《宝经》的注释巴利
1. Ratanasuttavaṇṇanā
以“世间已有诸物”开头的这部经,就是《宝经》。它的起因是什么?据说过去在毗舍离城发生了饥荒等灾难。为了平息这些灾难,离车族人前往王舍城,请求之后,把世尊请到了毗舍离。世尊就这样被请来,为了平息他们的灾难而说了这部经。这是此处的简要说明。不过,古代注释者们则从毗舍离的故事开始讲述它的起因。应当这样理解:据说往昔波罗奈国王的正宫王后怀了孕。她得知后禀告了国王。国王给了她孕期的照料。她得到妥善照料,到了临产之时,便进入了产房。有福之人通常在破晓时分分娩,她也是其中之一,所以在破晓时分产下了一块肉团,颜色像胭脂虫或红花。于是她想:“别的王妃都生下像金像一样的儿子,我身为正宫王后却生下肉团,在国王面前恐怕会传出对我不利的坏话。”因为害怕坏名声,她就把那块肉团放进一个容器,用另一个容器盖住,盖上国王的印章,让人丢进恒河的水流中。人们刚把它扔掉,天神们就安排了守护。并且在那里用天然朱砂在一面金笺上写下“波罗奈国王正宫王后之子”,系在上面。于是那个容器没有被波浪等危险所侵扰,顺着恒河的水流漂走了。巴利
Yānīdhabhūtānīti ratanasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Atīte kira vesāliyaṃ dubbhikkhādayo upaddavā uppajjiṃsu. Tesaṃ vūpasamanatthāya licchavayo rājagahaṃ gantvā, yācitvā, bhagavantaṃ vesālimānayiṃsu. Evaṃ ānīto bhagavā tesaṃ upaddavānaṃ vūpasamanatthāya idaṃ suttamabhāsi. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Porāṇā panassa vesālivatthuto pabhuti uppattiṃ vaṇṇayanti. Sā evaṃ veditabbā – bārāṇasirañño kira aggamahesiyā kucchimhi gabbho saṇṭhāsi. Sā taṃ ñatvā rañño nivedesi. Rājā gabbhaparihāraṃ adāsi. Sā sammā parihariyamānagabbhā gabbhaparipākakāle vijāyanagharaṃ pāvisi. Puññavatīnaṃ paccūsasamaye gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sā ca tāsaṃ aññatarā, tena paccūsasamaye alattakapaṭalabandhujīvakapupphasadisaṃ maṃsapesiṃ vijāyi. Tato ‘‘aññā deviyo suvaṇṇabimbasadise putte vijāyanti, aggamahesī maṃsapesinti rañño purato mama avaṇṇo uppajjeyyā’’ti cintetvā tena avaṇṇabhayena taṃ maṃsapesiṃ ekasmiṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā aññena paṭikujjitvā rājamuddikāya lañchetvā gaṅgāya sote pakkhipāpesi. Manussehi chaḍḍitamatte devatā ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu. Suvaṇṇapaṭṭikañcettha jātihiṅgulakena ‘‘bārāṇasirañño aggamahesiyā pajā’’ti likhitvā bandhiṃsu. Tato taṃ bhājanaṃ ūmibhayādīhi anupaddutaṃ gaṅgāya sotena pāyāsi.
那时,有一位苦行者依止一户牧牛人家,住在恒河岸边。他清晨下到恒河里,看见那个容器漂过来,以为是粪扫衣,就伸手抓住了。随后他看见上面有金片和国王印章的标记,便打开来看,结果看到那块肉团。看到之后他心里想:“这应该是个胎儿,因为它完全没有腐臭发烂的样子。”于是他把肉团带回自己的草庵,放在干净的地方。过了半个月,肉团变成了两块。苦行者看到后,把两块都安置得更加妥当。又过了半个月,每一块肉团上都长出了五处凸起,分别对应手、脚和头。再过半个月,一块肉团变成了一个像金像一样的男孩,另一块变成了女孩。苦行者对他们生起了父亲般的疼爱,他的拇指自然流出乳汁,从那时起他就有了乳汁和饭食。他吃完饭,就把乳汁喂进孩子们嘴里。凡是被他们吞进肚子里的东西,看起来都像装在宝瓶里一样清清楚楚,所以他们都没有皮肤。也有人说,他们的皮肤就像缝合后贴在一起那样,彼此紧密相连。就这样,因为他们没有皮肤,或者因为皮肤紧贴在一起,他们就被称为“离车”。巴利
Tena ca samayena aññataro tāpaso gopālakulaṃ nissāya gaṅgāya tīre vasati. So pātovagaṅgaṃ otiṇṇo taṃ bhājanaṃ āgacchantaṃ disvā paṃsukūlasaññāya aggahesi. Tato tattha taṃ akkharapaṭṭikaṃ rājamuddikālañchanañca disvā muñcitvā taṃ maṃsapesiṃ addasa. Disvānassa etadahosi – ‘‘siyā gabbho, tathā hissa duggandhapūtibhāvo natthī’’ti taṃ assamaṃ netvā suddhe okāse ṭhapesi. Atha aḍḍhamāsaccayena dve maṃsapesiyo ahesuṃ. Tāpaso disvā sādhukataraṃ ṭhapesi. Tato puna addhamāsaccayena ekamekissā pesiyā hatthapādasīsānamatthāya pañca pañca piḷakā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Atha tato addhamāsaccayena ekā maṃsapesi suvaṇṇabimbasadiso dārako; ekā dārikā ahosi. Tesu tāpasassa puttasineho uppajji, aṅguṭṭhato cassa khīraṃ nibbatti, tato pabhuti ca khīrabhattaṃ labhati. So bhattaṃ bhuñjitvā khīraṃ dārakānaṃ mukhe āsiñcati. Tesaṃ yaṃ yaṃ udaraṃ pavisati, taṃ sabbaṃ maṇibhājanagataṃ viya dissati. Evaṃ nicchavī ahesuṃ. Apare pana āhu – ‘‘sibbitvā ṭhapitā viya nesaṃ aññamaññaṃ līnā chavi ahosī’’ti. Evaṃ te nicchavitāya vā līnacchavitāya vā licchavīti paññāyiṃsu.
苦行者一边抚养这些孩子,一边在日头已高时进村乞食,直到过了正午才回来。牧牛人们知道了他的这个情况后,就对他说:尊者,抚养孩子对出家人来说是障碍。把孩子们交给我们吧,我们来养,您去做自己的事。苦行者答应了:好。第二天,牧牛人们把路修平整,撒上花,竖起旗帜,奏着乐器来到草庵。苦行者说:这些孩子有大福德,你们要用心把他们养大;养大之后,让他们互相婚嫁;再用五种牛乳制品讨国王欢心,求得一块土地,在那里建一座城,然后为王子灌顶。说完,就把孩子们交给了他们。他们答应说:好。便带着孩子们回去抚养了。巴利
Tāpaso dārake posento ussūre gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisati, atidivā paṭikkamati. Tassa taṃ byāpāraṃ ñatvā gopālakā āhaṃsu – ‘‘bhante, pabbajitānaṃ dārakaposanaṃ palibodho, amhākaṃ dārake detha, mayaṃ posessāma, tumhe attano kammaṃ karothā’’ti. Tāpaso ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇi. Gopālakā dutiyadivase maggaṃ samaṃ katvā, pupphehi okiritvā; dhajapaṭākā ussāpetvā tūriyehi vajjamānehi assamaṃ āgatā. Tāpaso ‘‘mahāpuññā dārakā, appamādena vaḍḍhetha, vaḍḍhetvā ca aññamaññaṃ āvāhavivāhaṃ karotha, pañcagorasena rājānaṃ tosetvā bhūmibhāgaṃ gahetvā nagaraṃ māpetha, tatra kumāraṃ abhisiñcathā’’ti vatvā dārake adāsi. Te ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā dārake netvā posesuṃ.
孩子们长大后,玩耍时一旦发生争执,就用手用脚打别的牧牛人的孩子,那些孩子就哭了。父母问他们:“你们为什么哭?”他们说:“这些没有父母、由苦行者养大的孩子,把我们打得太厉害了。”于是,那些孩子的父母就说:“这些孩子欺负、伤害别的孩子,不该和他们来往,应该避开他们。”据说从那时起,那一带方圆一百由旬的地方就被叫做“跋耆”。后来,牧牛人们讨好了国王,取得了那块地方。他们就在那里建起城市,给一个年满十六岁的王子灌顶,立他为国王,又让他和那个女孩成婚,并定下约定:“不得从外面娶女子进来,这里的女子也不得嫁给外人。”他们第一次同房后生了两个孩子,一个女儿和一个儿子,这样一共生了十六次,每次都是一对儿女。后来,这些孩子渐渐长大,那座城市的花园、游乐苑、住所和眷属等设施都不够用了,于是他们三次扩建城墙,每次扩建一牛呼的距离。因为这座城市一再被扩大,就得名为毗舍离。这就是毗舍离的由来。巴利
Dārakā vaḍḍhimanvāya kīḷantā vivādaṭṭhānesu aññe gopāladārake hatthenapi pādenapi paharanti, te rodanti. ‘‘Kissa rodathā’’ti ca mātāpitūhi vuttā ‘‘ime nimmātāpitikā tāpasapositā amhe atīva paharantī’’ti vadanti. Tato tesaṃ mātāpitaro ‘‘ime dārakā aññe dārake viheṭhenti dukkhāpenti, na ime saṅgahetabbā, vajjetabbā ime’’ti āhaṃsu. Tato pabhuti kira so padeso ‘‘vajjī’’ti vuccati yojanasataṃ parimāṇena. Atha taṃ padesaṃ gopālakā rājānaṃ tosetvā aggahesuṃ. Tattheva nagaraṃ māpetvā soḷasavassuddesikaṃ kumāraṃ abhisiñcitvā rājānaṃ akaṃsu. Tāya cassa dārikāya saddhiṃ vāreyyaṃ katvā katikaṃ akaṃsu – ‘‘na bāhirato dārikā ānetabbā, ito dārikā na kassaci dātabbā’’ti. Tesaṃ paṭhamasaṃvāsena dve dārakā jātā dhītā ca putto ca, evaṃ soḷasakkhattuṃ dve dve jātā. Tato tesaṃ dārakānaṃ yathākkamaṃ vaḍḍhantānaṃ ārāmuyyānanivāsanaṭṭhānaparivārasampattiṃ gahetuṃ appahontaṃ taṃ nagaraṃ tikkhattuṃ gāvutantarena gāvutantarena pākārena parikkhipiṃsu. Tassa punappunaṃ visālīkatattā vesālītveva nāmaṃ jātaṃ. Idaṃ vesālīvatthu.
不过,在世尊出现的时候,这座毗舍离城已经富庶繁荣,达到了极盛。当时那里仅国王就有七千七百零七位,副王、将军、库官等也同样如此。正如经中所说:巴利
Ayaṃ pana vesālī bhagavato uppannakāle iddhā vepullappattā ahosi. Tattha hi rājūnaṃyeva satta sahassāni satta ca satāni satta ca rājāno ahesuṃ, tathā yuvarājasenāpatibhaṇḍāgārikappabhutīnaṃ. Yathāha –
那时,毗舍离城既丰裕又繁荣,人口众多,人烟稠密,食物充足。城里有七千七百零七座高楼;七千七百零七座尖顶阁;七千七百零七座园林;七千七百零七座池塘。巴利
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena vesālī iddhā ceva hoti phītā ca bahujanā ākiṇṇamanussā subhikkhā ca, satta ca pāsādasahassāni, satta ca pāsādasatāni, satta ca pāsādā, satta ca kūṭāgārasahassāni, satta ca kūṭāgārasatāni, satta ca kūṭāgārāni, satta ca ārāmasahassāni, satta ca ārāmasatāni, satta ca ārāmā, satta ca pokkharaṇisahassāni, satta ca pokkharaṇisatāni, satta ca pokkharaṇiyo’’ti (mahāva. 326).
后来,那个地方发生了饥荒,又逢干旱,庄稼歉收。起初是穷困的人死去,人们把尸体丢到城外。尸体腐烂的气味引来了非人,它们进入了城里。此后,死去的人更多了。由于这种污秽不净,众生中又爆发了蛇风病。就这样,毗舍离城的居民被饥荒、非人、疾病这三种怖畏所逼迫,便前去对国王说:“大王,这座城里出现了三种怖畏。从过去七代王族以来,从未发生过这样的事。我们想,这大概是因您不如法,如今才出现的。”国王把所有人召集到集会厅,说道:“请你们查一查,我哪里不如法。”众人详细审查了一切传统做法,却什么也没发现。巴利
Sā aparena samayena dubbhikkhā ahosi dubbuṭṭhikā dussassā. Paṭhamaṃ duggatamanussā maranti, te bahiddhā chaḍḍenti. Matamanussānaṃ kuṇapagandhena amanussā nagaraṃ pavisiṃsu. Tato bahutarā mīyanti, tāya paṭikūlatāya ca sattānaṃ ahivātakarogo uppajji. Iti tīhi dubbhikkhaamanussarogabhayehi upaddutāya vesāliyā nagaravāsino upasaṅkamitvā rājānamāhaṃsu – ‘‘mahārāja, imasmiṃ nagare tividhaṃ bhayamuppannaṃ, ito pubbe yāva sattamā rājakulaparivaṭṭā evarūpaṃ anuppannapubbaṃ, tumhākaṃ maññe adhammikattena etarahi uppanna’’nti. Rājā sabbe santhāgāre sannipātāpetvā, ‘‘mayhaṃ adhammikabhāvaṃ vicinathā’’ti āha. Te sabbaṃ paveṇiṃ vicinantā na kiñci addasaṃsu.
他们没看出国王有什么过失,就想:“怎样才能让这场灾难平息呢?”于是,有些人举荐了六位外道导师,说:“只要他们一进城,灾难就会平息。”另一些人说:“听说佛陀已经出现在世间,这位世尊为了利益一切众生而说法,有大神通、大威力,只要他一进城,一切灾难都会平息。”听了这话,他们很欢喜,就问:“那这位世尊现在住在哪里呢?如果我们派人去请,他会来吗?”又有人说:“佛陀是慈悲怜悯众生的,怎么会不来呢?不过这位世尊现在住在王舍城,频婆娑罗王正在供养侍奉他,那边未必肯放人。”大家就说:“那我们就去说服那位国王,把世尊请来。”于是,两位离车族的王子率领大批军队,带着丰厚的礼物,被派去国王那里,说:“请说服频婆娑罗王,让他把世尊请来。”他们到了之后,向国王献上礼物,说明来意,说道:“大王,请让世尊到我们的城里来吧。”国王没有答应,只说:“这件事你们自己看着办吧。”他们便去拜见世尊,顶礼之后说:“尊者,我们的城里出现了三种灾难。如果世尊能来,我们就能得到平安。”世尊观察后知道:“在毗舍离宣说《宝经》时,这护佑之力将遍及万亿个世界;经文讲完时,会有八万四千众生领悟法义。”于是世尊默许了。频婆娑罗王听说世尊答应了,就让人在城里宣布“世尊已答应前往毗舍离”,然后去拜见世尊,问道:“尊者,您答应去毗舍离了吗?”世尊说:“是的,大王。”国王说:“那么,尊者,请稍等,等我把路准备好。”巴利
Tato rañño dosaṃ adisvā ‘‘idaṃ bhayaṃ amhākaṃ kathaṃ vūpasameyyā’’ti cintesuṃ. Tattha ekacce cha satthāro apadisiṃsu – ‘‘etehi okkantamatte vūpasamissatī’’ti. Ekacce āhaṃsu – ‘‘buddho kira loke uppanno, so bhagavā sabbasattahitāya dhammaṃ deseti mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo, tena okkantamatte sabbabhayāni vūpasameyyu’’nti. Tena te attamanā hutvā ‘‘kahaṃ pana so bhagavā etarahi viharati, amhehi vā pesite āgaccheyyā’’ti āhaṃsu. Athāpare āhaṃsu – ‘‘buddhā nāma anukampakā, kissa nāgaccheyyuṃ, so pana bhagavā etarahi rājagahe viharati, rājā ca bimbisāro taṃ upaṭṭhahati, kadāci so āgantuṃ na dadeyyā’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi rājānaṃ saññāpetvā ānessāmā’’ti dve licchavirājāno mahatā balakāyena pahūtaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ datvā rañño santikaṃ pesesuṃ – ‘‘bimbisāraṃ saññāpetvā bhagavantaṃ ānethā’’ti. Te gantvā rañño paṇṇākāraṃ datvā taṃ pavattiṃ nivedetvā ‘‘mahārāja, bhagavantaṃ amhākaṃ nagaraṃ pesehī’’ti āhaṃsu. Rājā na sampaṭicchi – ‘‘tumhe eva jānāthā’’ti āha. Te bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘bhante, amhākaṃ nagare tīṇi bhayāni uppannāni. Sace bhagavā āgaccheyya, sotthi no bhaveyyā’’ti. Bhagavā āvajjetvā ‘‘vesāliyaṃ ratanasutte vutte sā rakkhā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷāni pharissati, suttapariyosāne caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo bhavissatī’’ti adhivāsesi. Atha rājā bimbisāro bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ sutvā ‘‘bhagavatā vesāligamanaṃ adhivāsita’’nti nagare ghosanaṃ kārāpetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āha – ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, sampaṭicchittha vesāligamana’’nti? ‘‘Āma, mahārājā’’ti. ‘‘Tena hi, bhante, āgametha, yāva maggaṃ paṭiyādemī’’ti.
于是,频婆娑罗王把王舍城到恒河之间五由旬的地面都平整好,每隔一由旬就建一座精舍,然后把世尊启程的时机禀告上去。世尊由五百位比丘围绕,出发前行。国王让人把这条五由旬长的路铺满五色鲜花,花堆到膝盖那么高,又竖起旗帜、长幡、满瓶、芭蕉树等种种装饰,为世尊撑起两把白伞,为每一位比丘各撑一把,亲自带着随从,用花香等物作供养,请世尊在每一座精舍里住下,广行大布施,这样过了五天,把世尊送到恒河岸边。到了那里,他又用各种装饰把船装扮好,然后派人去给毗舍离人传话:“世尊已经来了,你们把路修整好,全都去迎接世尊。”毗舍离人想:“我们要做双倍的供养。”于是他们把毗舍离到恒河之间三由旬的地面平整好,为世尊准备四把白伞,为每一位比丘各准备两把白伞,一路供养着来到恒河岸边,站在那里。巴利
Atha kho rājā bimbisāro rājagahassa ca gaṅgāya ca antarā pañcayojanaṃ bhūmiṃ samaṃ katvā, yojane yojane vihāraṃ māpetvā, bhagavato gamanakālaṃ paṭivedesi. Bhagavā pañcahi bhikkhusatehi parivuto pāyāsi. Rājā pañcayojanaṃ maggaṃ pañcavaṇṇehi pupphehi jāṇumattaṃ okirāpetvā dhajapaṭākāpuṇṇaghaṭakadaliādīni ussāpetvā bhagavato dve setacchattāni, ekekassa ca bhikkhussa ekamekaṃ ukkhipāpetvā saddhiṃ attano parivārena pupphagandhādīhi pūjaṃ karonto ekekasmiṃ vihāre bhagavantaṃ vasāpetvā mahādānāni datvā pañcahi divasehi gaṅgātīraṃ nesi. Tattha sabbālaṅkārehi nāvaṃ alaṅkaronto vesālikānaṃ sāsanaṃ pesesi – ‘‘āgato bhagavā, maggaṃ paṭiyādetvā sabbe bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ karothā’’ti. Te ‘‘diguṇaṃ pūjaṃ karissāmā’’ti vesāliyā ca gaṅgāya ca antarā tiyojanaṃ bhūmiṃ samaṃ katvā bhagavato cattāri, ekekassa ca bhikkhuno dve dve setacchattāni sajjetvā pūjaṃ kurumānā gaṅgātīre āgantvā aṭṭhaṃsu.
频婆娑罗王把两条船并排连在一起,搭起帐幔,用花环等装饰好,然后在上面铺设了一座全部由珍宝做成的佛座。世尊坐了上去。五百位比丘也登上船,各自在合适的位置坐下。国王跟着世尊走,走进齐喉深的水里,说道:“尊者,在您回来之前,我就先住在这恒河岸边吧。”说完就转身回去了。上面的天神,从色究竟天以下,都来供养;下面的恒河居民,像甘跋罗、阿沙多罗等龙族,也都来供养。就在这样盛大的供养中,世尊在恒河上走了大约一由旬,进入了毗舍离人的地界。巴利
Bimbisāro dve nāvāyo saṅghāṭetvā, maṇḍapaṃ katvā, pupphadāmādīhi alaṅkaritvā tattha sabbaratanamayaṃ buddhāsanaṃ paññāpesi. Bhagavā tasmiṃ nisīdi. Pañcasatā bhikkhūpi nāvaṃ abhiruhitvā yathānurūpaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Rājā bhagavantaṃ anugacchanto galappamāṇaṃ udakaṃ orohitvā ‘‘yāva, bhante, bhagavā āgacchati, tāvāhaṃ idheva gaṅgātīre vasissāmī’’ti vatvā nivatto. Upari devatā yāva akaniṭṭhabhavanā pūjamakaṃsu, heṭṭhā gaṅgānivāsino kambalassatarādayo nāgā pūjamakaṃsu. Evaṃ mahatiyā pūjāya bhagavā yojanamattaṃ addhānaṃ gaṅgāya gantvā vesālikānaṃ sīmantaraṃ paviṭṭho.
随后,离车族的诸王按照频婆娑罗王所作供养的两倍,站在齐喉深的水里迎接世尊。就在那一刹那、那一瞬间,闪电划破黑暗,四方乌云翻滚,轰隆隆降下大雨。世尊的前脚刚一踏上恒河岸边,就下起了莲花雨。想被淋湿的人就被淋到,不想被淋的人就淋不到。到处水深及膝、及腿、及腰、及喉,所有腐尸都被水冲进恒河,地面变得干干净净。巴利
Tato licchavirājāno tena bimbisārena katapūjāya diguṇaṃ karontā galappamāṇe udake bhagavantaṃ paccuggacchiṃsu. Teneva khaṇena tena muhuttena vijjuppabhāvinaddhandhakāravisaṭakūṭo gaḷagaḷāyanto catūsu disāsu mahāmegho vuṭṭhāsi. Atha bhagavatā paṭhamapāde gaṅgātīre nikkhittamatte pokkharavassaṃ vassi. Ye temetukāmā, te eva tementi, atemetukāmā na tementi. Sabbattha jāṇumattaṃ ūrumattaṃ kaṭimattaṃ galappamāṇaṃ udakaṃ vahati, sabbakuṇapāni udakena gaṅgaṃ pavesitāni parisuddho bhūmibhāgo ahosi.
离车族的王族们让世尊在途中每走一由旬就停下来住一住,并献上盛大的布施,这样用三天时间以加倍的供养把世尊一路送到毗舍离。世尊到达毗舍离时,天主帝释在众天神的簇拥下前来。由于有大威势的天神聚集,非人们大多逃散了。世尊站在城门口,吩咐阿难长老说:“阿难,你受持这部《宝经》,带上祭祀用的器具,和离车族的王子们一起,在毗舍离的三重城墙之间巡行,念诵这部经作守护。”于是世尊宣说了《宝经》。关于“这部经是谁说的、什么时候说的、在哪里说的、为什么说的”这些问题,古来的注师们从《毗舍离事》开始就已经详细解说了。巴利
Licchavirājāno bhagavantaṃ antarā yojane yojane vāsāpetvā mahādānāni datvā tīhi divasehi diguṇaṃ pūjaṃ karontā vesāliṃ nayiṃsu. Vesāliṃ sampatte bhagavati sakko devānamindo devasaṅghapurakkhato āgacchi, mahesakkhānaṃ devānaṃ sannipātena amanussā yebhuyyena palāyiṃsu. Bhagavā nagaradvāre ṭhatvā ānandattheraṃ āmantesi – ‘‘imaṃ ānanda, ratanasuttaṃ uggahetvā balikammūpakaraṇāni gahetvā licchavikumārehi saddhiṃ vesāliyā tīsu pākārantaresu vicaranto parittaṃ karohī’’ti ratanasuttaṃ abhāsi. Evaṃ ‘‘kena panetaṃ suttaṃ, kadā, kattha, kasmā ca vutta’’nti etesaṃ pañhānaṃ vissajjanā vitthārena vesālivatthuto pabhuti porāṇehi vaṇṇiyati.
世尊抵达毗舍离的当天,就在毗舍离城门口,为了消除那些灾祸,具寿阿难诵习了这部《宝经》。他为了作守护而诵持此经,又从世尊的钵里取水,一边把水洒遍全城,一边四处巡行。当长老诵到“凡任何……”这一句时,那些先前还没逃走、依附在垃圾堆和墙缝等处的非人,就从四座城门逃了出去,城门变得拥挤不堪。还有些非人在城门处找不到出路,就打破城墙逃走了。非人刚一离开,人们身上的病就平息了。大家走出家门,用各种香、花等供养长老。大众在城中央的集会堂里,用各种香料涂地,搭起天篷,用一切装饰品布置好,在那里设了佛座,然后把世尊迎请进来。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavato vesāliṃ anuppattadivaseyeva vesālinagaradvāre tesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭighātatthāya vuttamidaṃ ratanasuttaṃ uggahetvā āyasmā ānando parittatthāya bhāsamāno bhagavato pattena udakaṃ ādāya sabbanagaraṃ abbhukkiranto anuvicari. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñcī’’ti vuttamatteyeva ca therena ye pubbe apalātā saṅkārakūṭabhittippadesādinissitā amanussā, te catūhi dvārehi palāyiṃsu, dvārāni anokāsāni ahesuṃ. Tato ekacce dvāresu okāsaṃ alabhamānā pākāraṃ bhinditvā palātā. Amanussesu gatamattesu manussānaṃ gattesu rogo vūpasanto, te nikkhamitvā sabbagandhapupphādīhi theraṃ pūjesuṃ. Mahājano nagaramajjhe santhāgāraṃ sabbagandhehi limpitvā vitānaṃ katvā sabbālaṅkārehi alaṅkaritvā tattha buddhāsanaṃ paññāpetvā bhagavantaṃ ānesi.
世尊走进集会堂,在铺好的座位上坐下。比丘僧团、国王们和民众也都在合适的地方坐下。帝释天也带着两个天界的天众坐在一边,还有其他天人。阿难长老巡行整个毗舍离城,做好守护之后,和毗舍离城的居民们一起回来,坐在一边。在那里,世尊为他们全体再次宣说了那部《宝经》。巴利
Bhagavā santhāgāraṃ pavisitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho rājāno manussā ca patirūpe okāse nisīdiṃsu. Sakkopi devānamindo dvīsu devalokesu devaparisāya saddhiṃ upanisīdi aññe ca devā. Ānandattheropi sabbaṃ vesāliṃ anuvicaranto ārakkhaṃ katvā vesālinagaravāsīhi saddhiṃ āgantvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Tattha bhagavā sabbesaṃ tadeva ratanasuttaṃ abhāsīti.
224 224. 其中,“凡在此处的众生”是这首偈颂的第一句。“凡”指无论小威力的还是大威力的。“此处”指这个地方,是就那个时刻众生聚集的场所而说的。“众生”:虽然bhūta这个词在“bhūtasmiṃ pācittiya”(《波逸提》中关于“存在”的戒条)等中表示“存在的”,在“bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, samanupassatha”(比丘们,你们应观察“这是已生”)等中表示五蕴,在“cattāro kho, bhikkhu, mahābhūtā hetū”(比丘,四大为因)等中表示地等四种界,在“yo ca kālaghaso bhūto”(那食时之bhūta)等中表示漏尽者,在“sabbeva nikkhipissanti, bhūtā loke samussaya”(一切众生都将弃舍世间积聚)等中表示一切众生,在“bhūtagāmapātabyatāya”(有关损害草木的规定)等中表示树木等,在“bhūtaṃ bhūtato sañjānāti”(如实了知存在者为存在者)等中则依四大王天以下有情之类而说。但在这里,应无区别地理解为非人。巴利
224. Tattha yānīdha bhūtānīti paṭhamagāthāyaṃ yānīti yādisāni appesakkhāni vā mahesakkhāni vā. Idhāti imasmiṃ padese, tasmiṃ khaṇe sannipatitaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha. Bhūtānīti kiñcāpi bhūtasaddo ‘‘bhūtasmiṃ pācittiya’’nti evamādīsu (pāci. 69) vijjamāne, ‘‘bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, samanupassathā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.401) khandhapañcake, ‘‘cattāro kho, bhikkhu, mahābhūtā hetū’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) catubbidhe pathavīdhātvādirūpe, ‘‘yo ca kālaghaso bhūto’’ti evamādīsu (jā. 1.2.190) khīṇāsave, ‘‘sabbeva nikkhipissanti, bhūtā loke samussaya’’nti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 2.220) sabbasatte, ‘‘bhūtagāmapātabyatāyā’’ti evamādīsu (pāci. 90) rukkhādike, ‘‘bhūtaṃ bhūtato sañjānātī’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.3) cātumahārājikānaṃ heṭṭhā sattanikāyaṃ upādāya vattati. Idha pana avisesato amanussesu daṭṭhabbo.
“已聚集”就是集合在一起。“地上的”就是生在大地上的。“或”表示选择。因此,先说“凡是在这里,地上的或众生,都已聚集”,这是第一种选择;接着为了提出第二种选择,又说“或是空中的”。意思是:凡是生在空中的众生,它们全都已经聚集在这里。这里应当知道,从夜摩天一直到色究竟天,这些众生因为出生在虚空中显现的宫殿里,所以是“空中的众生”。从那里以下,从须弥山开始,一直到地面上依住在树木、藤蔓等之中的众生,以及生在大地上的众生,这些全都因为生在大地以及依附大地的树木、藤蔓、山岭等之中,所以应当知道是“地上的众生”。巴利
Samāgatānīti sannipatitāni. Bhummānīti bhūmiyaṃ nibbattāni. Vāti vikappane. Tena yānīdha bhummāni vā bhūtāni samāgatānīti imamekaṃ vikappaṃ katvā puna dutiyaṃ vikappaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘yāni vā antalikkhe’’ti āha. Antalikkhe vā yāni bhūtāni nibbattāni, tāni sabbāni idha samāgatānīti attho. Ettha ca yāmato yāva akaniṭṭhaṃ, tāva nibbattāni bhūtāni ākāse pātubhūtavimānesu nibbattattā ‘‘antalikkhe bhūtānī’’ti veditabbāni. Tato heṭṭhā sineruto pabhuti yāva bhūmiyaṃ rukkhalatādīsu adhivatthāni pathaviyañca nibbattāni bhūtāni, tāni sabbāni bhūmiyaṃ bhūmipaṭibaddhesu ca rukkhalatāpabbatādīsu nibbattattā ‘‘bhummāni bhūtānī’’ti veditabbāni.
世尊就这样,先用“地上的或是空中的”这两个词,把一切非人众生都区分开来,再用一个词把它们总括起来,然后说:“一切众生都应当心怀喜悦。”其中“一切”是指没有遗漏。“都”是强调,意思是连一个也不排除。“众生”指非人。“应当心怀喜悦”是说愿他们内心快乐,生起欣喜和喜悦。“而且”这两个连词,是用来在句子承接中引出另一项事务。“恭敬听闻所说”意思是:视为重要、铭记于心、倾注全部心神,来听我这能带来天界福报和出世间安乐的教说。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā sabbāneva amanussabhūtāni ‘‘bhummāni vā yāni va antalikkhe’’ti dvīhi padehi vikappetvā puna ekena padena pariggahetvā ‘‘sabbeva bhūtā sumanā bhavantū’’ti āha. Sabbeti anavasesā. Evāti avadhāraṇe, ekampi anapanetvāti adhippāyo. Bhūtāti amanussā. Sumanā bhavantūti sukhitamanā, pītisomanassajātā bhavantūti attho. Athopīti kiccantarasanniyojanatthaṃ vākyopādāne nipātadvayaṃ. Sakkacca suṇantu bhāsitanti aṭṭhiṃ katvā, manasi katvā, sabbacetaso samannāharitvā dibbasampattilokuttarasukhāvahaṃ mama desanaṃ suṇantu.
世尊在这里先用“凡在此处已聚集的众生”这一不确定的称呼把众生统摄起来,接着又用“地上的或空中的”分成两类,然后说“一切众生”又合为一类,再用“愿他们心怀善意”这句话,把他们引导到意乐具足上;用“恭敬听闻所说”引导他们到精进具足、如理作意具足和闻他音声具足上;同样也引导他们到自正愿具足、亲近善士具足,以及定与慧之因具足上,就这样把这首偈颂说完。巴利
Evamettha bhagavā ‘‘yānīdha bhūtāni samāgatānī’’ti aniyamitavacanena bhūtāni pariggahetvā puna ‘‘bhummāni vā yāni va antalikkhe’’ti dvidhā vikappetvā tato ‘‘sabbeva bhūtā’’ti puna ekajjhaṃ katvā ‘‘sumanā bhavantū’’ti iminā vacanena āsayasampattiyaṃ niyojento ‘‘sakkacca suṇantu bhāsita’’nti payogasampattiyaṃ, tathā yonisomanasikārasampattiyaṃ paratoghosasampattiyañca, tathā attasammāpaṇidhisappurisūpanissayasampattīsu samādhipaññāhetusampattīsu ca niyojento gāthaṃ samāpesi.
225 因此,接下来是第二首偈颂:“Tasmā hi bhūtā”。其中,“tasmā”是表示原因的词,“bhūtā”是呼唤语,“nisāmetha”意思是你们要听,“sabbe”就是没有剩下任何一个。这话说的是什么呢?因为你们舍弃了天界的住处和那里的受用圆满,为了听法才来到这里,不是为了看跳舞、表演等,所以,诸位众生,你们全都要听。或者也可以这样理解:看到“愿他们怀着欢喜心、恭敬地听”这句话,知道他们已经有了欢喜心、恭敬和想听法的愿望,于是说:因为你们具备欢喜心、自己正确的发愿、如理作意、意乐清净、恭敬、想听法的愿望,以及亲近善士为依靠、以听他人说法为根据的努力清净等,所以,诸位众生,你们全都要听。又或者,是指向前一偈末尾所说的“所说”,把它当作原因来说:“因为我的所说,叫做极为难得,因为这是排除了八无暇的刹那,所以难得,又具有许多利益,是由智慧和悲心的功德而发起的;而我正想说它,已经说了‘让他们听所说’。因此,诸位众生,你们全都要听。”这就是这句偈颂所要表达的意思。巴利
225.Tasmā hi bhūtāti dutiyagāthā. Tattha tasmāti kāraṇavacanaṃ. Bhūtāti āmantanavacanaṃ. Nisāmethāti suṇātha. Sabbeti anavasesā . Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yasmā tumhe dibbaṭṭhānāni tattha upabhogasampadañca pahāya dhammassavanatthaṃ idha samāgatā, na naṭanaccanādidassanatthaṃ, tasmā hi bhūtā nisāmetha sabbeti. Atha vā ‘‘sumanā bhavantu sakkacca suṇantū’’ti vacanena tesaṃ sumanabhāvaṃ sakkaccaṃ sotukamyatañca disvā āha – yasmā tumhe sumanabhāvena attasammāpaṇidhiyonisomanasikārāsayasuddhīhi sakkaccaṃ sotukamyatāya sappurisūpanissayaparatoghosapadaṭṭhānato payogasuddhīhi ca yuttā, tasmā hi bhūtā nisāmetha sabbeti. Atha vā yaṃ purimagāthāya ante ‘‘bhāsita’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ kāraṇabhāvena apadisanto āha – ‘‘yasmā mama bhāsitaṃ nāma atidullabhaṃ aṭṭhakkhaṇaparivajjitassa khaṇassa dullabhattā, anekānisaṃsañca paññākaruṇāguṇena pavattattā, tañcāhaṃ vattukāmo ‘suṇantu bhāsita’nti avocaṃ. Tasmā hi bhūtā nisāmetha sabbe’’ti idaṃ iminā gāthāpadena vuttaṃ hoti.
像这样,他在说明这个道理、劝他们留意自己的话之后,就开始讲应当听的内容:“要对人类众生修慈。”这句话的意思是:对于那些被三种灾难所逼迫的人类众生,你们应当对他们生起友善之心,以利益为心意所向。不过,有些人读作“mānusiyaṃ pajaṃ”,因为处所格的含义不成立,所以这样读不对。另有一些人所解释的含义也不对。这里真正的意思是:我并不是以“我是佛陀”的威德力来说,而是为了你们以及这些人类众生的利益而说:“要对人类众生修慈。”在这里——巴利
Evametaṃ kāraṇaṃ niropento attano bhāsitanisāmane niyojetvā nisāmetabbaṃ vattumāraddho ‘‘mettaṃ karotha mānusiyā pajāyā’’ti. Tassattho – yāyaṃ tīhi upaddavehi upaddutā mānusī pajā, tassā mānusiyā pajāya mittabhāvaṃ hitajjhāsayataṃ paccupaṭṭhāpethāti. Keci pana ‘‘mānusiyaṃ paja’’nti paṭhanti, taṃ bhummatthāsambhavā na yujjati. Yampi caññe atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti, sopi na yujjati. Adhippāyo panettha – nāhaṃ buddhoti issariyabalena vadāmi, apica pana tumhākañca imissā ca mānusiyā pajāya hitatthaṃ vadāmi – ‘‘mettaṃ karotha mānusiyā pajāyā’’ti. Ettha ca –
那些征服了充满众生的大地、身为王族仙人的祭祀者们,曾四处游行;
马祭、人祭、遍掷祭、苏摩祭、无遮祭。
善加修习的慈心,那些祭祀也及不上它的十六分之一。
即使只是对一个生命怀有善意,修习慈心,他因此就是善者。
他以悲悯之心对待一切众生,这位圣者就在修积广大的福德。巴利
‘‘Ye sattasaṇḍaṃ pathaviṃ vijetvā, rājisayo yajamānā anupariyagā; Assamedhaṃ purisamedhaṃ, sammāpāsaṃ vājapeyyaṃ niraggaḷaṃ. ‘‘Mettassa cittassa subhāvitassa, kalampi te nānubhavanti soḷasiṃ. ‘‘Ekampi ce pāṇamaduṭṭhacitto, mettāyati kusalī tena hoti; Sabbe ca pāṇe manasānukampī, pahūtamariyo pakaroti puñña’’nti. (a. ni. 8.1) –
像这样一类经典,以及十一种利益来说,凡是修慈心的人,他们的慈心就是有益的,应当这样理解。巴利
Evamādīnaṃ suttānaṃ ekādasānisaṃsānañca vasena ye mettaṃ karonti, tesaṃ mettā hitāti veditabbā.
‘‘Devatānukampito poso, sadā bhadrāni passatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.153; udā. 76; mahāva. 286) –
以这些等为根据,对于所作用的对象,也应知道他们也是利益。巴利
Evamādīnaṃ vasena yesu karīyati, tesampi hitāti veditabbā.
像这样,为了说明对双方都有利益,先说了“要对人类众生修慈心”,现在为了进一步说明天神对人的帮助,又说:“那些白天和夜里都献供品的人,所以你们要不放逸地守护他们。”这段话的意思是:有些人通过绘画、木工等技艺塑造天神像,或者前往塔庙、大树等地方,为了天神在白天献供品,也在黑分等日子在夜里献供品。或者布施筹食等之后,从守护神一直到梵天,通过回向功德的方式在白天献供品;又让人竖起伞盖、点灯、挂花环,整夜听法等等,再通过回向功德的方式在夜里献供品——这样的人,怎么能不守护呢?既然他们这样白天和夜里都为你们献供品,所以你们要守护他们。因此,哪怕只是因为他们献供品这件事,你们也应当守护、保护这些人,为他们除去不利,带来利益,不放逸地去做,把感恩之心放在心里,常常忆念他们。巴利
Evaṃ ubhayesampi hitabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘mettaṃ karotha mānusiyā pajāyā’’ti vatvā idāni upakārampi dassento āha ‘‘divā ca ratto ca haranti ye baliṃ, tasmā hi ne rakkhatha appamattā’’ti. Tassattho – ye manussā cittakammakaṭṭhakammādīhipi devatā katvā cetiyarukkhādīni ca upasaṅkamitvā devatā uddissa divā baliṃ karonti, kāḷapakkhādīsu ca rattiṃ baliṃ karonti. Salākabhattādīni vā datvā ārakkhadevatā upādāya yāva brahmadevatānaṃ pattidānaniyyātanena divā baliṃ karonti, chattāropanadīpamālā sabbarattikadhammassavanādīni kārāpetvā pattidānaniyyātanena ca rattiṃ baliṃ karonti, te kathaṃ na rakkhitabbā. Yato evaṃ divā ca ratto ca tumhe uddissa karonti ye baliṃ, tasmā hi ne rakkhatha. Tasmā balikammakāraṇāpi te manusse rakkhatha gopayatha, ahitaṃ tesaṃ apanetha, hitaṃ upanetha appamattā hutvā taṃ kataññubhāvaṃ hadaye katvā niccamanussarantāti.
226 226. 这样显示了人类对天神的帮助之后,为了消除他们的灾祸,也为了通过阐明佛陀等功德让天神和人们听闻佛法,他开始以“凡任何财富……”这样的方式运用真实语。其中,“凡任何”以不确定的方式涵盖了一切,没有剩余,指在各处成为日常使用之物。“财富”就是财物,因为它能带来欢喜,所以叫财富。“此处”指人界,“彼处”指人界以外的其余世界。由于后面紧接着说了“或于天界”,而在涵盖一切世界时排除了人,应当知道除了人和天之外,其余龙、金翅鸟等也被包含在内。这样,通过这两句,就指明了人界中日常使用、可作装饰和受用的金、银、珍珠、摩尼宝、琉璃、珊瑚、红宝石、摩沙罗石等,以及在以珍珠摩尼沙构成地面、宽广数百由旬的宝殿中出生的龙、金翅鸟等所有众生的财富。巴利
226. Evaṃ devatāsu manussānaṃ upakārakabhāvaṃ dassetvā tesaṃ upaddavavūpasamanatthaṃ buddhādiguṇappakāsanena ca devamanussānaṃ dhammassavanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃkiñci vitta’’ntiādinā nayena saccavacanaṃ payujjitumāraddho. Tattha yaṃkiñcīti aniyamitavasena anavasesaṃ pariyādiyati yaṃkiñci tattha tattha vohārūpagaṃ . Vittanti dhanaṃ. Tañhi vittiṃ janetīti vittaṃ. Idha vāti manussalokaṃ niddisati, huraṃ vāti tato paraṃ avasesalokaṃ. Tena ca ṭhapetvā manusse sabbalokaggahaṇe patte ‘‘saggesu vā’’ti parato vuttattā ṭhapetvā manusse ca sagge ca avasesānaṃ nāgasupaṇṇādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ imehi dvīhi padehi yaṃ manussānaṃ vohārūpagaṃ alaṅkāraparibhogūpagañca jātarūparajatamuttāmaṇiveḷuriyapavāḷalohitaṅkamasāragallādikaṃ, yañca muttāmaṇivālukatthatāya bhūmiyā ratanamayavimānesu anekayojanasatavitthatesu bhavanesu uppannānaṃ nāgasupaṇṇādīnaṃ vittaṃ, taṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ hoti.
或者在天界:就是指欲界天和色界天的天界。因为那些众生依靠善业得以往生、到达,所以叫天界;又因为极其殊胜崇高,也叫天界。前往,无论是有主的还是无主的。宝能带来、承载、产生、增长喜悦,所以叫宝;凡是受到珍视、价值巨大、无可比拟、难得一见、由非凡众生所享用的,都是这个词的指称。正如所说:巴利
Saggesu vāti kāmāvacararūpāvacaradevalokesu. Te hi sobhanena kammena ajīyanti gammantīti saggā, suṭṭhu vā aggātipi saggā. Yanti yaṃ sassāmikaṃ vā assāmikaṃ vā. Ratananti ratiṃ nayati, vahati, janayati, vaḍḍhetīti ratanaṃ, yaṃkiñci cittīkataṃ mahagghaṃ atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ anomasattaparibhogañca, tassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathāha –
受到敬重,价值又高,无与伦比,难得一见;
因为被无上士(佛陀)所享用,所以称为宝。巴利
‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ; Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti.
所谓“殊胜”,就是最上等的、最好的、令人永不餍足的。这样一来,通过这首偈颂,就指出了:在天界中那些广达数百由旬、由各种宝物所成的宫殿里——比如善法殿、最胜殿等——有主之宝;以及当佛陀不出世、众生只往恶道里填充时,与空置天宫相关联的无主之宝;还有依附于大地、大海、雪山等其他地方的无主之宝。巴利
Paṇītanti uttamaṃ, seṭṭhaṃ, atappakaṃ. Evaṃ iminā gāthāpadena yaṃ saggesu anekayojanasatappamāṇasabbaratanamayavimānesu sudhammavejayantappabhutīsu sassāmikaṃ, yañca buddhuppādavirahena apāyameva paripūrentesu sattesu suññavimānapaṭibaddhaṃ assāmikaṃ, yaṃ vā panaññampi pathavīmahāsamuddahimavantādinissitaṃ assāmikaṃ ratanaṃ, taṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ hoti.
“没有与如来相等的东西”——这里的“没有”(na)是否定词,“确实不”(no)是强调词。“相等”就是一样。“有”就是存在。“与如来”就是与佛陀。
这话说的是什么呢?前面所说的那些财富和宝物当中,连一件能跟佛宝相比的宝物都没有。
就算从“值得敬重”这个意义上来说吧,比如转轮王的轮宝和摩尼宝,这些东西一出现,大众就不会再去别的地方表达敬重了,没有人会拿着花香跑去夜叉的地方或鬼神的地方,所有人就只对轮宝和摩尼宝心生敬重、加以供养,各自祈求各种心愿,其中有些祈求也能实现——但这样的宝物,也还是不能跟佛宝相比。
如果“值得敬重”就是宝,那如来本身就是宝。因为如来出现于世的时候,不管多么有大威力的天和人,都不会去敬重别的对象,不会去供养别的什么人。比如娑婆主梵天曾用须弥山那么大的宝鬘供养如来,其他天和人,像频婆娑罗王、憍萨罗王、给孤独长者他们,也各自尽力供养。就算是对已经般涅槃的世尊,阿育大王也舍弃了九十六俱胝的财富,在整个赡部洲建了八万四千座寺院,更不用说其他人做的恭敬了。再说,除了世尊,还有哪位已经般涅槃的人,他的诞生处、成道处、转法轮处、般涅槃处,以及他的像、塔庙等等,能像世尊那样受到这样的敬重和尊崇呢?所以,从“值得敬重”这个意义上说,也没有能和如来相等的宝。巴利
Nano samaṃ atthi tathāgatenāti na-iti paṭisedhe, no-iti avadhāraṇe. Samanti tulyaṃ. Atthīti vijjati. Tathāgatenāti buddhena. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yaṃ etaṃ vittañca ratanañca pakāsitaṃ, ettha ekampi buddharatanena sadisaṃ ratanaṃ nevatthi. Yampi hi taṃ cittīkataṭṭhena ratanaṃ, seyyathidaṃ – rañño cakkavattissa cakkaratanaṃ maṇiratanañca, yamhi uppanne mahājano na aññattha cittīkāraṃ karoti, na koci pupphagandhādīni gahetvā yakkhaṭṭhānaṃ vā bhūtaṭṭhānaṃ vā gacchati, sabbopi jano cakkaratanamaṇiratanameva cittiṃ karoti pūjeti, taṃ taṃ varaṃ pattheti, patthitapatthitañcassa ekaccaṃ samijjhati, tampi ratanaṃ buddharatanena samaṃ natthi. Yadi hi cittīkataṭṭhena ratanaṃ, tathāgatova ratanaṃ. Tathāgate hi uppanne ye keci mahesakkhā devamanussā, na te aññatra cittīkāraṃ karonti, na kañci aññaṃ pūjenti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati sinerumattena ratanadāmena tathāgataṃ pūjesi, yathābalañca aññe devā manussā ca bimbisārakosalarājaanāthapiṇḍikādayo. Parinibbutampi ca bhagavantaṃ uddissa channavutikoṭidhanaṃ vissajjetvā asokamahārājā sakalajambudīpe caturāsīti vihārasahassāni patiṭṭhāpesi, ko pana vādo aññesaṃ cittīkārānaṃ. Apica kassaññassa parinibbutassāpi jātibodhidhammacakkappavattanaparinibbānaṭṭhānāni paṭimācetiyādīni vā uddissa evaṃ cittīkāragarukāro vattati yathā bhagavato. Evaṃ cittīkataṭṭhenāpi tathāgatasamaṃ ratanaṃ natthi.
同样,如果从“价值巨大”这个意义上说,也有一种宝,比如迦尸衣。正如经文所说:“比丘们,迦尸衣即使旧了,也依然颜色鲜亮、触感柔软、价值巨大。”但这样的宝,也比不上佛宝。如果按“价值巨大”来说就是宝,那么如来本身就是宝。因为如来接受的,哪怕是一把泥土,对供养者来说也会带来大果报、大利益,就像阿育王那样。这就是如来价值巨大的地方。在说明这种价值巨大时,应当先了解下面这段经文,它正好证明如来没有过失:巴利
Tathā yampi taṃ mahagghaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, seyyathidaṃ – kāsikaṃ vatthaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘jiṇṇampi, bhikkhave, kāsikaṃ vatthaṃ vaṇṇavantañceva hoti sukhasamphassañca mahagghañcā’’ti, tampi buddharatanena samaṃ natthi. Yadi hi mahagghaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, tathāgatova ratanaṃ. Tathāgato hi yesaṃ paṃsukampi paṭiggaṇhāti, tesaṃ taṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsaṃ, seyyathāpi asokassa rañño. Idamassa mahagghatāya. Evaṃ mahagghatāvacane cettha dosābhāvasādhakaṃ idaṃ tāva suttapadaṃ veditabbaṃ –
凡是他接受其衣服、食物、住处、生病时所需医药等生活用品的人,对那些人来说,这些供养会带来大果报、大利益。我说这就是他的价值巨大。比丘们,就像那件迦尸衣价值巨大一样,比丘们,我用这个比喻来说明这样的人。巴利
‘‘Yesaṃ kho pana so paṭiggaṇhāti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānappaccayabhesajjaparikkhāraṃ, tesaṃ taṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsaṃ. Idamassa mahagghatāya vadāmi. Seyyathāpi taṃ, bhikkhave, kāsikaṃ vatthaṃ mahagghaṃ, tathūpamāhaṃ, bhikkhave, imaṃ puggalaṃ vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 3.100).
即使从“价值巨大”这个含义来说,也没有任何宝物能和如来相等。巴利
Evaṃ mahagghaṭṭhenāpi tathāgatasamaṃ ratanaṃ natthi.
同样地,它也因为无可估量的含义而成为宝。比如:转轮王的轮宝出现时,以靛蓝宝石为轮毂,以七宝制成千根辐条,以珊瑚为轮辋,以赤金为连接处。每十根辐条的上方各有一个圆头,用来迎风发声,所发出的声音就像善巧奏响的五种乐器合奏一样。轮毂两侧有两个狮子面孔,内部像车轮一样中空。这个轮宝没有制作者,也没有让人制作的人,而是依业缘从时节中自然生起。国王圆满了十种转轮王之行后,在第十五日布萨的满月之日,沐浴洗头,受持布萨戒,登上最上等宫殿的殊胜处,安住着清净戒,便看见它像满月或太阳一样升起。它的声音在十二由旬内都能听到,形色在一由旬内就能看见。大众看见它时,生起极大的惊奇,说:“我们以为第二个月亮或太阳升起来了呢!”它来到城市上空,停在国王内宫的东侧,不高不低,就像被轴固定住一样,正好是大众用香花等供养它的合适位置。巴利
Tathā yampi taṃ atulaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – rañño cakkavattissa cakkaratanaṃ uppajjati indanīlamaṇimayanābhi sattaratanamayasahassāraṃ pavāḷamayanemi, rattasuvaṇṇamayasandhi, yassa dasannaṃ dasannaṃ arānaṃ upari ekaṃ muṇḍāraṃ hoti vātaṃ gahetvā saddakaraṇatthaṃ, yena kato saddo sukusalappatāḷitapañcaṅgikatūriyasaddo viya hoti. Yassa nābhiyā ubhosu passesu dve sīhamukhāni honti, abbhantaraṃ sakaṭacakkasseva susiraṃ, tassa kattā vā kāretā vā natthi, kammapaccayena ututo samuṭṭhāti. Yaṃ rājā dasavidhaṃ cakkavattivattaṃ pūretvā tadahuposathe pannarase puṇṇamadivase sīsaṃnhāto uposathiko uparipāsādavaragato sīlāni sodhento nisinno puṇṇacandaṃ viya sūriyaṃ viya ca uṭṭhentaṃ passati, yassa dvādasayojanato saddo suyyati, yojanato vaṇṇo dissati, yaṃ mahājanena ‘‘dutiyo maññe cando sūriyo vā uṭṭhito’’ti ativiya kotūhalajātena dissamānaṃ nagarassa upari āgantvā rañño antepurassa pācīnapasse nātiuccaṃ nātinīcaṃ hutvā mahājanassa gandhapupphādīhi pūjetuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne akkhāhataṃ viya tiṭṭhati.
就在那之后,象宝出现了。它全身纯白,四足赤红,七处平正触地,有神通,能在空中飞行。它或者从布萨族来,或者从六牙族来。如果是从布萨族来的,来的是族中最年长的;如果是从六牙族来的,来的是族中最年幼的,已经修学圆满,调伏驯顺。它带着十二由旬长的随行队伍,绕行整个赡部洲,然后在早餐之前就回到自己的王都。巴利
Tadeva anubandhamānaṃ hatthiratanaṃ uppajjati, sabbaseto rattapādo sattappatiṭṭho iddhimā vehāsaṅgamo uposathakulā vā chaddantakulā vā āgacchati. Uposathakulā āgacchanto hi sabbajeṭṭho āgacchati, chaddantakulā sabbakaniṭṭho sikkhitasikkho damathūpeto. So dvādasayojanaṃ parisaṃ gahetvā sakalajambudīpaṃ anusaṃyāyitvā purepātarāsameva sakaṃ rājadhāniṃ āgacchati.
紧随其后,马宝也出现了。它全身纯白,四蹄赤红,头像乌鸦,鬃毛如芦苇。它从雨云王族而来。其余的情况和象宝完全一样。巴利
Tampi anubandhamānaṃ assaratanaṃ uppajjati, sabbaseto rattapādo kākasīso muñjakeso valāhakassa rājakulā āgacchati. Sesamettha hatthiratanasadisameva.
紧接着,又出现一颗随他而来的吠琉璃摩尼宝。这颗宝珠是吠琉璃摩尼,色泽纯净,天然生成,有八个棱面,经过精心打磨,长度像车轮的轮毂。它来自广博山。即使在具备四支的黑暗中,也能从国王的幢顶照亮一由旬的范围。借着它的光芒,人们以为是白天,就开始干活,连极微小的蚂蚁都能看见。巴利
Tampi anubandhamānaṃ maṇiratanaṃ uppajjati. So hoti maṇi veḷuriyo subho jātimā aṭṭhaṃso suparikammakato āyāmato cakkanābhisadiso, vepullapabbatā āgacchati, so caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre rañño dhajaggato yojanaṃ obhāseti, yassobhāsena manussā ‘‘divā’’ti maññamānā kammante payojenti, antamaso kunthakipillikaṃ upādāya passanti.
紧随其后,女宝也出现了。她要么是国王原本的正妃,要么从北俱卢洲来,要么出自摩陀罗王族。她没有身材过高、过矮等缺陷,容貌之美超过常人,但又还达不到天人的程度。天冷时,她身体是暖的;天热时,她身体是凉的。她的触感就像反复弹松的棉絮一样柔软。身上散发出栴檀香,口中散发出青莲花香,还具备早起等许多美德。巴利
Tampi anubandhamānaṃ itthiratanaṃ uppajjati. Pakatiaggamahesī vā hoti, uttarakuruto vā āgacchati maddarājakulato vā, atidīghādichadosavivajjitā atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇaṃ appattā dibbaṃ vaṇṇaṃ, yassā rañño sītakāle uṇhāni gattāni honti, uṇhakāle sītāni, satadhā phoṭitatūlapicuno viya samphasso hoti, kāyato candanagandho vāyati, mukhato uppalagandho, pubbuṭṭhāyitādianekaguṇasamannāgatā ca hoti.
接着,与前面类似地,居士宝也出现了。他是国王原本的管家,一位长者。轮宝刚一出现,他就获得了天眼,能看见周围一由旬内的所有宝藏,不管是有主的还是无主的。他来到国王面前,请求说:大王,您不用操心,我会用财富为您办妥一切需要用财富办的事。巴利
Tampi anubandhamānaṃ gahapatiratanaṃ uppajjati rañño pakatikammakaro seṭṭhi, yassa cakkaratane uppannamatte dibbaṃ cakkhu pātubhavati, yena samantato yojanamatte nidhiṃ passati sassāmikampi assāmikampi. So rājānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pavāreti ‘‘appossukko tvaṃ, deva, hohi, ahaṃ te dhanena dhanakaraṇīyaṃ karissāmī’’ti.
接着,与轮宝相随而生的典兵宝也出现了。他是国王的亲生长子,轮宝刚一出现,他就具备超群的智慧和明辨力,能以自心了知十二由旬内大众的心念,并有能力该压制时就压制、该提拔时就提拔。他来到国王面前请求说:大王,您不用操心了,我来替您治理国家。另外,凡是因不可称量的意义而成为宝的,也就是说,无法通过称量、判断来给它估价,说它值一百、一千或一千万的——在这一切宝中,没有任何一宝能与佛宝相等。如果按不可称量的意义来说宝,那么如来本身就是宝。因为任何人都不可能从戒、定或慧等任何一方面去衡量、判断如来,然后限定说:他有这么多功德,或者某人跟他相等、跟他相似。所以,即使从不可称量的意义上说,也没有与如来相等的宝。巴利
Tampi anubandhamānaṃ pariṇāyakaratanaṃ uppajjati rañño pakatijeṭṭhaputto, cakkaratane uppannamatte atirekapaññāveyyattiyena samannāgato hoti, dvādasayojanāya parisāya cetasā cittaṃ parijānitvā niggahapaggahasamattho hoti. So rājānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pavāreti – ‘‘appossukko tvaṃ, deva, hohi, ahaṃ te rajjaṃ anusāsissāmī’’ti. Yaṃ vā panaññampi evarūpaṃ atulaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, yassa na sakkā tulayitvā tīrayitvā aggho kātuṃ ‘‘sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā agghati koṭiṃ vā’’ti. Tattha ekaratanampi buddharatanena samaṃ natthi. Yadi hi atulaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, tathāgatova ratanaṃ. Tathāgato hi na sakkā sīlato vā samādhito vā paññādīnaṃ vā aññatarato kenaci tulayitvā tīrayitvā ‘‘ettakaguṇo vā iminā samo vā sappaṭibhāgo vā’’ti paricchindituṃ. Evaṃ atulaṭṭhenāpi tathāgatasamaṃ ratanaṃ natthi.
同样地,若以“难见”的意义而称为宝,比如转轮王以及他的轮宝等诸宝,它们出现都极为稀有,但即便如此,也无法与佛宝相等。如果以“难见”的意义来说宝,那么如来才是真正的宝,转轮王等人的宝又怎么能称为宝呢?因为那些宝在仅仅一劫之中就会多次出现。然而,即使经过无数劫,世间也可能没有如来出现。所以,唯有如来是偶尔才出现,因此极为难见。世尊在般涅槃时也这样说过:巴利
Tathā yampi taṃ dullabhadassanaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – dullabhapātubhāvo rājā cakkavatti cakkādīni ca tassa ratanāni, tampi buddharatanena samaṃ natthi. Yadi hi dullabhadassanaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, tathāgatova ratanaṃ, kuto cakkavattiādīnaṃ ratanattaṃ, yāni ekasmiṃyeva kappe anekāni uppajjanti. Yasmā pana asaṅkhyeyyepi kappe tathāgatasuñño loko hoti, tasmā tathāgato eva kadāci karahaci uppajjanato dullabhadassano. Vuttaṃ cetaṃ bhagavatā parinibbānasamaye –
阿难,天神们都在埋怨:“我们远道而来,就是为了见如来。如来、阿罗汉、正自觉者只是偶尔才出现在世间,而今天后夜时分,如来就要般涅槃了。可这位有大威德的比丘却站在世尊面前挡着,让我们没能在最后时刻见到如来。”巴利
‘‘Devatā, ānanda, ujjhāyanti – ‘dūrā ca vatamha āgatā tathāgataṃ dassanāya, kadāci karahaci tathāgatā loke uppajjanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā, ajjeva rattiyā pacchime yāme tathāgatassa parinibbānaṃ bhavissati, ayañca mahesakkho bhikkhu bhagavato purato ṭhito ovārento, na mayaṃ labhāma pacchime kāle tathāgataṃ dassanāyā’’’ti (dī. ni. 2.200).
即使从“难以见到”这一点来看,也没有任何珍宝能和如来相等。巴利
Evaṃ dullabhadassanaṭṭhenapi tathāgatasamaṃ ratanaṃ natthi.
同样地,那种宝之所以称为宝,是因为它只有非下劣的人才能受用。比如转轮王的轮宝等。即使拥有百千俱胝的财富,住在七层宫殿最上层的平台上的人,以及旃陀罗、竹匠、猎人、车匠、清道夫等下劣种姓的卑贱之人,即使在梦中,它也不会为了他们的受用而生起。只有父母双方血统都清净的刹帝利王,圆满具备十种转轮王的职责,才能为受用而令它生起,所以它确实是非下劣的人才能受用的。即便如此,它也不能与佛宝相等。如果按“非下劣的人才能受用”这一含义来称宝,那么如来本身就是宝。因为如来在世间,即使是那些被公认为高尚之人的人,如果不具备善缘、持有颠倒见解,比如富兰那迦叶等六位外道导师以及其他类似的人,即使在梦中也不能受用如来;而具备善缘的人,比如仅凭四句偈就能证得阿罗汉果、具有穿透性智见的婆醯迦等,以及其他出身大族姓的大弟子们,则能受用。他们通过成就见最上、闻最上、侍奉最上等,以各种方式受用如来。因此,即使按“非下劣的人才能受用”这一含义来说,也没有任何宝能与如来相等。巴利
Tathā yampi taṃ anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – rañño cakkavattissa cakkaratanādi. Tañhi koṭisatasahassadhanānampi sattabhūmikapāsādavaratale vasantānampi caṇḍālavenanesādarathakārapukkusādīnaṃ nīcakulikānaṃ omakapurisānaṃ supinantepi paribhogatthāya na nibbattati. Ubhato sujātassa pana rañño khattiyasseva paripūritadasavidhacakkavattivattassa paribhogatthāya nibbattanato anomasattaparibhogaṃyeva hoti, tampi buddharatanena samaṃ natthi. Yadi hi anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, tathāgatova ratanaṃ. Tathāgato hi loke anomasattasammatānampi anupanissayasampannānaṃ viparītadassanānaṃ pūraṇakassapādīnaṃ channaṃ satthārānaṃ aññesañca evarūpānaṃ supinantepi aparibhogo, upanissayasampannānaṃ pana catuppadāyapi gāthāya pariyosāne arahattamadhigantuṃ samatthānaṃ nibbedhikañāṇadassanānaṃ bāhiyadārucīriyappabhutīnaṃ aññesañca mahākulappasutānaṃ mahāsāvakānaṃ paribhogo. Te hi taṃ dassanānuttariyasavanānuttariyapāricariyānuttariyādīni sādhentā tathā tathā paribhuñjanti. Evaṃ anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhenāpi tathāgatasamaṃ ratanaṃ natthi.
还有,从普遍意义上说,凡是依“能让人生起欢喜”这个含义而称为宝的,比如转轮王的轮宝。转轮王一看见它,心里就欢喜,轮宝就是这样让王生起欢喜的。再者,转轮王左手拿着金水瓶,右手向轮宝洒水,说:“轮宝,请转动吧!轮宝,请征服吧!”于是轮宝就像五种乐器合奏一样,发出甜美的声音,从空中飞向东方。王靠着轮宝的威力,率领宽达十二由旬、由四支军队组成的队伍,不高不低地前进——从高树的下方、低树的上方穿过,收取树上献来的花、果、嫩叶等礼物,又接受那些以“大王,请来吧”这样最恭敬的方式前来迎接的敌国国王,并以“不得杀生”等方式教导他们,一路前行。每当王想吃饭或想午休时,轮宝就从空中降下,停在平坦的地面上,那里能完成取水等一切事务,地面平正得就像被车轴碾过一样。后来,当王心里生起要再出发的念头时,轮宝又像之前那样发出声音向前飞去。十二由旬内的随从听到这声音后,也都跟着在空中飞行。轮宝逐渐进入东海,它入海时,海水退开一由旬,像墙壁一样立在两边。大众随心所欲地取走七宝。王又拿起金水瓶,用水洒向轮宝,说:“从这里开始,就是我的国土。”然后返回。军队在前,轮宝在后,王在中间。轮宝退出所经过的地方,海水又重新涌满。用同样的方法,轮宝也前往南、西、北海。巴利
Yampi taṃ avisesato ratijananaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – rañño cakkavattissa cakkaratanaṃ. Tañhi disvā rājā cakkavatti attamano hoti, evampi taṃ rañño ratiṃ janeti. Puna caparaṃ rājā cakkavatti vāmena hatthena suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena cakkaratanaṃ abbhukkirati ‘‘pavattatu bhavaṃ cakkaratanaṃ, abhivijinātu bhavaṃ cakkaratana’’nti. Tato cakkaratanaṃ pañcaṅgikaṃ viya tūriyaṃ madhurassaraṃ niccharantaṃ ākāsena puratthimaṃ disaṃ gacchati, anvadeva rājā cakkavatti cakkānubhāvena dvādasayojanavitthiṇṇāya caturaṅginiyā senāya nātiuccaṃ nātinīcaṃ uccarukkhānaṃ heṭṭhābhāgena, nīcarukkhānaṃ uparibhāgena, rukkhesu pupphaphalapallavādipaṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā āgatānaṃ hatthato paṇṇākārañca gaṇhanto ‘‘ehi kho mahārājā’’tievamādinā paramanipaccakārena āgate paṭirājāno ‘‘pāṇo na hantabbo’’tiādinā nayena anusāsanto gacchati. Yattha pana rājā bhuñjitukāmo vā divāseyyaṃ vā kappetukāmo hoti, tattha cakkaratanaṃ ākāsā otaritvā udakādisabbakiccakkhame same bhūmibhāge akkhāhataṃ viya tiṭṭhati. Puna rañño gamanacitte uppanne purimanayeneva saddaṃ karontaṃ gacchati, yaṃ sutvā dvādasayojanikāpi parisā ākāsena gacchati. Cakkaratanaṃ anupubbena puratthimaṃ samuddaṃ ajjhogāhati, tasmiṃ ajjhogāhante udakaṃ yojanappamāṇaṃ apagantvā bhittīkataṃ viya tiṭṭhati. Mahājano yathākāmaṃ satta ratanāni gaṇhāti. Puna rājā suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṃ gahetvā ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya mama rajja’’nti udakena abbhukkiritvā nivattati. Senā purato hoti, cakkaratanaṃ pacchato, rājā majjhe. Cakkaratanassa osakkitosakkitaṭṭhānaṃ udakaṃ paripūrati. Eteneva upāyena dakkhiṇapacchimauttarepi samudde gacchati.
轮宝这样绕行四方之后,升上三由旬高的空中。国王站在轮宝上,靠着轮宝的威力,眺望他所征服的领土:东胜身洲方圆七千由旬,周围有五百小洲点缀;北俱卢洲方圆八千由旬;西牛货洲也是方圆七千由旬;赡部洲方圆一万由旬。这样一个由四大洲和两千小洲庄严围绕的轮围世界,他看起来就像一片盛开的白色莲花林。这样眺望时,他心中生起极大的喜悦。轮宝虽然能让国王生起喜悦,但它比不上佛宝。如果按“能令生喜”这个意义就叫宝,那么只有如来才是真正的宝。轮宝算得了什么?如来所生起的喜悦,比起转轮王的喜悦——无论是由轮宝还是其他任何东西所引生的——那是不及其百分之一、千分之一、百千万分之一的。而且如来还能为无数依教奉行的人天众生,生起比这更殊胜、更微妙的喜悦:初禅的喜悦、第二第三第四第五禅的喜悦,空无边处的喜悦、识无边处的喜悦、无所有处的喜悦、非想非非想处的喜悦,入流道的喜悦、入流果的喜悦,一来道、一来果、不还道、不还果的喜悦,以及阿罗汉道与阿罗汉果的喜悦。所以,即使按“能令生喜”这个意义来说,也没有任何宝能与如来相等。巴利
Evaṃ catuddisaṃ anusaṃyāyitvā cakkaratanaṃ tiyojanappamāṇaṃ ākāsaṃ ārohati. Tattha ṭhito rājā cakkaratanānubhāvena vijitaṃ pañcasataparittadīpapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ sattayojanasahassaparimaṇḍalaṃ pubbavidehaṃ, tathā aṭṭhayojanasahassaparimaṇḍalaṃ uttarakuruṃ, sattayojanasahassaparimaṇḍalaṃyeva aparagoyānaṃ, dasayojanasahassaparimaṇḍalaṃ jambudīpañcāti evaṃ catumahādīpadvisahassaparittadīpapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ suphullapuṇḍarīkavanaṃ viya oloketi. Evaṃ olokayato cassa anappikā rati uppajjati. Evampi taṃ cakkaratanaṃ rañño ratiṃ janeti, tampi buddharatanasamaṃ natthi. Yadi hi ratijananaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, tathāgatova ratanaṃ. Kiṃ karissati etaṃ cakkaratanaṃ? Tathāgato hi yassā dibbāya ratiyā cakkaratanādīhi sabbehipi janitā cakkavattirati saṅkhampi kalampi kalabhāgampi na upeti, tatopi ratito uttaritarañca paṇītatarañca attano ovādappatikarānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānampi devamanussānaṃ paṭhamajjhānaratiṃ, dutiyatatiyacatutthapañcamajjhānaratiṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanaratiṃ, viññāṇañcāyatanaākiñcaññāyatananevasaññānāsaññāyatanaratiṃ, sotāpattimaggaratiṃ, sotāpattiphalaratiṃ, sakadāgāmianāgāmiarahattamaggaphalaratiñca janeti. Evaṃ ratijananaṭṭhenāpi tathāgatasamaṃ ratanaṃ natthīti.
另外,所谓宝其实有两种:有识的宝和无识的宝。其中,无识的宝就是轮宝、珠宝,或者其他不属于根所摄的金银等物;有识的宝则是象宝等,一直到典兵宝为止,或者其他类似这样属于根所摄的。在这两种当中,有识的宝被称为最上等。为什么呢?因为无识的金、银、珠宝等宝,都是为了装饰有识的象宝等而拿来使用的。巴利
Apica ratanaṃ nāmetaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti saviññāṇakaṃ aviññāṇakañca. Tattha aviññāṇakaṃ cakkaratanaṃ maṇiratanaṃ, yaṃ vā panaññampi anindriyabaddhaṃ suvaṇṇarajatādi, saviññāṇakaṃ hatthiratanādi pariṇāyakaratanapariyosānaṃ, yaṃ vā panaññampi evarūpaṃ indriyabaddhaṃ. Evaṃ duvidhe cettha saviññāṇakaratanaṃ aggamakkhāyati. Kasmā? Yasmā aviññāṇakaṃ suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimuttādiratanaṃ, saviññāṇakānaṃ hatthiratanādīnaṃ alaṅkāratthāya upanīyati.
有识宝也分两种:畜生宝和人宝。其中,人宝被称为最上等。为什么呢?因为畜生宝是被人宝所驾驭的。人宝又分两种:女宝和男宝。其中,男宝被称为最上等。为什么呢?因为女宝是侍奉男宝的。男宝又分两种:在家宝和出家宝。其中,出家宝被称为最上等。为什么呢?因为即便是在家宝中最顶尖的转轮王,也要以五体投地的方式顶礼、亲近、侍奉具足戒等功德的出家宝,然后才能获得天界与人间的福报,最终证得涅槃。巴利
Saviññāṇakaratanampi duvidhaṃ tiracchānagataratanaṃ, manussaratanañca. Tattha manussaratanaṃ aggamakkhāyati. Kasmā? Yasmā tiracchānagataratanaṃ manussaratanassa opavayhaṃ hoti. Manussaratanampi duvidhaṃ itthiratanaṃ, purisaratanañca. Tattha purisaratanaṃ aggamakkhāyati. Kasmā? Yasmā itthiratanaṃ purisaratanassa paricārikattaṃ āpajjati. Purisaratanampi duvidhaṃ agārikaratanaṃ, anagārikaratanañca. Tattha anagārikaratanaṃ aggamakkhāyati. Kasmā? Yasmā agārikaratanesu aggo cakkavattīpi sīlādiguṇayuttaṃ anagārikaratanaṃ pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā upaṭṭhahitvā payirupāsitvā ca dibbamānusikā sampattiyo pāpuṇitvā ante nibbānasampattiṃ pāpuṇāti.
出家宝也有两种:以圣者和凡夫来分。圣者宝又有两种:有学和无学。无学宝又有两种:纯观行者和止乘行者。止乘行者宝又有两种:已经达到声闻波罗蜜的和还没达到的。其中,达到声闻波罗蜜的被称为最上。为什么?因为功德广大。比起达到声闻波罗蜜的宝,独觉佛宝更殊胜。为什么?因为功德广大。像舍利弗、目犍连那样的数百位声闻弟子,连一位独觉佛功德的百分之一都达不到。比起独觉佛宝,正自觉者宝更殊胜。为什么?因为功德广大。就算整个赡部洲都挤满了独觉佛,他们跏趺而坐、座席相接,也达不到一位正自觉者功德的百、千、百千分之一。世尊也这样说过:“诸比丘,一切有情中,无足的……乃至如来被称为最上。”所以,无论从哪个角度说,都没有和如来相等的宝。因此世尊说:“没有与如来等同者。”巴利
Evaṃ anagārikaratanampi duvidhaṃ – ariyaputhujjanavasena. Ariyaratanampi duvidhaṃ sekkhāsekkhavasena. Asekkharatanampi duvidhaṃ sukkhavipassakasamathayānikavasena, samathayānikaratanampi duvidhaṃ sāvakapāramippattaṃ, appattañca. Tattha sāvakapāramippattaṃ aggamakkhāyati. Kasmā? Guṇamahantatāya. Sāvakapāramippattaratanatopi paccekabuddharatanaṃ aggamakkhāyati. Kasmā? Guṇamahantatāya. Sāriputtamoggallānasadisāpi hi anekasatā sāvakā ekassa paccekabuddhassa guṇānaṃ satabhāgampi na upenti. Paccekabuddharatanatopi sammāsambuddharatanaṃ aggamakkhāyati. Kasmā? Guṇamahantatāya. Sakalampi hi jambudīpaṃ pūretvā pallaṅkena pallaṅkaṃ ghaṭṭentā nisinnā paccekabuddhā ekassa sammāsambuddhassa guṇānaṃ neva saṅkhaṃ na kalaṃ na kalabhāgaṃ upenti. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā…pe… tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.139; a. ni. 4.34; 5.32; itivu. 90). Evaṃ kenacipi pariyāyena tathāgatasamaṃ ratanaṃ natthi. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘na no samaṃ atthi tathāgatenā’’ti.
世尊这样说了佛宝与其他诸宝无法相比之后,现在为了平息那些众生已经生起的灾祸,不是依靠种姓、血统、家族出身、容貌端正等,而是依据从无间地狱直到有顶天之间的整个世间,以戒蕴、定蕴等功德来说明佛宝的独一无二,说出真实语:“这佛宝也是殊胜的,以此真理愿得安稳。”巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā buddharatanassa aññehi ratanehi asamataṃ vatvā idāni tesaṃ sattānaṃ uppannaupaddavavūpasamanatthaṃ neva jātiṃ na gottaṃ na kolaputtiyaṃ na vaṇṇapokkharatādiṃ nissāya, apica kho avīcimupādāya bhavaggapariyante loke sīlasamādhikkhandhādīhi guṇehi buddharatanassa asadisabhāvaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ, etena saccena suvatthi hotū’’ti.
这段话的意思是:无论在这里、在他方世界,还是在诸天界,任何存在的财富或珍宝,与佛宝相比,都因佛宝具有种种功德而无法与之相等,所以佛宝最为殊胜。如果这是真实的,就以这真实的力量,愿这些众生获得安稳,愿善好得以存在,愿他们无病、无灾。在这里,就像“阿难,眼是空的,没有我,也没有属于我的东西”等经文中所说,意思是:没有自我的实体,也没有属于自我的实体。否则,眼是我或是我所拥有之物,这种说法就无法被否定。同样地,“宝殊胜”是指宝性殊胜、成为宝的状态殊胜,应当这样理解。否则,佛陀就不能成立为宝了。因为并不是哪里有宝物,那个东西就成立为宝。而是由于存在一种被称为受尊重等意义的、以某种方式与之相关联的宝性,依于这种宝性才施设为宝;正因为这种宝性存在,才成立为宝。或者,“此佛宝”也是基于这个道理,说明佛本身就是宝。应当这样理解这里的含义。世尊说完这首偈颂后,王族获得了安稳,怖畏得以平息。这首偈颂的威令,在百千俱胝轮围世界中,被非人们所领受。巴利
Tassattho – idampi idha vā huraṃ vā saggesu vā yaṃkiñci atthi vittaṃ vā ratanaṃ vā, tena saddhiṃ tehi tehi guṇehi asamattā buddharatanaṃ paṇītaṃ. Yadi etaṃ saccaṃ, etena saccena imesaṃ pāṇīnaṃ sotthi hotu, sobhanānaṃ atthitā hotu, arogatā nirupaddavatāti. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘cakkhuṃ kho, ānanda, suññaṃ attena vā attaniyena vā’’tievamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.85) attabhāvena vā attaniyabhāvena vāti attho. Itarathā hi cakkhu attā vā attaniyaṃ vāti appaṭisiddhameva siyā. Evaṃ ratanaṃ paṇītanti ratanattaṃ paṇītaṃ, ratanabhāvo paṇītoti ayamattho veditabbo. Itarathā hi buddho neva ratananti sijjheyya. Na hi yattha ratanaṃ atthi, taṃ ratananti sijjhati. Yattha pana cittīkatādiatthasaṅkhātaṃ yena vā tena vā vidhinā sambandhagataṃ ratanattaṃ atthi, yasmā taṃ ratanattamupādāya ratananti paññāpīyati, tasmā tassa ratanattassa atthitāya ratananti sijjhati. Atha vā idampi buddhe ratananti imināpi kāraṇena buddhova ratananti evampettha attho veditabbo. Vuttamattāya ca bhagavatā imāya gāthāya rājakulassa sotthi jātā, bhayaṃ vūpasantaṃ. Imissā gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
227 227. 这样以佛的功德说了真实语之后,现在开始以涅槃法的功德来说“灭、离贪”。在这里,因为现证涅槃时,贪等烦恼已被灭尽、彻底断尽;又因为涅槃只是它们不再生起的灭尽本身;又因为涅槃与贪等烦恼不相应,不论从相应关系还是从所缘关系来说都是分离的;又因为当涅槃被现证时,贪等烦恼究竟离染、消失、被摧毁——所以称为“灭”,也称为“离贪”。又因为它没有生起可得,没有衰败,也没有住立后的变异,所以它不生、不老、不死,因此称为“不死”;以最上之义和以不满足之义,则称为“殊胜”。“yadajjhagā”:彼所证得、所发现、所获得,以自智慧力亲自体证者。“释迦牟尼”:因生于释迦族故为释迦,因具足牟尼法故为牟尼,释迦本身就是牟尼,所以是释迦牟尼。“等持”:以圣道之定而心得等持。“无与此法相等者”:以彼名为灭等的释迦牟尼所证得的法,没有任何法与之相等。因此其他经中也说:“诸比丘,一切法,或有为或无为,离贪于彼诸法中被说为最上。”等等。巴利
227. Evaṃ buddhaguṇena saccaṃ vatvā idāni nibbānadhammaguṇena vattumāraddho ‘‘khayaṃ virāga’’nti. Tattha yasmā nibbānasacchikiriyāya rāgādayo khīṇā honti parikkhīṇā, yasmā vā taṃ tesaṃ anuppādanirodhakkhayamattaṃ, yasmā ca taṃ rāgādiviyuttaṃ sampayogato ca ārammaṇato ca, yasmā vā tamhi sacchikate rāgādayo accantaṃ virattā honti vigatā viddhastā , tasmā ‘‘khaya’’nti ca ‘‘virāga’’nti ca vuccati. Yasmā panassa na uppādo paññāyati, na vayo na ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ, tasmā taṃ na jāyati na jīyati na mīyatīti katvā ‘‘amata’’nti vuccati, uttamaṭṭhena pana atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇītanti. Yadajjhagāti yaṃ ajjhagā vindi, paṭilabhi, attano ñāṇabalena sacchākāsi. Sakyamunīti sakyakulappasutattā sakyo, moneyyadhammasamannāgatattā muni, sakyo eva muni sakyamuni. Samāhitoti ariyamaggasamādhinā samāhitacitto. Na tena dhammena samatthi kiñcīti tena khayādināmakena sakyamuninā adhigatena dhammena samaṃ kiñci dhammajātaṃ natthi. Tasmā suttantarepi vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ dhammānaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90).
世尊这样讲了涅槃法与其他法不可等同之后,现在为了让那些众生已经生起的灾祸得以平息,就依靠灭、离贪、不死、殊胜这些功德,凭借涅槃法宝无可比拟的特性,而说出真实语:“这也是法中的宝,殊胜;以此真实语,愿得安稳。”这段话的意思,应当依照前面那首偈颂所说的方式来理解。这首偈颂的威令,也在百千俱胝轮围世界中,被非人所领受。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā nibbānadhammassa aññehi dhammehi asamataṃ vatvā idāni tesaṃ sattānaṃ uppannaupaddavavūpasamanatthaṃ khayavirāgāmatapaṇītatāguṇehi nibbānadhammaratanassa asadisabhāvaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi dhamme ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ etena saccena suvatthi hotū’’ti. Tassattho purimagāthāya vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
228 228. 这样,先用涅槃法的功德说了真实语之后,现在开始用道法的功德来说“yaṃ buddhaseṭṭho”(那位最胜佛所赞叹的)。其中,依照“觉悟了诸谛”等的方式,他是佛陀;最高、值得称赞的,就是“最胜”;他既是佛陀,又是最胜,所以叫“最胜佛”。或者,在佛陀、独觉佛等各类觉者当中,他是最殊胜的,所以叫“最胜佛”。这位最胜佛所赞叹的,就是像“八支圣道中,通向涅槃的安稳之道”以及“比丘们,我要为你们宣说有近因、有资具的圣正定”这样,在种种场合称赞、开示的。所谓“清净”,是因为能彻底断除烦恼垢秽,所以是极其清净。所谓“他们称之为无间定”,是说这种定在自身生起之后,必定紧接着就给出果报,所以叫“无间定”。因为圣道定一旦生起,就没有任何障碍能阻止它的果报产生。正如所说的——巴利
228. Evaṃ nibbānadhammaguṇena saccaṃ vatvā idāni maggadhammaguṇena vattumāraddho ‘‘yaṃ buddhaseṭṭho’’ti. Tattha ‘‘bujjhitā saccānī’’tiādinā (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. pārāyanatthutigāthāniddesa 97; paṭi. ma. 1.162) nayena buddho, uttamo pasaṃsanīyo cāti seṭṭho, buddho ca so seṭṭho cāti buddhaseṭṭho. Anubuddhapaccekabuddhasaṅkhātesu vā buddhesu seṭṭhoti buddhaseṭṭho. So buddhaseṭṭho yaṃ parivaṇṇayī, ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggānaṃ, khemaṃ nibbānappattiyā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.215) ca ‘‘ariyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, sammāsamādhiṃ desessāmi saupanisaṃ saparikkhāra’’nti (ma. ni. 3.136) ca evamādinā nayena tattha tattha pasaṃsi pakāsayi. Sucinti kilesamalasamucchedakaraṇato accantavodānaṃ. Samādhimānantarikaññamāhūti yañca attano pavattisamanantaraṃ niyameneva phaladānato ‘‘ānantarikasamādhī’’ti āhu. Na hi maggasamādhiñhi uppanne tassa phaluppattinisedhako koci antarāyo atthi. Yathāha –
如果这个人正在为了亲证入流果而修行,而世界又正好到了劫被毁灭的时候,那么只要这个人还没有证得入流果,劫就不会毁灭。这样的人就叫做“住劫者”。所有安住在道位上的人,也都是“住劫者”。巴利
‘‘Ayañca puggalo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno assa, kappassa ca uḍḍayhanavelā assa, neva tāva kappo uḍḍayheyya, yāvāyaṃ puggalo na sotāpattiphalaṃ sacchikaroti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ṭhitakappī. Sabbepi maggasamaṅgino puggalā ṭhitakappino’’ti (pu. pa. 17).
没有哪一种定能等同于这种定——这种被最胜佛所称赞的、清净的、无间定。无论是色界定还是无色界定,都找不到任何一种能与之相等。为什么?因为修习那些定,即使投生到各个梵天世界,仍然可能再堕入地狱等处;而修习这个阿罗汉果定,圣者则能彻底断除一切再生。因此,在其他经中也这样说:“比丘们,在一切有为法中,圣八支道被称为它们中最上的。”等等。巴利
Samādhinātena samo na vijjatīti tena buddhaseṭṭhaparivaṇṇitena sucinā ānantarikasamādhinā samo rūpāvacarasamādhi vā arūpāvacarasamādhi vā koci na vijjati. Kasmā? Tesaṃ bhāvitattā tattha tattha brahmaloke uppannassāpi puna nirayādīsu uppattisambhavato, imassa ca arahattasamādhissa bhāvitattā ariyapuggalassa sabbuppattisamugghātasambhavato. Tasmā suttantarepi vuttaṃ ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90).
世尊这样说了无间定与其他定不相等之后,现在就像前面那样,依据道法宝的无与伦比,说出真实语:“这法也……乃至……愿成为。”它的含义应当按前面所说的方式理解。这一偈的威令,在百千俱胝世界中,被非人领受。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā ānantarikasamādhissa aññehi samādhīhi asamataṃ vatvā idāni purimanayeneva maggadhammaratanassa asadisabhāvaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi dhamme…pe… hotū’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
229 229. 这样,先依据道法的功德说了真实语之后,现在开始依据僧伽的功德来说“ye puggalā”这句。其中,“ye”是不限定对象的泛指。“puggalā”指众生。“aṭṭha”是他们的数量界定。因为他们就是四种正在修行的人加上四种安住在果位的人,一共八种。“sataṃ pasatthā”就是被善士所称赞——这里的善士包括诸佛、独觉佛、声闻弟子,以及其他天和人。为什么被称赞呢?因为他们本身就具备戒等功德。就像瞻波花、婆枯拉花等花,天生就带着色泽和香气一样,这些圣者天生就具备戒、定等功德。因此,他们就像那些具足色泽和香气的花一样,在天人和凡人中的善士看来,是可爱、称心、值得称赞的。所以经文说:“ye puggalā aṭṭhasataṃ pasatthā”——那些被善士称赞的八种人。巴利
229. Evaṃ maggadhammaguṇenāpi saccaṃ vatvā idāni saṅghaguṇenāpi vattumāraddho ‘‘ye puggalā’’ti. Tattha yeti aniyametvā uddeso. Puggalāti sattā. Aṭṭhāti tesaṃ gaṇanaparicchedo. Te hi cattāro ca paṭipannā cattāro ca phale ṭhitāti aṭṭha honti. Sataṃ pasatthāti sappurisehi buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakehi aññehi ca devamanussehi pasatthā. Kasmā? Sahajātasīlādiguṇayogā. Tesañhi campakavakulakusumādīnaṃ sahajātavaṇṇagandhādayo viya sahajātasīlasamādhiādayo guṇā. Tena te vaṇṇagandhādisampannāni viya pupphāni devamanussānaṃ sataṃ piyā manāpā pasaṃsanīyā ca honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ye puggalā aṭṭhasataṃ pasatthā’’ti.
或者,“ye”是未加限定的泛指称呼。“puggalā”指众生。“aṭṭhasataṃ”是这些众生的数量界定。具体来说,一种子者、家家者、七返有者,这三种是入流者;在欲界、色界、无色界中已证得果位的三种一来者;他们全部按四种行道方式计算,就是二十四种。中般涅槃者、生般涅槃者、有行般涅槃者、无行般涅槃者、上流至色究竟天者——在无烦天有五种,在无热天、善见天、善现天也同样各有五种;而在色究竟天中,除去上流至色究竟天者,还有四种——这样就是二十四种不来者。纯观者与止行者,是两种阿拉汉;加上四种正在道上的人,总共五十四种。他们全部再按信乘与慧乘的区分翻一倍,就成为一百零八种。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Atha vā yeti aniyametvā uddeso. Puggalāti sattā. Aṭṭhasatanti tesaṃ gaṇanaparicchedo. Te hi ekabījī kolaṃkolo sattakkhattuparamoti tayo sotāpannā, kāmarūpārūpabhavesu adhigatapphalā tayo sakadāgāmino, te sabbepi catunnaṃ paṭipadānaṃ vasena catuvīsati, antarāparinibbāyī, upahaccaparinibbāyī, sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī, uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmīti, avihesu pañca, tathā atappasudassasudassīsu. Akaniṭṭhesu pana uddhaṃsotavajjā cattāroti catuvīsati anāgāmino, sukkhavipassako samathayānikoti dve arahanto, cattāro maggaṭṭhāti catupaññāsa. Te sabbepi saddhādhurapaññādhurānaṃ vasena diguṇā hutvā aṭṭhasataṃ honti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
这些成为四双。从详细列举的角度来说,他们是八种人或一百零八种人;从简略的角度来说,入流道者与入流果者为一双,这样一直到阿罗汉道者与阿罗汉果者为一双,如此共有四双。他们是应供者:在这里,“他们”是对之前没有限定而列举的人加以限定后的说明。无论从详细角度说的八种或一百零八种,还是从简略角度说的四双,所有这些人都是值得接受布施的,所以叫应供者。所谓布施,是指相信业与业的果报之后,不怀着“他会为我做治病的事或跑腿的事”等期待而给出的施物。能真正配得上接受这种布施的,是具备戒等功德的人。而这些人正是如此,因此他们被称为应供者。巴利
Cattāri etāni yugāni hontīti te sabbepi aṭṭha vā aṭṭhasataṃ vāti vitthāravasena uddiṭṭhapuggalā, saṅkhepavasena sotāpattimaggaṭṭho phalaṭṭhoti ekaṃ yugaṃ, evaṃ yāva arahattamaggaṭṭho phalaṭṭhoti ekaṃ yuganti cattāri yugāni honti. Te dakkhiṇeyyāti ettha teti pubbe aniyametvā uddiṭṭhānaṃ niyametvā niddeso. Ye puggalā vitthāravasena aṭṭha vā aṭṭhasataṃ vā, saṅkhepavasena cattāri yugāni hontīti vuttā, sabbepi te dakkhiṇaṃ arahantīti dakkhiṇeyyā. Dakkhiṇā nāma kammañca kammavipākañca saddahitvā ‘‘esa me idaṃ vejjakammaṃ vā jaṅghapesanikaṃ vā karissatī’’ti evamādīni anapekkhitvā dīyamāno deyyadhammo, taṃ arahanti nāma sīlādiguṇayuttā puggalā. Ime ca tādisā, tena vuccanti te ‘‘dakkhiṇeyyā’’ti.
善逝的弟子:世尊因为具足了殊胜的行持,因为到达了殊胜的境界,因为已经善巧地行证,又因为善于善巧地宣说,所以称为善逝。凡是听闻这位善逝教法的人,就称为弟子。虽然其他人也听闻,但听了之后并不去做应当做的事。而这些人听了之后,修行了应当修的法随法行,证得了道与果,因此才被称为弟子。在这些善逝弟子中布施能得大果报:在这些善逝弟子身上,即使布施的东西很少,由于接受者这一方使布施变得清净,所以能得大果报。因此,在另一部经中也这样说:巴利
Sugatassa sāvakāti bhagavā sobhanena gamanena yuttattā, sobhanañca ṭhānaṃ gatattā, suṭṭhu ca gatattā suṭṭhu eva ca gadattā sugato, tassa sugatassa. Sabbepi te vacanaṃ suṇantīti sāvakā. Kāmañca aññepi suṇanti, na pana sutvā kattabbakiccaṃ karonti. Ime pana sutvā kattabbaṃ dhammānudhammapaṭipattiṃ katvā maggaphalāni pattā, tasmā ‘‘sāvakā’’ti vuccanti. Etesu dinnāni mahapphalānīti etesu sugatasāvakesu appakānipi dānāni dinnāni paṭiggāhakato dakkhiṇāvisuddhibhāvaṃ upagatattā mahapphalāni honti. Tasmā suttantarepi vuttaṃ –
比丘们,无论有多少僧团或团体,如来弟子僧团都被称为其中之首,也就是四双八辈。这就是世尊的弟子僧团……能带来最殊胜的果报。巴利
‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, saṅghā vā gaṇā vā, tathāgatasāvakasaṅgho tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati, yadidaṃ cattāri purisayugāni aṭṭha purisapuggalā, esa bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho…pe… aggo vipāko hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; 5.32; itivu. 90).
世尊这样按道位和果位,依一切道住者与果住者,把僧宝的功德说了。现在,他依着这些功德,说出真实语:“此亦于僧中……”。这段话的意思,应当按前面说过的方式来了知。这一首偈颂的教令,也曾被百千俱胝轮围世界中的非人所领受。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā sabbesampi maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhānaṃ vasena saṅgharatanassa guṇaṃ vatvā idāni tameva guṇaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi saṅghe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
230 230. 这样,先按道位和果位来宣说僧伽的功德,说出真实语之后,现在转而以那些正在享受果定之乐的漏尽个人的功德来宣说,也就是“ye suppayuttā”这一段。其中,“ye”是泛指的说法。“suppayuttā”意思是善加精勤,也就是舍弃种种不正当的谋生方式,依靠清净的生活,开始用观慧来精勤修行自身。另一种解释是,“suppayuttā”指具备清净的身业和语业。以此显示他们的戒蕴。“manasā daḷhenā”指以坚固的意,即以具备稳定定力的心,以此显示他们的定蕴。“nikkāmino”指对身体乃至生命无所贪恋,以智慧为先导的精进而从一切烦恼中出离。以此显示他们具足精进的慧蕴。巴利
230. Evaṃ maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhānaṃ vasena saṅghaguṇena saccaṃ vatvā idāni tato ekacciyānaṃ phalasamāpattisukhamanubhavantānaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalānaṃyeva guṇena vattumāraddho ‘‘ye suppayuttā’’ti. Tattha yeti aniyamituddesavacanaṃ. Suppayuttāti suṭṭhu payuttā, anekavihitaṃ anesanaṃ pahāya suddhājīvitaṃ nissāya vipassanāya attānaṃ payuñjitumāraddhāti attho. Atha vā suppayuttāti parisuddhakāyavacīpayogasamannāgatā. Tena tesaṃ sīlakkhandhaṃ dasseti. Manasā daḷhenāti daḷhena manasā, thirasamādhiyuttena cetasāti attho. Tena tesaṃ samādhikkhandhaṃ dasseti. Nikkāminoti kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhā hutvā paññādhurena vīriyena sabbakilesehi katanikkamanā. Tena tesaṃ vīriyasampannaṃ paññākkhandhaṃ dasseti.
在乔达摩的教法中,这是指从族姓来说,在乔达摩如来的教法里。借此说明:在这教法之外,虽然修各种苦行,但因为不具备善于策励等功德,所以无法从烦恼中出离。“te”是指前面已经说过的那些人。“pattipattā”中,应被证得的称为“patti”,所谓应被证得的就是值得证得的;证得它之后,就成为究竟安稳的人,这是阿罗汉果的别名。已经证得这个应证得之果,所以叫“pattipattā”。“amata”指涅槃。“vigayha”指以所缘的方式深入。“laddhā”指获得。“mudhā”是不变词,意思是不花哪怕一丁点代价。“nibbuti”指烦恼躁动已经止息的果定。“bhuñjamānā”指正在体验。这话说的是什么呢?在乔达摩的教法中,那些人因为戒具足而善于策励,因为定具足而心意坚固,因为慧具足而出离烦恼,他们依这条正道深入涅槃,不花代价就获得并正在享受名为果定的止息之乐,这些人就叫作证得应证得者。巴利
Gotamasāsanamhīti gottato gotamassa tathāgatasseva sāsanamhi. Tena ito bahiddhā nānappakārampi amaratapaṃ karontānaṃ suppayogādiguṇābhāvato kilesehi nikkamanābhāvaṃ dīpeti. Teti pubbe uddiṭṭhānaṃ niddesavacanaṃ. Pattipattāti ettha pattabbāti patti, pattabbā nāma pattuṃ arahā, yaṃ patvā accantayogakkhemino honti, arahattaphalassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, taṃ pattiṃ pattāti pattipattā. Amatanti nibbānaṃ. Vigayhāti ārammaṇavasena vigāhitvā. Laddhāti labhitvā. Mudhāti abyayena kākaṇikamattampi byayaṃ akatvā. Nibbutinti paṭippassaddhakilesadarathaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ. Bhuñjamānāti anubhavamānā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ye imasmiṃ gotamasāsanamhi sīlasampannattā suppayuttā, samādhisampannattā manasā daḷhena, paññāsampannattā nikkāmino, te imāya sammāpaṭipadāya amataṃ vigayha mudhā laddhā phalasamāpattisaññitaṃ nibbutiṃ bhuñjamānā pattipattā nāma hontīti.
世尊这样以那些正在享受果定之乐的漏尽者个人的角度,宣说了僧宝的功德,现在就以这功德为依托,说出真实语:“idampi saṅghe”(这在僧团中也是如此)。它的含义应当按前面所说的方式来了知。这首偈颂的威力,也是被百千俱胝轮围世界中的非人所领受的。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā phalasamāpattisukhamanubhavantānaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalānaṃyeva vasena saṅgharatanassa guṇaṃ vatvā idāni tameva guṇaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi saṅghe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
231 231. 这样,先用诸漏尽者的功德说了“依止僧团”这句真实语之后,现在开始以普通人都能亲自见到的入流者功德来说,也就是“如因陀罗柱”等句子。其中,“如”是表示譬喻的词。“因陀罗柱”是指为了挡住城门,在门槛之间挖地八肘或十肘深,然后打进去的坚实木柱,这是它的名称。“地”指大地。“立”指进入并依靠在里面。“可能”指或许会成为。“四方之风”指从四个方向吹来的风。“不可动摇”指无法使之震动或摇动。“像那样”,即“tathūpama”,意思是那样的同类。“善士”指最上士/最胜人。“我说”即我宣说。“以慧深入观照四圣谛者”,即所谓“yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati”,是指以慧深入观照四圣谛者。其中,四圣谛应当依照《清净道论》所说的方式来理解。巴利
231. Evaṃ khīṇāsavapuggalānaṃ guṇena saṅghādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vatvā idāni bahujanapaccakkhena sotāpannasseva guṇena vattumāraddho ‘‘yathindakhīlo’’ti. Tattha yathāti upamāvacanaṃ. Indakhīloti nagaradvāranivāraṇatthaṃ ummārabbhantare aṭṭha vā dasa vā hatthe pathaviṃ khaṇitvā ākoṭitassa sāradārumayathambhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pathavinti bhūmiṃ. Sitoti anto pavisitvā nissito. Siyāti bhaveyya. Catubbhi vātehīti catūhi disāhi āgatavātehi. Asampakampiyoti kampetuṃ vā cāletuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo. Tathūpamanti tathāvidhaṃ. Sappurisanti uttamapurisaṃ. Vadāmīti bhaṇāmi. Yo ariyasaccāni avecca passatīti yo cattāri ariyasaccāni paññāya ajjhogāhetvā passati. Tattha ariyasaccāni visuddhimagge vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.
这里简要说明其含义:就像一根门柱,因为根基深植于大地,所以不会被四方来的风吹动;我说这位善士也是如此,因为他已经如实彻见四圣谛。为什么?因为他也像那根门柱一样,不会被一切外道论说的四方之风吹动,由于这种彻见,任何人都无法使他动摇或移动。因此,在另一部经中也这样说:巴利
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yathā hi indakhīlo gambhīranematāya pathavissito catubbhi vātehi asampakampiyo siyā, imampi sappurisaṃ tathūpamameva vadāmi, yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati. Kasmā? Yasmā sopi indakhīlo viya catūhi vātehi sabbatitthiyavādavātehi asampakampiyo hoti, tamhā dassanā kenaci kampetuṃ vā cāletuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo. Tasmā suttantarepi vuttaṃ –
比丘们,就像一根铁柱或门柱,根基深埋、埋得很稳,不动不摇。就算有猛烈的暴风雨从东方吹来,也不能让它动摇、震动、移动;从西方来……从南方来……从北方来……也不能让它移动。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为门柱的根基很深、埋得很稳。同样地,比丘们,任何沙门或婆罗门,如果能如实了知“这是苦……这是道”,他们就不会去看别的沙门或婆罗门的脸色,心想“这位尊者确实是知而了知、见而看见”。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为四圣谛已经被他们清楚地看见了。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi , bhikkhave, ayokhīlo vā indakhīlo vā gambhīranemo sunikhāto acalo asampakampī, puratthimāya cepi disāya āgaccheyya bhusā vātavuṭṭhi, neva naṃ saṅkampeyya na sampakampeyya na sampacāleyya. Pacchimāya…pe… dakkhiṇāya… uttarāya cepi…pe… na sampacāleyya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Gambhīrattā, bhikkhave, nemassa sunikhātattā indakhīlassa. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, ye ca kho keci samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā ‘idaṃ dukkhanti…pe… paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṃ pajānanti, te na aññassa samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā mukhaṃ olokenti ‘ayaṃ nūna bhavaṃ jānaṃ jānāti passaṃ passatī’ti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Sudiṭṭhattā, bhikkhave, catunnaṃ ariyasaccāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1109).
世尊这样以大众都能亲自证见的入流者功德,说了僧宝的功德之后,现在又依着这同样的功德,说出真实语:“此亦僧伽。”这句话的意思,应当按前面说过的方式理解。这一偈的真实语,也被百千俱胝轮围世界中的非人所领受。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā bahujanapaccakkhassa sotāpannasseva vasena saṅgharatanassa guṇaṃ vatvā idāni tameva guṇaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi saṅghe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
232 232. 这样,按入流者共通的功德,说了“依僧”这一真实语。现在,针对那三类入流者——一种子、家系、七返——来说。正如经中所说:巴利
232. Evaṃ avisesato sotāpannassa guṇena saṅghādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vatvā idāni ye te tayo sotāpannā ekabījī kolaṃkolo sattakkhattuparamoti. Yathāha –
在这里,有一类人因为断尽了三结,成为入流者……他只投生一次,就彻底结束了苦,这叫做“一种子”。同样,他在两家或三家之间流转、轮回,最终彻底结束苦,这叫做“家家”。同样,他在天界和人间流转、轮回了七次,最终彻底结束苦,这叫做“七次为限”。巴利
‘‘Idhekacco puggalo tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā sotāpanno hoti…pe… so ekaṃyeva bhavaṃ nibbattitvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti, ayaṃ ekabījī. Tathā dve vā tīṇi vā kulāni sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti, ayaṃ kolaṃkolo. Tathā sattakkhattuṃ devesu ca manussesu ca sandhāvitvā saṃsaritvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti, ayaṃ sattakkhattuparamo’’ti (pu. pa. 31-33).
为了说明他们当中最低的七返有者的功德,开始说“ye ariyasaccāni”。其中,“ye ariyasaccāni”这一句,和前文所说的一样。“vibhāvayanti”的意思是:用智慧的光明,破除覆盖圣谛的烦恼黑暗,使它们对自己变得清楚、明显。“gambhīrapaññena”是指以不可测量的智慧,连有天神在内的世间都无法用智慧找到其立足处的深慧者,也就是在说一切知者。“sudesitāni”是指用略说、广说、完整说、不完整说等各种方式善加宣说。“kiñcāpi te honti bhusaṃ pamattā”是说:那些已经彻见圣谛的人,即使因为得到天王位、转轮王位等放逸的处境而变得非常放逸,但由于入流道智灭掉了行所造的识,除了七有之外,在无始轮回中本可能生起的那些名色都已经灭尽、消失,所以他们不再取第八有。他们只是在第七有中开始观修,就证得阿罗汉果。巴利
Tesaṃ sabbakaniṭṭhassa sattakkhattuparamassa guṇena vattumāraddho ‘‘ye ariyasaccānī’’ti. Tattha ye ariyasaccānīti etaṃ vuttanayameva. Vibhāvayantīti paññāobhāsena saccapaṭicchādakaṃ kilesandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā attano pakāsāni pākaṭāni karonti. Gambhīrapaññenāti appameyyapaññatāya sadevakassapi lokassa ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhapaññena, sabbaññunāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sudesitānīti samāsabyāsasākalyavekalyādīhi tehi tehi nayehi suṭṭhu desitāni. Kiñcāpi te honti bhusaṃ pamattāti te vibhāvitaariyasaccā puggalā kiñcāpi devarajjacakkavattirajjādippamādaṭṭhānaṃ āgamma bhusaṃ pamattā honti, tathāpi sotāpattimaggañāṇena abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇassa nirodhā ṭhapetvā satta bhave anamatagge saṃsāre ye uppajjeyyuṃ nāmañca rūpañca , tesaṃ niruddhattā atthaṅgatattā na aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ ādiyanti, sattamabhave eva pana vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇantīti.
世尊这样以七返有者的功德说完僧宝的功德后,现在又依着那功德来运用真实语,说“idampi saṅghe”。它的含义应当按前面所说的方式来理解。这一偈的教令,也被百千俱胝轮围世界中的非人所领受。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā sattakkhattuparamavasena saṅgharatanassa guṇaṃ vatvā idāni tameva guṇaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi saṅghe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
233 233. 这样,以“最多七次往返”者不执取第八有的功德,说了以僧为依处的真实语之后,现在开始说“sahāvassa”等语,以说明:他虽然也还会执取七有,但与那些仍未断除有之执取的其他补特伽罗相比,具有一种殊胜功德。其中,“sahāva”就是“一起”的意思。“assa”指的是前面所说“他们不执取第八有”那些人当中的某一位。“dassanasampadāya”是指由入流道而成就的“见成就”。因为入流道在见到涅槃之后,以应做之事已经成就,并且是最先见到涅槃,所以称为“见”。这种见在自己身上生起,就是“见成就”。与这见成就一起,也就是当他具足见成就时,三种法就被舍弃。其中,“tayassu dhammā jahitā bhavanti”里的“su”只是用来补足音节的虚词,就像“idaṃsu me, sāriputta, mahāvikaṭabhojanasmiṃ hoti”等句子中那样。因此,这里的整体意思就是:由于他具有见成就,三种法便被舍弃、被断除。巴利
233. Evaṃ sattakkhattuparamassa aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ anādiyanaguṇena saṅghādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vatvā idāni tasseva satta bhave ādiyatopi aññehi appahīnabhavādānehi puggalehi visiṭṭhena guṇena vattumāraddho ‘‘sahāvassā’’ti. Tattha sahāvāti saddhiṃyeva. Assāti ‘‘na te bhavaṃ aṭṭhamamādiyantī’’ti vuttesu aññatarassa. Dassanasampadāyāti sotāpattimaggasampattiyā. Sotāpattimaggo hi nibbānaṃ disvā kattabbakiccasampadāya sabbapaṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato ‘‘dassana’’nti vuccati. Tassa attani pātubhāvo dassanasampadā, tāya dassanasampadāya saha eva. Tayassu dhammā jahitā bhavantīti ettha suiti padapūraṇamatte nipāto. ‘‘Idaṃsu me, sāriputta, mahāvikaṭabhojanasmiṃ hotī’’tievamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.156) viya. Yato sahāvassa dassanasampadāya tayo dhammā jahitā bhavanti pahīnā bhavantīti ayamevettha attho.
现在,为了说明已被舍断的法,经文说:“有身见、疑,以及任何戒禁取。”其中,当身体存在时,对于由五取蕴所构成的身体,以二十种事为基础生起的见,就是有身见;或者,对于这个身体生起的见,就是有身见。意思是:对于如上所说的那种身体,现存的见。或者,对于仅仅身体生起的见,就是有身见。意思是:对于如上所说的那种身体,现起“色等所成之我”这样的见。由于有身见已被断除,一切恶见也就都被断除了,因为它是一切恶见的根本。由于能平息一切烦恼病,慧被称为“治疗”;彼慧治从此远离,或者此从彼慧治远离,所以叫“疑”。这是对八种事的疑惑的异名,如“对师犹豫”等所说的那样。由于疑已被断除,一切疑惑也就都被断除了,因为它是疑惑的根本。认为“除此之外,沙门、婆罗门靠戒得清净,靠禁戒得清净”等,其中所说的牛戒、狗戒等戒,以及牛禁戒、狗禁戒等禁戒,就叫“戒禁取”。由于它已被断除,一切裸形、剃头等无益苦行也就都被断除了,因为它是这些的根本。因此最后总结说:“以及任何戒禁取。”这里应当知道:通过对苦的彻见,有身见被断除;通过对集起的彻见,疑被断除;通过对道和涅槃的彻见,戒禁取被断除。巴利
Idāni jahitadhammadassanatthaṃ āha ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhī vicikicchitañca, sīlabbataṃ vāpi yadatthi kiñcī’’ti. Tattha sati kāye vijjamāne upādānakkhandhapañcakasaṅkhāte kāye vīsativatthukā diṭṭhi sakkāyadiṭṭhi, satī vā tattha kāye diṭṭhītipi sakkāyadiṭṭhi, yathāvuttappakāre kāye vijjamānā diṭṭhīti attho. Satiyeva vā kāye diṭṭhītipi sakkāyadiṭṭhi, yathāvuttappakāre kāye vijjamāne rūpādisaṅkhāto attāti evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhīti attho. Tassā ca pahīnattā sabbadiṭṭhigatāni pahīnāniyeva honti. Sā hi nesaṃ mūlaṃ. Sabbakilesabyādhivūpasamanato paññā ‘‘cikicchita’’nti vuccati, taṃ paññācikicchitaṃ ito vigataṃ, tato vā paññācikicchitā idaṃ vigatanti vicikicchitaṃ, ‘‘satthari kaṅkhatī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1008; vibha. 915) nayena vuttāya aṭṭhavatthukāya vimatiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tassā pahīnattā sabbavicikicchitāni pahīnāni honti. Tañhi nesaṃ mūlaṃ. ‘‘Ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sīlena suddhi vatena suddhī’’tievamādīsu (dha. sa. 1222; vibha. 938) āgataṃ gosīlakukkurasīlādikaṃ sīlaṃ govatakukkuravatādikañca vataṃ ‘‘sīlabbata’’nti vuccati. Tassa pahīnattā sabbampi naggiyamuṇḍikādi amaratapaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti. Tañhi tassa mūlaṃ. Tena sabbāvasāne vuttaṃ ‘‘yadatthi kiñcī’’ti. Dukkhadassanasampadāya cettha sakkāyadiṭṭhi, samudayadassanasampadāya vicikicchitaṃ, maggadassananibbānadassanasampadāya sīlabbataṃ pahīyatīti viññātabbaṃ.
234 234. 这样显示了他烦恼轮的断除之后,现在要说明:当那烦恼轮还存在时,必然会有的果报轮,由于烦恼轮的断除,果报轮也随之断除,于是说“也从四恶趣解脱”。其中,所谓“四恶趣”,就是地狱、畜生、鬼界、阿修罗众。即使他还在执取七有,也已经从这些恶趣中解脱了,这就是这句话的意思。巴利
234. Evamassa kilesavaṭṭappahānaṃ dassetvā idāni tasmiṃ kilesavaṭṭe sati yena vipākavaṭṭena bhavitabbaṃ, tappahānā tassāpi pahānaṃ dīpento āha ‘‘catūhapāyehi ca vippamutto’’ti. Tattha cattāro apāyā nāma nirayatiracchānapettivisayaasurakāyā, tehi esa satta bhave upādiyantopi vippamuttoti attho.
这样显示了果报轮的断除之后,现在为了说明作为果报轮根本的业轮也要断除,就说“六种重事他不能做”。其中,“重事”指粗重的事,这六种事他不能做。这些应当依照《增支部·一集》等处所说的“比丘们,这是无此理的,没有这种可能,见具足的人会杀母……”等方式来理解,即杀母、杀父、杀阿罗汉、出佛身血、破僧、趣向其他导师(为皈依)这些业。见具足的圣弟子连蝼蚁都不杀,然而这里是为了呵责凡夫的状态才说的。因为凡夫由于不见具足,才会造作这样极大罪过的重事,而见具足的人则不可能做这些。这里说“不可能”,也是为了显示他在来生也不会造作。因为在来生,即使他不知道自己是圣弟子,由于法性自然,也不会造作这六种事,或者本性杀生等五种怨仇,连同趣向其他导师共六种事。有人根据这个读作“六种重事”。这里以圣弟子村中的孩子们为例子,提到捕取死鱼等。巴利
Evamassa vipākavaṭṭappahānaṃ dassetvā idāni yaṃ imassa vipākavaṭṭassa mūlabhūtaṃ kammavaṭṭaṃ, tassāpi pahānaṃ dassento āha ‘‘chaccābhiṭhānāni abhabba kātu’’nti. Tattha abhiṭhānānīti oḷārikaṭṭhānāni, tāni esa cha abhabbo kātuṃ. Tāni ca ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyyā’’tiādinā (a. ni. 1.271; ma. ni. 3.128; vibha. 809) nayena ekakanipāte vuttāni mātughātapitughātaarahantaghātalohituppādasaṅghabhedaaññasatthāruddesakammāni veditabbāni. Tāni hi kiñcāpi diṭṭhisampanno ariyasāvako kunthakipillikampi jīvitā na voropeti, apica kho pana puthujjanabhāvassa vigarahaṇatthaṃ vuttāni. Puthujjano hi adiṭṭhisampannattā evaṃmahāsāvajjāni abhiṭhānānipi karoti, dassanasampanno pana abhabbo tāni kātunti. Abhabbaggahaṇañcettha bhavantarepi akaraṇadassanatthaṃ. Bhavantarepi hi esa attano ariyasāvakabhāvaṃ ajānantopi dhammatāya eva etāni vā cha, pakatipāṇātipātādīni vā pañca verāni aññasatthāruddesena saha cha ṭhānāni na karoti, yāni sandhāya ekacce ‘‘chachābhiṭhānānī’’ti paṭhanti. Matamacchaggāhādayo cettha ariyasāvakagāmadārakānaṃ nidassanaṃ.
世尊这样讲了僧宝的功德:即使还在执取七有,圣弟子也比其他那些没有断除有执取的人更殊胜。说完之后,现在他就依靠这个功德来念诵真实语:“这一份也在僧中。”这段话的意思,应当按照前面所说的方式去理解。而且这一首偈颂的威力,是在百千俱胝轮围世界之中,被非人所领受的。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā satta bhave ādiyatopi ariyasāvakassa aññehi appahīnabhavādānehi puggalehi visiṭṭhaguṇavasena saṅgharatanassa guṇaṃ vatvā idāni tameva guṇaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi saṅghe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
235 235. 世尊这样以“即使还执取七种有,也比其他未断除有执取的人更殊胜”的功德,说明了以僧为皈依处的真实语之后,现在要说明:“具见者不只是不能造作六种重罪,哪怕只造了一点点恶业,也不可能把它覆藏起来。”于是开始说“即使他造作恶业”这句话,以此显示:即使是住于放逸的具见者,也具有造了恶业却不覆藏的功德。巴利
235. Evaṃ satta bhave ādiyatopi aññehi appahīnabhavādānehi puggalehi visiṭṭhaguṇavasena saṅghādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vatvā idāni ‘‘na kevalaṃ dassanasampanno cha abhiṭhānāni abhabbo kātuṃ, kiṃ pana appamattakampi pāpaṃ kammaṃ katvā tassa paṭicchādanāyapi abhabbo’’ti pamādavihārinopi dassanasampannassa katapaṭicchādanābhāvaguṇena vattumāraddho ‘‘kiñcāpi so kammaṃ karoti pāpaka’’nti.
这句话的意思是:那位具足见的人,即使因为忘失正念而住于放逸,除了世尊针对“故意不违越世间所谴责之事”所说的那句话——“我为弟子们制定的学处,弟子们即使为了活命也不违越”——之外,若以身造作其他恶业,比如建小屋、与女人同宿等,属于违越制罪、被佛陀呵责的身恶业;或者以语造作逐句说法、超出五六语、说法、杂秽语、粗恶语等;或者以意在某些情况下生起贪嗔,接受金银等,或在受用衣等物品时不作省察等,造作恶业。他不可能把这种恶业覆藏起来。他明知“这是不适当的、不应做的”之后,连片刻也不会覆藏。就在当时,他便向大师、或智者、或同梵行者发露,依法忏悔,并守护自己“今后不再做”,或者守护自己应当守护的。为什么?因为已见谛者不可能这样做。意思是说:已见涅槃之道的具见者,造作这样的恶业之后,不可能把它覆藏起来。巴利
Tassattho – so dassanasampanno kiñcāpi satisammosena pamādavihāraṃ āgamma yaṃ taṃ bhagavatā lokavajjasañciccānatikkamanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (cūḷava. 385; a. ni. 8.19; udā. 45), taṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ kuṭikārasahaseyyādiṃ vā paṇṇattivajjavītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ buddhapaṭikuṭṭhaṃ kāyena pāpakammaṃ karoti, padasodhammauttarichappañcavācādhammadesanāsamphappalāpapharusavacanādiṃ vā vācāya, uda cetasā vā katthaci lobhadosuppādanajātarūpādisādiyanaṃ cīvarādiparibhogesu apaccavekkhaṇādiṃ vā pāpakammaṃ karoti. Abhabbo so tassa paṭicchadāya, na so taṃ ‘‘idaṃ akappiyamakaraṇīya’’nti jānitvā muhuttampi paṭicchādeti, taṅkhaṇaññeva pana satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu āvi katvā yathādhammaṃ paṭikaroti, ‘‘na puna karissāmī’’ti evaṃ saṃvaritabbaṃ vā saṃvarati. Kasmā? Yasmā abhabbatā diṭṭhapadassa vuttā, evarūpaṃ pāpakammaṃ katvā tassa paṭicchādāya diṭṭhanibbānapadassa dassanasampannassa puggalassa abhabbatā vuttāti attho.
比丘们,就像一个小婴儿,还什么都不懂,只会仰面躺着,用手或脚碰到火炭,就会立刻缩回来;同样地,比丘们,对具足正见的人来说,这种(犯错的)热恼也是如此——即使他犯了那样的过失,而那种过失是可以出罪的,他还是会立刻在大师面前,或在有智慧的同梵行者面前,发露、公开、坦白;发露、公开、坦白之后,今后就会防护自己。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, daharo kumāro mando uttānaseyyako hatthena vā pādena vā aṅgāraṃ akkamitvā khippameva paṭisaṃharati , evameva kho, bhikkhave, ghammatā esā diṭṭhisampannassa puggalassa, kiñcāpi tathārūpiṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati, yathārūpāya āpattiyā vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati, atha kho naṃ khippameva satthari vā viññūsu vā sabrahmacārīsu deseti vivarati uttānīkaroti, desetvā vivaritvā uttānīkatvā āyatiṃ saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.496).
世尊这样说了具见者即使放逸也不覆藏所造之罪的功德——这是僧宝的功德——之后,现在又依着这个功德,说出真实语:“这也在僧伽中。”它的含义应当按前面所说的方式来理解。这一偈的威神力,在一万亿个世界中被非人领受了。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā pamādavihārinopi dassanasampannassa katapaṭicchādanābhāvaguṇena saṅgharatanassa guṇaṃ vatvā idāni tameva guṇaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi saṅghe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
236 世尊这样说明了属于僧团的众人以种种功德类型作为僧团依止的真实语之后,现在为了显示三宝的功德,又依着世尊在此处略说、在别处广说的教法,开始再次宣说以佛陀为依止的真实语:“犹如在林丛中,花开满枝头。”其中,“林”是指那些生长在邻近区域、位置固定的树木聚集在一起。“丛”是指由根、心材、软木、树皮、枝条、树叶而繁茂增大的聚集。“林丛”就是林中的丛,所以说“在林丛中”。这样表达也是可以的,就像说“有寻有伺、无寻唯伺、乐、苦、命”等语一样。“犹如”是譬喻语。“花开满枝头”是指枝头盛开着花朵,也就是所有的枝条乃至细枝都开出了花。它依照前面所说的方式被称为“花开满枝头”。“热季的月份中,初热”是指四个热季月份中的一个月。是哪一个月份呢?是初热,也就是制怛罗月。那个月被称为“初热”和“早春”。此后,从词义上就已经清楚了。巴利
236. Evaṃ saṅghapariyāpannānaṃ puggalānaṃ tena tena guṇappakārena saṅghādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vatvā idāni yvāyaṃ bhagavatā ratanattayaguṇaṃ dīpentena idha saṅkhepena aññatra ca vitthārena pariyattidhammo desito, tampi nissāya puna buddhādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vattumāraddho ‘‘vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge’’ti. Tattha āsannasannivesavavatthitānaṃ rukkhānaṃ samūho vanaṃ, mūlasārapheggutacasākhāpalāsehi pavuḍḍho gumbo pagumbo, vane pagumbo vanappagumbo, svāyaṃ ‘‘vanappagumbe’’ti vutto . Evampi hi vattuṃ labbhati ‘‘atthi savitakkasavicāre, atthi avitakkavicāramatte, sukhe dukkhe jīve’’tiādīsu viya. Yathāti opammavacanaṃ. Phussitāni aggāni assāti phussitaggo, sabbasākhāpasākhāsu sañjātapupphoti attho. So pubbe vuttanayeneva ‘‘phussitagge’’ti vutto. Gimhāna māse paṭhamasmiṃ gimheti ye cattāro gimhamāsā, tesaṃ catunnaṃ gimhānaṃ ekasmiṃ māse. Katamasmiṃ māse iti ce? Paṭhamasmiṃ gimhe, citramāseti attho. So hi ‘‘paṭhamagimho’’ti ca ‘‘bālavasanto’’ti ca vuccati. Tato paraṃ padatthato pākaṭameva.
这里再给出它的总括含义:就像在名叫“初热季”的早春时节,各种树木密布的森林里,有一丛花开满枝头的幼树灌木,极其美丽;同样,这教法以蕴、处等,或以念处、正勤等,或以戒蕴、定蕴等种种不同的方式,用开显义理的花朵,显得极其庄严,因为它开示了通往涅槃的道路,所以是引导到达涅槃的最胜教法。世尊宣说它,不是为了利养,也不是为了恭敬等,纯粹是被大悲所激励的心,为了众生的最高利益而宣说。在“最高利益”这个词里,为了偈颂音韵的顺畅而有鼻音,这里的意思是“为了最高利益,为了涅槃而宣说”。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha piṇḍattho – yathā paṭhamagimhanāmake bālavasante nānāvidharukkhagahane vane supupphitaggasākho taruṇarukkhagacchapariyāyanāmo pagumbo ativiya sassiriko hoti, evamevaṃ khandhāyatanādīhi satipaṭṭhānasammappadhānādīhi sīlasamādhikkhandhādīhi vā nānappakārehi atthappabhedapupphehi ativiya sassirikattā tathūpamaṃ nibbānagāmimaggadīpanato nibbānagāmiṃ pariyattidhammavaraṃ neva lābhahetu na sakkārādihetu, kevalañhi mahākaruṇāya abbhussāhitahadayo sattānaṃ paramaṃhitāya adesayīti. Paramaṃhitāyāti ettha ca gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ anunāsiko, ayaṃ panattho ‘‘paramahitāya nibbānāya adesayī’’ti.
世尊这样说了这部像开满花的林丛一样的教法之后,现在又依靠它,运用以佛陀为依止的真实语:“这也在佛陀中。”它的含义应该按照前面说过的方式理解,只是这里还要这样连接:如前所说的那种教法,就是佛陀这个宝中最殊胜的。这部偈颂的威力,也在一万亿个世界中由非人领受了。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā imaṃ supupphitaggavanappagumbasadisaṃ pariyattidhammaṃ vatvā idāni tameva nissāya buddhādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi buddhe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo, kevalaṃ pana idampi yathāvuttappakārapariyattidhammasaṅkhātaṃ buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītanti yojetabbaṃ. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
237 237. 世尊这样用教法,说了以佛陀为依止的真实语之后,现在开始用出世间法来说“胜者、知胜、赐胜、持胜”。其中,“胜者”:那些倾慕殊胜境界的人这样希求:“啊,但愿我们也能成为这样的人!”因此他是他们所希求的;或者因为具足殊胜功德而称为胜者,意思是最上、最殊胜。“知胜”:就是了知涅槃。涅槃在一切法中是最殊胜的,所以叫“胜”;而世尊在菩提树下亲自证悟、了知了它。“赐胜”:他向五群比丘、贤群比丘、结发苦行者等人,以及其他的天和人,赐予了能导向通达、能成为习气分的殊胜之法。“持胜”:因为带来了殊殊之道,所以称为持胜。世尊从燃灯佛那时起,圆满三十种波罗蜜,带来了过去诸正自觉者所遵循的古胜道,因此称为持胜。另外,因为获得一切知智而为胜;因为证得涅槃而为知胜;因为赐予众生解脱之乐而为赐胜;因为带来最上的修行之道而为持胜。由于在这些出世间功德上没有任何人比他更高,所以称为无上。巴利
237. Evaṃ bhagavā pariyattidhammena buddhādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vatvā idāni lokuttaradhammena vattumāraddho ‘‘varo varaññū’’ti. Tattha varoti paṇītādhimuttikehi icchito ‘‘aho vata mayampi evarūpā assāmā’’ti, varaguṇayogato vā varo, uttamo seṭṭhoti attho. Varaññūti nibbānaññū. Nibbānañhi sabbadhammānaṃ uttamaṭṭhena varaṃ, tañcesa bodhimūle sayaṃ paṭivijjhitvā aññāsi. Varadoti pañcavaggiyabhaddavaggiyajaṭilādīnaṃ aññesañca devamanussānaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyavāsanābhāgiyavaradhammadāyīti attho. Varāharoti varassa maggassa āhaṭattā varāharoti vuccati. So hi bhagavā dīpaṅkarato pabhuti samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūrento pubbakehi sammāsambuddhehi anuyātaṃ purāṇaṃ maggavaraṃ āhari, tena varāharoti vuccati. Apica sabbaññutaññāṇapaṭilābhena varo, nibbānasacchikiriyāya varaññū, sattānaṃ vimuttisukhadānena varado, uttamapaṭipadāharaṇena varāharo, etehi lokuttaraguṇehi adhikassa kassaci abhāvato anuttaro.
另一种解释方式:殊胜者是因为圆满寂止的决意,知殊胜者是因为圆满智慧的决意,赐殊胜者是因为圆满施舍的决意,持殊胜者是因为圆满真理的决意——他带来了殊胜的道谛。同样,殊胜者是因为福德的积聚,知殊胜者是因为智慧的积聚,赐殊胜者是因为把能成就佛果的方法施予那些希求佛果的人,持殊胜者是因为把能成就独觉佛果的方法带给那些希求独觉佛果的人。无上者则是因为在各方面都无可比拟,或者是因为他自己无需老师而能成为他人的老师。他为那些希求声闻果位的人宣说了殊胜的法,这法具备善说等功德。其余部分按照前面所说的方法来理解。巴利
Aparo nayo – varo upasamādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇena, varaññū paññādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇena, varado cāgādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇena, varāharo saccādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇena, varaṃ maggasaccamāharīti. Tathā varo puññussayena, varaññū paññussayena, varado buddhabhāvatthikānaṃ tadupāyasampadānena, varāharo paccekabuddhabhāvatthikānaṃ tadupāyāharaṇena, anuttaro tattha tattha asadisatāya, attanā vā anācariyako hutvā paresaṃ ācariyabhāvena, dhammavaraṃ adesayi sāvakabhāvatthikānaṃ tadatthāya svākhātatādiguṇayuttassa varadhammassa desanato. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
世尊这样用九种出世间法讲了自己的功德之后,现在又依靠这同样的功德,说出以佛陀为依止的真实语:“此亦在佛陀中。”它的含义应当按前面说过的方式来理解。只是要这样连贯起来:这位世尊所了知、所施与、所带来、所宣说的殊胜九种出世间法,就是“在佛陀中”的至上之宝。这首偈颂的威力,也在百千俱胝轮围世界里被非人等所领受。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā navavidhena lokuttaradhammena attano guṇaṃ vatvā idāni tameva guṇaṃ nissāya buddhādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccavacanaṃ payuñjati ‘‘idampi buddhe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Kevalaṃ pana yaṃ varaṃ navalokuttaradhammaṃ esa aññāsi, yañca adāsi, yañca āhari, yañca adesayi, idampi buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītanti evaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
238 238. 世尊这样依着教法之法和出世间法,用两首偈颂宣说了以佛陀为依止的真实语之后,现在为了说明那些听闻了这教法、又随所闻而修行、从而证得九种出世间法的人,他们因为证得无余涅槃的功德,世尊再次开始宣说以僧伽为依止的真实语:“旧的已尽,新的没有……”其中,“已尽”是指已彻底断除。“旧的”是指过去的。“新的”是指现在正在进行的。“没有生起”是指不再出现。“心已离染”是指心已远离贪欲。“在未来有中”是指未来世的再生。“te”是指那些旧的已尽、新的没有生起、在未来有中心已离染的人,他们是漏已尽的比丘。“种子已尽”是指种子已断。“无增长欲”是指远离增长欲。“般涅槃”是指熄灭。“智者”是指具足坚毅者。“犹如这盏灯”是指犹如这盏灯。巴利
238. Evaṃ bhagavā pariyattidhammaṃ lokuttaradhammañca nissāya dvīhi gāthāhi buddhādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vatvā idāni ye taṃ pariyattidhammaṃ assosuṃ sutānusārena ca paṭipajjitvā navappakārampi lokuttaradhammaṃ adhigamiṃsu, tesaṃ anupādisesanibbānappattiguṇaṃ nissāya puna saṅghādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccaṃ vattumāraddho ‘‘khīṇaṃ purāṇa’’nti. Tattha khīṇanti samucchinnaṃ. Purāṇanti purātanaṃ. Navanti sampati vattamānaṃ. Natthisambhavanti avijjamānapātubhāvaṃ. Virattacittāti vigatarāgacittā. Āyatike bhavasminti anāgatamaddhānaṃ punabbhave. Teti yesaṃ khīṇaṃ purāṇaṃ navaṃ natthisambhavaṃ, ye ca āyatike bhavasmiṃ virattacittā, te khīṇāsavā bhikkhū. Khīṇabījāti ucchinnabījā. Avirūḷhichandāti virūḷhichandavirahitā. Nibbantīti vijjhāyanti. Dhīrāti dhitisampannā. Yathāyaṃ padīpoti ayaṃ padīpo viya.
这段话是在说什么呢?众生所造的旧业,虽然生起后已经灭去,属于过去时,但因为他们的渴爱之水还没有被断除,所以这些旧业仍然有能力引生下一世的结生识,因此并没有真正耗尽。而对于那些通过阿罗汉道彻底干掉了渴爱之水的人来说,他们的旧业就像被火烧过的种子,在未来已经失去了产生果报的能力,所以说是“已尽”。再者,他们现在以供养佛陀等行为正在造作的新业,被称为“新业”,但因为这些人已经断除了渴爱,这些新业就像被连根拔起的树开出的花一样,在未来无法再结出果实,所以说他们“新业不再生起”。还有,那些因为断除了渴爱而对未来的生命完全没有了贪恋之心的人,就是诸漏尽者比丘。在“业是田,识是种子”这句经文里所说的结生识,也因为业的灭尽而灭尽,所以称他们为“种子已尽”。此外,他们过去对被称为“后有”的生长所生起的欲望,也由于苦的根源被彻底断除而断除了,命终时不会再像以前那样产生结生,所以说是“没有生长的欲望”。由于他们具足坚定的智慧,所以称为“贤者”。随着最后识的灭尽,他们就像这盏灯熄灭一样寂灭了,从此不再落入“有色、无色”等任何施设范畴。据说,当时为了供养城里的天神而点燃了许多灯,其中有一盏灯熄灭了,为了说明这个道理,他说:“就像这盏灯。”巴利
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yaṃ taṃ sattānaṃ uppajjitvā niruddhampi purāṇaṃ atītakālikaṃ kammaṃ taṇhāsinehassa appahīnattā paṭisandhiāharaṇasamatthatāya akhīṇaṃyeva hoti, taṃ purāṇaṃ kammaṃ yesaṃ arahattamaggena taṇhāsinehassa sositattā agginā daḍḍhabījamiva āyatiṃ vipākadānāsamatthatāya khīṇaṃ. Yañca nesaṃ buddhapūjādivasena idāni pavattamānaṃ kammaṃ navanti vuccati, tañca taṇhāpahāneneva chinnamūlapādapapupphamiva āyatiṃ phaladānāsamatthatāya yesaṃ natthisambhavaṃ, ye ca taṇhāpahāneneva āyatike bhavasmiṃ virattacittā, te khīṇāsavā bhikkhū ‘‘kammaṃ khettaṃ viññāṇaṃ bīja’’nti (a. ni. 3.77) ettha vuttassa paṭisandhiviññāṇassa kammakkhayeneva khīṇattā khīṇabījā. Yopi pubbe punabbhavasaṅkhātāya virūḷhiyā chando ahosi, tassāpi samudayappahāneneva pahīnattā pubbe viya cutikāle asambhavena avirūḷhichandā dhitisampannattā dhīrā carimaviññāṇanirodhena yathāyaṃ padīpo nibbuto, evaṃ nibbanti, puna ‘‘rūpino vā arūpino vā’’ti evamādiṃ paññattipathaṃ accentīti. Tasmiṃ kira samaye nagaradevatānaṃ pūjanatthāya jālitesu padīpesu eko padīpo vijjhāyi, taṃ dassento āha – ‘‘yathāyaṃ padīpo’’ti.
世尊这样说明了:那些听过前两首偈颂所讲的教法、并依照所听到的教法去修行而证得九种出世间法的人,世尊讲完他们所证得的无余涅槃功德之后,现在又依着这个功德,运用以僧伽为所依的真实语,以“这也是在僧伽中”这句话来结束开示。它的含义应当按前面所说的方式来理解。只是这里还要这样连贯起来理解:依照前面所说的方式,这同样是诸漏尽比丘计为涅槃的僧伽中的至上之宝。这首偈颂的威力,也在百千俱胝轮围世界中被非人等所领受。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā ye taṃ purimāhi dvīhi gāthāhi vuttaṃ pariyattidhammaṃ assosuṃ, sutānusāreneva paṭipajjitvā navappakārampi lokuttaradhammaṃ adhigamiṃsu, tesaṃ anupādisesanibbānappattiguṇaṃ vatvā idāni tameva guṇaṃ nissāya saṅghādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccavacanaṃ payuñjanto desanaṃ samāpesi ‘‘idampi saṅghe’’ti. Tassattho pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbo, kevalaṃ pana idampi yathāvuttena pakārena khīṇāsavabhikkhūnaṃ nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ saṅghe ratanaṃ paṇītanti evaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Imissāpi gāthāya āṇā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesu amanussehi paṭiggahitāti.
说法结束时,王族得到了平安,一切灾难都平息了,八万四千众生证得了法的现观。巴利
Desanāpariyosāne rājakulassa sotthi ahosi, sabbūpaddavā vūpasamiṃsu caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi.
239-241 这时,帝释天心想:“世尊依靠三宝的功德,说出真实语,使城里的人得到了平安。我也应该依靠三宝的功德,为城里的人说些什么来求得平安。”于是,他在最后说了三首偈颂:“凡在此处存在的众生……”其中,因为佛陀像那些为世间利益而努力的人应当前来那样而来,应当离去那样而去,应当了知那样而了知,应当知道那样而知道,并且如实宣说真实不虚之法,所以称为“如来”。又因为他受到天与人用花香等外物,以及依法随法修行等自身内修所极度恭敬供养,因此帝释天把一切天众和自己聚在一起,说道:“我们礼敬为天人所崇敬的如来、佛陀,愿得平安。”巴利
239-241. Atha sakko devānamindo ‘‘bhagavatā ratanattayaguṇaṃ nissāya saccavacanaṃ payuñjamānena nāgarassa sotthi katā, mayāpi nāgarassa sotthitthaṃ ratanattayaguṇaṃ nissāya kiñci vattabba’’nti cintetvā avasāne gāthāttayaṃ abhāsi ‘‘yānīdha bhūtānī’’ti. Tattha yasmā buddho yathā lokahitatthāya ussukkaṃ āpannehi āgantabbaṃ, tathā āgatato, yathā ca etehi gantabbaṃ, tathā gatato, yathā vā etehi ājānitabbaṃ, tathā ājānanato, yathā ca jānitabbaṃ, tathā jānanato, yañca tatheva hoti, tassa gadanato ca ‘‘tathāgato’’ti vuccati. Yasmā ca so devamanussehi pupphagandhādinā bahinibbattena upakaraṇena, dhammānudhammappaṭipattādinā ca attani nibbattena ativiya pūjito, tasmā sakko devānamindo sabbadevaparisaṃ attanā saddhiṃ sampiṇḍetvā āha ‘‘tathāgataṃ devamanussapūjitaṃ, buddhaṃ namassāma suvatthi hotū’’ti.
再从法这边说:道法就像双运一样,应当以止观的力量,断除烦恼那一方而前进,所以称为如来。涅槃法也是这样:以智慧彻证之后,能灭除一切苦,并且被佛陀等如实了知,因此也称为如来。僧伽也是这样:为了自利而修行的人,应当沿着种种道前进,所以也称为如来。因此在剩下两首偈颂里也说:我们礼敬如来之法,愿得安稳;我们礼敬如来之僧,愿得安稳。其余内容都按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Yasmā pana dhamme maggadhammo yathā yuganandha samathavipassanābalena gantabbaṃ kilesapakkhaṃ samucchindantena, tathā gatoti tathāgato. Nibbānadhammopi yathā gato paññāya paṭividdho sabbadukkhavighātāya sampajjati, buddhādīhi tathā avagato, tasmā ‘‘tathāgato’’ti vuccati. Yasmā ca saṅghopi yathā attahitāya paṭipannehi gantabbaṃ tena tena maggena, tathā gato, tasmā ‘‘tathāgato’’ tveva vuccati. Tasmā avasesagāthādvayepi tathāgataṃ dhammaṃ namassāma suvatthi hotu, tathāgataṃ saṅghaṃ namassāma suvatthi hotūti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
帝释天王说完这三首偈颂后,向右绕礼世尊,便与天众一同回到天城。世尊在第二天又宣说了同一部《宝经》,又有八万四千众生领悟了法。就这样,世尊一直说到第七天,每天都同样有那么多众生领悟法。世尊在毗舍离只住了半个月,就通知诸位国王说:“我该走了。”于是国王们以加倍的供养,又用三天时间把世尊送到恒河岸边。恒河里出生的龙王们心想:“人们都供养如来,我们怎么能不供养呢?”于是变化出金、银、宝珠做成的船,铺设金、银、宝珠做成的坐具,让水面铺满五色莲花,然后来到世尊面前说:“请世尊接受我们的供养。”世尊默然答应了,便登上宝船,五百位比丘也各自上了自己的船。龙王们把世尊和比丘僧团迎入龙宫。在那里,世尊整夜为龙众说法。第二天,龙王们用天界的硬食和软食做了盛大的布施。世尊随喜之后,就离开了龙宫。巴利
Evaṃ sakko devānamindo imaṃ gāthāttayaṃ bhāsitvā bhagavantaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā devapurameva gato saddhiṃ devaparisāya. Bhagavā pana tadeva ratanasuttaṃ dutiyadivasepi desesi, puna caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Evaṃ bhagavā yāva sattamaṃ divasaṃ desesi, divase divase tatheva dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Bhagavā aḍḍhamāsameva vesāliyaṃ viharitvā rājūnaṃ ‘‘gacchāmā’’ti paṭivedesi. Tato rājāno diguṇena sakkārena puna tīhi divasehi bhagavantaṃ gaṅgātīraṃ nayiṃsu. Gaṅgāyaṃ nibbattā nāgarājāno cintesuṃ – ‘‘manussā tathāgatassa sakkāraṃ karonti, mayaṃ kiṃ na karissāmā’’ti suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimayā nāvāyo māpetvā suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimaye eva pallaṅke paññāpetvā pañcavaṇṇapadumasañchannaṃ udakaṃ karitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ anuggahaṃ karothā’’ti bhagavantaṃ upagatā. Bhagavā adhivāsetvā ratananāvamārūḷho pañca ca bhikkhusatāni sakaṃ sakaṃ nāvaṃ. Nāgarājāno bhagavantaṃ saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena nāgabhavanaṃ pavesesuṃ. Tatra sudaṃ bhagavā sabbarattiṃ nāgaparisāya dhammaṃ desesi. Dutiyadivase dibbehi khādanīyabhojanīyehi mahādānaṃ adaṃsu. Bhagavā anumoditvā nāgabhavanā nikkhami.
住在地面上的天人们心想:“人类和龙族都在向如来献上恭敬,我们为什么不做呢?”于是他们在树林、灌木丛、山岳等处,一层又一层地举起伞盖。就这样,一直到阿迦尼咤梵天界,都出现了极其盛大的恭敬。频婆娑罗王也在离车族人前来时所作供养的基础上,加倍供养,像前面说的那样,用五天时间把世尊迎请到王舍城。巴利
Bhūmaṭṭhā devā ‘‘manussā ca nāgā ca tathāgatassa sakkāraṃ karonti, mayaṃ kiṃ na karissāmā’’ti cintetvā vanagumbarukkhapabbatādīsu chattātichattāni ukkhipiṃsu. Eteneva upāyena yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmabhavanaṃ, tāva mahāsakkāraviseso nibbatti. Bimbisāropi licchavīhi āgatakāle katasakkārato diguṇamakāsi, pubbe vuttanayeneva pañcahi divasehi bhagavantaṃ rājagahaṃ ānesi.
世尊到达王舍城后,吃过饭,比丘们聚集在圆亭里,生起了这样一段交谈:“真是稀有啊,佛陀世尊的威德!因为世尊的缘故,恒河此岸和彼岸八由旬的地面,低洼处和高处都被整平,撒上了细沙,铺满了鲜花;恒河一由旬宽的水面上,覆盖着各种颜色的莲花;直到阿迦尼吒天界,层层伞盖都竖了起来。”世尊知道这件事后,从香室出来,以与那时相应的神通前往,坐在圆亭中铺设好的殊胜佛座上。世尊坐好后,对比丘们说:“比丘们,你们现在聚在一起谈论什么?”比丘们把全部经过禀告了世尊。世尊这样说:“比丘们,这一份特别的供养,不是靠我的佛力产生的,也不是靠龙、天、梵天的力量产生的,而是靠过去微小的布施之力产生的。”比丘们说:“尊者,我们不知道那个微小的布施,请世尊为我们讲说,让我们能了解它。”巴利
Rājagahamanuppatte bhagavati pacchābhattaṃ maṇḍalamāḷe sannipatitānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ayamantarakathā udapādi – ‘‘aho buddhassa bhagavato ānubhāvo, yaṃ uddissa gaṅgāya orato ca pārato ca aṭṭhayojano bhūmibhāgo ninnañca thalañca samaṃ katvā vālukāya okiritvā pupphehi sañchanno, yojanappamāṇaṃ gaṅgāya udakaṃ nānāvaṇṇehi padumehi sañchannaṃ, yāva akaniṭṭhabhavanā chattātichattāni ussitānī’’ti. Bhagavā taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā gandhakuṭito nikkhamitvā taṅkhaṇānurūpena pāṭihāriyena gantvā maṇḍalamāḷe paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti? Bhikkhū sabbaṃ ārocesuṃ. Bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ayaṃ pūjāviseso mayhaṃ buddhānubhāvena nibbatto, na nāgadevabrahmānubhāvena, apica kho pubbe appamattakapariccāgānubhāvena nibbatto’’ti. Bhikkhū āhaṃsu – ‘‘na mayaṃ, bhante, taṃ appamattakaṃ pariccāgaṃ jānāma, sādhu no bhagavā tathā kathetu, yathā mayaṃ taṃ jāneyyāmā’’ti.
世尊说:比丘们,过去在塔克西拉,有一位名叫桑卡的婆罗门。他有个儿子叫苏尸摩,是个十六岁的少年。有一天,苏尸摩走到父亲跟前,行礼后站在一边。父亲对他说:孩子苏尸摩,有什么事吗?他说:父亲,我想去波罗奈城学技艺。父亲说:那好吧,孩子苏尸摩,我有个朋友,是某某婆罗门,你去他那里学吧。说完给了他一千个迦哈巴那。他拿了钱,向父母行礼后,一路到了波罗奈城,按照拜师的礼节去见老师,行礼后说明了自己的身份。老师心想:这是我朋友的儿子。便收下了这个少年,给了他一切应有的招待。他消除了旅途的疲劳后,把那一千个迦哈巴那放在老师脚边,请求允许他学习技艺。老师答应后,就开始教他。巴利
Bhagavā āha – bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, takkasilāyaṃ saṅkho nāma brāhmaṇo ahosi. Tassa putto susīmo nāma māṇavo soḷasavassuddesiko vayena, so ekadivasaṃ pitaraṃ upasaṅkamitvā abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ pitā āha – ‘‘kiṃ, tāta susīmā’’ti? So āha – ‘‘icchāmahaṃ, tāta, bārāṇasiṃ gantvā sippaṃ uggahetu’’nti. ‘‘Tena hi, tāta susīma, asuko nāma brāhmaṇo mama sahāyako, tassa santikaṃ gantvā uggaṇhāhī’’ti kahāpaṇasahassaṃ adāsi. So taṃ gahetvā mātāpitaro abhivādetvā anupubbena bārāṇasiṃ gantvā upacārayuttena vidhinā ācariyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā abhivādetvā attānaṃ nivedesi. Ācariyo ‘‘mama sahāyakassa putto’’ti māṇavaṃ sampaṭicchitvā sabbaṃ pāhuneyyamakāsi. So addhānakilamathaṃ paṭivinodetvā taṃ kahāpaṇasahassaṃ ācariyassa pādamūle ṭhapetvā sippaṃ uggahetuṃ okāsaṃ yāci. Ācariyo okāsaṃ katvā uggaṇhāpesi.
他学得又快又多,凡是学过的都记得牢牢的,就像倒进金盘里的狮子油一样,一点也不会变质。原本要十二年才能学完的技艺,他只用几个月就学完了。可是他诵习的时候,只看得见开头和中间,看不到结尾。于是他去见老师,说:“这门技艺,我只看得见开头和中间,看不到结尾。”老师说:“孩子,我也是这样。”他说:“老师,那谁知道这门技艺的结尾呢?”老师说:“孩子,在仙人堕处有一些修行者,他们可能知道。”他说:“我可以去问他们吗?”老师说:“去吧,孩子,随你高兴。”他就去了仙人堕处,拜见那些独觉佛,问道:“你们知道开头、中间和结尾吗?”他们回答:“是的,贤友,我们知道。”“那请你们也教教我吧。”“这样的话,贤友,你得先出家,在家人是学不了的。”“好的,尊者,请让我出家。你们要我做什么,我都照做,做完之后请告诉我结尾。”他们就让他出了家。但他们没办法指导他修习业处,只能教他威仪规矩,比如“下衣要这样穿,上衣要这样披”等等。他在那里修学,因为具备了亲依止的善根条件,没过多久就证悟了独觉菩提。在整个波罗奈城,他被称为“苏尸摩独觉佛”,得到了最多的利养和最高的名声,随从弟子也很圆满。但他因为过去造过短命的业,没过多久就般涅槃了。独觉佛们和大众一起为他办了遗体的事,收取舍利后,在城门处建了一座塔。巴利
So lahuñca gaṇhanto bahuñca gaṇhanto gahitagahitañca suvaṇṇabhājane pakkhittamiva sīhatelaṃ avinassamānaṃ dhārento dvādasavassikaṃ sippaṃ katipayamāseneva pariyosāpesi. So sajjhāyaṃ karonto ādimajjhaṃyeva passati, no pariyosānaṃ. Atha ācariyaṃ upasaṅkamitvā āha – ‘‘imassa sippassa ādimajjhameva passāmi, pariyosānaṃ na passāmī’’ti. Ācariyo āha – ‘‘ahampi, tāta, evamevā’’ti. ‘‘Atha ko, ācariya, imassa sippassa pariyosānaṃ jānātī’’ti? ‘‘Isipatane, tāta, isayo atthi, te jāneyyu’’nti. Te upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘pucchāmi, ācariyā’’ti. ‘‘Puccha, tāta, yathāsukha’’nti. So isipatanaṃ gantvā paccekabuddhe upasaṅkamitvā pucchi – ‘‘ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ jānāthā’’ti? ‘‘Āmāvuso, jānāmā’’ti. ‘‘Taṃ mampi sikkhāpethā’’ti. ‘‘Tena, hāvuso, pabbajāhi, na sakkā apabbajitena sikkhitu’’nti. ‘‘Sādhu, bhante, pabbājetha vā maṃ, yaṃ vā icchatha, taṃ katvā pariyosānaṃ jānāpethā’’ti. Te taṃ pabbājetvā kammaṭṭhāne niyojetuṃ asamatthā ‘‘evaṃ te nivāsetabbaṃ, evaṃ pārupitabba’’ntiādinā nayena ābhisamācārikaṃ sikkhāpesuṃ. So tattha sikkhanto upanissayasampannattā na cireneva paccekabodhiṃ abhisambujjhi. Sakalabārāṇasiyaṃ ‘‘susīmapaccekabuddho’’ti pākaṭo ahosi lābhaggayasaggappatto sampannaparivāro. So appāyukasaṃvattanikassa kammassa katattā na cireneva parinibbāyi. Tassa paccekabuddhā ca mahājanakāyo ca sarīrakiccaṃ katvā dhātuto gahetvā nagaradvāre thūpaṃ patiṭṭhāpesuṃ.
这时,桑伽婆罗门心想:“我儿子离家很久了,我一直不知道他的消息。”他因为想见儿子,就从塔迦尸喇出发,一路来到波罗奈。看到一大群人聚在一起,他想:“这么多人里,总会有一个知道我儿子的消息吧。”于是走上前去问道:“有个叫苏尸摩的年轻人来过这里吗?你们知道他的消息吗?”他们回答说:“是的,婆罗门,我们知道。他在这个城里,在一位婆罗门座下精通了三吠陀,然后在独觉佛们那里出家,成了独觉佛,最后在无余涅槃界般涅槃了。这就是为他建的塔。”他用手捶打地面,痛哭悲叹,然后来到那座塔的院子,拔掉杂草,用上衣运来沙子,撒在独觉佛塔的院子里,又用水瓶里的水把四周地面都洒了一遍,用林中的花作了供养,把上衣挂起来当旗幡,又把自己的伞盖系在塔顶上,然后离开了。巴利
Atha kho saṅkho brāhmaṇo ‘‘putto me ciragato, na cassa pavattiṃ jānāmī’’ti puttaṃ daṭṭhukāmo takkasilāya nikkhamitvā anupubbena bārāṇasiṃ patvā mahājanakāyaṃ sannipatitaṃ disvā ‘‘addhā bahūsu ekopi me puttassa pavattiṃ jānissatī’’ti cintento upasaṅkamitvā pucchi – ‘‘susīmo nāma māṇavo idha āgato atthi, api nu tassa pavattiṃ jānāthā’’ti? Te ‘‘āma, brāhmaṇa, jānāma, asmiṃ nagare brāhmaṇassa santike tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū hutvā paccekabuddhānaṃ santike pabbajitvā paccekabuddho hutvā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, ayamassa thūpo patiṭṭhāpito’’ti āhaṃsu. So bhūmiṃ hatthena paharitvā, roditvā ca paridevitvā ca taṃ cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā tiṇāni uddharitvā uttarasāṭakena vālukaṃ ānetvā, paccekabuddhacetiyaṅgaṇe ākiritvā, kamaṇḍaluto udakena samantato bhūmiṃ paripphositvā vanapupphehi pūjaṃ katvā uttarasāṭakena paṭākaṃ āropetvā thūpassa upari attano chattaṃ bandhitvā pakkāmīti.
世尊这样讲完过去的事,就把这个本生故事和现在连起来,对比丘们说法:“比丘们,你们也许会这样想:‘那时候那个桑伽婆罗门,大概是另外一个人吧。’但不应这样看。那时候那个桑伽婆罗门就是我。我曾为苏尸摩独觉佛的塔院拔掉杂草,因为那个业的果报,他们就把八由旬路上的树桩和荆棘清除掉,铺得平坦、干净;我曾在那里撒下沙子,因为那个果报,他们就在八由旬的路上撒了沙;我曾在那里用林中的花作供养,因为那个果报,他们就在九由旬的陆地上和水面上铺满了各种花;我曾在那里用水罐里的水洒地面,因为那个果报,毗舍离下起了莲花雨;我曾在那座塔上升起幢幡,又系上伞盖,因为那个果报,直到阿迦尼吒天界都升起了幢幡,竖起了层层伞盖。比丘们,所以,我这份特别的供养,并不是靠佛的威力成就的,也不是靠龙、天、梵天的威力成就的,而是靠极微小的布施之力成就的。”说法结束时,世尊说出这首偈颂:巴利
Evaṃ atītaṃ dassetvā taṃ jātakaṃ paccuppannena anusandhento bhikkhūnaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathesi – ‘‘siyā kho pana vo, bhikkhave, evamassa añño nūna tena samayena saṅkho brāhmaṇo ahosī’’ti, na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, ahaṃ tena samayena saṅkho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ, mayā susīmassa paccekabuddhassa cetiyaṅgaṇe tiṇāni uddhaṭāni, tassa me kammassa nissandena aṭṭhayojanamaggaṃ vigatakhāṇukaṇṭakaṃ katvā samaṃ suddhamakaṃsu, mayā tattha vālukā okiṇṇā, tassa me nissandena aṭṭhayojanamagge vālukaṃ okiriṃsu. Mayā tattha vanakusumehi pūjā katā, tassa me nissandena navayojanamagge thale ca udake ca nānāpupphehi pupphasantharaṃ akaṃsu. Mayā tattha kamaṇḍaludakena bhūmi paripphositā, tassa me nissandena vesāliyaṃ pokkharavassaṃ vassi. Mayā tasmiṃ cetiye paṭākā āropitā, chattañca baddhaṃ, tassa me nissandena yāva akaniṭṭhabhavanā paṭākā ca āropitā, chattātichattāni ca ussitāni. Iti kho, bhikkhave, ayaṃ mayhaṃ pūjāviseso neva buddhānubhāvena nibbatto, na nāgadevabrahmānubhāvena, apica kho appamattakapariccāgānubhāvena nibbatto’’ti. Dhammakathāpariyosāne imaṃ gāthamabhāsi –
如果舍弃小小的快乐,能见到广大的安乐,
智者应当舍弃微小的快乐,因为他看到了广大的快乐。巴利
‘‘Mattāsukhapariccāgā, passe ce vipulaṃ sukhaṃ; Caje mattāsukhaṃ dhīro, sampassaṃ vipulaṃ sukha’’nti. (dha. pa. 290);
2. 《腥臭经》的注释巴利
2. Āmagandhasuttavaṇṇanā
食盐、酸、辛等——这是《臭腥经》。它的缘起是什么?在世尊还没出现于世间的时候,有一位名叫臭腥的婆罗门,和五百位青年一起出家修苦行。他们进入雪山,在山间建了一座道场,靠森林里的树根和野果为食,住在那里,从不吃鱼肉。后来,那些苦行者因为不食用盐、酸、辛等食物,患上了黄疸病。于是他们想:“为了能食用盐、酸、辛等食物,我们到人间的地方去吧。”便来到了一座边地村落。那里的人们对他们生起了信心,迎请并供养了他们。吃完饭,人们又为他们提供床座、器具、足部涂油等,说:“尊者,请住在这里,不要厌烦。”给他们指了住处就离开了。第二天,人们又布施,并且按户轮流,每天供养。苦行者们在那个村子住了四个月,因为食用盐、酸、辛等食物,身体变得结实强壮,便对人们说:“贤友们,我们要走了。”人们送给他们油、米等物品。他们带着这些东西,回到了自己的道场。此后,他们每年都来到这个村子。村民们也知道他们到来的时节,早早备好米等物品等着布施,等他们来了,仍然像以前一样恭敬招待。巴利
Sāmākaciṅgūlakacīnakānicāti āmagandhasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Anuppanne bhagavati āmagandho nāma brāhmaṇo pañcahi māṇavakasatehi saddhiṃ tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā himavantaṃ pavisitvā pabbatantare assamaṃ kārāpetvā vanamūlaphalāhāro hutvā tattha paṭivasati, na kadāci macchamaṃsaṃ khādati. Atha tesaṃ tāpasānaṃ loṇambilādīni aparibhuñjantānaṃ paṇḍurogo uppajji. Tato te ‘‘loṇambilādisevanatthāya manussapathaṃ gacchāmā’’ti paccantagāmaṃ sampattā. Tattha manussā tesu pasīditvā nimantetvā bhojesuṃ, katabhattakiccānaṃ nesaṃ mañcapīṭhaparibhogabhājanapādamakkhanādīni upanetvā ‘‘ettha, bhante, vasatha, mā ukkaṇṭhitthā’’ti vasanaṭṭhānaṃ dassetvā pakkamiṃsu. Dutiyadivasepi nesaṃ dānaṃ datvā puna gharapaṭipāṭiyā ekekadivasaṃ dānamadaṃsu. Tāpasā catumāsaṃ tattha vasitvā loṇambilādisevanāya thirabhāvappattasarīrā hutvā ‘‘mayaṃ, āvuso, gacchāmā’’ti manussānaṃ ārocesuṃ. Manussā tesaṃ telataṇḍulādīni adaṃsu. Te tāni ādāya attano assamameva agamaṃsu. Tañca gāmaṃ tatheva saṃvacchare saṃvacchare āgamiṃsu. Manussāpi tesaṃ āgamanakālaṃ viditvā dānatthāya taṇḍulādīni sajjetvāva acchanti, āgate ca ne tatheva sammānenti.
那时,世尊出现于世间,转动了殊胜的法轮,次第游行到舍卫城,住在那里。他看见那些苦行者具备了证悟的因缘,就从舍卫城出发,在比丘僧团的围绕下周游各地,次第来到了那个村子。人们见到世尊,做了盛大的布施。世尊为他们说法。由于那次说法,他们当中有些人证得入流果,有些人证得一来果,有些人证得不来果,还有些人出家后证得了阿罗汉果。世尊又回到了舍卫城。后来,那些苦行者来到了这个村子。人们见到苦行者,不再像以前那样热情接待。苦行者们就问:“贤友们,这些人怎么不像以前那样了?这村子是遭到国王惩罚了,还是闹饥荒了?还是有什么戒行等功德比我们更圆满的出家人来过这个村子?”他们回答说:“尊者,不是国王惩罚,也不是饥荒。是佛陀出现于世间了,那位世尊为了利益大众而说法,来过这里。”巴利
Atha bhagavā loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakko anupubbena sāvatthiṃ gantvā tattha viharanto tesaṃ tāpasānaṃ upanissayasampattiṃ disvā tato nikkhamma bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto cārikaṃ caramāno anupubbena taṃ gāmaṃ anuppatto. Manussā bhagavantaṃ disvā mahādānāni adaṃsu. Bhagavā tesaṃ dhammaṃ desesi. Te tāya dhammadesanāya appekacce sotāpannā, ekacce sakadāgāmino, ekacce anāgāmino ahesuṃ, ekacce pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Bhagavā punadeva sāvatthiṃ paccāgamāsi. Atha te tāpasā taṃ gāmaṃ āgamiṃsu. Manussā tāpase disvā na pubbasadisaṃ kotūhalamakaṃsu. Tāpasā taṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kiṃ, āvuso, ime manussā na pubbasadisā, kiṃ nu kho ayaṃ gāmo rājadaṇḍena upadduto, udāhu dubbhikkhena, udāhu amhehi sīlādiguṇehi sampannataro koci pabbajito imaṃ gāmamanuppatto’’ti? Te āhaṃsu – ‘‘na, bhante, rājadaṇḍena, na dubbhikkhenāyaṃ gāmo upadduto, apica buddho loke uppanno, so bhagavā bahujanahitāya dhammaṃ desento idhāgato’’ti.
荤腥苦行者听了这话,就问:“各位居士,你们说的是‘佛陀’吗?”他们回答:“尊者,是的,我们说‘佛陀’。”这样问了三遍之后,苦行者满心欢喜,说出欢喜的话:“在这世间,‘佛陀’这个名号实在难得啊!”他又问:“那位佛陀吃荤腥,还是不吃?”他们反问:“尊者,什么是荤腥?”他说:“居士们,荤腥就是鱼肉。”他们说:“尊者,世尊是吃鱼肉的。”苦行者听了,心里后悔起来:“但愿他不是佛陀!”接着又想:“佛陀出现于世极为难得,我应该去见他,当面问个明白。”于是,他向人们打听世尊走过的路,像一头急着找牛犊的母牛一样,匆匆赶路,沿途只住一夜,很快就到了舍卫城,带着自己的弟子们径直进入祇园精舍。那时,世尊正坐在座位上准备说法。苦行者们走到世尊跟前,默不作声,连礼都没行,就坐在一边。世尊用“诸位仙人,还安好吗”这样的话跟他们打招呼。他们也回答:“乔达摩尊者,我们还好。”然后,荤腥苦行者问世尊:“乔达摩尊者,您吃荤腥,还是不吃?”世尊反问:“婆罗门,你说的荤腥是什么?”他说:“乔达摩尊者,就是鱼肉。”世尊说:“婆罗门,鱼肉不是荤腥。真正的荤腥,是一切烦恼、一切恶不善法。”接着又说:“婆罗门,不只是你现在问荤腥这件事,过去也有个叫帝沙的婆罗门问过迦叶世尊。他那样问,世尊那样回答。”于是世尊把帝沙婆罗门和迦叶世尊说过的偈颂引出来,用那些偈颂开导这位婆罗门,说道:“稗子、芡实、蒌叶菜……”以上就是这部经在这里的缘起。巴利
Taṃ sutvā āmagandhatāpaso ‘‘buddhoti, gahapatayo, vadethā’’ti? ‘‘Buddhoti, bhante, vadāmā’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā ‘‘ghosopi kho eso dullabho lokasmiṃ, yadidaṃ buddho’’ti attamano attamanavācaṃ nicchāretvā pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho so buddho āmagandhaṃ bhuñjati, na bhuñjatī’’ti? ‘‘Ko, bhante, āmagandho’’ti? ‘‘Āmagandho nāma macchamaṃsaṃ, gahapatayo’’ti. ‘‘Bhagavā, bhante, macchamaṃsaṃ paribhuñjatī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā tāpaso vippaṭisārī ahosi – ‘‘māheva kho pana buddho siyā’’ti . Puna cintesi – ‘‘buddhānaṃ pātubhāvo nāma dullabho, gantvā buddhaṃ disvā pucchitvā jānissāmī’’ti. Tato yena bhagavā gato, taṃ maggaṃ manusse pucchitvā vacchagiddhinī gāvī viya turitaturito sabbattha ekarattivāsena sāvatthiṃ anuppatvā jetavanameva pāvisi saddhiṃ sakāya parisāya. Bhagavāpi tasmiṃ samaye dhammadesanatthāya āsane nisinno eva hoti. Tāpasā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamma tuṇhībhūtā anabhivādetvāva ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Bhagavā ‘‘kacci vo isayo khamanīya’’ntiādinā nayena tehi saddhiṃ paṭisammodi. Tepi ‘‘khamanīyaṃ, bho gotamā’’tiādimāhaṃsu. Tato āmagandho bhagavantaṃ pucchi – ‘‘āmagandhaṃ, bho gotama, bhuñjasi, na bhuñjasī’’ti? ‘‘Ko so, brāhmaṇa, āmagandho nāmā’’ti? ‘‘Macchamaṃsaṃ, bho gotamā’’ti. Bhagavā ‘‘na, brāhmaṇa, macchamaṃsaṃ āmagandho. Apica kho āmagandho nāma sabbe kilesā pāpakā akusalā dhammā’’ti vatvā ‘‘na, brāhmaṇa, idāni tvameva āmagandhaṃ pucchi, atītepi tisso nāma brāhmaṇo kassapaṃ bhagavantaṃ pucchi. Evañca so pucchi, evañcassa bhagavā byākāsī’’ti tissena ca brāhmaṇena kassapena ca bhagavatā vuttagāthāyo eva ānetvā tāhi gāthāhi brāhmaṇaṃ saññāpento āha – ‘‘sāmākaciṅgūlakacīnakāni cā’’ti. Ayaṃ tāva imassa suttassa idha uppatti.
过去世时,据说迦叶菩萨历经八阿僧祇又十万劫圆满波罗蜜后,在波罗奈城一位名叫梵授的婆罗门家中,投入其妻达那瓦蒂婆罗门女的腹中结生。他的上首弟子也在同一天从天界命终,投入辅相婆罗门妻子的腹中出生。就这样,两人同一天结生、同一天出生,同一天被取名为迦叶和提舍。两人从小一起玩泥沙,渐渐长大。提舍的父亲对儿子说:“孩子,这位迦叶将来会出家成佛。你应当到他身边出家,追求出离。”提舍答应道:“好的。”便来到菩萨面前说:“朋友,我们一起出家吧。”菩萨也答应了。后来到了成年时,提舍又对菩萨说:“来吧,朋友,我们出家吧。”菩萨却没有离家。提舍心想:“看来他的智慧还没有成熟。”便自己出家修仙人苦行,在森林山脚建了一座茅棚住下。后来有一天,菩萨虽然还住在家里,却已经修成了入出息念,生起四禅和神通。他乘着宫殿飞到菩提道场附近,发愿说:“愿宫殿回到原处。”宫殿就回到了原来的位置。据说,没有出家的人是不能到菩提道场的。于是他出家后,来到菩提道场,坐下精进修行七天,在七天内证得了正等觉。巴利
Atīte pana kassapo kira bodhisatto aṭṭhāsaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā bārāṇasiyaṃ brahmadattassa brāhmaṇassa dhanavatī nāma brāhmaṇī, tassā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ aggahesi. Aggasāvakopi taṃ divasaṃyeva devalokā cavitvā anupurohitabrāhmaṇassa pajāpatiyā kucchimhi nibbatti. Evaṃ tesaṃ ekadivasameva paṭisandhiggahaṇañca gabbhavuṭṭhānañca ahosi, ekadivasameva etesaṃ ekassa kassapo, ekassa tissoti nāmamakaṃsu. Te sahapaṃsukīḷanakā dve sahāyā anupubbena vuḍḍhiṃ agamiṃsu. Tissassa pitā puttaṃ āṇāpesi – ‘‘ayaṃ, tāta, kassapo nikkhamma pabbajitvā buddho bhavissati, tvampissa santike pabbajitvā bhavanissaraṇaṃ kareyyāsī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā bodhisattassa santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘ubhopi, samma, pabbajissāmā’’ti āha. Bodhisatto ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇi. Tato vuḍḍhiṃ anuppattakālepi tisso bodhisattaṃ āha – ‘‘ehi, samma, pabbajissāmā’’ti bodhisatto na nikkhami. Tisso ‘‘na tāvassa ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gata’’nti sayaṃ nikkhamma isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā araññe pabbatapāde assamaṃ kārāpetvā vasati. Bodhisattopi aparena samayena ghare ṭhitoyeva ānāpānassatiṃ pariggahetvā cattāri jhānāni abhiññāyo ca uppādetvā pāsādena bodhimaṇḍasamīpaṃ gantvā ‘‘puna pāsādo yathāṭhāneyeva patiṭṭhātū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi, so sakaṭṭhāneyeva patiṭṭhāsi. Apabbajitena kira bodhimaṇḍaṃ upagantuṃ na sakkāti. So pabbajitvā bodhimaṇḍaṃ patvā nisīditvā satta divase padhānayogaṃ katvā sattahi divasehi sammāsambodhiṃ sacchākāsi.
那时,在仙人堕处住着两万名出家众。于是,咖沙巴世尊召集他们,转起了法轮。说法结束时,所有人全都证得了阿拉汉果。据说,这位世尊就由两万名比丘围绕,住在仙人堕处。基基迦尸王以四种资具供养他。有一天,一个住在波罗奈的人进山寻找檀香心材等物,来到提舍苦行者的道场,向他礼敬后站在一边。苦行者看见他,问道:“你从哪里来?”那人说:“尊者,我从波罗奈来。”又问:“那里有什么消息?”那人说:“尊者,那里出现了一位名叫咖沙巴的正自觉者。”苦行者听到这难得听到的话,满心欢喜,问道:“他吃荤腥吗?还是不吃?”那人问:“尊者,什么是荤腥?”苦行者说:“朋友,就是鱼肉。”那人说:“尊者,世尊吃鱼肉。”听到这话,苦行者心生懊悔,接着又想:“我去问问他。如果他说‘我吃荤腥’,我就对他说:‘尊者,这与您的出身、家族和种姓都不相称’,劝阻他之后,再在他座下出家,追求出离。”于是他带上轻便的用具,一路每天只住一夜,傍晚时分到达波罗奈,进入仙人堕处。那时,世尊也已坐在座位上,准备说法。苦行者走近世尊,没有礼敬,沉默地站在一边。世尊看见他,像前面所说的那样与他互相问候。他也说了“咖沙巴贤友,可安好吗”等话,然后坐在一边,问世尊:“咖沙巴贤友,你吃荤腥吗?还是不吃?”世尊说:“婆罗门,我不吃荤腥。”苦行者说:“好,好,咖沙巴贤友,不吃别人的尸体,你做得好,这才配得上咖沙巴贤友的出身、家族和种姓。”于是世尊想:“我是就烦恼而说‘我不吃荤腥’,这位婆罗门却以为是鱼肉。不如我明天早上不进村托钵,就吃从基基王宫里送来的食物,这样就会围绕荤腥展开谈论。然后我就能用说法说服这位婆罗门。”第二天一早,世尊做完身体清洁,进入香室。比丘们看见香室门关着,知道“世尊今天不想和比丘们一起进村”,就右绕香室,进村托钵去了。巴利
Tadā isipatane vīsatisahassā pabbajitā paṭivasanti. Atha kassapo bhagavā te āmantetvā dhammacakkaṃ pavattesi. Suttapariyosāne sabbeva arahanto ahesuṃ. So sudaṃ bhagavā vīsatibhikkhusahassaparivuto tattheva isipatane vasati. Kikī ca naṃ kāsirājā catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhāti. Athekadivasaṃ bārāṇasivāsī eko puriso pabbate candanasārādīni gavesanto tissassa tāpasassa assamaṃ patvā taṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Tāpaso taṃ disvā ‘‘kuto āgatosī’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Bārāṇasito, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Kā tattha pavattī’’ti? ‘‘Tattha, bhante, kassapo nāma sammāsambuddho uppanno’’ti. Tāpaso dullabhavacanaṃ sutvā pītisomanassajāto pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ so āmagandhaṃ bhuñjati, na bhuñjatī’’ti? ‘‘Ko bhante, āmagandho’’ti? ‘‘Macchamaṃsaṃ āvuso’’ti. ‘‘Bhagavā, bhante, macchamaṃsaṃ bhuñjatī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā tāpaso vippaṭisārī hutvā puna cintesi – ‘‘gantvā taṃ pucchissāmi, sace ‘āmagandhaṃ paribhuñjāmī’ti vakkhati, tato naṃ ‘tumhākaṃ, bhante, jātiyā ca kulassa ca gottassa ca ananucchavikameta’nti nivāretvā tassa santike pabbajitvā bhavanissaraṇaṃ karissāmī’’ti sallahukaṃ upakaraṇaṃ gahetvā sabbattha ekarattivāsena sāyanhasamaye bārāṇasiṃ patvā isipatanameva pāvisi. Bhagavāpi tasmiṃ samaye dhammadesanatthāya āsane nisinnoyeva hoti. Tāpaso bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamma anabhivādetvā tuṇhībhūto ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavā taṃ disvā pubbe vuttanayeneva paṭisammodi. Sopi ‘‘khamanīyaṃ, bho kassapā’’tiādīni vatvā ekamantaṃ nisīditvā bhagavantaṃ pucchi – ‘‘āmagandhaṃ, bho kassapa, bhuñjasi, na bhuñjasī’’ti? ‘‘Nāhaṃ, brāhmaṇa, āmagandhaṃ bhuñjāmī’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu, sādhu, bho kassapa, parakuṇapaṃ akhādanto sundaramakāsi, yuttametaṃ bhoto kassapassa jātiyā ca kulassa ca gottassa cā’’ti. Tato bhagavā ‘‘ahaṃ kilese sandhāya ‘āmagandhaṃ na bhuñjāmī’ti vadāmi, brāhmaṇo macchamaṃsaṃ pacceti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ sve gāmaṃ piṇḍāya apavisitvā kikīrañño gehā ābhataṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjeyyaṃ, evaṃ āmagandhaṃ ārabbha kathā pavattissati. Tato brāhmaṇaṃ dhammadesanāya saññāpessāmī’’ti dutiyadivase kālasseva sarīraparikammaṃ katvā gandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi. Bhikkhū gandhakuṭidvāraṃ pihitaṃ disvā ‘‘na bhagavā ajja bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ pavisitukāmo’’ti ñatvā gandhakuṭiṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā piṇḍāya pavisiṃsu.
世尊也从香室出来,坐在已经铺好的座位上。那位苦行者煮了树叶,吃完后,坐到世尊面前。迦尸王基基看见比丘们正在托钵乞食,就问:“尊者,世尊在哪里?”听说“大王,在精舍”之后,便派人给世尊送去用种种滋味、种种配菜和许多肉食做成的饭食。大臣们把食物送到精舍,禀告世尊,献上漱洗水,在侍奉时先奉上用各种肉做成的粥。苦行者看见后,心想:“他到底吃不吃?”就站在那里观察。世尊当着他的面喝粥,还把一块肉放进嘴里。苦行者看见后,很生气。喝完粥后,他们又奉上种种滋味、种种配菜的食物,他看见世尊又拿起来吃,就更加愤怒:“明明在吃鱼肉,却说自己不吃。”于是,世尊吃完饭、洗完手和脚坐下后,他走上前去,说道:“喂,迦叶,你在说谎,这不是智者该做的事。诸佛都呵责妄语。就连那些住在山脚、林间,靠树根果实过活的仙人们,也不说妄语。”接着,他用偈颂赞叹仙人们的功德,说道:“sāmākaciṅgūlakacīnakāni cā……”巴利
Bhagavāpi gandhakuṭito nikkhamma paññattāsane nisīdi. Tāpasopi kho pattasākaṃ pacitvā khāditvā bhagavato santike nisīdi. Kikī kāsirājā bhikkhū piṇḍāya carante disvā ‘‘kuhiṃ bhagavā, bhante’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘vihāre, mahārājā’’ti ca sutvā nānābyañjanarasamanekamaṃsavikatisampannaṃ bhojanaṃ bhagavato pāhesi. Amaccā vihāraṃ netvā bhagavato ārocetvā dakkhiṇodakaṃ datvā parivisantā paṭhamaṃ nānāmaṃsavikatisampannaṃ yāguṃ adaṃsu, tāpaso disvā ‘‘khādati nu kho no’’ti cintento aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavā tassa passatoyeva yāguṃ pivanto maṃsakhaṇḍaṃ mukhe pakkhipi. Tāpaso disvā kuddho. Puna yāgupītassa nānārasabyañjanaṃ bhojanamadaṃsu, tampi gahetvā bhuñjantaṃ disvā ativiya kuddho ‘‘macchamaṃsaṃ khādantoyeva ‘na khādāmī’ti bhaṇatī’’ti. Atha bhagavantaṃ katabhattakiccaṃ hatthapāde dhovitvā nisinnaṃ upasaṅkamma ‘‘bho kassapa, musā tvaṃ bhaṇasi, netaṃ paṇḍitakiccaṃ. Musāvādo hi garahito buddhānaṃ, yepi te pabbatapāde vanamūlaphalādīhi yāpentā isayo vasanti, tepi musā na bhaṇantī’’ti vatvā puna isīnaṃ guṇe gāthāya vaṇṇento āha ‘‘sāmākaciṅgūlakacīnakāni cā’’ti.
242 242. 其中,“稗子”是指一种草本谷物,抖一抖或者摘下穗头就能取用。同样,“荆粒”的穗头形状像夹竹桃花。“秦豆”是指种在森林和山脚下的秦地绿豆。“叶果”是指任何绿色的叶子。“根果”是指任何球茎根块。“河果”是指任何树木或藤蔓的果实。也可以这样理解:用“根”这个词涵盖球茎根块,用“果”这个词涵盖树木和藤蔓的果实,用“河果”这个词涵盖水中生长的菱角、莼菜等果实。“如法所得”是指舍弃了替人送信、跑腿这类邪命之后,在林间靠拾穗得来的食物。“诸善人”是指那些已寂静的圣者们。“正在受用着”是指正在进食。“不因欲求诸欲而说虚妄语”是说:这些没有我执、无所执取的仙人,在吃这些稗子之类的食物时,不会像你那样渴求美味等诸欲、明明吃着腥味却说“婆罗门,我不吃腥味”而说谎,他们不会为了欲求诸欲而说妄语;这是借着赞叹仙人来表达对世尊的呵责。巴利
242. Tattha sāmākāti dhunitvā vā sīsāni uccinitvā vā gayhūpagā tiṇadhaññajāti. Tathā ciṅgūlakā kaṇavīrapupphasaṇṭhānasīsā honti. Cīnakānīti aṭavipabbatapādesu aropitajātā cīnamuggā. Pattapphalanti yaṃkiñci haritapaṇṇaṃ. Mūlaphalanti yaṃkiñci kandamūlaṃ. Gavipphalanti yaṃkiñci rukkhavalliphalaṃ. Mūlaggahaṇena vā kandamūlaṃ, phalaggahaṇena rukkhavalliphalaṃ, gavipphalaggahaṇena udake jātasiṅghātakakaserukādiphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dhammena laddhanti dūteyyapahiṇagamanādimicchājīvaṃ pahāya vane uñchācariyāya laddhaṃ. Satanti santo ariyā. Asnamānāti bhuñjamānā. Na kāmakāmā alikaṃ bhaṇantīti te evaṃ amamā apariggahā etāni sāmākādīni bhuñjamānā isayo yathā tvaṃ sādurasādike kāme patthayanto āmagandhaṃ bhuñjantoyeva ‘‘nāhaṃ, brāhmaṇa, āmagandhaṃ bhuñjāmī’’ti bhaṇanto alikaṃ bhaṇasi, tathā na kāmakāmā alikaṃ bhaṇanti, kāme kāmayantā musā na bhaṇantīti isīnaṃ pasaṃsāya bhagavato nindaṃ dīpeti.
243 243. 他这样借赞叹仙人的说法来指责世尊之后,现在要指出他自己心里认定的该受指责的事,毫不掩饰地直接指责世尊,说道:“yadasnamāno(当你吃的时候)。”这里“da”这个字母是连声用的。意思是:无论是兔肉还是鹧鸪肉,经过清洗、切割等前期的处理而做得很好,又经过烹煮、调味等后来的加工而做得完美,不是母亲给的,也不是父亲给的,而是那些认为“这个人值得供养”的、喜爱正法的人所布施的,因为恭敬供养而精心准备,用上好的调料装饰得精美,因为味道最上等、营养丰富、能增长力量和体力而成为精美的食物。当你享用、吃下这样的食物时,不仅如此,不只是随便什么肉,你还吃这种精心挑选去除黑粒的优质米、这种精白米饭。迦叶,你吃着肉,又享用这种精心挑选去除黑粒的优质米,迦叶,这就是腥味。他用族姓来称呼世尊。巴利
243. Evaṃ isīnaṃ pasaṃsāpadesena bhagavantaṃ ninditvā idāni attanā adhippetaṃ nindāvatthuṃ dassetvā nippariyāyeneva bhagavantaṃ nindanto āha ‘‘yadasnamāno’’ti tattha da-kāro padasandhikaro. Ayaṃ panattho – yaṃ kiñcideva sasamaṃsaṃ vā tittiramaṃsaṃ vā dhovanacchedanādinā pubbaparikammena sukataṃ, pacanavāsanādinā pacchāparikammena suniṭṭhitaṃ, na mātarā na pitarā, apica kho pana ‘‘dakkhiṇeyyo aya’’nti maññamānehi dhammakāmehi parehi dinnaṃ, sakkārakaraṇena payataṃ paṇītamalaṅkataṃ, uttamarasatāya ojavantatāya thāmabalabharaṇasamatthatāya ca paṇītaṃ asnamāno āhārayamāno, na kevalañca yaṃkiñci maṃsameva, apica kho pana idampi sālīnamannaṃ vicitakāḷakaṃ sālitaṇḍulodanaṃ paribhuñjamāno so bhuñjasi, kassapa, āmagandhaṃ, so tvaṃ yaṃkiñci maṃsaṃ bhuñjamāno idañca sālīnamannaṃ paribhuñjamāno bhuñjasi, kassapa, āmagandhanti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati.
244 244. 他这样从饮食方面指责了世尊之后,现在又给世尊安上妄语的罪名来指责,说道:“不是腥味……中略……精心烹调的。”这段话的意思是:先前我问你的时候,你只是说“对我来说,腥味是不允许的”,你就这样一口咬定地说。他接着用“梵天亲族”这个称呼来辱骂,意思是“你这个远离婆罗门功德、只凭出身才算婆罗门的人”。sālīnamannaṃ 指的是精白米饭。paribhuñjamāno 意思是正在吃。sakuntamaṃsehi susaṅkhatehi 意思是,他这是在指出当时供奉给世尊的鸟肉。巴利
244. Evaṃ āhārato bhagavantaṃ ninditvā idāni musāvādaṃ āropetvā nindanto āha ‘‘na āmagandho…pe… susaṅkhatehī’’ti. Tassattho – pubbe mayā pucchito samāno ‘‘na āmagandho mama kappatī’’ti icceva tvaṃ bhāsasi, evaṃ ekaṃseneva tvaṃ bhāsasi brahmabandhu brāhmaṇaguṇavirahitajātimattabrāhmaṇāti paribhāsanto bhaṇati. Sālīnamannanti sālitaṇḍulodanaṃ. Paribhuñjamānoti bhuñjamāno. Sakuntamaṃsehi susaṅkhatehīti tadā bhagavato abhihaṭaṃ sakuṇamaṃsaṃ niddisanto bhaṇati.
他这样说着,同时从世尊的脚底一直向上打量到头顶的发尖,看见了三十二种殊胜的大人相、八十种随形好圆满具足,以及一寻长的身光。于是他想:“拥有这样以大人相等庄严之身的人,不可能说妄语。他在过去世中,正是凭着真实语的果报,眉间才生出了白毫,洁白柔软如棉花,而且每一毛孔各生一毛。这样的人,如今怎么会说妄语呢?一定是另有所指,那才是他说的‘腥味’,他就是针对那个才说‘婆罗门,我不吃腥味’。我何不就此问问他?”于是他生起了极大的敬重,仍旧以族姓称呼,说出了这首偈颂的剩余部分:巴利
Evaṃ bhaṇanto eva ca bhagavato heṭṭhā pādatalā pabhuti yāva upari kesaggā sarīramullokento dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇāsītianubyañjanasampadaṃ byāmappabhāparikkhepañca disvā ‘‘evarūpo mahāpurisalakkhaṇādipaṭimaṇḍitakāyo na musā bhaṇituṃ arahati. Ayaṃ hissa bhavantarepi saccavācānissandeneva uṇṇā bhamukantare jātā odātā mudu tūlasannibhā, ekekāni ca lomakūpesu lomāni. Svāyaṃ kathamidāni musā bhaṇissati. Addhā añño imassa āmagandho bhavissati, yaṃ sandhāya etadavoca – ‘nāhaṃ, brāhmaṇa, āmagandhaṃ bhuñjāmī’ti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ etaṃ puccheyya’’nti cintetvā sañjātabahumāno gotteneva ālapanto imaṃ gāthāsesaṃ āha –
迦叶,我问你这件事:你说的腥味,到底是什么样的?巴利
‘‘Pucchāmi taṃ kassapa etamatthaṃ, kathaṃpakāro tava āmagandho’’ti.
245 245. 于是,世尊为了给他解释什么是腥味,就说了“杀生”等这些话。其中,“杀生”就是杀害生命。“杀害、切割、捆绑”里面,用棍棒等打众生叫杀害,砍断手脚等叫切割,用绳子等绑住叫捆绑。“偷盗、妄语”就是偷盗和妄语。“诈骗”就是用“我会给、我会做”这类方式让人产生期待,然后又不兑现。“欺瞒”就是把不是金子的东西说成金子让人接受等等。“徒劳的诵习”就是毫无意义地学习很多典籍。“邪淫”就是侵犯别人所守护的妇女。“这是腥味,不是吃肉”:这些杀生等不善法的现起,就是腥味,是臭秽的气味,是腐尸的气味。为什么呢?因为它不可意,因为它夹杂着烦恼的不净,因为它被善人们厌恶,也因为它会带来最严重的恶臭。那些烦恼炽盛的众生,身上就极其恶臭;没有烦恼的人,即使是一具死尸也不臭。所以,这才是腥味。而吃肉,如果没有看见、没有听说、也没有怀疑,那就没有过失,所以说吃肉不是腥味。巴利
245. Athassa bhagavā āmagandhaṃ vissajjetuṃ ‘‘pāṇātipāto’’ti evamādimāha. Tattha pāṇātipātoti pāṇavadho. Vadhachedabandhananti ettha sattānaṃ daṇḍādīhi ākoṭanaṃ vadho, hatthapādādīnaṃ chedanaṃ chedo, rajjuādīhi bandho bandhanaṃ. Theyyaṃ musāvādoti theyyañca musāvādo ca. Nikatīti ‘‘dassāmi, karissāmī’’tiādinā nayena āsaṃ uppādetvā nirāsākaraṇaṃ. Vañcanānīti asuvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇanti gāhāpanādīni. Ajjhenakuttanti niratthakamanekaganthapariyāpuṇanaṃ. Paradārasevanāti parapariggahitāsu cārittāpajjanaṃ. Esāmagandho na hi maṃsabhojananti esa pāṇātipātādiakusaladhammasamudācāro āmagandho vissagandho kuṇapagandho. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Amanuññattā kilesaasucimissakattā sabbhi jigucchitattā paramaduggandhabhāvāvahattā ca. Ye hi ussannakilesā sattā, te tehi atiduggandhā honti, nikkilesānaṃ matasarīrampi duggandhaṃ na hoti, tasmā esāmagandho. Maṃsabhojanaṃ pana adiṭṭhamasutamaparisaṅkitañca anavajjaṃ, tasmā na hi maṃsabhojanaṃ āmagandhoti.
246 世尊这样以法为立足点说法,从一个角度解释了腥味之后,现在又因为各类众生各自具有不同的腥味——不是一个人具有所有腥味,也不是所有人都只有同一种腥味——为了说明他们各自具有的那些腥味,就先以人为立足点来说法,用“在此世间,于诸欲中不自制的人”等语句来解释腥味,说了两首偈颂。巴利
246. Evaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya ekena nayena āmagandhaṃ vissajjetvā idāni yasmā te te sattā tehi tehi āmagandhehi samannāgatā, na eko eva sabbehi, na ca sabbe ekeneva, tasmā nesaṃ te te āmagandhe pakāsetuṃ ‘‘ye idha kāmesu asaññatā janā’’tiādinā nayena puggalādhiṭṭhānāya tāva desanāya āmagandhe vissajjento dve gāthāyo abhāsi.
在这里,凡是于诸欲中不自制的人,就是指在这个世间,对任何被称为享受欲乐的各种欲,即使对母亲、姨母等也不守界限、毁坏防护,因而不能自制的凡夫。贪著于味,是指对舌识所知的种种味道贪著、执迷、迷恋、沉溺,看不到过患,没有出离的智慧,就这样受用味道。依附于不净的状态,是指因为那种对味的贪著,为了得到味道而依附于种种被称为邪命的不净状态。持无见,是指具备以“没有布施”等十种说法为依据的邪见。邪曲,是指具备邪曲的身业等。难以教导,是指难以被教示,具备固执己见、执取己见、坚执不舍、难以放下的状态。这就是腥味,这首偈颂是就人而指出:于诸欲中不自制、贪著于味、邪命活命、持无见、身恶行等邪曲、难以教导。应当知道,这也是依前面所说的意义而来的另一种六种腥味。而不是吃肉,至于吃肉,则按照前面所说的意义,并不是腥味。巴利
Tattha ye idha kāmesu asaññatā janāti ye keci idha loke kāmapaṭisevanasaṅkhātesu kāmesu mātimātucchādīsupi mariyādāvirahena bhinnasaṃvaratāya asaṃyatā puthujjanā. Rasesu giddhāti jivhāviññeyyesu rasesu giddhā gadhitā mucchitā ajjhosannā anādīnavadassāvino anissaraṇapaññā rase paribhuñjanti. Asucibhāvamassitāti tāya rasagiddhiyā rasapaṭilābhatthāya nānappakāramicchājīvasaṅkhātaasucibhāvamissitā. Natthikadiṭṭhīti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādidasavatthukamicchādiṭṭhisamannāgatā. Visamāti visamena kāyakammādinā samannāgatā. Durannayāti duviññāpayā sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīādhānaggāhīduppaṭinissaggitāsamannāgatā. Esāmagandhoti esa etāya gāthāya puggale adhiṭṭhāya niddiṭṭho ‘‘kāmesu asaṃyatatā rasagiddhatā ājīvavipattinatthikadiṭṭhikāyaduccaritādivisamatā durannayabhāvatā’’ti aparopi pubbe vuttenevatthena chabbidho āmagandho veditabbo. Na hi maṃsabhojananti maṃsabhojanaṃ pana yathāvuttenevatthena na āmagandhoti.
247 247. 在第二首偈颂里,“ye lūkhasā”(那些粗鄙的人):是指粗劣、没有滋味的人,意思是专修自我折磨的人。“dāruṇā”(残暴的人):是指粗暴、难以调伏的人。“piṭṭhimaṃsikā”(背后吃肉的):是指当面说好听话、背后却说不善之语的人。因为这些人没法当面直视对方,对背向自己的人就像在吃他们背上的肉一样,所以叫“背后吃肉的人”。“mittadduno”(害朋友的人):是指背叛朋友的人,对于在妻子、财富、生命上寄予信任的朋友,在那方面行为不正,这就是所说的意思。“nikkaruṇā”(无悲悯者):是指无有悲悯、希望众生不利的人。“atimānino”(极度骄慢者):是指具备如此极度骄慢的人——正如《分别论》(Vibh.880)中所说:“在此,有一类人因为出身……中略……以某种其他事由而极度轻视他人,凡这样的慢、渴望成为旗帜的心所。”“adānasīlā”(悭吝成性者):是指天性不施、倾向不施、喜欢不分享的人,这是其义。又说“na ca denti kassaci”(他们也不给任何人):由于这种悭吝成性,即使被乞求,他们也不给任何人任何东西,就像从未布施过的家族中的人一样,成为以焦渴饿鬼为归宿者。然而有些人读作“ādānasīlā”,意思是纯粹习惯于拿取,而不给任何人任何东西。“esāmagandho na hi maṃsabhojananti”(这确实是腥味,不是吃肉):在这首偈颂中,针对个人而指出“粗鄙、残暴、背后吃肉、害朋友、无悲悯、极度骄慢、悭吝成性、不施”这八种腥味,应以先前所说的同样含义了知,确实不是吃肉。巴利
247. Dutiyagāthāyapi ye lūkhasāti ye lūkhā nirasā, attakilamathānuyuttāti attho. Dāruṇāti kakkhaḷā dovacassatāyuttā. Piṭṭhimaṃsikāti purato madhuraṃ bhaṇitvā parammukhe avaṇṇabhāsino . Ete hi abhimukhaṃ oloketumasakkontā parammukhānaṃ piṭṭhimaṃsakhādakā viya honti, tena ‘‘piṭṭhimaṃsikā’’ti vuccanti. Mittaddunoti mittadūhakā, dāradhanajīvitesu vissāsamāpannānaṃ mittānaṃ tattha micchāpaṭipajjanakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nikkaruṇāti karuṇāvirahitā sattānaṃ anatthakāmā. Atimāninoti ‘‘idhekacco jātiyā vā…pe… aññataraññatarena vatthunā pare atimaññati, yo evarūpo māno ketukamyatā cittassā’’ti (vibha. 880) evaṃ vuttena atimānena samannāgatā. Adānasīlāti adānapakatikā, adānādhimuttā asaṃvibhāgaratāti attho. Na ca denti kassacīti tāya ca pana adānasīlatāya yācitāpi santā kassaci kiñci na denti, adinnapubbakakule manussasadisā nijjhāmataṇhikapetaparāyaṇā honti. Keci pana ‘‘ādānasīlā’’tipi paṭhanti, kevalaṃ gahaṇasīlā, kassaci pana kiñci na dentīti. Esāmagandho na hi maṃsabhojananti esa etāya gāthāya puggale adhiṭṭhāya niddiṭṭho ‘‘lūkhatā, dāruṇatā , piṭṭhimaṃsikatā, mittadūbhitā, nikkaruṇatā, atimānitā, adānasīlatā, adāna’’nti aparopi pubbe vuttenevatthena aṭṭhavidho āmagandho veditabbo, na hi maṃsabhojananti.
248 248. 世尊这样以人为所依的说法讲了两首偈颂之后,又知道那位苦行者的内心倾向,便只以法为所依的说法说了一首偈颂。其中,忿怒应当按《蛇喻经》里所说的方式来理解。慢,就是心的陶醉,按《分别论》里“生慢、姓慢、健康慢”等分类方式所说明的种种差别。顽迷,就是僵硬的状态。违抗,就是反向对立,即当别人依法理开示时,反而对抗而住。谄,就是覆藏已作的恶业,按《分别论》里“此世间有人以身造恶行”等方式所分别说明的。嫉,就是对他人获得利养、恭敬等的嫉妒。盛语之积聚,就是盛大的言说,也就是赞美自己。慢与过慢,按《分别论》所分别的:“此世间有人或因出身……或以某种原因,起初认为与他人相等,而后认为自己更胜,视他人为劣,如是类的慢……心的高举性。”与不善人亲近,就是与不善士交往。这就是腥味,而不是食肉。应当知道,这忿怒等九种不善聚,按前面已说的含义就是腥味,而不是食肉。巴利
248. Evaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya dve gāthāyo vatvā puna tassa tāpasassa āsayānuparivattanaṃ viditvā dhammādhiṭṭhānāyeva desanāya ekaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi. Tattha kodho uragasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Madoti ‘‘jātimado, gottamado, ārogyamado’’tiādinā (vibha. 832) nayena vibhaṅge vuttappabhedo cittassa majjanabhāvo. Thambhoti thaddhabhāvo. Paccupaṭṭhāpanāti paccanīkaṭṭhāpanā, dhammena nayena vuttassa paṭivirujjhitvā ṭhānaṃ. Māyāti ‘‘idhekacco kāyena duccaritaṃ caritvā’’tiādinā (vibha. 894) nayena vibhaṅge vibhattā katapāpapaṭicchādanatā. Usūyāti paralābhasakkārādīsu issā. Bhassasamussayoti samussitaṃ bhassaṃ, attukkaṃsanatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Mānātimānoti ‘‘idhekacco jātiyā vā…pe… aññataraññatarena vatthunā pubbakālaṃ parehi sadisaṃ attānaṃ dahati, aparakālaṃ attānaṃ seyyaṃ dahati, pare hīne dahati, yo evarūpo māno…pe… ketukamyatā cittassā’’ti (vibha. 880) vibhaṅge vibhatto. Asabbhi santhavoti asappurisehi santhavo. Esāmagandho na hi maṃsabhojananti esa kodhādi navavidho akusalarāsi pubbe vuttenevatthena āmagandhoti veditabbo, na hi maṃsabhojananti.
249 249. 像这样,在以法为立足点的开示中展示了九种腥味之后,又以和前面所说相同的方式,在以人为立足点的开示中处理腥味的问题,诵出了三首偈颂。其中,“那些恶戒者”:是指因为行为恶劣,在世间以“恶戒者”闻名的人。“赖债者与告密者”:按照《贱民经》所说的方法,借了债却不还,就是赖债者;用离间语搬弄是非,就是告密者。“此处狡诈的论事者即是伪善者”:指坐在法官的位置上,收了贿赂,让物主败诉,因为具有狡诈的论事,所以是“狡诈的论事者”;因为外表看起来像法官,所以是“伪善者”。或者,“此处”是指在教法中;“伪善者”是指破戒的人。因为他们通过威仪等方面的成就,看起来像持戒的人,所以是“相似者”,这“相似者”本身就是“伪善者”。“那些人中下劣者在此造作罪业”:是指在此世间,对父母、诸佛与独觉佛等造作邪行(称为罪业)的人中下劣者。“这就是腥味,而不是肉食”:依据这首偈颂,以人为立足点所指出的是“恶戒性、赖债性、告密性、狡诈论事性、伪善性、造罪性”——此外,也应当依照前面已说之义,了知这是六种腥味,而不是肉食。巴利
249. Evaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya navavidhaṃ āmagandhaṃ dassetvā punapi pubbe vuttanayeneva puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya āmagandhe vissajjento tisso gāthāyo abhāsi. Tattha yepāpasīlāti ye pāpasamācāratāya ‘‘pāpasīlā’’ti loke pākaṭā. Iṇaghātasūcakāti vasalasutte vuttanayena iṇaṃ gahetvā tassa appadānena iṇaghātā, pesuññena sūcakā ca. Vohārakūṭā idha pāṭirūpikāti dhammaṭṭaṭṭhāne ṭhitā lañjaṃ gahetvā sāmike parājentā kūṭena vohārena samannāgatattā vohārakūṭā, dhammaṭṭhapaṭirūpakattā pāṭirūpikā. Atha vā idhāti sāsane. Pāṭirūpikāti dussīlā. Te hi yasmā nesaṃ iriyāpathasampadādīhi sīlavantapaṭirūpaṃ atthi, tasmā paṭirūpā, paṭirūpā eva pāṭirūpikā. Narādhamā yedha karonti kibbisanti ye idha loke narādhamā mātāpitūsu buddhapaccekabuddhādīsu ca micchāpaṭipattisaññitaṃ kibbisaṃ karonti. Esāmagandho na hi maṃsabhojananti esa etāya gāthāya puggale adhiṭṭhāya niddiṭṭho ‘‘pāpasīlatā, iṇaghātatā, sūcakatā, vohārakūṭatā, pāṭirūpikatā, kibbisakāritā’’ti aparopi pubbe vuttenevatthena chabbidho āmagandho veditabbo, na hi maṃsabhojananti.
250 250.「那些在此世对众生不加克制的人」:指在此世间,那些对众生随心所欲,杀害百条千条生命,连一点点怜悯都不做,因此不加克制的人。「夺取他人所有后专事伤害」:指夺取他人的财物或生命后,对那些哀求“请不要这样做”或加以阻止的人,用拳、石、杖等加以伤害;或者抓来其他众生,说“今天十个,今天二十个”,这样抓来之后,用杀害、捆绑等方式加以伤害。「无戒而残酷」:指因行为邪恶而无戒,因双手沾血而做残忍之事,捕鱼者、猎鹿者、捕鸟者等在此所指。「粗恶」:即粗恶语。「无尊重者」:口中说“我们现在不做,应远离这类事”,内心却毫无尊重的人。「此是腥味,非食肉」:这由该偈颂针对个人而说,依“杀生、杀害、切割、捆绑”等的方式,前面已说及未说的“对众生不克制、伤害他人、无戒、残酷、粗恶、不恭敬”,应知有六种腥味,非食肉。前面所说的,也因听众想听、确定、坚固等理由而再次宣说。因此下文将说:“世尊再三宣说此义,通达咒语彼岸者令其知晓。”巴利
250.Ye idha pāṇesu asaññatā janāti ye janā idhaloke pāṇesu yathākāmacāritāya satampi sahassampi māretvā anuddayāmattassāpi akaraṇena asaṃyatā. Paresamādāya vihesamuyyutāti paresaṃ santakaṃ ādāya dhanaṃ vā jīvitaṃ vā tato ‘‘mā evaṃ karothā’’ti yācantānaṃ vā nivārentānaṃ vā pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍādīhi vihesaṃ uyyutā. Pare vā satte samādāya ‘‘ajja dasa, ajja vīsa’’nti evaṃ samādiyitvā tesaṃ vadhabandhanādīhi vihesamuyyutā. Dussīlaluddāti nissīlā ca durācārattā , luddā ca kurūrakammantā lohitapāṇitāya, macchaghātakamigabandhakasākuṇikādayo idhādhippetā. Pharusāti pharusavācā. Anādarāti ‘‘idāni na karissāma, viramissāma evarūpā’’ti evaṃ ādaravirahitā . Esāmagandho na hi maṃsabhojananti esa etāya gāthāya puggale adhiṭṭhāya niddiṭṭho ‘‘pāṇātipāto vadhachedabandhana’’ntiādinā nayena pubbe vutto ca avutto ca ‘‘pāṇesu asaṃyatatā paresaṃ vihesatā dussīlatā luddatā pharusatā anādaro’’ti chabbidho āmagandho veditabbo, na hi maṃsabhojananti. Pubbe vuttampi hi sotūnaṃ sotukāmatāya avadhāraṇatāya daḷhīkaraṇatāyāti evamādīhi kāraṇehi puna vuccati. Teneva ca parato vakkhati ‘‘iccetamatthaṃ bhagavā punappunaṃ, akkhāsi naṃ vedayi mantapāragū’’ti.
251 在这些众生中,贪着、敌对、杀害者:对于这些众生,因贪爱而贪着,因嗔恨而敌对,因愚痴而看不到过患,所以一再违犯、达到杀害;或者,在这些按杀生、杀害、砍伐、捆绑等所说为恶业中,按各自情况,被称为贪着、敌对、杀害的贪嗔痴——他们就是贪着者、敌对者、杀害者。恒常精勤:指恒常致力于造作不善,即使有时经过思择也不戒除。死后:指从此世去往他世之后。那些走向黑暗、头下脚上堕入地狱的众生:指那些走向世界之间的黑暗,或走向低贱家族等黑暗的人;也指那些堕入无间等地狱、头朝下倒栽的众生。这就是腥味:令那些众生走向黑暗、堕入地狱的原因,就是这贪着、敌对、杀害的分别,它是一切腥味的根本,按前面所说的意义,应知有三种腥味。而不是肉食:肉食并不是腥味。巴利
251.Etesu giddhā viruddhātipātinoti etesu pāṇesu gedhena giddhā, dosena viruddhā, mohena ādīnavaṃ apassantā punappunaṃ ajjhācārappattiyā atipātino, etesu vā ‘‘pāṇātipāto vadhachedabandhana’’ntiādinā nayena vuttesu pāpakammesu yathāsambhavaṃ ye gedhavirodhātipātasaṅkhātā rāgadosamohā, tehi giddhā viruddhā atipātino ca. Niccuyyutāti akusalakaraṇe niccaṃ uyyutā, kadāci paṭisaṅkhāya appaṭiviratā. Peccāti asmā lokā paraṃ gantvā. Tamaṃ vajanti ye, patanti sattā nirayaṃ avaṃsirāti ye lokantarikandhakārasaṅkhātaṃ nīcakulatādibhedaṃ vā tamaṃ vajanti, ye ca patanti sattā avīciādibhedaṃ nirayaṃ avaṃsirā adhogatasīsā. Esāmagandhoti tesaṃ sattānaṃ tamavajananirayapatanahetu esa gedhavirodhātipātabhedo sabbāmagandhamūlabhūto yathāvuttenatthena tividho āmagandho. Na hi maṃsabhojananti maṃsabhojanaṃ pana na āmagandhoti.
252 252. 世尊这样从究竟意义上解释了腥味,并说明它就是通往恶趣的道路之后,现在要说明:那位苦行者把吃鱼肉当成腥味、当成通往恶趣的道路,想靠不吃鱼肉来得到清净,所以他不吃鱼肉;而这种方式,以及其他类似的方式,其实都没有净化人的能力。为了说明这一点,世尊说了“不是鱼肉……”这六句偈颂。这里,所有词都应该和最后一句连起来理解,也就是:“不是鱼肉能净化一个还没有超越疑惑的人,不是供物、祭祀和时节受用能净化一个还没有超越疑惑的人。”在这里,“不是鱼肉”是指不被吃的鱼肉不能净化,同样,不食也不能净化,古师们作如是解。然而这样可能更好:“不是鱼肉的不食不能净化,不是鱼肉的不食不能净化,鱼肉的不食不能净化一个还没有超越疑惑的人。”这里也可能有另一种理解,若如此,不食就被舍弃了吗?那也不然,因为它被无死苦行所摄。因为“若在世间有许多无死苦行”这里,所有未说的残余自我折磨都被摄入了。裸形是指赤裸之行。剃发是指光头状态。结发垢秽是指结发和尘垢。粗糙兽皮衣是指粗糙的兽皮衣。侍奉火供是指侍奉火。无死是指因希求无死状态而起的身体苦行。许多是指从鸡行精勤等类别而有许多。苦行是指身体的热恼。咒语是指吠陀。供物是指火供仪式。祭祀和时节受用是指马祠等祭祀以及时节受用。时节受用是指夏天受用晒太阳,雨季受用树下,冬天受用入水。不能净化一个还没有超越疑惑的人,是指不能净化一个在烦恼清净或存在清净上还没有超越疑惑的人。因为疑惑之垢存在时就不清净,而你也仍有自己的疑惑。在这里,“还没有超越疑惑”这句,并不是苦行者在听了“不是鱼肉”等之后,生起了“难道不食鱼肉等能成为清净之道吗”这一疑惑,而由世尊说的,这不是意图。而他在听了“他吃鱼肉”之后对佛生起的疑惑,才是针对它而说此语的,应当如此理解。巴利
252. Evaṃ bhagavā paramatthato āmagandhaṃ vissajjetvā duggatimaggabhāvañcassa pakāsetvā idāni yasmiṃ macchamaṃsabhojane tāpaso āmagandhasaññī duggatimaggasaññī ca hutvā tassa abhojanena suddhikāmo hutvā taṃ na bhuñjati, tassa ca aññassa ca tathāvidhassa sodhetuṃ asamatthabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘na macchamaṃsa’’nti imaṃ chappadaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha sabbapadāni antimapādena yojetabbāni – na macchamaṃsaṃ sodheti maccaṃ avitiṇṇakaṅkhaṃ, na āhutiyaññamutūpasevanā sodheti maccaṃ avitiṇṇakaṅkhanti evaṃ. Ettha ca na macchamaṃsanti akhādiyamānaṃ macchamaṃsaṃ na sodheti, tathā anāsakattanti evaṃ porāṇā vaṇṇenti. Evaṃ pana sundarataraṃ siyā ‘‘na macchamaṃsānaṃ anāsakattaṃ na macchamaṃsānānāsakattaṃ, macchamaṃsānaṃ anāsakattaṃ na sodheti, macca’’nti athāpi siyā, evaṃ sante anāsakattaṃ ohīyatīti? Tañca na, amaratapena saṅgahitattā. ‘‘Ye vāpi loke amarā bahū tapā’’ti ettha hi sabbopi vuttāvaseso attakilamatho saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti. Naggiyanti acelakattaṃ. Muṇḍiyanti muṇḍabhāvo. Jaṭājallanti jaṭā ca rajojallañca. Kharājinānīti kharāni ajinacammāni. Aggihuttassupasevanāti aggipāricāriyā. Amarāti amarabhāvapatthanatāya pavattakāyakilesā. Bahūti ukkuṭikappadhānādibhedato aneke. Tapāti sarīrasantāpā. Mantāti vedā. Āhutīti aggihomakammaṃ. Yaññamutūpasevanāti assamedhādiyaññā ca utūpasevanā ca. Utūpasevanā nāma gimhe ātapaṭṭhānasevanā, vasse rukkhamūlasevanā, hemante jalappavesasevanā. Na sodhenti maccaṃ avitiṇṇakaṅkhanti kilesasuddhiyā vā bhavasuddhiyā vā avitiṇṇavicikicchaṃ maccaṃ na sodhenti. Kaṅkhāmale hi sati na visuddho hoti, tvañca sakaṅkhoyevāti. Ettha ca ‘‘avitiṇṇakaṅkha’’nti etaṃ ‘‘na macchamaṃsa’’ntiādīni sutvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho macchamaṃsānaṃ abhojanādinā siyā visuddhimaggo’’ti tāpasassa kaṅkhāya uppannāya bhagavatā vuttaṃ siyāti no adhippāyo. Yā cassa ‘‘so macchamaṃsaṃ bhuñjatī’’ti sutvāva buddhe kaṅkhā uppannā, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
253 253. 这样显示了不能靠不吃鱼肉等来净化之后,现在为了显示能够净化的法,而说了“在诸根上守护”这一偈。其中,“在诸根上”指在六根上。“守护”指具备以根律仪为守护。到这里,显示的是以根律仪为辅助的戒。“了知诸根而行”是指以知遍知了知六根、使之明了之后而行、而住。到这里,显示的是戒清净者对名色的分别。“安住于法”是指安住于应以圣道现证的四谛法。以此显示入流果的阶段。“乐于正直与柔软”是指乐于正直的状态和柔软的状态。以此显示一来者的阶段。因为一来者由于导致身曲等以及导致心硬的贪和嗔已变得薄弱,所以乐于正直与柔软。“超越执著”是指超越贪和嗔的执著。以此显示不来者的阶段。“已断尽一切苦”是指通过断除轮回之苦的因,而断尽一切苦。以此显示阿罗汉的阶段。“贤者于所见所闻不染着”是指如此依次证得阿罗汉的人,由于成就了坚定,对于所见所闻的法,不被任何烦恼所染着。不仅对所见所闻,对已觉知、已识知的法也不染着,反而达到最上的清净——这是以阿罗汉为顶点来结束开示。巴利
253. Evaṃ macchamaṃsānāsakattādīnaṃ sodhetuṃ asamatthabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sodhetuṃ samatthe dhamme dassento ‘‘sotesu gutto’’ti imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha sotesūti chasu indriyesu. Guttoti indriyasaṃvaraguttiyā samannāgato. Ettāvatā indriyasaṃvaraparivārasīlaṃ dasseti. Viditindriyo careti ñātapariññāya chaḷindriyāni viditvā pākaṭāni katvā careyya, vihareyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettāvatā visuddhasīlassa nāmarūpaparicchedaṃ dasseti. Dhamme ṭhitoti ariyamaggena abhisametabbacatusaccadhamme ṭhito. Etena sotāpattibhūmiṃ dasseti. Ajjavamaddaveratoti ujubhāve ca mudubhāve ca rato. Etena sakadāgāmibhūmiṃ dasseti. Sakadāgāmī hi kāyavaṅkādikarānaṃ cittathaddhabhāvakarānañca rāgadosānaṃ tanubhāvā ajjavamaddave rato hoti. Saṅgātigoti rāgadosasaṅgātigo. Etena anāgāmibhūmiṃ dasseti. Sabbadukkhappahīnoti sabbassa vaṭṭadukkhassa hetuppahānena pahīnasabbadukkho. Etena arahattabhūmiṃ dasseti. Na lippati diṭṭhasutesu dhīroti so evaṃ anupubbena arahattaṃ patto dhitisampadāya dhīro diṭṭhasutesu dhammesu kenaci kilesena na lippati. Na kevalañca diṭṭhasutesu, mutaviññātesu ca na lippati, aññadatthu paramavisuddhippatto hotīti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
254-5 从此以后,结集经典的诸位长老又说了两首偈颂:“这就是那个意思。”这两首偈颂的含义是:迦叶世尊为了以法为依止、以人为依止来教导,用许多偈颂一再地宣说、讲说、详细阐发这个义理,一直到那位苦行者完全了知为止。那位通达圣言的婆罗门也了知了这个义理——也就是说,那位通达圣言、通达吠陀的提舍婆罗门,也了知了这个义理。是什么原因呢?因为牟尼用义理、词句和说法方式都丰富多样的偈颂来阐明它。是什么样的牟尼呢?是离臭、无依着——他已没有贪爱与邪见的依着、难牵引——他不可能被任何外道见解所牵,说“这个是更好的,这个更殊胜”。他如此阐明之后,提舍婆罗门听了佛陀的善说、妙语、法教,即离臭、离烦恼相应、能除一切苦、能除一切轮回之苦,于是以卑下之心、卑下之意,顶礼如来。提舍婆罗门以五体投地顶礼如来之足。就在那里,他欢喜出家。也就是说,就在那里,提舍苦行者对坐在座上的迦叶世尊欢喜出家,请求说。世尊说:“善来,比丘。”他当下就具足八种资具,从空中而来,如同百岁长老一般顶礼世尊,不久便通达声闻波罗蜜智,成为名叫提舍的上首弟子,接着第二位名叫婆罗堕阇。这样,那位世尊就有了名为提舍婆罗堕阇的一对上首弟子。巴利
254-5. Ito paraṃ ‘‘iccetamattha’’nti dve gāthā saṅgītikārehi vuttā. Tāsamattho – iti bhagavā kassapo etamatthaṃ punappunaṃ anekāhi gāthāhi dhammādhiṭṭhānāya puggalādhiṭṭhānāya ca desanāya yāva tāpaso aññāsi, tāva so akkhāsi kathesi vitthāresi. Naṃ vedayi mantapāragūti sopi tañca atthaṃ mantapāragū, vedapāragū, tisso brāhmaṇo vedayi aññāsi. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Yasmā atthato ca padato ca desanānayato ca citrāhi gāthāhi munī pakāsayi. Kīdiso? Nirāmagandho asito durannayo, āmagandhakilesābhāvā nirāmagandho, taṇhādiṭṭhinissayābhāvā asito, bāhiradiṭṭhivasena ‘‘idaṃ seyyo idaṃ vara’’nti kenaci netuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā durannayo. Evaṃ pakāsitavato cassa sutvāna buddhassa subhāsitaṃ padaṃ sukathitaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā nirāmagandhaṃ nikkilesayogaṃ, sabbadukkhappanūdanaṃ sabbavaṭṭadukkhappanūdanaṃ, nīcamano nīcacitto hutvā vandi tathāgatassa, tisso brāhmaṇo tathāgatassa pāde pañcapatiṭṭhitaṃ katvā vandi. Tattheva pabbajjamarocayitthāti tattheva ca naṃ āsane nisinnaṃ kassapaṃ bhagavantaṃ tisso tāpaso pabbajjamarocayittha, ayācīti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ bhagavā ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti āha. So taṅkhaṇaṃyeva aṭṭhaparikkhārayutto hutvā ākāsenāgantvā vassasatikatthero viya bhagavantaṃ vanditvā katipāheneva sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ paṭivijjhitvā tisso nāma aggasāvako ahosi, puna dutiyo bhāradvājo nāma. Evaṃ tassa bhagavato tissabhāradvājaṃ nāma sāvakayugaṃ ahosi.
而我们的世尊,则把提舍婆罗门最初说的三首偈颂、迦叶世尊在中间说的九首偈颂,以及当时结集者最后加上的两首偈颂,全部汇集起来,凑成完整的十四首偈颂,然后对以阿阇梨为首的那五百位苦行者,讲说了这部《臭秽经》,说明什么是臭秽。那位婆罗门听了之后,同样内心谦卑,在世尊足下顶礼,并带着随从一起请求出家。世尊说:“来吧,诸比库!”他们就这样获得了“来比库”的身份,从空中飞来,顶礼世尊,没过多久,就全部安住在最高的果位——阿拉汉果上。巴利
Amhākaṃ pana bhagavā yā ca tissena brāhmaṇena ādito tisso gāthā vuttā, yā ca kassapena bhagavatā majjhe nava, yā ca tadā saṅgītikārehi ante dve, tā sabbāpi cuddasa gāthā ānetvā paripuṇṇaṃ katvā imaṃ āmagandhasuttaṃ ācariyappamukhānaṃ pañcannaṃ tāpasasatānaṃ āmagandhaṃ byākāsi. Taṃ sutvā so brāhmaṇo tatheva nīcamano hutvā bhagavato pāde vanditvā pabbajjaṃ yāci saddhiṃ parisāya. ‘‘Etha bhikkhavo’’ti bhagavā avoca. Te tatheva ehibhikkhubhāvaṃ patvā ākāsenāgantvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā katipāheneva sabbeva aggaphale arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsūti.
3. 《惭经》的注释巴利
3. Hirisuttavaṇṇanā
《惭经》就是《惭经》。它是怎么来的呢?世尊还没有出世的时候,舍卫城里有一位大婆罗门富豪,家财万贯,拥有八千万财产。他只有一个独生子,既可爱又讨人喜欢。他像养育天子一样,用种种舒适的享受把儿子养大,还没把家产交给儿子,就和婆罗门妻子一起去世了。后来,这个年轻人的父母过世之后,管库房的人打开宝库,把财产点交给他说:“主人,这些是您父母的,这些是您祖父母、曾祖父母的,这些是您家族七代辗转传下来的。”年轻人看到这些财富,心想:“只看见这些财产,却看不见积攒它们的人,他们全都落到死神手里去了。他们走的时候,什么也没能从这里带走。看来人死了就得丢下财物去往他世,除了善行,什么也带不走。我何不舍弃这些财富,去取得那能带走的善行之财呢?”于是他每天布施十万钱财。后来他又想:“这财富实在太多了,这样一点一点地布施有什么意思?我何不用它来作一次大布施呢?”他就禀告国王说:“大王,我家里有这么多钱财,我想用它来作大布施。请大王下令在城里击鼓宣告吧。”国王就照他说的做了。凡是来的人,他都把他们的容器装满,七天之内把全部财产都布施出去了。布施完之后,他想:“作了这样大的布施,再住在家里就不合适了,我何不出家呢?”于是他把这件事告诉了家里的人。他们说:“主人,您别以为家财已经用尽了,我们不久就能用种种办法重新积聚财富。”他们用种种方式劝他留下。他不理会他们的劝留,就出家做了苦行者。巴利
Hiriṃtarantanti hirisuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Anuppanne bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ aññataro brāhmaṇamahāsālo aḍḍho ahosi asītikoṭidhanavibhavo. Tassa ekaputtako ahosi piyo manāpo. So taṃ devakumāraṃ viya nānappakārehi sukhūpakaraṇehi saṃvaḍḍhento taṃ sāpateyyaṃ tassa aniyyātetvāva kālamakāsi saddhiṃ brāhmaṇiyā. Tato tassa māṇavassa mātāpitūnaṃ accayena bhaṇḍāgāriko sāragabbhaṃ vivaritvā sāpateyyaṃ niyyātento āha – ‘‘idaṃ te, sāmi, mātāpitūnaṃ santakaṃ, idaṃ ayyakapayyakānaṃ santakaṃ, idaṃ sattakulaparivaṭṭena āgata’’nti. Māṇavo dhanaṃ disvā cintesi – ‘‘idaṃ dhanaṃyeva dissati, yehi pana idaṃ sañcitaṃ, te na dissanti, sabbeva maccuvasaṃ gatā. Gacchantā ca na ito kiñci ādāya agamaṃsu, evaṃ nāma bhoge pahāya gantabbo paraloko, na sakkā kiñci ādāya gantuṃ aññatra sucaritena. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ imaṃ dhanaṃ pariccajitvā sucaritadhanaṃ gaṇheyyaṃ, yaṃ sakkā ādāya gantu’’nti. So divase divase satasahassaṃ vissajjento puna cintesi – ‘‘pahūtamidaṃ dhanaṃ, kiṃ iminā evamappakena pariccāgena, yaṃnūnāhaṃ mahādānaṃ dadeyya’’nti. So rañño ārocesi – ‘‘mahārāja, mama ghare ettakaṃ dhanaṃ atthi, icchāmi tena mahādānaṃ dātuṃ. Sādhu, mahārāja, nagare ghosanaṃ kārāpethā’’ti. Rājā tathā kārāpesi. So āgatāgatānaṃ bhājanāni pūretvā sattahi divasehi sabbadhanamadāsi , datvā ca cintesi – ‘‘evaṃ mahāpariccāgaṃ katvā ayuttaṃ ghare vasituṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ pabbajeyya’’nti. Tato parijanassa etamatthaṃ ārocesi. Te ‘‘mā, tvaṃ sāmi, ‘dhanaṃ parikkhīṇa’nti cintayi, mayaṃ appakeneva kālena nānāvidhehi upāyehi dhanasañcayaṃ karissāmā’’ti vatvā nānappakārehi taṃ yāciṃsu. So tesaṃ yācanaṃ anādiyitvāva tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbaji.
其中,苦行者有八种:带着妻儿一起的、捡拾落穗为生的、别人给什么就吃什么的、不用火煮食的、手里握着石头的、用牙齿剥树皮的、只吃自然掉落果实的、只吃地上落叶的。
其中,带着妻儿一起的苦行者,就是和儿女妻子一起出家,靠耕种、经商等方式过日子的人,比如羇尼耶结发外道那些人。
捡拾落穗为生的苦行者,就是在城门外建一座茅棚,在那里教刹帝利、婆罗门子弟等学技艺和学问,不接受金银,只接受芝麻、米粒等允许的物品。他们比带着妻儿一起的苦行者更殊胜。
别人给什么就吃什么的苦行者,就是到了吃饭的时候,有人送来食物就拿来吃,以此维持生活。他们比捡拾落穗为生的苦行者更殊胜。
不用火煮食的苦行者,就是只吃没有用火煮过的树叶和果实来维持生活。他们比别人给什么就吃什么的苦行者更殊胜。
手里握着石头的苦行者,就是手里拿着一块石头,或者拿着刀斧之类的东西四处游走,饿了的时候就从遇到的树上剥下树皮来吃,然后受持布萨支,修习四梵住。他们比不用火煮食的苦行者更殊胜。
用牙齿剥树皮的苦行者,就是连石头等东西也不拿,四处游走,饿了的时候就用牙齿从遇到的树上剥下树皮来吃,然后受持布萨支,修习梵住。他们比手里握着石头的苦行者更殊胜。
只吃自然掉落果实的苦行者,就是依靠天然湖泊或密林居住,湖里有藕根等,密林里花季有花、果季有果,他们就只吃这些。如果没有花也没有果,他们甚至吃那里的树皮碎屑来维持生活,绝不会为了找食物而到别处去。他们也受持布萨支,修习梵住。他们比用牙齿剥树皮的苦行者更殊胜。
只吃地上落叶的苦行者,就是只吃掉落在地上、已脱离叶柄的叶子,其余和前面一样。他们是所有苦行者中最殊胜的。巴利
Tattha aṭṭhavidhā tāpasā – saputtabhariyā, uñchācārikā, sampattakālikā, anaggipakkikā, asmamuṭṭhikā, dantaluyyakā, pavattaphalikā, vaṇṭamuttikā cāti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.280). Tattha saputtabhariyāti puttadārena saddhiṃ pabbajitvā kasivaṇijjādīhi jīvikaṃ kappayamānā keṇiyajaṭilādayo. Uñchācārikāti nagaradvāre assamaṃ kārāpetvā tattha khattiyabrāhmaṇakumārādayo sippādīni sikkhāpetvā hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ paṭikkhipitvā tilataṇḍulādikappiyabhaṇḍapaṭiggāhakā, te saputtabhariyehi seṭṭhatarā. Sampattakālikāti āhāravelāya sampattaṃ āhāraṃ gahetvā yāpentā, te uñchācārikehi seṭṭhatarā. Anaggipakkikāti agginā apakkapattaphalāni khāditvā yāpentā, te sampattakālikehi seṭṭhatarā. Asmamuṭṭhikāti muṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ gahetvā aññaṃ vā kiñci vāsisatthakādiṃ gahetvā vicarantā yadā chātā honti, tadā sampattarukkhato tacaṃ gahetvā khāditvā uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya cattāro brahmavihāre bhāventi, te anaggipakkikehi seṭṭhatarā. Dantaluyyakāti muṭṭhipāsāṇādīnipi agahetvā carantā khudākāle sampattarukkhato dantehi uppāṭetvā tacaṃ khāditvā uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya brahmavihāre bhāventi, te asmamuṭṭhikehi seṭṭhatarā. Pavattaphalikāti jātassaraṃ vā vanasaṇḍaṃ vā nissāya vasantā yaṃ tattha sare bhisamuḷālādi, yaṃ vā vanasaṇḍe pupphakāle pupphaṃ, phalakāle phalaṃ, tameva khādanti. Pupphaphale asati antamaso tattha rukkhapapaṭikampi khāditvā vasanti, na tveva āhāratthāya aññatra gacchanti. Uposathaṅgādhiṭṭhānaṃ brahmavihārabhāvanaṃ ca karonti, te dantaluyyakehi seṭṭhatarā. Vaṇṭamuttikā nāma vaṇṭamuttāni bhūmiyaṃ patitāni paṇṇāniyeva khādanti, sesaṃ purimasadisameva, te sabbaseṭṭhā.
这位婆罗门子弟心想:“在各种苦行出家当中,我要出家修最殊胜的那一种。”于是他专门选择了食叶柄苦行出家,越过雪山中两三座山,建了一座茅棚住在那里。那时,世尊出现在世间,转动了殊胜的法轮,逐渐来到舍卫城,住在舍卫城祇园给孤独园。当时,舍卫城有一个人到山里寻找旃檀树心等物,来到他的茅棚,行礼之后站在一旁。苦行者看见他,问道:“你从哪里来?”他说:“从舍卫城来,尊者。”“那里有什么消息?”“尊者,那里的人们不放逸,在做布施等功德。”“他们听了谁的教导?”“佛陀世尊的教导。”苦行者听到“佛陀”这个声音,非常惊讶,就像《臭秽经》里说的那样,一连问了三次:“朋友,你说的是佛陀吗?”他心想:“连这个名号都这么难得听到。”他很欢喜,想去世尊那里,又想:“空着手去见佛陀不合适,我该带点什么去呢?”他又想:“佛陀并不看重物质供养,那我就带一份法的礼物去吧。”于是他准备了四个问题——巴利
Ayaṃ pana brāhmaṇakulaputto ‘‘tāpasapabbajjāsu aggapabbajjaṃ pabbajissāmī’’ti vaṇṭamuttikapabbajjameva pabbajitvā himavante dve tayo pabbate atikkamma assamaṃ kārāpetvā paṭivasati. Atha bhagavā loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakko anupubbena sāvatthiṃ gantvā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme. Tena kho pana samayena sāvatthivāsī eko puriso pabbate candanasārādīni gavesanto tassa assamaṃ patvā abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. So taṃ disvā ‘‘kuto āgatosī’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Sāvatthito, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Kā tattha pavattī’’ti? ‘‘Tattha, bhante, manussā appamattā dānādīni puññāni karontī’’ti. ‘‘Kassa ovādaṃ sutvā’’ti? ‘‘Buddhassa bhagavato’’ti. Tāpaso buddhasaddassavanena vimhito ‘‘buddhoti tvaṃ, bho purisa, vadesī’’ti āmagandhe vuttanayeneva tikkhattuṃ pucchitvā ‘‘ghosopi kho eso dullabho’’ti attamano bhagavato santikaṃ gantukāmo hutvā cintesi – ‘‘na yuttaṃ buddhassa santikaṃ tucchameva gantuṃ, kiṃ nu kho gahetvā gaccheyya’’nti. Puna cintesi – ‘‘buddhā nāma āmisagarukā na honti, handāhaṃ dhammapaṇṇākāraṃ gahetvā gacchāmī’’ti cattāro pañhe abhisaṅkhari –
什么样的朋友不该亲近?什么样的朋友该亲近?
应该怎样精勤用功?在种种滋味当中,什么才是最上的?巴利
‘‘Kīdiso mitto na sevitabbo, kīdiso mitto sevitabbo; Kīdiso payogo payuñjitabbo, kiṃ rasānaṃ agga’’nti.
他拿着那些问题,朝中部地区出发,一路走,到了舍卫城,进入祇园精舍。那时候,世尊正坐在座位上为大众说法。他看见世尊,连礼都没行,就站在一边。世尊用“仙人,还过得去吧?”这样的话跟他打招呼。他也用“过得去,乔达摩贤者”这样的话回应了问候,心里想:“如果这人真是佛陀,他一定会用言语回答我心里问的那些问题。”于是他就在心里向世尊问了那些问题。世尊被这位婆罗门一问,为了先回答第一个问题,便以“越惭者”开头,说了两首半偈颂。巴利
So te pañhe gahetvā majjhimadesābhimukho pakkamitvā anupubbena sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanaṃ paviṭṭho. Bhagavāpi tasmiṃ samaye dhammadesanatthāya āsane nisinnoyeva hoti. So bhagavantaṃ disvā avanditvāva ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavā ‘‘kacci, isi, khamanīya’’ntiādinā nayena sammodi. Sopi ‘‘khamanīyaṃ, bho gotamā’’tiādinā nayena paṭisammoditvā ‘‘yadi buddho bhavissati, manasā pucchite pañhe vācāya eva vissajjessatī’’ti manasā eva bhagavantaṃ te pañhe pucchi. Bhagavā brāhmaṇena puṭṭho ādipañhaṃ tāva vissajjetuṃ hiriṃ tarantanti ārabhitvā aḍḍhateyyā gāthāyo āha.
256 256. 这些偈颂的意思是:“越惭者”,就是指跨越了惭耻、没有惭耻、不知羞耻的人。“厌恶而视之”,是指看待它就像看不净物一样。无惭者确实厌恶惭耻,看它就像看不净物一样,因此人们不与他结交,不亲近他。所以说“厌恶而视之”。“称‘我是你的’”,是指像这样说:“朋友,我是你的同伴,一心为你好、希望你快乐,我甚至愿意为你献出生命。”用这类方式来说话。“不承担可办之事”,是指虽然这样说了,但对于那些他做得到的事,却不去承担,不为成办这些事而努力;或者说,他心里对这些事连一点敬意都没有,而且每当有事情出现时,他只会表现出为难。对于这种人,有智慧的人应当这样辨认——“此非我友”:应当知道:“这是假朋友,不是我的朋友。”巴利
256. Tāsaṃ attho – hiriṃ tarantanti hiriṃ atikkamantaṃ ahirikaṃ nillajjaṃ. Vijigucchamānanti asucimiva passamānaṃ. Ahiriko hi hiriṃ jigucchati asucimiva passati, tena naṃ na bhajati na allīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vijigucchamāna’’nti. Tavāhamasmi iti bhāsamānanti ‘‘ahaṃ, samma, tava sahāyo hitakāmo sukhakāmo, jīvitampi me tuyhaṃ atthāya pariccatta’’nti evamādinā nayena bhāsamānaṃ. Sayhāni kammāni anādiyantanti evaṃ bhāsitvāpi ca sayhāni kātuṃ sakkānipi tassa kammāni anādiyantaṃ karaṇatthāya asamādiyantaṃ. Atha vā cittena tattha ādaramattampi akarontaṃ, apica kho pana uppannesu kiccesu byasanameva dassentaṃ. Neso mamanti iti naṃ vijaññāti taṃ evarūpaṃ ‘‘mittapaṭirūpako eso, neso me mitto’’ti evaṃ paṇḍito puriso vijāneyya.
257 “不随顺”是指:他说“我要说明这个道理,我要去做这件事”,但实际行为却并不跟着这些话走。所谓“在朋友中说可爱话的人”,是指有人用过去、未来的话去应酬,拿毫无意义的话去拉拢人,纯粹只是在朋友之间说些只有言辞影子的好听话。对于这种说了却不做、只是嘴上说说的人,智者会这样判定并知道:“这人只是个言语至上者,不是真朋友,是假朋友。”巴利
257.Ananvayanti yaṃ atthaṃ dassāmi, karissāmīti ca bhāsati, tena ananugataṃ. Piyaṃ vācaṃ yo mittesu pakubbatīti yo atītānāgatehi padehi paṭisantharanto niratthakena saṅgaṇhanto kevalaṃ byañjanacchāyāmatteneva piyaṃ mittesu vācaṃ pavatteti. Akarontaṃ bhāsamānaṃ, parijānanti paṇḍitāti evarūpaṃ yaṃ bhāsati, taṃ akarontaṃ, kevalaṃ vācāya bhāsamānaṃ ‘‘vacīparamo nāmesa amitto mittapaṭirūpako’’ti evaṃ paricchinditvā paṇḍitā jānanti.
258 他不是真正的朋友:如果一个人总是担心友情会破裂,表面上却装出亲切的样子,时刻提防着,那么对方因为失念、没有作意而做的任何事,或者因为无知而没有做的任何事,他都只盯着过失,心里盘算着:“等他指责我的时候,我就拿这件事去回击他。”这样的人只看见对方的过错,不是应该亲近的朋友。巴利
258.Na so mitto yo sadā appamatto, bhedāsaṅkī randhamevānupassīti yo bhedameva āsaṅkamāno katamadhurena upacārena sadā appamatto viharati, yaṃkiñci assatiyā amanasikārena kataṃ, aññāṇakena vā akataṃ, ‘‘yadā maṃ garahissati, tadā naṃ etena paṭicodessāmī’’ti evaṃ randhameva anupassati, na so mitto sevitabboti.
世尊这样回答了“什么样的人不该结交”这第一个问题之后,为了回答第二个问题,说出了这半颂:“又于何处,他信赖地安住。”它的意思是:对于某位朋友,他完全进入对方心中而安住。就像儿子睡在父亲胸口,心里毫无疑虑,不会想“我这样睡在他胸口,会不会让他痛苦或不高兴”——就这样毫无疑虑地安住。同样地,在妻子、财富、生命等事上,他也这样信赖对方,以朋友的身份毫无疑虑地安住。如果有人被别人用百般理由、千般理由来挑拨,也绝不能被离间,这样的人才是应当结交的朋友。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā ‘‘kīdiso mitto na sevitabbo’’ti imaṃ ādipañhaṃ vissajjetvā dutiyaṃ vissajjetuṃ ‘‘yasmiñca setī’’ti imaṃ upaḍḍhagāthamāha. Tassattho yasmiñca mitte mitto tassa hadayamanupavisitvā sayanena yathā nāma pitu urasi putto ‘‘imassa mayi urasi sayante dukkhaṃ vā anattamanatā vā bhaveyyā’’tiādīhi aparisaṅkamāno nibbisaṅko hutvā seti, evamevaṃ dāradhanajīvitādīsu vissāsaṃ karonto mittabhāvena nibbisaṅko seti. Yo ca parehi kāraṇasataṃ kāraṇasahassampi vatvā abhejjo, sa ve mitto sevitabboti.
259 世尊这样解答了“应该结交什么样的朋友”这第二个问题之后,为了解答第三个问题,说出“能生欢悦”这首偈颂。它的意思是:能让人生起欢悦,所以叫“能生欢悦”。“处”就是原因。那又是什么呢?是精进。因为这种精进与法相应,能引生喜、欢悦和快乐,所以称为“能生欢悦”。正如经中所说:“比丘们,在善说的法与律中,谁已发起精进,谁就安住在安乐中。”能带来称赞,所以叫“带来称赞”。因为它从一开始能带来天界与人间的快乐,到最后能带来涅槃的快乐,所以从果的角度假名为“乐”。因为期盼这个果报,所以叫“具有果报之利”。“修习”就是增长。“承担人的担子”,就是担起与男子相称的重担而安住,修习这个名为正勤精进的处。这样的努力,应当去亲近。巴利
259. Evaṃ bhagavā ‘‘kīdiso mitto sevitabbo’’ti evaṃ dutiyapañhaṃ vissajjetvā tatiyaṃ vissajjetuṃ ‘‘pāmujjakaraṇa’’nti gāthamāha. Tassattho – pāmujjaṃ karotīti pāmujjakaraṇaṃ. Ṭhānanti kāraṇaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Vīriyaṃ. Tañhi dhammūpasañhitaṃ pītipāmojjasukhamuppādanato pāmujjakaraṇanti vuccati. Yathāha ‘‘svākhāte, bhikkhave, dhammavinaye yo āraddhavīriyo, so sukhaṃ viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.319). Pasaṃsaṃ āvahatīti pasaṃsāvahanaṃ. Ādito dibbamānusakasukhānaṃ , pariyosāne nibbānasukhassa āvahanato phalūpacārena sukhaṃ. Phalaṃ paṭikaṅkhamāno phalānisaṃso. Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti. Vahanto porisaṃ dhuranti purisānucchavikaṃ bhāraṃ ādāya viharanto etaṃ sammappadhānavīriyasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ bhāveti, īdiso payogo sevitabboti.
260 世尊这样解答了“应当运用怎样的努力”这第三个问题之后,为了解答第四个问题,说出这首偈颂:“远离之味……”
其中,“远离”:因为是从烦恼的远离中生起的,所以指最高的果——阿罗汉果;它的“味”,就是从品尝的意义上说的、与它相应的乐。“寂静”也是指这个,因为是从烦恼止息中生起的,或者因为是以称为涅槃的寂静为所缘。“法喜之味”也是指这个,因为那是从不离圣法、在称为涅槃的法中生起的喜的味。饮了这远离之味和寂静之味,也就是饮了那法喜之味,他就成为无苦、无罪。饮了之后,因为没有烦恼的烧灼,所以无苦;正在饮的时候,因为已经断除了罪恶,所以无罪。因此,这是诸味中的最上者。
不过,有些人把它理解为:“依禅那、涅槃与省察,以及身远离、心远离、依远离,这三种法就是远离之味等。”但前面那种解说才是更好的。
世尊这样解答第四个问题,以阿罗汉果为顶点结束了这次开示。开示结束时,那位婆罗门在世尊座下出家,仅仅几天就证得无碍解,成为阿罗汉。巴利
260. Evaṃ bhagavā ‘‘kīdiso payogo payuñjitabbo’’ti tatiyapañhaṃ vissajjetvā catutthaṃ vissajjetuṃ ‘‘pavivekarasa’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha pavivekoti kilesavivekato jātattā aggaphalaṃ vuccati, tassa rasoti assādanaṭṭhena taṃsampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ. Upasamopi kilesūpasamante jātattā nibbānasaṅkhātaupasamārammaṇattā vā tadeva, dhammapītirasopi ariyadhammato anapetāya nibbānasaṅkhāte dhamme uppannāya pītiyā rasattā tadeva. Taṃ pavivekarasaṃ upasamassa ca rasaṃ pitvā tadeva dhammapītirasaṃ pivaṃ niddaro hoti nippāpo, pivitvāpi kilesapariḷāhābhāvena niddaro, pivantopi pahīnapāpattā nippāpo hoti, tasmā etaṃ rasānamagganti. Keci pana ‘‘jhānanibbānapaccavekkhaṇānaṃ kāyacittaupadhivivekānañca vasena pavivekarasādayo tayo eva ete dhammā’’ti yojenti , purimameva sundaraṃ. Evaṃ bhagavā catutthapañhaṃ vissajjento arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Desanāpariyosāne brāhmaṇo bhagavato santike pabbajitvā katipāheneva paṭisambhidāppatto arahā ahosīti.
《经集》义注巴利
Suttanipāta-aṭṭhakathā
4. 《吉祥经》的注释巴利
4. Maṅgalasuttavaṇṇanā
这部《吉祥经》以“如是我闻”开头。它是怎么来的呢?据说在赡部洲,各地城门口、集会厅、会堂等地方,大众聚在一起,施舍金银,请人讲述各种悉多被劫之类的世俗外道故事,每讲一个故事都要花四个月才结束。有一天,那里有人提起了一个关于吉祥的话题:“到底什么是吉祥?什么是见到的吉祥、听到的吉祥、感知到的吉祥?谁知道吉祥?”巴利
Evaṃme sutanti maṅgalasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Jambudīpe kira tattha tattha nagaradvārasanthāgārasabhādīsu mahājanā sannipatitvā hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ datvā nānappakāraṃ sītāharaṇādibāhirakakathaṃ kathāpenti, ekekā kathā catumāsaccayena niṭṭhāti. Tattha ekadivasaṃ maṅgalakathā samuṭṭhāsi – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho maṅgalaṃ, kiṃ diṭṭhaṃ maṅgalaṃ, sutaṃ maṅgalaṃ, mutaṃ maṅgalaṃ, ko maṅgalaṃ jānātī’’ti?
这时,有个叫“见吉祥”的人说:“我知道什么是吉祥。世间上看得见的东西就是吉祥。所谓‘看得见的东西’,就是大家公认最吉祥的色相。比如说:有人清早起来,看见沙雉鸟,或者看见木苹果树的嫩枝,或者看见孕妇,或者看见打扮得漂漂亮亮的男孩,或者看见装满水的罐子,或者看见鲜红色的鱼,或者看见良马,或者看见良马拉的车,或者看见公牛,或者看见母牛,或者看见黄褐色的东西,乃至看见其他任何类似这样被公认为最吉祥的色相。这就叫做‘见吉祥’。”有些人接受了他的说法,有些人不接受。不接受的人就跟他争论起来。巴利
Atha diṭṭhamaṅgaliko nāmeko puriso āha – ‘‘ahaṃ maṅgalaṃ jānāmi, diṭṭhaṃ loke maṅgalaṃ, diṭṭhaṃ nāma abhimaṅgalasammataṃ rūpaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – idhekacco kālasseva vuṭṭhāya cātakasakuṇaṃ vā passati, beluvalaṭṭhiṃ vā gabbhiniṃ vā kumārake vā alaṅkatapaṭiyatte puṇṇaghaṭaṃ vā allarohitamacchaṃ vā ājaññaṃ vā ājaññarathaṃ vā usabhaṃ vā gāviṃ vā kapilaṃ vā, yaṃ vā panaññampi kiñci evarūpaṃ abhimaṅgalasammataṃ rūpaṃ passati, idaṃ vuccati diṭṭhamaṅgala’’nti. Tassa vacanaṃ ekacce aggahesuṃ, ekacce nāggahesuṃ. Ye nāggahesuṃ, te tena saha vivadiṃsu.
接着,又有一个叫“闻吉祥论者”的人说:“诸位贤友,眼睛这东西,既能看到干净的,也能看到不干净的;既能看好东西,也能看不好看的东西;既能看顺眼的,也能看不顺眼的。如果眼睛看到的东西算吉祥,那岂不是一切看到的都成了吉祥?所以,看到的不是吉祥。真正算吉祥的是听到的。所谓‘听到的’,就是大家公认为最上吉祥的声音。比如有人清早起来,听到有人喊‘增长’‘增长中’‘圆满’‘繁荣’‘善喜’‘吉祥’‘吉祥增长’,或者听到‘今天是好星宿、好时辰、好日子、大吉祥’这一类被公认为最上吉祥的声音。这就叫闻吉祥。”有些人接受了他的说法,有些人不接受。不接受的人就跟他争论起来。巴利
Atha sutamaṅgaliko nāmeko puriso āha – ‘‘cakkhu nāmetaṃ, bho, sucimpi asucimpi passati, tathā sundarampi asundarampi, manāpampi amanāpampi. Yadi tena diṭṭhaṃ maṅgalaṃ siyā, sabbampi maṅgalaṃ siyā, tasmā na diṭṭhaṃ maṅgalaṃ, apica kho pana sutaṃ maṅgalaṃ, sutaṃ nāma abhimaṅgalasammato saddo. Seyyathidaṃ – idhekacco kālasseva vuṭṭhāya vaḍḍhāti vā vaḍḍhamānāti vā puṇṇāti vā phussāti vā sumanāti vā sirīti vā sirivaḍḍhāti vā ajja sunakkhattaṃ sumuhuttaṃ sudivasaṃ sumaṅgalanti evarūpaṃ vā yaṃkiñci abhimaṅgalasammataṃ saddaṃ suṇāti, idaṃ vuccati sutamaṅgala’’nti. Tassapi vacanaṃ ekacce aggahesuṃ, ekacce nāggahesuṃ. Ye nāggahesuṃ, te tena saha vivadiṃsu.
接着,又有一个叫“觉吉祥论者”的人说:“贤者们,耳朵这东西,好的也听,不好的也听,悦意的也听,不悦意的也听。如果听到的东西算是吉祥,那一切听到的就都该是吉祥了。所以,所闻不是吉祥。真正吉祥的是所觉。所谓‘所觉’,就是大家公认为最上吉祥的香、味、触。比如有人清早起来,闻到莲花香等各种花香,或者嚼弗沙树的枝芽,或者摸大地,或者摸绿油油的庄稼、新鲜牛粪、乌龟、芝麻束、花、果,或者用弗沙泥好好涂身,或者穿弗沙衣,或者戴弗沙头巾,乃至闻到、尝到、触到任何其他类似被公认为最上吉祥的香、味、触,这就叫觉吉祥。”有些人接受了他的说法,有些人不接受。巴利
Atha mutamaṅgaliko nāmeko puriso āha – ‘‘sotampi hi nāmetaṃ bho sādhumpi asādhumpi manāpampi amanāpampi suṇāti. Yadi tena sutaṃ maṅgalaṃ siyā, sabbampi maṅgalaṃ siyā, tasmā na sutaṃ maṅgalaṃ, apica kho pana mutaṃ maṅgalaṃ, mutaṃ nāma abhimaṅgalasammataṃ gandharasaphoṭṭhabbaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – idhekacco kālasseva vuṭṭhāya padumagandhādipupphagandhaṃ vā ghāyati, phussadantakaṭṭhaṃ vā khādati, pathaviṃ vā āmasati, haritasassaṃ vā allagomayaṃ vā kacchapaṃ vā tilavāhaṃ vā pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā āmasati, phussamattikāya vā sammā limpati, phussasāṭakaṃ vā nivāseti, phussaveṭhanaṃ vā dhāreti, yaṃ vā panaññampi kiñci evarūpaṃ abhimaṅgalasammataṃ gandhaṃ vā ghāyati, rasaṃ vā sāyati, phoṭṭhabbaṃ vā phusati, idaṃ vuccati mutamaṅgala’’nti. Tassapi vacanaṃ ekacce aggahesuṃ, ekacce nāggahesuṃ.
在这其中,那位主张“见吉祥”的人无法说服主张“闻吉祥”和“觉吉祥”的人,他们三人中任何一方也无法说服另外两方。在那些人当中,接受了“见吉祥”论者说法的人,就执持“只有所见才是吉祥”;接受了“闻吉祥”和“觉吉祥”论者说法的人,就执持“只有所闻才是吉祥”“只有所觉才是吉祥”。就这样,这场关于吉祥的讨论在整个赡部洲传开了,变得家喻户晓。巴利
Tattha na diṭṭhamaṅgaliko sutamutamaṅgalike asakkhi saññāpetuṃ. Na tesaṃ aññataro itare dve. Tesu ca manussesu ye diṭṭhamaṅgalikassa vacanaṃ gaṇhiṃsu, te ‘‘diṭṭhaṃyeva maṅgala’’nti gatā. Ye sutamutamaṅgalikānaṃ vacanaṃ gaṇhiṃsu, te ‘‘sutaṃyeva mutaṃyeva maṅgala’’nti gatā. Evamayaṃ maṅgalakathā sakalajambudīpe pākaṭā jātā.
那时,整个阎浮提洲的人们一群一群聚在一起,心里琢磨:“到底什么才是吉祥?”人们的守护天神听到这些话,也照样琢磨起吉祥来。那些守护天神和地居天神是朋友,地居天神从他们那里听到后,也照样琢磨起吉祥来。那些天神又和空居天神是朋友,空居天神又和四天王天是朋友。就这样一层层传上去,一直到善见天,善见天又和阿迦腻吒天是朋友,阿迦腻吒天从他们那里听到后,也照样一群一群聚在一起,琢磨起吉祥来。这样一来,在一万个轮围世界里,到处都兴起了对吉祥的琢磨。这种琢磨虽然被大家反复判定“这是吉祥”“那是吉祥”,但过了十二年,仍然没能得出一个结论。除了圣弟子以外,所有的人、天神和梵天,都按照自己所见、所闻、所觉知的不同,分成了三派。没有一个人能如实地确定“只有这才是吉祥”,于是世间就出现了“吉祥喧哗”。巴利
Atha sakalajambudīpe manussā gumbagumbā hutvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho maṅgala’’nti maṅgalāni cintayiṃsu . Tesaṃ manussānaṃ ārakkhadevatā taṃ kathaṃ sutvā tatheva maṅgalāni cintayiṃsu. Tāsaṃ devatānaṃ bhummadevatā mittā honti, atha tato sutvā bhummadevatāpi tatheva maṅgalāni cintayiṃsu. Tāsampi devatānaṃ ākāsaṭṭhadevatā mittā honti, ākāsaṭṭhadevatānaṃ cātumahārājikadevatā. Eteneva upāyena yāva sudassīdevatānaṃ akaniṭṭhadevatā mittā honti, atha tato sutvā akaniṭṭhadevatāpi tatheva gumbagumbā hutvā maṅgalāni cintayiṃsu. Evaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷesu sabbattha maṅgalacintā udapādi. Uppannā ca sā ‘‘idaṃ maṅgalaṃ idaṃ maṅgala’’nti vinicchiyamānāpi appattā eva vinicchayaṃ dvādasa vassāni aṭṭhāsi. Sabbe manussā ca devā ca brahmāno ca ṭhapetvā ariyasāvake diṭṭhasutamutavasena tidhā bhinnā. Ekopi ‘‘idameva maṅgala’’nti yathābhuccato niṭṭhaṅgato nāhosi, maṅgalakolāhalaṃ loke uppajji.
所谓喧哗有五种:劫喧哗、转轮王喧哗、佛喧哗、吉祥喧哗、牟尼喧哗。其中,欲界的天神们披散着头发,满脸泪痕,用手擦着眼泪,身穿红衣,打扮得极其怪异,在人间游走宣告:“十万年之后,劫灭将要发生。这个世界将会毁灭,大海将会干涸,这片大地和须弥山王都将被烧毁、毁灭,世界的毁灭会一直蔓延到梵天界。朋友们,要修习慈心!朋友们,要修习悲心、喜心、舍心!要孝敬母亲,孝敬父亲,敬重家族中的长辈,要保持警醒,不要放逸!”这就叫劫喧哗。巴利
Kolāhalaṃ nāma pañcavidhaṃ – kappakolāhalaṃ, cakkavattikolāhalaṃ, buddhakolāhalaṃ, maṅgalakolāhalaṃ, moneyyakolāhalanti. Tattha kāmāvacaradevā muttasirā vikiṇṇakesā rudammukhā assūni hatthehi puñchamānā rattavatthanivatthā ativiya virūpavesadhārino hutvā, ‘‘vassasatasahassassa accayena kappuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissati. Ayaṃ loko vinassissati, mahāsamuddo sussissati, ayañca mahāpathavī sineru ca pabbatarājā uḍḍhayhissati vinassissati, yāva brahmalokā lokavināso bhavissati. Mettaṃ, mārisā, bhāvetha, karuṇaṃ muditaṃ upekkhaṃ, mārisā, bhāvetha, mātaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, pitaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino hotha, jāgaratha mā pamādatthā’’ti manussapathe vicaritvā ārocenti. Idaṃ kappakolāhalaṃ nāma.
正是那些欲界的天神,游行在人间,宣告说:再过一百年,转轮王就要出现在世间了。这就叫做转轮王喧哗。巴利
Kāmāvacaradevāyeva ‘‘vassasatassaccayena cakkavattirājā loke uppajjissatī’’ti manussapathe vicaritvā ārocenti. Idaṃ cakkavattikolāhalaṃ nāma.
净居天的天人们用梵天的装饰打扮自己,把梵天的头巾缠在头上,满心欢喜快乐,称颂佛陀的功德,游行在人间宣告:过了一千年之后,佛陀将会出现在世间。这叫做佛喧哗。巴利
Suddhāvāsā pana devā brahmābharaṇena alaṅkaritvā brahmaveṭhanaṃ sīse katvā pītisomanassajātā buddhaguṇavādino ‘‘vassasahassassa accayena buddho loke uppajjissatī’’ti manussapathe vicaritvā ārocenti. Idaṃ buddhakolāhalaṃ nāma.
净居天的天人们知道了人们的心念,就在人间的道路上行走,宣告说:十二年后,正自觉者将会宣说吉祥。这叫作吉祥喧哗。巴利
Suddhāvāsā eva devā manussānaṃ cittaṃ ñatvā ‘‘dvādasannaṃ vassānaṃ accayena sammāsambuddho maṅgalaṃ kathessatī’’ti manussapathe vicaritvā ārocenti. Idaṃ maṅgalakolāhalaṃ nāma.
净居天的天人们就在人间的道路上行走,宣告说:“七年后,会有一位比丘与世尊相聚,询问牟尼之行。”这叫作牟尼喧哗。在这五种喧哗中,当天人和人们因为所见吉祥等而分成三类时,这种吉祥喧哗就在世间出现了。巴利
Suddhāvāsā eva devā ‘‘sattannaṃ vassānaṃ accayena aññataro bhikkhu bhagavatā saddhiṃ samāgamma moneyyapaṭipadaṃ pucchissatī’’ti manussapathe vicaritvā ārocenti. Idaṃ moneyyakolāhalaṃ nāma. Imesu pañcasu kolāhalesu diṭṭhamaṅgalādivasena tidhā bhinnesu devamanussesu idaṃ maṅgalakolāhalaṃ loke uppajji.
那时,天神和人们到处寻找吉祥,却始终找不到。十二年过去后,忉利天的天神们聚在一起,共同商量:“诸位朋友,就像一家之主是家中人的首领,村长是村民的首领,国王是所有百姓的首领一样,这位帝释天王也是我们当中最高、最尊的,他凭福德、威光、自在和智慧,成为两个天界的主宰。我们不如去问帝释天王这件事吧。”
于是他们来到帝释天王那里。当时帝释天王身穿与那一刻相称的衣服和饰物,身体光彩庄严,被两千五百万天女围绕,坐在波利质多罗树下的黄色毛毯胜座上。众天神上前礼敬帝释天王,站在一旁,对他说:“朋友,您应该知道,现在关于吉祥的问题已经出现了。有人说‘所见的就是吉祥’,有人说‘所听的就是吉祥’,有人说‘所感知的就是吉祥’。我们和其他人都还没弄清楚,请您如实为我们解答。”
帝释天王本来就很有智慧,问道:“这个关于吉祥的说法,最早是从哪里出现的?”
他们回答:“大王,我们是从四大天王天那里听来的。”
接着,四大天王天是从空居天那里听来的,空居天是从地居天那里听来的,地居天是从守护人间的天神那里听来的,而守护人间的天神说:“这是在人间出现的。”巴利
Atha devesu ca manussesu ca vicinitvā vicinitvā maṅgalāni alabhamānesu dvādasannaṃ vassānaṃ accayena tāvatiṃsakāyikā devatā saṅgamma samāgamma evaṃ samacintesuṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi nāma, mārisā, gharasāmiko antogharajanānaṃ, gāmasāmiko gāmavāsīnaṃ, rājā sabbamanussānaṃ, evamevaṃ ayaṃ sakko devānamindo amhākaṃ aggo ca seṭṭho ca yadidaṃ puññena tejena issariyena paññāya dvinnaṃ devalokānaṃ adhipati. Yaṃnūna mayaṃ sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ etamatthaṃ puccheyyāmā’’ti. Tā sakkassa santikaṃ gantvā sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ taṅkhaṇānurūpanivāsanābharaṇasassirikasarīraṃ aḍḍhateyyakoṭiaccharāgaṇaparivutaṃ pāricchattakamūle paṇḍukambalavarāsane nisinnaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ ṭhatvā etadavocuṃ – ‘‘yagghe, mārisa, jāneyyāsi, etarahi maṅgalapañhā samuṭṭhitā, eke diṭṭhaṃ maṅgalanti vadanti, eke sutaṃ maṅgalanti vadanti, eke mutaṃ maṅgalanti vadanti. Tattha mayañca aññe ca aniṭṭhaṅgatā, sādhu vata no tvaṃ yāthāvato byākarohī’’ti. Devarājā pakatiyāpi paññavā ‘‘ayaṃ maṅgalakathā kattha paṭhamaṃ samuṭṭhitā’’ti āha. ‘‘Mayaṃ deva cātumahārājikānaṃ assumhā’’ti āhaṃsu. Tato cātumahārājikā ākāsaṭṭhadevatānaṃ, ākāsaṭṭhadevatā bhummadevatānaṃ, bhummadevatā manussārakkhadevatānaṃ, manussārakkhadevatā ‘‘manussaloke samuṭṭhitā’’ti āhaṃsu.
这时,帝释天王问:“正自觉者现在住在哪里?”众天神回答:“在人间,大王。”帝释又问:“有谁去请教过那位世尊吗?”众天神说:“没有哪位天神请教过。”帝释说:“朋友们,你们这不是丢了火去点萤火虫吗?你们放着那位能圆满开示一切吉祥的世尊不去问,却觉得该来问我?来吧,朋友们,我们去请教那位世尊,一定能得到光彩殊胜的解答。”于是他命令一位天子:“你去请教世尊。”那位天子立刻用与当时场合相称的装饰打扮自己,像闪电一样闪闪发光,在天众的围绕下来到祇园大精舍,礼敬世尊,站在一旁,以偈颂请教吉祥的问题。世尊为他解答那个问题,便说了这部经。巴利
Atha devānamindo ‘‘sammāsambuddho kattha vasatī’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Manussaloke, devā’’ti āhaṃsu. ‘‘Taṃ bhagavantaṃ koci pucchī’’ti āha. ‘‘Na koci devā’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ nu kho nāma tumhe mārisā aggiṃ chaḍḍetvā khajjopanakaṃ ujjāletha, ye anavasesamaṅgaladesakaṃ taṃ bhagavantaṃ atikkamitvā maṃ pucchitabbaṃ maññatha? Āgacchatha, mārisā, taṃ bhagavantaṃ pucchāma, addhā sassirikaṃ pañhabyākaraṇaṃ labhissāmā’’ti ekaṃ devaputtaṃ āṇāpesi – ‘‘tvaṃ bhagavantaṃ pucchā’’ti. So devaputto taṅkhaṇānurūpena alaṅkārena attānaṃ alaṅkaritvā vijjuriva vijjotamāno devagaṇaparivuto jetavanamahāvihāraṃ āgantvā bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā ekamantaṃ ṭhatvā maṅgalapañhaṃ pucchanto gāthāya ajjhabhāsi. Bhagavā tassa taṃ pañhaṃ vissajjento imaṃ suttamabhāsi.
在这里,“如是我闻”等句的含义,简要来说已在《耕田婆罗堕阇经》的注释中讲过;如果想要详细了解,就应当按照《破除迷执·中部注》中所说的方式去掌握。在《耕田婆罗堕阇经》里说的是“住在摩揭陀国南山一个叫一村的婆罗门村落”,而这里说的是“住在舍卫城祇树给孤独园”。因此,我们以“在舍卫城”这一句为起点,来对这里尚未解释的词句作注释。巴利
Tattha evaṃ me sutantiādīnamattho saṅkhepato kasibhāradvājasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto, vitthāraṃ pana icchantehi papañcasūdaniyā majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena gahetabbo. Kasibhāradvājasutte ca ‘‘magadhesu viharati dakkhiṇāgirismiṃ ekanāḷāyaṃ brāhmaṇagāme’’ti vuttaṃ, idha ‘‘sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘sāvatthiya’’nti imaṃ padaṃ ādiṃ katvā idha apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ karissāma.
所谓“舍卫城”,就是一座叫这个名字的城市。据说那里曾是名叫舍卫的仙人的住处。因此,就像拘萨婆的住处叫憍赏弥、迦旃陀的住处叫迦旃提那样,按照阴性词形,就称为“舍卫城”。不过古代论师们是这样解说的:因为那个地方商队聚集时,有人问“有什么货物”,大家回答“什么都有”,根据这个说法,就称为“舍卫城”。在舍卫城里——这一句说明了他游化乞食的村落。祇陀是一位王子,因为那片林苑是他种植培育的,所以叫祇园,也就是在祇园中。无依者的食物存在于他那里,所以叫给孤独,就是那位给孤独长者的。给孤独长者以五亿四千万的舍财建成林园,这是其含义。这一句说明了适合出家人居住的住所。巴利
Seyyathidaṃ, sāvatthiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Taṃ kira savatthassa nāma isino nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ ahosi. Tasmā yathā kusambassa nivāso kosambī, kākaṇḍassa nivāso kākaṇḍīti, evaṃ itthiliṅgavasena ‘‘sāvatthī’’ti vuccati. Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – yasmā tasmiṃ ṭhāne satthasamāyoge ‘‘kiṃbhaṇḍamatthī’’ti pucchite ‘‘sabbamatthī’’ti āhaṃsu, tasmā taṃ vacanamupādāya ‘‘sāvatthī’’ti vuccati. Tassaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ. Etenassa gocaragāmo dīpito hoti. Jeto nāma rājakumāro, tena ropitasaṃvaḍḍhitattā tassa jetassa vananti jetavanaṃ, tasmiṃ jetavane. Anāthānaṃ piṇḍo etasmiṃ atthīti anāthapiṇḍiko, tassa anāthapiṇḍikassa. Anāthapiṇḍikena gahapatinā catupaṇṇāsakoṭipariccāgena niṭṭhāpitārāmeti attho. Etenassa pabbajitānurūpanivāsokāso dīpito hoti.
“Atha”这个词表示不间断,“kho”是一个用来引出另一件事的虚词。借此说明:世尊住在那里时,相续不断地“生起了这样一件别的事”。是什么事呢?就是“某一位天神”等。其中“某一位”是不确定的说法。因为她的名字和族姓都不为人知,所以只说“某一位”。“天”本身就是“天神”,这是男女通用的说法。但这里实际上是一位男性,也就是那位天子,只是依照通行的名称而称作“天神”。巴利
Athāti avicchedatthe, khoti adhikārantaranidassanatthe nipāto. Tena avicchinneyeva tattha bhagavato vihāre ‘‘idamadhikārantaraṃ udapādī’’ti dasseti. Kiṃ tanti? Aññatarā devatātiādi. Tattha aññatarāti aniyamitaniddeso. Sā hi nāmagottato apākaṭā, tasmā ‘‘aññatarā’’ti vuttā. Devo eva devatā, itthipurisasādhāraṇametaṃ. Idha pana puriso eva so devaputto, kintu sādhāraṇanāmavasena ‘‘devatā’’ti vutto.
在“夜已深”这一句里,“abhikkanta”这个词出现在耗尽、美好、合宜、随喜等意思中。其中,在“尊者,夜已深,初夜分已过,比丘僧众久坐,请世尊为比丘们诵巴帝摩卡”这类语句中,它表示耗尽的意思。在“此人在这四种人当中,更为殊胜、更为精妙”这类语句中,它表示美好的意思。巴利
Abhikkantāyarattiyāti ettha abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘abhikkantā, bhante, ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho. Uddisatu, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha’’nti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 383; a. ni. 8.20; udā. 45) khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro ca paṇītataro cā’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.100) sundare.
是谁以神通和名声的光辉,来礼敬我的双足?
以极其殊胜的容色,照亮了一切方向。巴利
‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ; Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā’’ti. (vi. va. 857) –
在“美丽”这类用法中是这样;而在“贤者们,乔达摩真是殊胜!贤者们,乔达摩真是殊胜!”这类语句中,它用于表示随喜。但在这里,它取的是“耗尽”的意思。因此,“abhikkantāya rattiyā”说的就是夜已穷尽。巴利
Evamādīsu abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamā’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 2.16; pārā. 15) abbhanumodane. Idha pana khaye. Tena abhikkantāya rattiyā, parikkhīṇāya rattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
在“abhikkantavaṇṇā”这个词里,“abhikkanta”表示美丽;而“vaṇṇa”这个词则出现在肤色、称赞、种姓阶层、原因、形状、大小、色处等多种语境中。比如在“世尊具有金色肤色”这类语句中,指的是肤色;在“居士!你是从什么时候开始聚集起这些对沙门乔达摩的称赞的?”这类语句中,指的是称赞;在“乔达摩贤者!有这四种姓”这类语句中,指的是种姓阶层;在“那么,到底是因什么原因而称为香贼呢?”这类语句中,指的是原因;在“变化出巨大的龙象形状之后”这类语句中,指的是形状;在“钵有三种大小”这类语句中,指的是大小;在“色、香、味、食素”这类语句中,指的是色处。在这里,应当把它理解为肤色。因此,“abhikkantavaṇṇā”就是说肤色美丽。巴利
Abhikkantavaṇṇāti ettha abhikkantasaddo abhirūpe, vaṇṇasaddo pana chavithutikulavaggakāraṇasaṇṭhānappamāṇarūpāyatanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 2.399; su. ni. 553) chaviyaṃ. ‘‘Kadā saññūḷhā pana te, gahapati, ime samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 2.77) thutiyaṃ. ‘‘Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 3.115) kulavagge. ‘‘Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhatthenoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.234) kāraṇe. ‘‘Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) saṇṭhāne. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’ti evamādīsu pamāṇe. ‘‘Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā’’ti evamādīsu rūpāyatane. So idha chaviyaṃ daṭṭhabbo. Tena abhikkantavaṇṇā abhirūpacchavīti vuttaṃ hoti.
在“kevalakappanti”这个词里,“kevala”这个词有无余、多数、无混杂、无超出、坚固、离系等多种含义。比如,在“完全圆满、清净的梵行”这类语句中,它的意思是“无余”;在“几乎所有的盎嘎-摩揭陀人都会带着丰盛的嚼食、噉食前来”这类语句中,它的意思是“多数”;在“纯大苦蕴的集”这类语句中,它的意思是“无混杂”;在“这位具寿大概只是有信而已”这类语句中,它的意思是“无超出”;在“尊者!具寿阿那律的同伴比丘巴希卡,坚持要破僧”这类语句中,它的意思是“坚固”;在“称为已住立者、无学者、最上士”这类语句中,它的意思是“离系”。但在这里,取的是它“无余”的意思。巴利
Kevalakappanti ettha kevalasaddo anavasesayebhuyyaabyāmissaanatirekadaḷhatthavisaṃyogādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariya’’nti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.255; pārā. 1) anavasesatā attho. ‘‘Kevalakappā ca aṅgamāgadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ ādāya upasaṅkamissantī’’ti evamādīsu (mahāva. 43) yebhuyyatā. ‘‘Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti evamādīsu (vibha. 225) abyāmissatā. ‘‘Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā’’ti evamādīsu (mahāva. 244) anatirekatā. ‘‘Āyasmato bhante anuruddhassa bāhiko nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito’’ti evamādīsu (a. ni. 4.243) daḷhatthatā. ‘‘Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.57) visaṃyogo. Idha panassa anavasesato attho adhippeto.
而“kappa”这个词,则有信受、言说、时间、施设、剪断、开许、少许、遍满等多种含义。比如在“尊者乔达摩,这是可以信受的,正如对阿罗汉、正自觉者那样”这类语句中,它的意思是信受;在“诸比丘,我允许用五种沙门的方式受用果实”这类语句中,它的意思是言说;在“我常常这样安住”这类语句中,它的意思是时间;在“这位具寿名叫劫波”这类语句中,它的意思是施设;在“打扮整齐,须发修剪过”这类语句中,它的意思是剪断;在“两指宽的开许是允许的”这类语句中,它的意思是开许;在“有少许卧处”这类语句中,它的意思是少许;在“照亮整个竹林园”这类语句中,它的意思是遍满。这里取的则是“遍满”这个意思。因此,“kevalakappaṃ jetavanaṃ”应当理解为:毫无遗漏地、四周遍及整个祇园。巴利
Kappasaddo panāyaṃ abhisaddahanavohārakālapaññattichedanavikappalesasamantabhāvādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘okappaniyametaṃ bhoto gotamassa, yatā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) abhisaddahanamattho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjitu’’nti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 250) vohāro. ‘‘Yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) kālo. ‘‘Iccāyasmā kappo’’ti evamādīsu (su. ni. 1098; cūḷani. kappamāṇavapucchā 117) paññatti. ‘‘Alaṅkato kappitakesamassū’’ti evamādīsu (jā. 2.22.1368) chedanaṃ. ‘‘Kappati dvaṅgulakappo’’ti evamādīsu (cūḷava. 446) vikappo. ‘‘Atthi kappo nipajjitu’’nti evamādīsu (a. ni. 8.80) leso. ‘‘Kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.94) samantabhāvo. Idha panassa samantabhāvo atthoti adhippeto. Yato kevalakappaṃ jetavananti ettha anavasesaṃ samantato jetavananti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
“Obhāsetvā”的意思是:用光明遍照,像月亮和太阳一样,使整个范围成为一片光明、一片明亮。巴利
Obhāsetvāti ābhāya pharitvā, candimā viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ karitvāti attho.
“Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī”这句话里,工具格表达的是处所的意思,应当这样理解:世尊在哪里,就去那里。“Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, teneva kāraṇena upasaṅkamī”也可以这样理解:世尊因为什么原因值得被天和人亲近,就以这个原因去亲近。世尊因为什么原因值得被亲近呢?是为了获得种种功德殊胜,是为了享用美味果实,犹如群鸟恒常围绕常结果的大树。“upasaṅkamī”是“往诣”的意思。“upasaṅkamitvā”是说明亲近的结束。或者说,如此前往,去到比那里更近的、称为世尊附近的地方,也可以这样说。“bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvā”是礼敬世尊、向世尊鞠躬、恭敬地顶礼世尊。巴利
Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, yato yattha bhagavā, tattha upasaṅkamīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yena vā kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, teneva kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamādhippāyena sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyena dijagaṇehi niccaphalitamahārukkho viya. Upasaṅkamīti ca gatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā evaṃ gatā tato āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ bhagavato samīpasaṅkhātaṃ gantvātipi vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavantaṃ abhivādetvāti bhagavantaṃ vanditvā paṇamitvā namassitvā.
Ekamantaṃ 是中性词的说明,意思是“在一个地方、在一侧”。或者,这里的业格表达的是处所格的意义。Aṭṭhāsi 是对坐下等姿势的排除,她安排了站立之处,意思是“她站着”。巴利
Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, ekokāsaṃ ekapassanti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ. Aṭṭhāsīti nisajjādipaṭikkhepo, ṭhānaṃ kappesi, ṭhitā ahosīti attho.
那么,她又是怎样站到一边的呢?巴利
Kathaṃ ṭhitā pana sā ekamantaṃ ṭhitā ahūti?
不在后面,不在前面,也不在近处或远处;
不在腋窝,也不在下风处,也不在低洼或高凸的地方;
避开这些过失后,她们就站在了一边。巴利
‘‘Na pacchato na purato, nāpi āsannadūrato; Na kacche nopi paṭivāte, na cāpi oṇatuṇṇate; Ime dose vivajjetvā, ekamantaṃ ṭhitā ahū’’ti.
那她为什么只是站着,没有坐下呢?因为她想赶快回去。天神们是为了某个目的才来到人间的,就像爱干净的人去上厕所一样。平时,从一百由旬以外开始,人间就因为臭气熏天而让她们觉得厌恶,她们在那里待得不舒服。所以她办完该办的事之后,因为想赶快回去,就没有坐下。再说,人们坐下是为了消除行走等各种动作带来的疲劳,但天神们没有这种疲劳,所以也没有坐下。还有,她想对围在世尊身边站着的大弟子们表示恭敬和礼让,所以也没有坐下。而且,她纯粹是出于对世尊的恭敬才没有坐下。天神们如果想坐,座位自然会出现,但她不想坐,连坐的念头都没起,就站在了一边。巴利
Kasmā panāyaṃ aṭṭhāsi eva, na nisīdīti? Lahuṃ nivattitukāmatāya. Devatā hi kañcideva atthavasaṃ paṭicca sucipuriso viya vaccaṭṭhānaṃ manussalokaṃ āgacchanti. Pakatiyā panetāsaṃ yojanasatato pabhuti manussaloko duggandhatāya paṭikūlo hoti, na tattha abhiramanti. Tena sā āgatakiccaṃ katvā lahuṃ nivattitukāmatāya na nisīdi. Yassa ca gamanādiiriyāpathaparissamassa vinodanatthaṃ nisīdanti, so devānaṃ parissamo natthi, tasmāpi na nisīdi. Ye ca mahāsāvakā bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitā, te patimānesi, tasmāpi na nisīdi. Apica bhagavati gāraveneva na nisīdi. Devānañhi nisīditukāmānaṃ āsanaṃ nibbattati, taṃ anicchamānā nisajjāya cittampi akatvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi.
那位天女确实站在一边。所谓“那位天女站在一边”,就是由于这些原因,那位天女站在了一边。她以偈颂对世尊说话,意思是用由字母、词句和节律连缀而成的言语对世尊说话。巴利
Ekamantaṃ ṭhitā kho sā devatāti evaṃ imehi kāraṇehi ekamantaṃ ṭhitā kho sā devatā. Bhagavantaṃ gāthāya ajjhabhāsīti bhagavantaṃ gāthāya akkharapadaniyamitaganthitena vacanena abhāsīti attho.
261 在这里,“众多”是指数量不定的说明。因此说的就是数百、数千、数十万。“天”是因为他们游戏、以五种欲乐嬉戏,或者以自身的光辉闪耀,这就是词义。另外,天有三种:假名天、再生天、清净天。正如所说:巴利
261. Tattha bahūti aniyamitasaṅkhyāniddeso. Tena anekasatā anekasahassā anekasatasahassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dibbantīti devā, pañcahi kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti, attano vā siriyā jotantīti attho. Apica tividhā devā sammutiupapattivisuddhivasena. Yathāha –
“天”有三种:假名天、化生天、清净天。其中,假名天指的是国王、王后、王子。化生天指的是从四大王天开始往上的诸天。清净天指的是阿罗汉。巴利
‘‘Devāti tayo devā sammutidevā, upapattidevā, visuddhidevā. Tattha sammutidevā nāma rājāno, deviyo, rājakumārā. Upapattidevā nāma cātumahārājike deve upādāya taduttaridevā. Visuddhidevā nāma arahanto vuccantī’’ti (cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32, pārāyanānugītigāthāniddesa 119).
在这三类天中,这里指的是化生天。摩奴的子孙就是人。不过古德说:因为心特别增盛,所以称为人。人有四种:赡部洲人、西牛货洲人、北俱卢洲人、东胜身洲人。这里指的是赡部洲人。“吉祥”是指有情依这些而获得神通与增长,意思是获得神通与增长。“思考了”就是思索。“渴望”就是想要、希求、倾慕。“利益”指安稳的状态,也就是说,一切现世与来世的善好、殊胜、吉祥之法的存在。“请说”就是请开示、宣说、阐明、分别解说、令其明了。“吉祥”是获得神通、增长乃至一切成就的原因。“最上”是指殊胜、最顶级,能带来一切世间的利益与安乐。这是本偈颂的逐词解释。巴利
Tesu idha upapattidevā adhippetā. Manuno apaccāti manussā. Porāṇā pana bhaṇanti – manassa ussannatāya manussā. Te jambudīpakā, aparagoyānakā, uttarakurukā, pubbavidehakāti catubbidhā. Idha jambudīpakā adhippetā. Maṅgalanti imehi sattāti maṅgalāni, iddhiṃ vuddhiñca pāpuṇantīti attho. Acintayunti cintesuṃ. Ākaṅkhamānāti icchamānā patthayamānā pihayamānā. Sotthānanti sotthibhāvaṃ, sabbesaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikānaṃ sobhanānaṃ sundarānaṃ kalyāṇānaṃ dhammānamatthitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Brūhīti desehi pakāsehi ācikkha vivara vibhaja uttānīkarohi. Maṅgalanti iddhikāraṇaṃ vuddhikāraṇaṃ sabbasampattikāraṇaṃ. Uttamanti visiṭṭhaṃ pavaraṃ sabbalokahitasukhāvahanti ayaṃ gāthāya anupubbapadavaṇṇanā.
这段的总义是这样:那位天子看见,在一万个轮围世界里,天神们为了听吉祥之问,都聚集到这一个轮围世界来。他们把自己的微细身体变化到只有一根毫毛尖那么小的地方,或者十个、二十个、三十个、四十个、五十个、六十个、七十个、八十个挤在一起,以各自的荣光和威神力,压过一切天、魔、梵天。他们围绕着坐在已敷设好的最胜佛座上的世尊,世尊周身光明照耀。那位天子看到这一幕,又在那个时候,以心得知尚未到来的整个赡部洲人们心中所想,为了拔除一切天和人的疑惑之箭,便说道:“众多天与人,思惟诸吉祥,渴望安稳,想要自己获得安稳,请说最上吉祥。”意思是:得到那些天神的同意和人们的助力,世尊受我请问之时,那能为我们所有人带来究竟利益与安乐、因此是最上的吉祥,请世尊出于悲悯为我们宣说。巴利
Ayaṃ pana piṇḍattho – so devaputto dasasahassacakkavāḷesu devatā maṅgalapañhaṃ sotukāmatāya imasmiṃ ekacakkavāḷe sannipatitvā ekavālaggakoṭiokāsamatte dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi saṭṭhipi sattatipi asītipi sukhumattabhāve nimminitvā sabbadevamārabrahmāno siriyā ca tejasā ca adhigayha virocamānaṃ paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinnaṃ bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitā disvā tasmiṃ ca samaye anāgatānampi sakalajambudīpakānaṃ manussānaṃ cetasā cetoparivitakkamaññāya sabbadevamanussānaṃ vicikicchāsallasamuddharaṇatthaṃ āha – ‘‘bahū devā manussā ca, maṅgalāni acintayuṃ, ākaṅkhamānā sotthānaṃ attano sotthibhāvaṃ icchantā, brūhi maṅgalamuttamaṃ, tesaṃ devānaṃ anumatiyā manussānañca anuggahena mayā puṭṭho samāno yaṃ sabbesameva amhākaṃ ekantahitasukhāvahanato uttamaṃ maṅgalaṃ, taṃ no anukampaṃ upādāya brūhi bhagavā’’ti.
262 262. 世尊听了天子这番话,就说出“不亲近愚者”这首偈颂。其中,“不亲近”是指不交往、不接近。“愚者”:因为他们只是靠呼吸活着,所以叫愚者;意思是说,他们仅凭出息入息维持生命,而不是靠智慧生活。“智者”:因为他们以智慧去审察,能以智慧通达现世和来世的利益,所以叫智者。“亲近”是指交往、接近、做朋友、亲密相处。“供养”是指恭敬、尊重、敬奉、礼拜。“应受供养者”就是值得供养的人。“这是最上的吉祥”:把不亲近愚者、亲近智者、供养应受供养者这三件事合在一起,就说这是最上的吉祥。你问的是“请说最上的吉祥”,在这里,你首先应当把握的就是“这是最上的吉祥”。以上是这首偈颂的逐词解释。巴利
262. Evametaṃ devaputtassa vacanaṃ sutvā bhagavā ‘‘asevanā ca bālāna’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha asevanāti abhajanā apayirupāsanā. Bālānanti balanti assasantīti bālā, assasitapassasitamattena jīvanti, na paññājīvitenāti adhippāyo. Tesaṃ bālānaṃ paṇḍitānanti paṇḍantīti paṇḍitā, sandiṭṭhikasamparāyikesu atthesu ñāṇagatiyā gacchantīti adhippāyo. Tesaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ. Sevanāti bhajanā payirupāsanā taṃsahāyatā taṃsampavaṅkatā. Pūjāti sakkāragarukāramānanavandanā. Pūjaneyyānanti pūjārahānaṃ. Etaṃ maṅgalamuttamanti yā ca bālānaṃ asevanā, yā ca paṇḍitānaṃ sevanā, yā ca pūjaneyyānaṃ pūjā, taṃ sabbaṃ sampiṇḍetvā āha etaṃ maṅgalamuttamanti. Yaṃ tayā puṭṭhaṃ ‘‘brūhi maṅgalamuttama’’nti, ettha tāva etaṃ maṅgalamuttamanti gaṇhāhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayametissā gāthāya padavaṇṇanā.
这段义注应当这样理解:世尊听了那位天子的话之后,说了这首偈颂。在这里,说法有四种:被问而说、没被问而说、有因缘关联而说、没有因缘关联而说。其中,像“乔达摩,我请问您这位智慧广大的人:弟子怎样做才算好?”以及“贤友,您是怎样渡过暴流的?”这类,是有人问了之后说法者才说的,叫“被问而说”。像“别人说是快乐的,圣者们说是苦的”这类,是没人问、只凭自己的心意而说的,叫“没被问而说”。而佛陀的一切说法,因为经中说“比丘们,我说法都是有因缘的”,所以都是“有因缘关联而说”。在这个教法里,没有“没有因缘关联而说”这回事。在以上这些说法类别中,这一段是因为天子问了之后世尊才说的,所以属于“被问而说”。而对于被问而说,就像一个熟悉正路、也熟悉邪路的人,别人来问路时,他会先指出该避开的路,然后指出该走的路,说:“在某个地方有个岔路口,到了那里,放开左边,走右边。”同样地,在哪些该亲近、哪些不该亲近的问题上,他先说明不该亲近的,再说明该亲近的。世尊也正是这样一位熟悉正路的人。正如经中所说:巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā panassā evaṃ veditabbā – evametaṃ devaputtassa vacanaṃ sutvā bhagavā imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha yasmā catubbidhā kathā pucchitakathā, apucchitakathā, sānusandhikathā, ananusandhikathāti. Tattha ‘‘pucchāmi taṃ, gotama, bhūripaññaṃ, kathaṃkaro sāvako sādhu hotī’’ti (su. ni. 378) ca, ‘‘kathaṃ nu tvaṃ, mārisa, oghamatarī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.1) ca evamādīsu pucchitena kathikā pucchitakathā. ‘‘Yaṃ pare sukhato āhu, tadariyā āhu dukkhato’’ti evamādīsu (su. ni. 767) apucchitena attajjhāsayavaseneva kathitā apucchitakathā. Sabbāpi buddhānaṃ kathā ‘‘sanidānāhaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desemī’’ti (a. ni. 3.126; kathā. 806) vacanato sānusandhikathā. Ananusandhikathā imasmiṃ sāsane natthi. Evametāsu kathāsu ayaṃ devaputtena pucchitena bhagavatā kathitattā pucchitakathā. Pucchitakathāyañca yathā cheko puriso kusalo maggassa, kusalo amaggassa, maggaṃ puṭṭho paṭhamaṃ vijahitabbaṃ ācikkhitvā pacchā gahetabbaṃ ācikkhati – ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne dvedhāpatho hoti, tattha vāmaṃ muñcitvā dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti, evaṃ sevitabbāsevitabbesu asevitabbaṃ ācikkhitvā sevitabbaṃ ācikkhati. Bhagavā ca maggakusalapurisasadiso. Yathāha –
提舍,所谓“善知路者”,正是对如来、阿罗汉、正自觉者的称呼。巴利
‘‘Puriso maggakusaloti kho, tissa, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.84).
他确实对这个世界善巧,对另一个世界善巧,对死亡之境善巧,对不死之境善巧,对魔的领域善巧,对非魔的领域善巧。因此,先说明不该亲近的,再说明该亲近的,世尊才说:“不亲近愚者,应亲近智者。”就像先指出该舍弃的道路一样,愚者不该亲近、不该侍奉;然后,像指出该走的道路一样,智者才该亲近、该侍奉。巴利
So hi kusalo imassa lokassa, kusalo parassa lokassa, kusalo maccudheyyassa, kusalo amaccudheyyassa, kusalo māradheyyassa, kusalo amāradheyyassāti. Tasmā paṭhamaṃ asevitabbaṃ ācikkhitvā sevitabbaṃ ācikkhanto āha – ‘‘asevanā ca bālānaṃ, paṇḍitānañca sevanā’’ti. Vijahitabbamaggo viya hi paṭhamaṃ bālā na sevitabbā na payirupāsitabbā, tato gahetabbamaggo viya paṇḍitā sevitabbā payirupāsitabbāti.
为什么世尊在讲吉祥的时候,最先说的是不亲近愚者、亲近智者呢?回答是:因为天与人这些众生,由于亲近愚者,把所见等事物执为吉祥,形成了错误的吉祥见解,而这种见解其实是不吉祥的。所以世尊呵斥那种会破坏此世利益和来世利益的亲近恶友行为,同时赞叹能成就此世和来世利益的亲近善友行为,因此最先讲说不亲近愚者、亲近智者。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavatā maṅgalaṃ kathentena paṭhamaṃ bālānaṃ asevanā paṇḍitānañca sevanā kathitāti? Vuccate – yasmā imaṃ diṭṭhādīsu maṅgaladiṭṭhiṃ bālasevanāya devamanussā gaṇhiṃsu, sā ca amaṅgalaṃ, tasmā nesaṃ taṃ idhalokatthaparalokatthabhañjakaṃ akalyāṇamittasaṃsaggaṃ garahantena ubhayalokatthasādhakañca kalyāṇamittasaṃsaggaṃ pasaṃsantena bhagavatā paṭhamaṃ bālānaṃ asevanā paṇḍitānañca sevanā kathitāti.
在这里,“愚者”指的是任何具有杀生等不善业道的众生。他们可以从三个方面来辨认,正如经中所说:“比丘们,愚者有这三种愚者的特征。”此外,富兰那迦叶等六位外道导师,以及提婆达多、拘迦利迦、迦吒摩达底沙、刹帝利女之子、海授、旃遮摩纳维等人,还有过去世中长眠者的兄弟,这些以及其他同类的众生,都应当知道是愚者。巴利
Tattha bālā nāma ye keci pāṇātipātādiakusalakammapathasamannāgatā sattā. Te tīhākārehi jānitabbā. Yathāha – ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, bālassa bālalakkhaṇānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.3; ma. ni. 3.246) suttaṃ. Apica pūraṇakassapādayo cha satthāro devadattakokālikakaṭamodakatissakhaṇḍadeviyāputtasamuddadattaciñcamāṇavikādayo atītakāle ca dīghavidassa bhātāti ime aññe ca evarūpā sattā bālāti veditabbā.
他们因为自己错误地执取,就像用手去抓烧红的炭火一样,既毁了自己,也毁了那些听从他们话的人。就像长眠者的兄弟,经过四个佛的漫长时间,以六十由旬高的身体,仰面倒进大地狱里被烧煮;又像那五百个家族,因为喜好他的邪见,投生到跟他同样的境地,在地狱里被烧煮。关于这件事,是这样说的:巴利
Te aggipadittamiva aṅgāraṃ attanā duggahitena attānañca attano vacanakārake ca vināsenti, yathā dīghavidassa bhātā catubuddhantaraṃ saṭṭhiyojanamattena attabhāvena uttāno patito mahāniraye paccati, yathā ca tassa diṭṭhiṃ abhirucikāni pañca kulasatāni tasseva sahabyataṃ upapannāni niraye paccanti. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ –
比丘们,就像芦苇搭的屋子或茅草搭的屋子着了火,火也会烧到那些内外都涂了泥灰、不透风、门闩牢固、窗户关紧的尖顶楼房。同样地,比丘们,凡是生起的恐惧,全都从愚人那里生起,不会从智者那里生起;凡是生起的祸患……凡是生起的灾厄……都不会从智者那里生起。就是这样,比丘们,愚人有恐惧,智者没有恐惧;愚人有祸患,智者没有祸患;愚人有灾厄,智者没有灾厄。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, naḷāgārā vā tiṇāgārā vā aggi mutto kūṭāgārānipi ḍahati ullittāvalittāni nivātāni phusitaggaḷāni pihitavātapānāni, evameva kho, bhikkhave, yāni kānici bhayāni uppajjanti, sabbāni tāni bālato uppajjanti, no paṇḍitato. Ye keci upaddavā uppajjanti…pe… ye keci upasaggā…pe… no paṇḍitato. Iti kho, bhikkhave, sappaṭibhayo bālo, appaṭibhayo paṇḍito. Saupaddavo bālo, anupaddavo paṇḍito, saupasaggo bālo, anupasaggo paṇḍito’’ti (a. ni. 3.1).
而且,愚人就像臭鱼;亲近愚人的人,就像用装臭鱼的荷叶包一样,会被智者看成该丢弃、该厌恶的东西。关于这一点,曾这样说:巴利
Apica pūtimacchasadiso bālo, pūtimacchabandhapattapuṭasadiso hoti tadupasevī, chaḍḍanīyataṃ jigucchanīyatañca āpajjati viññūnaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ –
有人用茅草尖去触碰臭鱼,
吉祥草本身也会发臭,亲近愚者,结果就是这样。巴利
‘‘Pūtimacchaṃ kusaggena, yo naro upanayhati; Kusāpi pūtī vāyanti, evaṃ bālūpasevanā’’ti. (itivu. 76; jā. 1.15.183; 2.22.1257);
即使帝释天——诸天之主——正在赐予恩惠,无称智者(Akittipaṇḍita)也这样说道:巴利
Akittipaṇḍito cāpi sakkena devānamindena vare diyyamāne evamāha –
不要看见愚人,不要听见愚人的声音,也不要和愚人住在一起;
不要跟愚人交谈,也不要喜欢这种事。
愚者到底对你做了什么?迦叶,请说出原因。
迦叶,你为什么不想见到愚者呢?
愚痴的人把自己引向灾祸,还去承担不该承担的事。
他难以被善巧引导,却自以为高明;被人如法劝诫时,就动怒发火。
他不懂戒律,不见他是好的。巴利
‘‘Bālaṃ na passe na suṇe, na ca bālena saṃvase; Bālenallāpasallāpaṃ, na kare na ca rocaye. ‘‘Kinnu te akaraṃ bālo, vada kassapa kāraṇaṃ; Kena kassapa bālassa, dassanaṃ nābhikaṅkhasi. ‘‘Anayaṃ nayati dummedho, adhurāyaṃ niyuñjati; Dunnayo seyyaso hoti, sammā vutto pakuppati; Vinayaṃ so na jānāti, sādhu tassa adassana’’nti. (jā. 1.13.90-92);
世尊这样从各个方面呵责亲近愚人,把不亲近愚人称为“吉祥”之后,现在又赞叹亲近智者,说“亲近智者也是吉祥”。在这里,所谓“智者”,是指任何具足了离杀生等十善业道的有情。他们可以通过三种特征来辨认。正如经中所说:“比丘们,有三种智者的智者相。”此外,佛陀、独觉佛、八十位大弟子,以及如来的其他声闻弟子,还有苏内德、摩诃高毗昙、维杜罗、萨罗邦伽、大善慧、须陀素摩、尼弥王、铁屋王子、阿基提智者等人,都应当知道是智者。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā sabbākārena bālūpasevanaṃ garahanto bālānaṃ asevanaṃ ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vatvā idāni paṇḍitasevanaṃ pasaṃsanto ‘‘paṇḍitānañca sevanā maṅgala’’nti āha. Tattha paṇḍitā nāma ye keci pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādidasakusalakammapathasamannāgatā sattā, te tīhākārehi jānitabbā. Yathāha – ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa paṇḍitalakkhaṇānī’’ti (a. ni. 3.3; ma. ni. 3.253) vuttaṃ. Apica buddhapaccekabuddhaasītimahāsāvakā aññe ca tathāgatassa sāvakā sunettamahāgovindavidhurasarabhaṅgamahosadhasutasomanimirāja- ayogharakumāraakittipaṇḍitādayo ca paṇḍitāti veditabbā.
他们就像危难中的保护者,像黑暗中的明灯,像在饥渴等痛苦逼迫时获得饮食一样;对于听从他们教导的人,他们能够摧毁一切恐惧、灾祸和障碍。确实如此,正是依靠如来,数不清、无量无数的天与人证得了漏尽,有的安住在梵天界,有的安住在天界,有的投生于善趣。有人对舍利弗长老生起净信,以四种资具供养长老,有八万户人家因此投生天界。同样,对大目犍连、大迦叶等一切大弟子也是如此。苏内德导师的弟子们,有些投生于梵天界,有些成为他化自在天诸天的同伴……有些投生为居士大富之家的同伴。经中也是这样说的——巴利
Te bhaye viya rakkhā, andhakāre viya padīpo, khuppipāsādidukkhābhibhave viya annapānādipaṭilābho, attano vacanakarānaṃ sabbabhayaupaddavūpasaggaviddhaṃsanasamatthā honti. Tathā hi tathāgataṃ āgamma asaṅkhyeyyā aparimāṇā devamanussā āsavakkhayaṃ pattā, brahmaloke patiṭṭhitā, devaloke patiṭṭhitā, sugatiloke uppannā. Sāriputtatthere cittaṃ pasādetvā catūhi paccayehi theraṃ upaṭṭhahitvā asīti kulasahassāni sagge nibbattāni. Tathā mahāmoggallānamahākassapappabhutīsu sabbamahāsāvakesu, sunettassa satthuno sāvakā appekacce brahmaloke uppajjiṃsu, appekacce paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ devānaṃ sahabyataṃ…pe… appekacce gahapatimahāsālakulānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjiṃsu. Vuttañcetaṃ –
比丘们,跟智者在一起,不会有恐惧,不会有灾祸,不会有侵扰。巴利
‘‘Natthi, bhikkhave, paṇḍitato bhayaṃ, natthi paṇḍitato upaddavo, natthi paṇḍitato upasaggo’’ti (a. ni. 3.1).
而且,有智慧的人就像多伽罗、花鬘等香物;亲近有智慧者的人,则像包裹多伽罗、花鬘等香物的叶子,对有见识的人来说,变得值得亲近,也令人欢喜。巴利
Apica tagaramālādigandhabhaṇḍasadiso paṇḍito, tagaramālādigandhabhaṇḍapaliveṭhanapattasadiso hoti tadupasevī, bhāvanīyataṃ manuññatañca āpajjati viññūnaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ –
有人用叶子把多伽罗香包起来,
即使只是叶子,被风吹拂也会散发芳香;亲近智者同样如此。巴利
‘‘Tagarañca palāsena, yo naro upanayhati; Pattāpi surabhī vāyanti, evaṃ dhīrūpasevanā’’ti. (itivu. 76; jā. 1.15.184; 2.22.1258);
即使帝释天——诸天之主——正在赐予恩惠,无称智者(Akittipaṇḍita)也这样说道:巴利
Akittipaṇḍito cāpi sakkena devānamindena vare diyyamāne evamāha –
要见智者,要听智者的话,要和智者一起生活;
应做与智者的交谈,并喜欢此事。
我这智者对你做了什么?迦叶,请说出原因。
迦叶,你因为什么而想见到这位智者?
“智者引导正道,不从事不正当之行。”
善于引导的人更优秀,被如法劝诫时也不发怒。
他懂得戒律,能和这样的人交往是好事。巴利
‘‘Dhīraṃ passe suṇe dhīraṃ, dhīrena saha saṃvase; Dhīrenallāpasallāpaṃ, taṃ kare tañca rocaye. ‘‘Kinnu te akaraṃ dhīro, vada kassapa kāraṇaṃ; Kena kassapa dhīrassa, dassanaṃ abhikaṅkhasi. ‘‘Nayaṃ nayati medhāvī, adhurāyaṃ na yuñjati; Sunayo seyyaso hoti, sammā vutto na kuppati; Vinayaṃ so pajānāti, sādhu tena samāgamo’’ti. (jā. 1.13.94-96);
世尊这样从各个方面赞叹亲近智者,把亲近智者称为“吉祥”之后,现在接着赞叹供养——因为不亲近愚者、亲近智者,逐渐就会成为值得供养的人,所以世尊赞叹对值得供养者的供养,说道:“供养值得供养的人,这是最上的吉祥。”这里所谓的“值得供养的人”,是指因为远离一切过失、具足一切功德而成为佛陀的诸世尊,其次是独觉佛和圣弟子。对他们的供养,哪怕非常微少,也会在漫长的轮回中带来利益和安乐。这里可以举须摩那花鬘师和末利夫人等人作为例子。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā sabbākārena paṇḍitasevanaṃ pasaṃsanto, paṇḍitānaṃ sevanaṃ ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vatvā idāni tāya bālānaṃ asevanāya paṇḍitānaṃ sevanāya ca anupubbena pūjaneyyabhāvaṃ upagatānaṃ pūjaṃ pasaṃsanto ‘‘pūjā ca pūjaneyyānaṃ etaṃ maṅgalamuttama’’nti āha. Tattha pūjaneyyā nāma sabbadosavirahitattā sabbaguṇasamannāgatattā ca buddhā bhagavanto, tato pacchā paccekabuddhā ariyasāvakā ca. Tesañhi pūjā appakāpi dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hoti, sumanamālākāramallikādayo cettha nidassanaṃ.
这里我们只举一个例子来说明。据说有一天上午,世尊穿好下衣,拿着钵和袈裟,进入王舍城乞食。这时,摩揭陀国频婆娑罗王的须摩那花鬘师正拿着花走在路上,看见世尊来到城门口,相貌庄严,令人心生净信,具足三十二大人相和八十种随形好,闪耀着佛陀的光辉。他看见之后,心里这样想:“国王拿了这些花,也许会赏我一百或一千钱,但那只是这一世的快乐罢了;而供养世尊,果报却是无量无数、不可计算的,能在漫长的轮回中带来利益和安乐。不如我用这些花来供养世尊吧。”于是他满怀净信,抓起一把花,朝世尊面前抛去。那些花飞到空中,在世尊上方变成花盖停住了。花鬘师看到这种神通变化,信心更加增长,又抛出一把花,那些花飞上去变成花帐停住了。就这样一共抛了八把花,那些花飞上去变成了一座花屋停住了。世尊就好像坐在花屋里一样,大批人群聚集过来。世尊看着花鬘师,露出了微笑。阿难尊者想:“诸佛不会没有原因、没有理由就微笑”,于是问起微笑的原因。世尊说:“阿难,这位花鬘师因为这次供养的功德,将在十万劫中于天界和人间流转,最后成为一位名叫须摩那主的独觉佛。”说完这番话,为了宣说正法,又诵出这首偈颂:巴利
Tatthekaṃ nidassanamattaṃ bhaṇāma. Bhagavā kira ekadivasaṃ pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Atha kho sumanamālākāro rañño māgadhassa seniyassa bimbisārassa pupphāni gahetvā gacchanto addasa bhagavantaṃ nagaradvāraṃ anuppattaṃ pāsādikaṃ pasādanīyaṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāsītānubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ buddhasiriyā jalantaṃ. Disvānassa etadahosi – ‘‘rājā pupphāni gahetvā sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā dadeyya, tañca idhalokamattameva sukhaṃ bhaveyya, bhagavato pana pūjā appameyyaasaṅkhyeyyaphalā dīgharattaṃ hitasukhāvahā hoti. Handāhaṃ imehi pupphehi bhagavantaṃ pūjemī’’ti pasannacitto ekaṃ pupphamuṭṭhiṃ gahetvā bhagavato paṭimukhaṃ khipi, pupphāni ākāsena gantvā bhagavato upari mālāvitānaṃ hutvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Mālākāro taṃ ānubhāvaṃ disvā pasannataracitto puna ekaṃ pupphamuṭṭhiṃ khipi, tāni gantvā mālākañcuko hutvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Evaṃ aṭṭha pupphamuṭṭhiyo khipi, tāni gantvā pupphakūṭāgāraṃ hutvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Bhagavā antokūṭāgāre viya ahosi, mahājanakāyo sannipati. Bhagavā mālākāraṃ passanto sitaṃ pātvākāsi. Ānandatthero ‘‘na buddhā ahetu appaccayā sitaṃ pātukarontī’’ti sitakāraṇaṃ pucchi. Bhagavā āha – ‘‘eso, ānanda, mālākāro imissā pūjāya ānubhāvena satasahassakappe devesu ca manussesu ca saṃsaritvā pariyosāne sumanissaro nāma paccekabuddho bhavissatī’’ti. Vacanapariyosāne ca dhammadesanatthaṃ imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –
那种业做了之后确实好,因为做了以后不会后悔。
他满心欢喜,享受善业的果报。巴利
‘‘Tañca kammaṃ kataṃ sādhu, yaṃ katvā nānutappati; Yassa patīto sumano, vipākaṃ paṭisevatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 68);
偈颂结束时,八万四千众生证悟了法。由此应当知道,即使对他们所作的供养很少,也会在很长的时间里带来利益和安乐。这还只是财物供养,更何况是修行供养呢?那些善男子以皈依、受持学处、受持布萨支,以及四种清净戒等自身功德来供养世尊,谁能说尽他们供养的果报呢?他们确实被称为以最上的供养供养如来的人。正如所说:巴利
Gāthāpariyosāne caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi, evaṃ appakāpi tesaṃ pūjā dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hotīti veditabbā. Sā ca āmisapūjāva ko pana vādo paṭipattipūjāya. Yato ye kulaputtā saraṇagamanena sikkhāpadapaṭiggahaṇena uposathaṅgasamādānena catupārisuddhisīlādīhi ca attano guṇehi bhagavantaṃ pūjenti, ko tesaṃ pūjāya phalaṃ vaṇṇayissati. Te hi tathāgataṃ paramāya pūjāya pūjentīti vuttā. Yathāha –
阿难,无论是比丘、比丘尼、近事男还是近事女,只要他安住在法随法行中,行为端正合宜,随法而行,他就是在以最上的供养恭敬如来、尊重如来、崇敬如来、供养如来、致敬如来。巴利
‘‘Yo kho, ānanda, bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā upāsako vā upāsikā vā dhammānudhammapaṭipanno viharati sāmīcippaṭipanno anudhammacārī, so tathāgataṃ sakkaroti garuṃ karoti māneti pūjeti apaciyati paramāya pūjāyā’’ti.
按照此教导,也应知道:对独觉佛和圣弟子们的供养,同样能带来利益与安乐。巴利
Etenānusārena paccekabuddhaariyasāvakānampi pūjāya hitasukhāvahatā veditabbā.
另外,在家人当中,年幼的弟弟妹妹也应该敬奉年长的哥哥姐姐,子女应该敬奉父母,媳妇应该敬奉丈夫、婆婆和公公。应当知道,这里所说的应受敬奉的人就是这些。因为对这些人做供养,也算在善法里面,又是寿命等增长的因,所以本身就是吉祥。确实是这样说的:巴利
Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ kaniṭṭhassa jeṭṭho bhātāpi bhaginīpi pūjaneyyā, puttassa mātāpitaro, kulavadhūnaṃ sāmikasassusasurāti evampettha pūjaneyyā veditabbā. Etesampi hi pūjā kusaladhammasaṅkhātattā āyuādivaḍḍhihetuttā ca maṅgalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
他们将孝顺母亲、孝顺父亲、敬奉沙门、敬奉婆罗门,尊敬家族中的长辈,受持这善法并照着去做。因为受持这些善法的缘故,他们的寿命会增长,容貌也会增长,等等。巴利
‘‘Te matteyyā bhavissanti petteyyā sāmaññā brahmaññā kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino, idaṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ samādāya vattissanti. Te tesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samādānahetu āyunāpi vaḍḍhissanti, vaṇṇenapi vaḍḍhissantī’’tiādi.
在这一偈颂中,宣说了三种吉祥:不亲近愚者、亲近智者、供养应受供养者。其中,不亲近愚者能防止因亲近愚者而带来的怖畏等过患,是成就今生与来世利益的因;亲近智者和供养应受供养者,则正如前面在果德广说中所讲的那样,是趣向涅槃与善趣的因,因此应当理解为吉祥。从这以后,我们将不先列出论母,而是直接对每一处所说的吉祥加以界定,并阐明它为什么是吉祥。巴利
Evametissā gāthāya bālānaṃ asevanā paṇḍitānaṃ sevanā pūjaneyyānaṃ pūjāti tīṇi maṅgalāni vuttāni. Tattha bālānaṃ asevanā bālasevanapaccayabhayādiparittāṇena ubhayalokahitahetuttā paṇḍitānaṃ sevanā pūjaneyyānaṃ pūjā ca tāsaṃ phalavibhūtivaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva nibbānasugatihetuttā ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbā. Ito paraṃ tu mātikaṃ adassetvā eva yaṃ yattha maṅgalaṃ, taṃ vavatthapessāma, tassa ca maṅgalattaṃ vibhāvayissāmāti.
关于“不亲近愚者”等的这一偈颂,其义理注释到此结束。巴利
Niṭṭhitā asevanā ca bālānanti imissā gāthāya atthavaṇṇanā.
263 世尊只被请求了一次“请说最上吉祥”,却像一位所求极少、施与极多的尊贵之人,先用一首偈颂说了三种吉祥。之后,因为天神们还想继续听,吉祥也还有更多,又为了让各种相应的众生各自投入适合他们的吉祥,世尊便又以“居住适宜地”等偈颂,开始宣说更多吉祥。巴利
263. Evaṃ bhagavā ‘‘brūhi maṅgalamuttama’’nti ekaṃ ajjhesitopi appaṃ yācito bahudāyako uḷārapuriso viya ekāya gāthāya tīṇi maṅgalāni vatvā tato uttaripi devatānaṃ sotukāmatāya maṅgalānañca atthitāya yesaṃ yesaṃ yaṃ yaṃ anukūlaṃ, te te satte tattha tattha maṅgale niyojetukāmatāya ca ‘‘patirūpadesavāso cā’’tiādīhi gāthāhi punapi anekāni maṅgalāni vattumāraddho.
这里先解释第一首偈颂。“适宜”就是相称、合适。“地”指村落、集镇、城市、国土等任何众生居住的地方。“居住”就是在那里安住。“往昔”指过去、以前的各期生命。“曾修福德”就是累积善行。“自己”指心,或者整个身心。“正誓愿”就是对自身正确地引导、投入,意思是安立。其余部分按前面已说的方式理解。这就是这里对词句的解释。巴利
Tattha paṭhamagāthāya tāva patirūpoti anucchaviko. Desoti gāmopi nigamopi nagarampi janapadopi yo koci sattānaṃ nivāsokāso. Vāsoti tattha nivāso. Pubbeti purā atītāsu jātīsu. Katapuññatāti upacitakusalatā. Attāti cittaṃ vuccati, sakalo vā attabhāvo. Sammāpaṇidhīti tassa attano sammā paṇidhānaṃ niyuñjanaṃ, ṭhapananti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti ayamettha padavaṇṇanā.
义理的解说应当这样理解:所谓“适宜的地方”,就是有四众弟子安住、布施等福业事在进行、九分具足的佛陀教法在弘扬的地方。在那里安住,因为能成为众生行福业的条件,所以称为“吉祥”。这里可以举进入斯里兰卡的渔夫等人作为例子。巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā patirūpadeso nāma yattha catasso parisā viharanti, dānādīni puññakiriyāvatthūni vattanti, navaṅgaṃ satthu sāsanaṃ dippati. Tattha nivāso sattānaṃ puññakiriyāya paccayattā ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. Sīhaḷadīpapaviṭṭhakevaṭṭādayo cettha nidassanaṃ.
另一种解释:所谓“适宜的地方”,就是指世尊的菩提座处、初转法轮处、在十二由旬会众中间破除一切外道见解并示现双神变的芒果树下处、从天上降下处,或者舍卫城、王舍城等佛陀曾居住过的其他地方。众生住在那里,因为能成为获得六种无上法的条件,所以称为“吉祥”。巴利
Aparo nayo – patirūpadeso nāma bhagavato bodhimaṇḍappadeso, dhammacakkappavattitappadeso, dvādasayojanāya parisāya majjhe sabbatitthiyamataṃ bhinditvā yamakapāṭihāriyadassitakaṇḍambarukkhamūlappadeso, devorohanappadeso, yo vā panaññopi sāvatthirājagahādibuddhādivāsappadeso. Tattha nivāso sattānaṃ chaanuttariyapaṭilābhapaccayato ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati.
还有一种说法:东方有个叫迦阇伽罗的集镇,集镇过去是大娑罗,再过去就是边地,以内则是中部。东南方有条叫萨罗婆提的河,再过去就是边地,以内则是中部。南方有个叫塞陀伽尼迦的集镇,再过去就是边地,以内则是中部。西方有个叫图那的婆罗门村,再过去就是边地,以内则是中部。北方有座叫优尸罗陀阇的山,再过去就是边地,以内则是中部(《大品》259)。这片中部地区长三百由旬,宽二百五十由旬,周长九百由旬,这就叫适宜地。巴利
Aparo nayo – puratthimāya disāya kajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo, tassa aparena mahāsālā, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe. Dakkhiṇapuratthimāya disāya sallavatī nāma nadī, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe. Dakkhiṇāya disāya setakaṇṇikaṃ nāma nigamo, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe. Pacchimāya disāya thūṇaṃ nāma brāhmaṇagāmo, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā, orato majjhe. Uttarāya disāya usiraddhajo nāma pabbato, tato paraṃ paccantimā janapadā , orato majjhe (mahāva. 259). Ayaṃ majjhimappadeso āyāmena tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārena aḍḍhateyyāni, parikkhepena navayojanasatāni honti, eso patirūpadeso nāma.
在这里,会出生统领四大洲和两千小岛的转轮王;也会出生圆满修了一阿僧祇又十万劫波罗蜜的舍利弗、大目犍连等大弟子;还会出生圆满修了二阿僧祇又十万劫波罗蜜的独觉佛;以及圆满修了四、八或十六阿僧祇又十万劫波罗蜜的正自觉者。在那里,众生接受转轮王的教导,安住在五戒上,就以天界为归宿;同样,依独觉佛的教导安住,也以天界为归宿。而依正自觉者弟子的教导安住,则以天界为归宿,也以涅槃为归宿。所以,在那里居住,因为是获得这些成就的条件,就称为“吉祥”。巴利
Ettha catunnaṃ mahādīpānaṃ dvisahassānaṃ parittadīpānañca issariyādhipaccakārakā cakkavattī uppajjanti, ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā sāriputtamahāmoggallānādayo mahāsāvakā uppajjanti, dve asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā paccekabuddhā, cattāri aṭṭha soḷasa vā asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambuddhā ca uppajjanti. Tattha sattā cakkavattirañño ovādaṃ gahetvā pañcasu sīlesu patiṭṭhāya saggaparāyaṇā honti, tathā paccekabuddhānaṃ ovāde patiṭṭhāya. Sammāsambuddhasāvakānaṃ pana ovāde patiṭṭhāya saggaparāyaṇā nibbānaparāyaṇā ca honti. Tasmā tattha vāso imāsaṃ sampattīnaṃ paccayato ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati.
过去世曾修福德,是指在过去生中,以佛陀、独觉佛、漏尽者为对象而积累的善行,这也是吉祥。为什么呢?因为佛陀或独觉佛当面示现,或者当面从佛陀或佛弟子那里听到哪怕一首四句偈,在听完的时候就能证得阿罗汉果。再者,如果有人在过去生中积过福德、善根深厚,他就能依靠这份善根修起观智,达到漏尽,就像摩诃劫宾那王和他的王后那样。因此说:过去世曾修福德,是吉祥。巴利
Pubbe katapuññatā nāma atītajātiyaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsave ārabbha upacitakusalatā, sāpi maṅgalaṃ. Kasmā? Buddhapaccekabuddhe sammukhato dassetvā buddhānaṃ vā buddhasāvakānaṃ vā sammukhā sutāya catuppadikāyapi gāthāya pariyosāne arahattaṃ pāpetīti katvā. Yo ca manusso pubbe katādhikāro ussannakusalamūlo hoti, so teneva kusalamūlena vipassanaṃ uppādetvā āsavakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti yathā rājā mahākappino aggamahesī ca. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbe ca katapuññatā maṅgala’’nti.
所谓“自我正确的志向”,就是指:在这个世界上,有人把自己安立在戒行上——本来戒行不清净,现在安立在戒行上;本来没有信心,现在安立在信心具足上;本来吝啬,现在安立在布施具足上。这就叫作“自我正确的志向”。这也是吉祥。为什么呢?因为它是现世与来世断除怨恨、获得种种功德的因。巴利
Attasammāpaṇidhi nāma idhekacco attānaṃ dussīlaṃ sīle patiṭṭhāpeti, assaddhaṃ saddhāsampadāya patiṭṭhāpeti, macchariṃ cāgasampadāya patiṭṭhāpeti. Ayaṃ vuccati ‘‘attasammāpaṇidhī’’ti. Eso ca maṅgalaṃ. Kasmā? Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaverappahānavividhānisaṃsādhigamahetutoti.
同样地,在这首偈颂里,也只说了“住在适宜的地方”“过去生中修过福德”“自己立下正确的愿”这三种吉祥,而它们的吉祥性在各个相应的地方都已经说明过了。巴利
Evaṃ imissāpi gāthāya patirūpadesavāso, pubbe ca katapuññatā, attasammāpaṇidhīti tīṇiyeva maṅgalāni vuttāni, maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
“居住在适宜的地方”这一偈颂的义解,到此结束。巴利
Niṭṭhitā patirūpadesavāso cāti imissā gāthāya atthavaṇṇanā.
264 264. 现在来说“多闻”等词。这里,“多闻”指博学多闻的状态。“手艺”指任何一种手上的技能。“律”指对身、语、意的调伏。“善学”指学得很好。“善说”指说得很好。“Yā”是没有明确指向的指示词。“语”指言辞、说话。其余部分按照前面所说的方式来理解。这是这里对字词的解释。巴利
264. Idāni bāhusaccañcāti ettha bāhusaccanti bahussutabhāvo. Sippanti yaṃkiñci hatthakosallaṃ. Vinayoti kāyavācācittavinayanaṃ. Susikkhitoti suṭṭhu sikkhito. Subhāsitāti suṭṭhu bhāsitā. Yāti aniyamaniddeso. Vācāti girā byappatho. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti. Ayamettha padavaṇṇanā.
义注应当这样理解:所谓“多闻”,就是像“他是持闻者、是积集所闻者”以及“比丘们,这里有的人多闻,通晓契经、重颂、分别说”等这样一类说法所赞叹的、任持佛陀教法的状态。因为它是断除不善、成就善法之因,又次第成为证得究竟真理之因,所以被称为“吉祥”。世尊也确实这样说过——巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā – bāhusaccaṃ nāma yaṃ taṃ ‘‘sutadharo hoti sutasannicayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.339; a. ni. 4.22) ca ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, ekaccassa puggalassa bahukaṃ sutaṃ hoti suttaṃ geyyaṃ veyyākaraṇa’’nti (a. ni. 4.6) ca evamādinā nayena satthusāsanadharattaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ, taṃ akusalappahānakusalādhigamahetuto anupubbena paramatthasaccasacchikiriyahetuto ca ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,多闻的圣弟子确实会舍断不善,修习善;舍断有过失的,修习无过失的;他保持自己的清净。巴利
‘‘Sutavā ca kho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāveti, sāvajjaṃ pajahati, anavajjaṃ bhāveti, suddhamattānaṃ pariharatī’’ti (a. ni. 7.67).
另外也说过——巴利
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
他审察所持之法的含义。当他审察含义时,那些法便得到慧的认可。当有了对法的慧的认可时,欲求就生起。欲求生起后,他努力。努力时,他衡量。衡量时,他精勤。精勤时,他以身亲证胜义,并以智慧透彻地看见。巴利
‘‘Dhatānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthamupaparikkhati, atthaṃ upaparikkhato dhammā nijjhānaṃ khamanti, dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā sati chando jāyati, chandajāto ussahati, ussahanto tulayati, tulayanto padahati, padahanto kāyena ceva paramatthasaccaṃ sacchikaroti, paññāya ca ativijjha passatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.432).
另外,在家人多闻而无过失,因为它能带来今生和来世的利益与安乐,所以应当知道这也是“吉祥”。巴利
Apica agārikabāhusaccampi yaṃ anavajjaṃ, taṃ ubhayalokahitasukhāvahanato ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ.
“手艺”分为在家人的手艺和出家人的手艺。其中,在家人的手艺,是指像珠宝加工、金匠工艺这类不伤害、不压迫他人,远离不善的技艺;因为它能带来现世的利益,所以是吉祥。出家人的手艺,是指缝制、整理袈裟等,也就是制作沙门用具的技艺。正如经文中所赞叹的:“比丘们,比丘对同梵行者所做的各种大小事务,都能熟练做好。”还有被称为“能作依怙”的法。因为这类手艺能为自己和他人带来今生与来世的利益和安乐,所以应当知道它是“吉祥”。巴利
Sippaṃ nāma agārikasippañca anagārikasippañca. Tattha agārikasippaṃ nāma yaṃ parūparodhavirahitaṃ akusalavivajjitaṃ maṇikārasuvaṇṇakārakammādi, taṃ idhalokatthāvahanato maṅgalaṃ. Anagārikasippaṃ nāma cīvaravicāraṇasibbanādi samaṇaparikkhārābhisaṅkharaṇaṃ, yaṃ taṃ ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yāni tāni sabrahmacārīnaṃ uccāvacāni kiṃkaraṇīyāni, tattha dakkho hotī’’tiādinā nayena tattha tattha saṃvaṇṇitaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘nāthakaraṇo dhammo’’ti (dī. ni. 3.345; a. ni. 10.17) ca vuttaṃ, taṃ attano ca paresañca ubhayalokahitasukhāvahanato ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ.
律可以分为在家人的律和出家人的律。其中,在家人的律就是远离十种不善业道;这种律因为不沾染烦恼、能建立行为品德的规范,好好修学它,能带来今生和来世两方面的利益与安乐,所以是吉祥。出家人的律就是不违犯七种犯戒聚;这个也同样按上面说的方式好好修学。或者说,四遍清净戒就是出家人的律。依靠这个律而安住,就能证得阿罗汉果;像这样通过学习而善加修习,能获得世间和出世间的安乐,因此应当知道这就是吉祥。巴利
Vinayo nāma agārikavinayo ca anagārikavinayo ca. Tattha agārikavinayo nāma dasaakusalakammapathaviramaṇaṃ, so tattha asaṃkilesāpajjanena ācāraguṇavavatthānena ca susikkhito ubhayalokahitasukhāvahanato maṅgalaṃ. Anagārikavinayo nāma sattāpattikkhandhe anāpajjanaṃ, sopi vuttanayeneva susikkhito. Catupārisuddhisīlaṃ vā anagārikavinayo. So yathā tattha patiṭṭhāya arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, evaṃ sikkhanena susikkhito lokiyalokuttarasukhādhigamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbo.
所谓“善说之语”,就是远离妄语等过失的言语。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,具足四种要素的言语,就是善说。”另外,不杂秽无意义的言语,也就是善说。正如经中所说:巴利
Subhāsitā vācā nāma musāvādādidosavirahitā vācā. Yathāha – ‘‘catūhi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatā vācā subhāsitā hotī’’ti. Asamphappalāpā vācā eva vā subhāsitā. Yathāha –
已寂静的人说,善说之语是最殊胜的。
说法,不说非法,这是第二。
说可爱的话,不说不可爱的话,这是第三。
说真实的话,不说虚假的话,这是第四。巴利
‘‘Subhāsitaṃ uttamamāhu santo, Dhammaṃ bhaṇe nādhammaṃ taṃ dutiyaṃ; Piyaṃ bhaṇe nāppiyaṃ taṃ tatiyaṃ, Saccaṃ bhaṇe nālikaṃ taṃ catuttha’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.213; su. ni. 452);
这个也可以因为能带来两世的利益和安乐,所以应当知道它就是“吉祥”。又因为它本来就属于律的范畴,所以在收摄律时不把这个单独收摄进来,而应当直接收摄律。或者,何必费这个劲呢?这里说的“善说之语”,应当理解为为他人开示佛法的言语。因为它就像住在合适的地方一样,也能成为众生获得两世利益安乐乃至证悟涅槃的条件,所以被称为“吉祥”。经中也说——巴利
Ayampi ubhayalokahitasukhāvahanato ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbā. Yasmā ca ayaṃ vinayapariyāpannā eva, tasmā vinayaggahaṇena etaṃ asaṅgaṇhitvā vinayo saṅgahetabbo. Athavā kiṃ iminā parissamena paresaṃ dhammadesanāvācā idha ‘‘subhāsitā vācā’’ti veditabbā. Sā hi yathā patirūpadesavāso, evaṃ sattānaṃ ubhayalokahitasukhanibbānādhigamapaccayato ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. Āha ca –
佛陀所说的语言,是为了证得涅槃的安稳;
为了彻底终结痛苦,这句话确实是所有言语中最殊胜的。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ buddho bhāsati vācaṃ, khemaṃ nibbānapattiyā; Dukkhassantakiriyāya, sā ve vācānamuttamā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.213; su. ni. 456);
就这样,在这首偈颂里讲了四种吉祥:多闻、技艺、善学于律、善说之语;而它们的吉祥之义,也在各处一一阐明过了。巴利
Evaṃ imissā gāthāya bāhusaccaṃ, sippaṃ, vinayo susikkhito, subhāsitā vācāti cattāri maṅgalāni vuttāni, maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
关于“多闻”这首偈颂的义理注释,到此结束。巴利
Niṭṭhitā bāhusaccañcāti imissā gāthāya atthavaṇṇanā.
265 265. 现在解释“奉养父母”这一句。其中,母亲和父亲,就是父母。“奉养”的意思是侍奉照料。儿子和妻子,就是儿子和妻子。“摄受”就是接纳关怀。“不混乱”就是有条理、不杂乱。“诸业”就是各种工作。其余部分按照前面所说的方式理解。以上是对词句的解释。巴利
265. Idāni mātāpituupaṭṭhānanti ettha mātu ca pitu cāti mātāpitu. Upaṭṭhānanti upaṭṭhahanaṃ. Puttānañca dārānañcāti puttadārassa. Saṅgaṇhanaṃ saṅgaho. Na ākulā anākulā. Kammāni eva kammantā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti ayaṃ padavaṇṇanā.
关于义理的注释,应当这样理解:所谓“母亲”,指的是生育的人;父亲也是这样。所谓“服侍”,就是通过洗脚、按摩、涂油、沐浴,以及供养四种生活必需品来利益和报答他们。其中,因为父母对子女有大恩德,希望子女得到利益,怀着悲悯之心——当他们看到孩子们在外面玩耍后满身尘土回来,就替他们擦掉尘土,闻他们的头顶,亲吻他们,心中生起慈爱。即使子女用头顶着父母侍奉一百年,也无法报答父母的恩情。又因为父母生育我们、养育我们,是指引我们认识这个世界的人,被尊为梵天,被尊为最早的老师,所以服侍父母在今生能带来称赞,来世能带来生天的快乐,因此被称为“吉祥”。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā – mātā nāma janikā vuccati, tathā pitā. Upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma pādadhovanasambāhanaucchādananhāpanehi catupaccayasampadānena ca upakārakaraṇaṃ. Tattha yasmā mātāpitaro bahūpakārā puttānaṃ atthakāmā anukampakā, yaṃ puttake bahi kīḷitvā paṃsumakkhitasarīrake āgate disvā paṃsukaṃ puñchitvā matthakaṃ upasiṅghāyantā paricumbantā ca sinehaṃ uppādenti, vassasatampi mātāpitaro sīsena pariharantā puttā tesaṃ paṭikāraṃ kātuṃ asamatthā. Yasmā ca te āpādakā posakā imassa lokassa dassetāro brahmasammatā pubbācariyasammatā, tasmā tesaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ idha pasaṃsaṃ pecca saggasukhañca āvahati, tena ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
父母被称为梵天,也被称作最早的老师。
他们也是子女应当供养的对象,是怜悯众生的人。
所以,智者确实应当礼敬他们,恭敬供养他们;
以食物、饮品、衣物及卧具,
用涂油、沐浴和洗脚来服侍,
智者用这样的服侍对待父母,
就在这一世,人们就称赞他;死后,他会在天界里欢喜快乐。巴利
‘‘Brahmāti mātāpitaro, pubbācariyāti vuccare; Āhuneyyā ca puttānaṃ, pajāya anukampakā. ‘‘Tasmā hi ne namasseyya, sakkareyya ca paṇḍito; Annena atha pānena, vatthena sayanena ca. ‘‘Ucchādanena nhāpanena, pādānaṃ dhovanena ca; Tāya naṃ pāricariyāya, mātāpitūsu paṇḍitā; Idheva naṃ pasaṃsanti, pecca sagge pamodatī’’ti. (a. ni. 3.31; itivu. 106; jā. 2.20.181-183);
还有一种理解方式:“侍奉”分为五种:赡养、履行应尽的职责、延续家族血脉等等。这种侍奉是以防止恶行等为首的五种现世利益的因,因此应当知道它就是“吉祥”。世尊确实这样说过——巴利
Aparo nayo – upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma bharaṇakiccakaraṇakulavaṃsaṭṭhapanādipañcavidhaṃ, taṃ pāpanivāraṇādipañcavidhadiṭṭhadhammikahitahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
居士子,儿子应当从五个方面来对待东方的父母:他们养育了我,我要奉养他们;我要为他们尽应尽的责任;我要延续家族血脉;我要继承家业;他们去世之后,我要为他们行布施回向功德。居士子,当儿子从这五个方面来对待东方的父母时,父母也会从五个方面来慈悯儿子:阻止他作恶,引导他行善,教他技艺,为他娶合适的妻子,到了适当的时候把家产交给他。巴利
‘‘Pañcahi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi puttena puratthimā disā mātāpitaro paccupaṭṭhātabbā ‘bhato ne bharissāmi, kiccaṃ nesaṃ karissāmi, kulavaṃsaṃ ṭhapessāmi, dāyajjaṃ paṭipajjissāmi, atha vā pana petānaṃ kālakatānaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ anuppadassāmī’ti . Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi puttena puratthimā disā mātāpitaro paccupaṭṭhitā pañcahi ṭhānehi puttaṃ anukampanti, pāpā nivārenti, kalyāṇe nivesenti, sippaṃ sikkhāpenti, patirūpena dārena saṃyojenti, samaye dāyajjaṃ niyyādentī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.267).
另外,如果有人通过让父母对三宝生起净信、受持戒律,或者出家,在这三方面来侍奉父母,这个人就是侍奉父母者中最殊胜的。他这种对父母的侍奉,是对父母所给恩惠的回报,也是许多现世利益和来世利益的近因,所以被称为“吉祥”。巴利
Apica yo mātāpitaro tīsu vatthūsu pasāduppādanena sīlasamādāpanena pabbajjāya vā upaṭṭhahati, ayaṃ mātāpituupaṭṭhākānaṃ aggo, tassa taṃ mātāpituupaṭṭhānaṃ mātāpitūhi katassa upakārassa paccupakārabhūtaṃ anekesaṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ samparāyikānañca atthānaṃ padaṭṭhānato ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati.
这里说的“子妻”:自己亲生的儿子和女儿,都算在“子”里面。“妻”是指二十种妻子当中的任何一种。子和妻合起来就是“子妻”,即“他的子妻”。所谓“摄护”,就是用恭敬等方式去利益和照顾他们。这种摄护因为是妥善安排事业等现世利益的因由,所以应当理解为“吉祥”。世尊确实这样说过:“应当把西方的子妻看作……”在这里,他把上文所列的“子妻”用“妻子”这个词统摄起来——巴利
Puttadārassāti ettha attanā janitā puttāpi dhītaropi ‘‘puttā’’ tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Dārāti vīsatiyā bhariyānaṃ yā kāci bhariyā. Puttā ca dārā ca puttadāraṃ, tassa puttadārassa. Saṅgahoti sammānanādīhi upakārakaraṇaṃ. Taṃ susaṃvihitakammantatādidiṭṭhadhammikahitahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘pacchimā disā puttadārā veditabbā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.266) ettha uddiṭṭhaṃ puttadāraṃ bhariyāsaddena saṅgaṇhitvā –
居士子,做丈夫的应当以五种方式对待西方的妻子:尊重她、不轻视她、不背叛她、把家中大权交给她、赠予她饰品。居士子,丈夫以这五种方式对待西方的妻子之后,妻子也会以五种方式回报丈夫的关爱:把家务打理得井井有条、照顾好家里的人、不背叛他、守护他积攒的财物、在一切事务上都能干而不懒惰。巴利
‘‘Pañcahi kho, gahapatiputta, ṭhānehi sāmikena pacchimā disā bhariyā paccupaṭṭhātabbā, sammānanāya anavamānanāya anaticariyāya issariyavossaggena alaṅkārānuppadānena. Imehi kho, gahapatiputta, pañcahi ṭhānehi sāmikena pacchimā disā bhariyā paccupaṭṭhitā pañcahi ṭhānehi sāmikaṃ anukampati, susaṃvihitakammantā ca hoti, saṅgahitaparijanā ca, anaticārinī ca, sambhatañca anurakkhati, dakkhā ca hoti analasā sabbakiccesū’’ti (dī. ni. 3.269).
还有一种说法:“摄受”就是用符合正法的布施、爱语、利行来聚拢人心。比如:在布萨日布施生活所需,在星宿日让人观看星象,在吉祥日举行吉祥仪式,对现世和来世的利益给予教导和劝诫。应当依照前面所说的方式理解:因为它能带来现世的利益,能带来来世的利益,还能因值得天神礼敬的性质,所以称为“吉祥”。正如诸天之主帝释天所说:巴利
Ayaṃ vā aparo nayo – saṅgahoti dhammikāhi dānapiyavācaatthacariyāhi saṅgaṇhanaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – uposathadivasesu paribbayadānaṃ, nakkhattadivasesu nakkhattadassāpanaṃ, maṅgaladivasesu maṅgalakaraṇaṃ, diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikesu atthesu ovādānusāsananti. Taṃ vuttanayeneva diṭṭhadhammikahitahetuto samparāyikahitahetuto devatāhipi namassanīyabhāvahetuto ca ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ. Yathāha sakko devānamindo –
那些在家行善、持戒的近事男,
他们如法地养活妻儿,摩得利,我向他们致敬。巴利
‘‘Ye gahaṭṭhā puññakarā, sīlavanto upāsakā; Dhammena dāraṃ posenti, te namassāmi mātalī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.264);
所谓“有条不紊的事业”,就是懂得把握时机、做事得当、不懒惰、勤奋精进、没有败家恶习,因而远离了错过时机、做事不当、不作为、松懈怠惰等混乱状况的事业,比如农耕、牧牛、经商等。这些事业,无论是由自己、妻子儿女,还是奴仆雇工凭着精明能干这样经营,都能在今生就带来财富和粮食的增长,所以被称为“吉祥”。世尊也这样说过:巴利
Anākulākammantā nāma kālaññutāya patirūpakāritāya analasatāya uṭṭhānavīriyasampadāya abyasanīyatāya ca kālātikkamanaappatirūpakaraṇākaraṇasithilakaraṇādiākulabhāvavirahitā kasigorakkhavaṇijjādayo kammantā. Ete attano vā puttadārassa vā dāsakammakarānaṃ vā byattatāya evaṃ payojitā diṭṭheva dhamme dhanadhaññavuḍḍhipaṭilābhahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuttā. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā –
做事合乎正道、能扛起责任、勤奋精进的人,就能得到财富。
非白天嗜睡者,亦非厌恶夜间起身者;
整天醉得像藤蔓缠身一样,还是可能在家住下去的。
太冷了,太热了,现在又太晚了。
就这样,年轻人放逸了该做的事,利益便一一溜走。
凡在此世者不会认为冷热比草更重。
他做男子该做的事,就不会远离安乐。
就像蜜蜂采集花蜜时那样,在积攒财富的时候,
财富会越积越多,就像蚁丘一点点堆高一样。巴利
‘‘Patirūpakārī dhuravā, uṭṭhātā vindate dhana’’nti. (su. ni. 189; saṃ. ni. 1.246) ca; ‘‘Na divā soppasīlena, rattimuṭṭhānadessinā; Niccaṃ mattena soṇḍena, sakkā āvasituṃ gharaṃ. ‘‘Atisītaṃ atiuṇhaṃ, atisāyamidaṃ ahu; Iti vissaṭṭhakammante, atthā accenti māṇave. ‘‘Yodha sītañca uṇhañca, tiṇā bhiyyo na maññati; Karaṃ purisakiccāni, so sukhā na vihāyatī’’ti. ca (dī. ni. 3.253); ‘‘Bhoge saṃharamānassa, bhamarasseva irīyato; Bhogā sannicayaṃ yanti, vammikovūpacīyatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.265) –
这样,在这首偈颂里也宣说了四种吉祥:侍奉母亲、侍奉父亲、照顾妻儿、事业没有混乱。如果把“照顾妻儿”分成两项,就成了五种;如果把“侍奉父母”合为一项,就成了三种。而它们的吉祥之义,在相应的地方都已经分别说明了。巴利
Evaṃ imissāpi gāthāya mātupaṭṭhānaṃ, pitupaṭṭhānaṃ, puttadārassa saṅgaho, anākulā ca kammantāti cattāri maṅgalāni vuttāni, puttadārassa saṅgahaṃ vā dvidhā katvā pañca, mātāpituupaṭṭhānaṃ vā ekameva katvā tīṇi. Maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
266 266. 现在解释“布施”等词。这里,“布施”的意思是“以此而施与”,也就是说,把自己的财物转交给他人。“法行”就是依法的行为,或者是不离法的行为。“亲族”就是被认为“这些是我们的亲人”的人。“无过失”就是没有过错、无可指责、无可非难的意思。其余部分按照前面所说的方式理解。这是词语解释。巴利
266. Idāni dānañcāti ettha dīyate imināti dānaṃ, attano santakaṃ parassa paṭipādīyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammassa cariyā, dhammā vā anapetā cariyā dhammacariyā. Ñāyante ‘‘amhākaṃ ime’’ti ñātakā. Na avajjāni anavajjāni, aninditāni agarahitānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti ayaṃ padavaṇṇanā.
关于义理的解说,应当这样理解:所谓布施,是指为了他人、以善心为先导,对食物等十种布施物加以施舍的思心所,或者与这种思相应的无贪心所。正是靠着无贪,才能把那件物品转交给他人。因此说“以此而施与,所以叫布施”。由于它能让人获得现世和来世种种殊胜果报,比如被众人喜爱、令人欢喜等,所以称为吉祥。在这里还应当忆念《增支部》5.34等经中的说法,比如:“西哈啊,施主、布施之主为众人所喜爱、令人欢喜。”巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā – dānaṃ nāma paraṃ uddissa subuddhipubbikā annādidasadānavatthupariccāgacetanā taṃsampayutto vā alobho. Alobhena hi taṃ vatthuṃ parassa paṭipādeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dīyate imināti dāna’’nti. Taṃ bahujanapiyamanāpatādīnaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikānaṃ phalavisesānaṃ adhigamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dāyako sīha dānapati bahuno janassa piyo hoti manāpo’’ti evamādīni cettha suttāni (a. ni. 5.34) anussaritabbāni.
还有一种理解方式:布施分为两种,即财物布施和法布施。其中,财物布施就是前面所说的那种。而法布施,是出于希望他人得到利益的心,为他人开示由正等正觉者所宣说、能带来今生和来世灭苦与安乐的的法。在这两种布施中,法布施才是最殊胜的。正如经中所说:巴利
Aparo nayo – dānaṃ nāma duvidhaṃ āmisadānañca, dhammadānañca. Tattha āmisadānaṃ vuttappakārameva. Idhalokaparalokadukkhakkhayasukhāvahassa pana sammāsambuddhappaveditassa dhammassa paresaṃ hitakāmatāya desanā dhammadānaṃ. Imesañca dvinnaṃ dānānaṃ etadeva aggaṃ. Yathāha –
法施胜过一切布施,
法味胜过一切滋味。
一切喜乐中,法喜能胜出,
渴爱的灭尽,就能战胜一切苦。巴利
‘‘Sabbadānaṃ dhammadānaṃ jināti, Sabbarasaṃ dhammaraso jināti; Sabbaratiṃ dhammaratī jināti, Taṇhakkhayo sabbadukkhaṃ jinātī’’ti. (dha. pa. 354);
在这里,财施的吉祥含义前面已经说过了。而法施,因为它能成为体证义理等功德的近因,所以被称为“吉祥”。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Tattha āmisadānassa maṅgalattaṃ vuttameva. Dhammadānaṃ pana yasmā atthapaṭisaṃveditādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,一位比丘将自己听闻、学习过的法,详细地为他人宣说,他就能在那法上体会到义理,也体会到法本身。巴利
‘‘Yathā yathā, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme atthapaṭisaṃvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṃvedī cā’’ti evamādi (dī. ni. 3.355; a. ni. 5.26).
所谓法行,就是行持十善业道。正如经中所说:居士们,以身行法行、正行有三种……等等。这种法行能成为投生天界的因,所以应当知道它是吉祥。世尊确实这样说过:居士们,正是因为法行和正行,这里有些众生身坏命终之后,投生到善趣、天界。巴利
Dhammacariyā nāma dasakusalakammapathacariyā. Yathāha – ‘‘tividhaṃ kho, gahapatayo, kāyena dhammacariyāsamacariyā hotī’’ti evamādi. Sā panesā dhammacariyā saggalokūpapattihetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘dhammacariyāsamacariyāhetu kho, gahapatayo, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjantī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.441).
所谓亲戚,就是从母亲这边或父亲这边算起,一直到第七代祖父辈为止有血缘关系的人。当他们因为财产损失或生病而陷入困境,来到自己身边时,就根据自己的能力,用食物、衣服、钱财、粮食等来照顾他们。这样做能成为现世得到称赞等好处,以及来世投生善趣等殊胜成就的因,所以称为吉祥。巴利
Ñātakā nāma mātito vā pitito vā yāva sattamā pitāmahayugā sambandhā. Tesaṃ bhogapārijuññena vā byādhipārijuññena vā abhihatānaṃ attano samīpaṃ āgatānaṃ yathābalaṃ ghāsacchādanadhanadhaññādīhi saṅgaho pasaṃsādīnaṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ sugatigamanādīnañca samparāyikānaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ hetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati.
无过失的业,指的是受持布萨戒条、提供服务、营造园林、种植树木、修建桥梁等身、口、意的善行。因为这些是获得种种利益与安乐的因,所以称为吉祥。关于这一点,应当忆念经典中的这些话:“毗舍佉,确实有这种情况:世间某个女人或男人,受持具足八支的布萨后,身体坏散、死后,得以投生到四大王天众神的行列中。”(《增支部》8.43)等等。巴利
Anavajjāni kammāni nāma uposathaṅgasamādānaveyyāvaccakaraṇaārāmavanaropanasetukaraṇādīni kāyavacīmanosucaritakammāni. Tāni hi nānappakārahitasukhādhigamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ, visākhe, vijjati yaṃ idhekacco itthī vā puriso vā aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ uposathaṃ upavasitvā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjeyyā’’ti evamādīni cettha suttāni (a. ni. 8.43) anussaritabbāni.
就这样,在这首偈颂里讲了四种吉祥:布施、如法而行、照顾亲族、没有过失的行为;而它们各自的吉祥含义,也在各处已经说明过了。巴利
Evaṃ imissā gāthāya dānaṃ, dhammacariyā, ñātakānaṃ saṅgaho, anavajjāni kammānīti cattāri maṅgalāni vuttāni, maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
267 现在解释“不乐”和“远离”。这里的“不乐”是指不乐于(恶)。“远离”是指远离,或者众生通过它而远离,所以叫远离。“恶”是指不善。以迷醉之义称为“酒”,饮酒就是“饮酒”,由此而有“从饮酒”的说法。摄护就是“律仪”。不放逸就是“不放逸”。“于诸法中”是指在善法中。其余内容依照前面所说的方式来理解——这是词句的解释。巴利
267. Idāni āratī viratīti ettha āratīti āramaṇaṃ. Viratīti viramaṇaṃ, viramanti vā etāya sattāti virati. Pāpāti akusalā. Madanīyaṭṭhena majjaṃ, majjassa pānaṃ majjapānaṃ, tato majjapānā. Saṃyamanaṃ saṃyamo. Appamajjanaṃ appamādo. Dhammesūti kusalesu. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti ayaṃ padavaṇṇanā.
关于含义的解释,应当这样理解:所谓“不乐”,是指已经看清恶的过患的人,内心对恶自然生起不欢喜。所谓“离”,是指通过业门,以身和语来远离。这个“离”有三种:现前离、受持离、断除离。其中,良家子因为顾念自己的出身、家族或氏族,这样想:“我去杀害生命、拿取别人没给的东西,这跟我的身份实在不相称。”以这种心态,对眼前的具体情境生起远离,这叫现前离。通过受持学处而生起的远离,叫受持离;自从受持之后,良家子就不再造作杀生等恶行。与圣道相应的远离,叫断除离;自从它生起之后,圣弟子的五种恐惧和怨恨就完全止息了。所谓“恶”,就像经中详细说的:“居士子,杀生是业的染污,不与取……欲邪行……妄语——”巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā – ārati nāma pāpe ādīnavadassāvino manasā eva anabhirati. Virati nāma kammadvāravasena kāyavācāhi viramaṇaṃ. Sā cesā virati nāma sampattavirati samādānavirati samucchedaviratīti tividhā hoti. Tattha yā kulaputtassa attano jātiṃ vā kulaṃ vā gottaṃ vā paṭicca ‘‘na me etaṃ patirūpaṃ, yvāhaṃ imaṃ pāṇaṃ haneyyaṃ, adinnaṃ ādiyeyya’’ntiādinā nayena sampattavatthuto virati, ayaṃ sampattavirati nāma. Sikkhāpadasamādānavasena pana pavattā samādānavirati nāma, yassā pavattito pabhuti kulaputto pāṇātipātādīni na samācarati. Ariyamaggasampayuttā samucchedavirati nāma, yassā pavattito pabhuti ariyasāvakassa pañca bhayāni verāni vūpasantāni honti. Pāpaṃ nāma yaṃ taṃ ‘‘pāṇātipāto kho, gahapatiputta, kammakileso adinnādānaṃ…pe… kāmesumicchācāro…pe… musāvādo’’ti evaṃ vitthāretvā –
杀生、不与取,还有妄语,这些被称为……
智者们不会称赞侵犯他人妻子的行为。巴利
‘‘Pāṇātipāto adinnādānaṃ, musāvādo ca vuccati; Paradāragamanañceva, nappasaṃsanti paṇḍitā’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.245) –
像这样,偈颂里已经概括了四种名为业与烦恼的不善,从这些恶[而说为恶]。对这一切恶的不乐和远离,因为能带来现世与来世怖畏、怨恨的断除等种种不同殊胜功德的证得,所以称为吉祥。在这里,还应当忆念这些经文:居士子,圣弟子远离杀生……等等。巴利
Evaṃ gāthāya saṅgahitaṃ kammakilesasaṅkhātaṃ catubbidhaṃ akusalaṃ, tato pāpā. Sabbāpesā ārati ca virati ca diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikabhayaverappahānādinānappakāravisesādhigamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Pāṇātipātā paṭivirato kho, gahapatiputta, ariyasāvako’’tiādīni cettha suttāni anussaritabbāni.
所谓“饮酒的自制”,就是前面说过的“远离谷酒、果酒等放逸因”这一学处的另一个名称。因为喝酒的人不知道什么是有益,不知道什么是法,会对母亲造成伤害,会对父亲、佛陀、独觉佛、如来的弟子们造成伤害;在今生就会被人指责,来世会堕入恶道,再往后还会变得疯癫。反过来,能克制自己不喝酒的人,就能止息这些过患,并获得与这些过患相反的种种功德。所以应当知道,这种饮酒的自制就是“吉祥”。巴利
Majjapānāca saṃyamo nāma pubbe vuttasurāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā veramaṇiyāvetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yasmā pana majjapāyī atthaṃ na jānāti, dhammaṃ na jānāti, mātupi antarāyaṃ karoti, pitu buddhapaccekabuddhatathāgatasāvakānampi antarāyaṃ karoti, diṭṭheva dhamme garahaṃ, samparāye duggatiṃ, aparāpariyāye ummādañca pāpuṇāti. Majjapānā pana saṃyato tesaṃ dosānaṃ vūpasamaṃ tabbiparītaguṇasampadañca pāpuṇāti. Tasmā ayaṃ majjapānā saṃyamo ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbo.
在诸善法中,所谓“不放逸”,按照《分别论》第846段所说的放逸的反面来理解其含义,应当知道就是:在诸善法中对正念不偏离、不遗忘。这种不放逸,因为能使人获得种种善法,也能使人证得不死(涅槃),所以被称为“吉祥”。在这里,应当忆念导师的教导,比如“对不放逸、精勤的人……”以及“不放逸是不死之路”等等。巴利
Kusalesu dhammesu appamādo nāma ‘‘kusalānaṃ vā dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya asakkaccakiriyatā asātaccakiriyatā anaṭṭhitakiriyatā olīnavuttitā nikkhittachandatā nikkhittadhuratā anāsevanā abhāvanā abahulīkammaṃ anadhiṭṭhānaṃ ananuyogo pamādo. Yo evarūpo pamādo pamajjanā pamajjitattaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati pamādo’’ti (vibha. 846) ettha vuttassa pamādassa paṭipakkhanayena atthato kusalesu dhammesu satiyā avippavāso veditabbo. So nānappakārakusalādhigamahetuto amatādhigamahetuto ca ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. Tattha ‘‘appamattassa ātāpino’’ti (ma. ni. 2.18-19; a. ni. 5.26) ca ‘‘appamādo amatapada’’nti (dha. pa. 21) ca evamādi satthusāsanaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
就这样,在这首偈颂里讲了三种吉祥:远离恶行、节制饮酒、在善法上不放逸;而它们各自作为吉祥的含义,也在相应的地方分别说明了。巴利
Evaṃ imissā gāthāya pāpā virati, majjapānā saṃyamo, kusalesu dhammesu appamādoti tīṇi maṅgalāni vuttāni, maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
268 268. 现在解释“恭敬”等词。这里的“恭敬”指尊重。“谦下”指行为谦逊。“知足”指满足。“知恩”指记得别人为自己做过的事。“适时”指恰当的时机、合适的时间。“听法”就是听闻佛法。其余部分按照前面说过的方式理解——这是逐词解释。巴利
268. Idāni gāravo cāti ettha gāravoti garubhāvo. Nivātoti nīcavuttitā. Santuṭṭhīti santoso. Katassa jānanatā kataññutā. Kālenāti khaṇena samayena. Dhammassa savanaṃ dhammassavanaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti ayaṃ padavaṇṇanā.
义理注释应当这样理解:所谓“恭敬”,就是对值得尊重、值得礼敬的对象,比如佛陀、独觉佛、如来弟子、老师、亲教师、父母、年长的兄弟姊妹等,按照各自相应的方式表达尊重、行礼致敬、保持恭敬之心。这种恭敬是投生善趣等的因,正如经中所说:巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā – gāravo nāma garukārapayogārahesu buddhapaccekabuddhatathāgatasāvakaācariyupajjhāyamātāpitujeṭṭhabhātikabhaginiādīsu yathānurūpaṃ garukāro garukaraṇaṃ sagāravatā. Svāyaṃ gāravo yasmā sugatigamanādīnaṃ hetu. Yathāha –
他尊重值得尊重的人,敬重值得敬重的人,供养值得供养的人。他凭着这样的业,做得这样圆满、这样受持,在身体坏灭、死后,会投生到善趣、天界。如果身体坏灭之后……没有投生到那里,而是转生为人,那么无论生在哪里,都会出生在高贵的家族。巴利
‘‘Garukātabbaṃ garuṃ karoti, mānetabbaṃ māneti, pūjetabbaṃ pūjeti. So tena kammena evaṃ samattena evaṃ samādinnena kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati. No ce kāyassa bhedā…pe… upapajjati, sace manussattaṃ āgacchati, yattha yattha paccājāyati, uccākulīno hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.295).
就像这样,世尊说过:“比丘们,有七种不退法。是哪七种呢?敬重导师……”(《增支部》7.32-33)。因此,这被称为“吉祥”。巴利
Yathā cāha – ‘‘sattime, bhikkhave, aparihāniyā dhammā. Katame satta? Satthugāravatā’’tiādi (a. ni. 7.32-33). Tasmā ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati.
所谓“谦下”,就是内心谦卑、行为谦逊。具足这种品质的人,已经断除了我慢,断除了骄横,变得像擦脚布一样,像断了角的牛一样,像拔掉毒牙的蛇一样,柔和、亲切、言语令人愉快。这就是谦下。由于它是获得名声等功德的因,所以称为“吉祥”。经中也说:“谦下而不傲慢,这样的人获得名声。”等等。巴利
Nivāto nāma nīcamanatā nivātavuttitā, yāya samannāgato puggalo nihatamāno nihatadappo pādapuñchanacoḷakasamo chinnavisāṇusabhasamo uddhaṭadāṭhasappasamo ca hutvā saṇho sakhilo sukhasambhāso hoti, ayaṃ nivāto. Svāyaṃ yasādiguṇapaṭilābhahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati. Āha ca – ‘‘nivātavutti atthaddho, tādiso labhate yasa’’nti evamādi (dī. ni. 3.273).
所谓知足,就是对任何一种生活必需品都感到满足。这种知足有十二种。具体来说:在袈裟方面有三种知足——随所得而知足、随能力而知足、随适宜而知足。对饮食等其他必需品,也同样各有这三种。巴利
Santuṭṭhi nāma itarītarapaccayasantoso, so dvādasavidho hoti. Seyyathidaṃ – cīvare yathālābhasantoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasantosoti tividho. Evaṃ piṇḍapātādīsu.
关于这一点,分类说明如下:在这里,一位比丘得到一件袈裟,不管是好的还是不好的,他就靠这一件过日子,不再希求别的;即使得到更好的,他也不接受。这是他对袈裟的“随所得知足”。可是,如果他生病了,披着沉重的袈裟时会弯腰驼背,或者感到疲惫,那么他跟同分比丘交换,用轻便的袈裟维持生活,也依然知足。这是他对袈裟的“随体力知足”。另一位比丘常常能得到殊胜的资具,他得到丝绸袈裟之类昂贵袈裟中的某一种时,心想:“这适合长老们、久出家者和多闻者。”于是把它送给那些人,自己则从垃圾堆或其他地方捡来碎布,缝成僧伽梨披着,也依然知足。这是他对袈裟的“随适合知足”。巴利
Tassāyaṃ pabhedavaṇṇanā – idha bhikkhu cīvaraṃ labhati sundaraṃ vā asundaraṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti, ayamassa cīvare yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana ābādhiko hoti, garuṃ cīvaraṃ pārupanto oṇamati vā kilamati vā. So sabhāgena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ taṃ parivattetvā lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa cīvare yathābalasantoso. Aparo bhikkhu paṇītapaccayalābhī hoti, so paṭṭacīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ mahagghaṃ cīvaraṃ labhitvā ‘‘idaṃ therānaṃ cirapabbajitānaṃ bahussutānañca anurūpa’’nti tesaṃ datvā attanā saṅkārakūṭā vā aññato vā kutoci nantakāni uccinitvā saṅghāṭiṃ katvā dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa cīvare yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到团食,不管是粗劣的还是精美的,他只靠这些维持生活,不希求别的,即使得到更好的也不接受,这就是他对团食的随所得知足。但如果他生病了,吃了粗劣的团食后引发严重的病痛,他就把团食给同分比丘,从那位比丘手里接受酥、蜜、乳等来吃,同时修行沙门法,也依然知足,这就是他对团食的随体力知足。另一位比丘得到精美的团食,他想:这团食适合长老、久出家者,以及其他不靠精美团食就难以维持生活的同梵行者,于是把食物给他们,自己去乞食,吃混合的食物,也同样知足,这就是他对团食的随适合知足。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu piṇḍapātaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti, aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti, ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana ābādhiko hoti, lūkhaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjitvā bāḷhaṃ rogātaṅkaṃ pāpuṇāti, so sabhāgassa bhikkhuno taṃ datvā tassa hatthato sappimadhukhīrādīni bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathābalasantoso. Aparo bhikkhu paṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, so ‘‘ayaṃ piṇḍapāto therānaṃ cirapabbajitānaṃ aññesañca paṇītapiṇḍapātaṃ vinā ayāpentānaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ anurūpo’’ti tesaṃ datvā attanā piṇḍāya caritvā missakāhāraṃ bhuñjantopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,一位比丘得到住处,他就以所得的住处为满足,即使后来又得到更好的住处,也不接受,这就是他对住处的随所得知足。如果他生病了,住在无风的住处时,被胆病等剧烈折磨,他就把那个住处让给同分的比丘,然后住到对方所得到的有风凉爽的住处,修习沙门法,依然感到满足,这就是他对住处的随体力知足。还有一位比丘,即使得到美好的住处也不接受,他想:美好的住处是放逸的地方,坐在那里会陷入昏沉睡眠,被睡眠压倒后,醒来时贪欲的念头就会侵蚀他。他拒绝这些之后,不论住在露天、树下还是叶屋等任何地方,都感到满足,这就是他对住处的随适合知足。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhuno senāsanaṃ pāpuṇāti, so teneva santussati, puna aññaṃ sundaratarampi pāpuṇantaṃ na gaṇhāti, ayamassa senāsane yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana ābādhiko hoti, nivātasenāsane vasanto ativiya pittarogādīhi āturīyati, so sabhāgassa bhikkhuno taṃ datvā tassa pāpuṇanake savātasītalasenāsane vasitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa senāsane yathābalasantoso. Aparo bhikkhu sundaraṃ senāsanaṃ pattampi na sampaṭicchati ‘‘sundarasenāsanaṃ pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tatra nisinnassa thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, niddābhibhūtassa ca puna paṭibujjhato kāmavitakkā samudācarantī’’ti, so taṃ paṭikkhipitvā abbhokāsarukkhamūlapaṇṇakuṭīsu yattha katthaci nivasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso.
在这里,比丘得到药,或是诃梨勒果,或是庵摩罗果,他就只靠这个维持身体,不希求别人得到的酥、蜜、糖浆等,即使得到了也不接受。这是他对病缘的随所得知足。
如果比丘生病了,需要油,却得到了糖浆,他就把糖浆送给同分的比丘,再从那位比丘手里拿到油,做成药来用,同时修行沙门法,也一样知足。这是他对病缘的随体力知足。
还有一位比丘,在一个容器里放了腐尿诃梨勒,在另一个容器里放了四甘味药,有人对他说:尊者,您想要哪个就拿哪个。如果他的病靠这两者中的任何一种就能治好,他就想:腐尿诃梨勒是诸佛等所赞叹的,而且我就是依靠腐尿药出家的,对此应当尽形寿努力。这样想了之后,他拒绝四甘味药,用腐尿诃梨勒做药,也极为满足。这是他对病缘的随相宜知足。巴利
Idha pana bhikkhu bhesajjaṃ labhati harītakaṃ vā āmalakaṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti, aññehi laddhaṃ sappimadhuphāṇitādimpi na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti, ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana ābādhiko telena atthiko phāṇitaṃ labhati, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa hatthato telena bhesajjaṃ katvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathābalasantoso. Aparo bhikkhu ekasmiṃ bhājane pūtimuttaharītakaṃ ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ catumadhuraṃ ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante, yadicchasī’’ti vuccamāno sacassa tesaṃ dvinnaṃ aññatarenapi byādhi vūpasammati, atha ‘‘pūtimuttaharītakaṃ nāma buddhādīhi vaṇṇitaṃ, ayañca pūtimuttabhesajjaṃ nissāya pabbajjā, tattha te yāvajīvaṃ ussāho karaṇīyo’’ti (mahāva. 128) vuttanti cintento catumadhurabhesajjaṃ paṭikkhipitvā muttaharītakena bhesajjaṃ karontopi paramasantuṭṭhova hoti, ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathāsāruppasantoso.
这样分类的各种知足,就称为知足。应当知道,这种知足是“吉祥”,因为它是断除过度贪求、恶欲、多欲等恶法的原因,是投生善趣的原因,是成就圣道的资粮,也是成就四方无碍等状态的原因。正如所说的:巴利
Evaṃ pabhedo sabbopeso santoso santuṭṭhīti vuccati. Sā atricchatāpāpicchatāmahicchatādīnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahānādhigamahetuto sugatihetuto ariyamaggasambhārabhāvato cātuddisādibhāvahetuto ca ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbā. Āha ca –
他四方无碍,也没有嗔恨,
满足于随缘得到的任何东西。巴利
‘‘Cātuddiso appaṭigho ca hoti, Santussamāno itarītarenā’’ti. (su. ni. 42; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 128) evamādi;
所谓知恩,就是无论别人给的帮助是大是小,也不管是什么样的人给的,都能一次又一次地记在心里、念念不忘。再者,布施持戒等善行功德能让众生脱离地狱等恶趣的痛苦,对众生有大利益,所以对这些功德的利益也能常常忆念不忘,这也应当理解为知恩。这种知恩能带来善人所赞叹的种种殊胜功德,所以被称为吉祥。佛陀也说过:比丘们,世间有两种人很难遇到。哪两种?一种是先付出帮助的人,一种是知恩报恩的人。(《增支部》2.120)巴利
Kataññutā nāma appassa vā bahussa vā yena kenaci katassa upakārassa punappunaṃ anussaraṇabhāvena jānanatā. Apica nerayikādidukkhaparittāṇato puññāni eva pāṇīnaṃ bahūpakārāni, tato tesampi upakārānussaraṇatā ‘‘kataññutā’’ti veditabbā. Sā sappurisehi pasaṃsanīyatādinānappakāravisesādhigamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuttā. Āha ca – ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, puggalā dullabhā lokasmiṃ. Katame dve? Yo ca pubbakārī, yo ca kataññū katavedī’’ti (a. ni. 2.120).
有时候,当心里生起与掉举相应的心念,或者被欲贪寻思等任何一种烦恼压倒时,为了在当时驱除这些烦恼而听闻佛法,这就叫“适时听法”。另一些论师说:每隔五天听一次法,就叫“适时听法”。正如具寿阿那律所说:“尊者,我们每隔五天,就整夜坐在一起谈论法义。”(《中部》1.327;《大品》466)巴利
Kālena dhammassavanaṃ nāma yasmiṃ kāle uddhaccasahagataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kāmavitakkādīnaṃ vā aññatarena abhibhūtaṃ, tasmiṃ kāle tesaṃ vinodanatthaṃ dhammassavanaṃ. Apare āhu – pañcame pañcame divase dhammassavanaṃ kālena dhammassavanaṃ nāma. Yathāha āyasmā anuruddho ‘‘pañcāhikaṃ kho pana mayaṃ, bhante, sabbarattiṃ dhammiyā kathāya sannisīdāmā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.327; mahāva. 466).
另外,有时候一个人去亲近善知识,能够听到消除自己疑惑的法,那么这个时候的听法也应该理解为“适时听法”。就像经里说的:“他时常去亲近、请问、追问。”这个适时听法,因为是断除五盖、获得四种利益、灭尽诸漏等各种殊胜成就的原因,所以应该看作是吉祥。对此确实说过:巴利
Apica yasmiṃ kāle kalyāṇamitte upasaṅkamitvā sakkā hoti attano kaṅkhāpaṭivinodakaṃ dhammaṃ sotuṃ, tasmiṃ kālepi dhammassavanaṃ ‘‘kālena dhammassavana’’nti veditabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘te kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paripucchati paripañhatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 3.358). Tadetaṃ kālena dhammassavanaṃ nīvaraṇappahānacaturānisaṃsaāsavakkhayādinānappakāravisesādhigamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,当圣弟子竖起耳朵、用心作意、把全部心力都集中起来、倾耳聆听正法的时候,就在那一刻,他的五种盖障不存在。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, samaye ariyasāvako aṭṭhiṃ katvā manasi katvā sabbaṃ cetaso samannāharitvā ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti, pañcassa nīvaraṇāni tasmiṃ samaye na hontī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.219) ca.
比丘们,对于听闻随入耳中……(中略)……已被善加通达的诸法,可以预期有四种利益。(《增支部》4.191)巴利
‘‘Sotānugatānaṃ, bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ…pe… suppaṭividdhānaṃ cattāro ānisaṃsā pāṭikaṅkhā’’ti (a. ni. 4.191) ca.
比丘们,这四种法,如果能适时正确地修习、正确地继而实践,就会一步步让诸漏灭尽。是哪四种呢?就是“适时听法”等等。巴利
‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, dhammā kālena kālaṃ sammā bhāviyamānā sammā anuparivattiyamānā anupubbena āsavānaṃ khayaṃ pāpenti. Katame cattāro? Kālena dhammassavana’’nti ca evamādīni (a. ni. 4.147).
就这样,在这首偈颂里讲了五种吉祥:恭敬、谦卑、知足、感恩、适时听法,而且它们各自的吉祥含义在相应的地方都已经说明清楚了。巴利
Evaṃ imissā gāthāya gāravo, nivāto, santuṭṭhi, kataññutā, kālena dhammassavananti pañca maṅgalāni vuttāni, maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
关于恭敬与谦卑这一偈的释义,到此结束。巴利
Niṭṭhitā gāravo ca nivāto cāti imissā gāthāya atthavaṇṇanā.
269 现在解释“忍耐”等词。这里,能忍受就是忍耐。因为以顺取的方式领受,言语对我容易,所以叫易受教;易受教的行为,就是易受教行;易受教的性质,就是易受教性。因为烦恼已经止息,所以叫沙门。“见”就是看、观察。对法进行讨论,就叫法谈。其余的词都按照前面说过的方式来理解——这就是词句的释义。巴利
269. Idāni khantī cāti ettha khamanaṃ khanti. Padakkhiṇaggāhitāya sukhaṃ vaco asminti suvaco, suvacassa kammaṃ sovacassaṃ, sovacassassa bhāvo sovacassatā. Kilesānaṃ samitattā samaṇā. Dassananti pekkhanaṃ. Dhammassa sākacchā dhammasākacchā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti ayaṃ padavaṇṇanā.
不过,义释应当这样理解:所谓“忍耐”,就是安忍、堪忍。具足这种忍耐的比丘,当别人用十种辱骂的方式骂他,或者用殴打、捆绑等手法伤害他时,他就像听不见、看不见一样,内心毫不动摇,如同忍辱仙人一般。正如经中所说:巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā khanti nāma adhivāsanakkhanti, yāya samannāgato bhikkhu dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosante, vadhabandhādīhi vā vihiṃsante puggale asuṇanto viya ca apassanto viya ca nibbikāro hoti khantivādī viya. Yathāha –
过去时,有一位宣扬忍辱的沙门;
迦尸王砍断了那位安住于忍辱中的人。巴利
‘‘Ahū atītamaddhānaṃ, samaṇo khantidīpano; Taṃ khantiyāyeva ṭhitaṃ, kāsirājā achedayī’’ti. (jā. 1.4.51);
或者,他作意对方是好的,因为对方没有进一步的过失,就像具寿富楼那长老那样。正如所说的——巴利
Bhaddakato vā manasi karoti tato uttari aparādhābhāvena āyasmā puṇṇatthero viya. Yathāha –
尊者,如果苏那巴兰答人骂我、侮辱我,我就会这样想:这些苏那巴兰答人真好,实在太好,因为他们没有用手打我。巴利
‘‘Sace maṃ, bhante, sunāparantakā manussā akkosissanti paribhāsissanti, tattha me evaṃ bhavissati ‘bhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, subhaddakā vatime sunāparantakā manussā, yaṃ me nayime pāṇinā pahāraṃ dentī’’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.396; saṃ. ni. 4.88).
具足它的人,也会受到仙人们的称赞。正如萨罗婆伽仙人所说——巴利
Yāya ca samannāgato isīnampi pasaṃsanīyo hoti. Yathāha sarabhaṅgo isi –
灭掉愤怒的人,永远不会忧愁。
仙人们称赞断除忘恩负义。
对一切所说的粗恶言语,都应当忍耐。
已寂静的圣者们说这是最高的忍耐。巴利
‘‘Kodhaṃ vadhitvā na kadāci socati, Makkhappahānaṃ isayo vaṇṇayanti; Sabbesaṃ vuttaṃ pharusaṃ khametha, Etaṃ khantiṃ uttamamāhu santo’’ti. (jā. 2.17.64);
他也会受到天人们的称赞。就像诸天之主帝释天所说的那样:巴利
Devatānampi pasaṃsanīyo hoti. Yathāha sakko devānamindo –
真正有力量的人,确实会忍受软弱者的冒犯;
最高的堪忍是软弱的人恒常忍耐。巴利
‘‘Yo have balavā santo, dubbalassa titikkhati; Tamāhu paramaṃ khantiṃ, niccaṃ khamati dubbalo’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.250-251);
这种忍耐也是诸佛所称赞的。正如世尊所说:巴利
Buddhānampi pasaṃsanīyo hoti. Yathāha bhagavā –
就算被人辱骂、殴打、捆绑,也能不生气地忍受;
我把拥有忍辱之力、以忍辱为军队的人,称为婆罗门。巴利
‘‘Akkosaṃ vadhabandhañca, aduṭṭho yo titikkhati; Khantībalaṃ balānīkaṃ, tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇa’’nti. (dha. pa. 399);
这个忍耐,因为它是这里所说的这些功德以及其他功德的证得之因,所以应当知道它就是“吉祥”。巴利
Sā panesā khanti etesañca idha vaṇṇitānaṃ aññesañca guṇānaṃ adhigamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbā.
所谓“易受教”,就是当被同梵行者如法地劝告时,不陷入散乱、沉默或盘算对方说得对还是错,而是怀着极大的敬意、尊重和谦卑,说“善哉”,并照着去做。这种素质能让人从同梵行者那里得到教诫和教导,也能断除过失、获得功德,所以称为“吉祥”。巴利
Sovacassatā nāma sahadhammikaṃ vuccamāne vikkhepaṃ vā tuṇhībhāvaṃ vā guṇadosacintanaṃ vā anāpajjitvā ativiya ādarañca gāravañca nīcamanatañca purakkhatvā ‘‘sādhū’’ti vacanakaraṇatā. Sā sabrahmacārīnaṃ santikā ovādānusāsanīpaṭilābhahetuto dosappahānaguṇādhigamahetuto ca ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati.
所谓“见沙门”,是指去亲近、侍奉、随念、听闻、瞻视那些已经止息了烦恼、修好了身语意和智慧、具备最上的调伏与寂止的出家修行人;这一切,简略地说,就叫作“见”。应当知道这就是“吉祥”。为什么?因为它能带来很大的利益。经中也说:“诸比丘,我说见那些比丘有大利益。”等等。因此,一个想得到利益的好人家的子弟,看见持戒的比丘来到自家门口时,如果有东西可以布施,就应当尽力用布施来款待;如果没有东西,就应当五体投地顶礼;如果连这也做不到,就应当合掌敬礼;如果连这也做不到,就应当以清净的信心,用慈爱的眼光注视。就这样,仅仅以见沙门为根本所生的福德,就能让他在无数千生之中,眼睛不生病、不灼痛、不肿起、不长疮,眼睛清净明亮,具足五种色泽的光彩,就像宝殿中打开的摩尼宝窗一样;在十万劫之中,在天界和人间都能获得一切圆满。一个人生而为人,又有智慧,以如理修习见沙门所生的福德,而感受到这样的果报圆满,这并不稀奇;就连畜生道的众生,仅仅以信心所引发的见沙门,也能得到这样的果报圆满,所以他们才这样赞叹——巴利
Samaṇānaṃdassanaṃ nāma upasamitakilesānaṃ bhāvitakāyavacīcittapaññānaṃ uttamadamathasamathasamannāgatānaṃ pabbajitānaṃ upasaṅkamanupaṭṭhānaanussaraṇasavanadassanaṃ, sabbampi omakadesanāya ‘‘dassana’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ. Kasmā? Bahūpakārattā. Āha ca – ‘‘dassanampahaṃ, bhikkhave, tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahūpakāraṃ vadāmī’’tiādi (itivu. 104). Yato hitakāmena kulaputtena sīlavante bhikkhū gharadvāraṃ sampatte disvā yadi deyyadhammo atthi, yathābalaṃ deyyadhammena patimānetabbā. Yadi natthi, pañcapatiṭṭhitaṃ katvā vanditabbā. Tasmiṃ asampajjamāne añjaliṃ paggahetvā namassitabbā, tasmimpi asampajjamāne pasannacittena piyacakkhūhi sampassitabbā. Evaṃ dassanamūlakenāpi hi puññena anekāni jātisahassāni cakkhumhi rogo vā dāho vā ussadā vā piḷakā vā na honti, vippasannapañcavaṇṇasassirikāni honti cakkhūni ratanavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇikavāṭasadisāni , satasahassakappamattaṃ devesu ca manussesu ca sabbasampattīnaṃ lābhī hoti. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ manussabhūto sappaññajātiko sammā pavattitena samaṇadassanamayena puññena evarūpaṃ vipākasampattiṃ anubhaveyya, yattha tiracchānagatānampi kevalaṃ saddhāmattakajanitassa samaṇadassanassa evaṃ vipākasampattiṃ vaṇṇayanti –
猫头鹰,圆眼者,
住在韦地亚卡山很久的长久居住者
这位憍尸迦族人真是快乐啊!
他看见那位殊胜的佛陀,在清晨时分安住着。
对我生起净信之心,并对无与伦比的比丘僧团;
他在十万劫中都不会堕入恶趣。
从天界命终之后,被善业所推动,
他将拥有无尽的智慧,以“喜悦”之名而闻名。巴利
‘‘Ulūko maṇḍalakkhiko, Vediyake ciradīghavāsiko; Sukhito vata kosiyo ayaṃ, Kāluṭṭhitaṃ passati buddhavaraṃ. ‘‘Mayi cittaṃ pasādetvā, bhikkhusaṅghe anuttare; Kappānaṃ satasahassāni, duggatiṃ so na gacchati. ‘‘Devalokā cavitvāna, kusalakammena codito; Bhavissati anantañāṇo, somanassoti vissuto’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.144; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 5.10);
在傍晚或清晨,两位经师比丘互相讨论经典,持律者讨论律,论师讨论阿毗达摩,本生诵者讨论本生,注疏师讨论注疏;或者为了净化被昏沉、掉举和疑惑所占据的心,在适当的时段进行讨论,这就是适时讨论法义。它能带来通达圣教、善巧辨析等功德,所以被称为吉祥。巴利
Kālena dhammasākacchā nāma padose vā paccūse vā dve suttantikā bhikkhū aññamaññaṃ suttantaṃ sākacchanti, vinayadharā vinayaṃ, ābhidhammikā abhidhammaṃ , jātakabhāṇakā jātakaṃ, aṭṭhakathikā aṭṭhakathaṃ, līnuddhatavicikicchāparetacittavisodhanatthaṃ vā tamhi tamhi kāle sākacchanti, ayaṃ kālena dhammasākacchā. Sā āgamabyattiādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ hetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccatīti.
就这样,在这首偈颂里讲了四种吉祥:忍耐、易受教、见沙门、适时讨论法义;而它们之所以是吉祥,也在各处分别说明了。巴利
Evaṃ imissā gāthāya khanti, sovacassatā, samaṇadassanaṃ, kālena dhammasākacchāti cattāri maṅgalāni vuttāni, maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
“忍耐”这一偈颂的义解,到这里就结束了。巴利
Niṭṭhitā khantī cāti imissā gāthāya atthavaṇṇanā.
270 270. 现在解释“苦行等”这一句:在这里,能烧灼邪恶不善法,所以叫苦行。梵行,就是清净的行为,或者婆罗门的行为,也就是最殊胜的行为,这样说才正确。见圣谛,就是见到圣谛。也有人说是“见到诸圣谛”,那种说法并不好。涅槃,因为已经脱离称为“林缚”的渴爱,所以叫涅槃。作证,就是亲自证得。涅槃作证,就是亲自证得涅槃。其余内容,按照前面讲过的方式理解。以上是词语的解释。巴利
270. Idāni tapo cāti ettha pāpake akusale dhamme tapatīti tapo. Brahmaṃ cariyaṃ, brahmānaṃ vā cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, seṭṭhacariyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ariyasaccānaṃ dassanaṃ ariyasaccāna dassanaṃ. Ariyasaccāni dassanantipi eke, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Nikkhantaṃ vānatoti nibbānaṃ, sacchikaraṇaṃ sacchikiriyā, nibbānassa sacchikiriyā nibbānasacchikiriyā. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti ayaṃ padavaṇṇanā.
关于义理的解释,则应当这样理解:所谓“苦行”,因为能烧灼贪欲、忧恼等烦恼,所以指守护根门;或者因为能烧灼懈怠,所以指精进。具足这种精进的人,就称为“具勤者”。而这种精进,因为是断除贪欲、忧恼等烦恼以及获得禅那等成就的原因,所以应当知道它是“吉祥”。巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā – tapo nāma abhijjhādomanassādīnaṃ tapanato indriyasaṃvaro, kosajjassa vā tapanato vīriyaṃ. Tena hi samannāgato puggalo ātāpīti vuccati. Svāyaṃ abhijjhādippahānajhānādipaṭilābhahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbo.
“梵行”这个词,是远离淫欲、沙门法、教法和道这几个意思的同义词。比如在“断除不梵行,成为梵行者”这类经文里,远离淫欲就叫梵行。在“贤友,我们在世尊座下修梵行”这类经文里,指的是沙门法。在“邪恶者,只要我的梵行还没有成就、繁荣、广传、为众人所知,我就不会般涅槃”这类经文里,指的是教法。在“比丘,这圣八支道就是梵行,也就是正见等”这类经文里,指的是道。而在这里,因为后文已经用“见圣谛”把道包含进去了,所以剩下的其他所有含义也都适用。这个梵行,因为是层层证得种种殊胜差别的原因,所以应当理解为“吉祥”。巴利
Brahmacariyaṃ nāma methunaviratisamaṇadhammasāsanamaggānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘abrahmacariyaṃ pahāya brahmacārī hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.194; ma. ni. 1.292) evamādīsu methunavirati brahmacariyanti vuccati. ‘‘Bhagavati no, āvuso, brahmacariyaṃ vussatī’’ti evamādīsu (ma. ni. 1.257) samaṇadhammo. ‘‘Na tāvāhaṃ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me idaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na iddhañceva bhavissati phītañca vitthārikaṃ bāhujañña’’nti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 2.168; saṃ. ni. 5.822; udā. 51) sāsanaṃ. ‘‘Ayameva kho, bhikkhu, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo brahmacariyaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, sammādiṭṭhī’’ti evamādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.6) maggo. Idha pana ariyasaccadassanena parato maggassa gahitattā avasesaṃ sabbampi vaṭṭati. Tañcetaṃ uparūpari nānappakāravisesādhigamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ.
见圣谛是指在《童子问》中所说的以现观方式对四种圣谛的道见。它因为是超越轮回之苦的因,所以称为吉祥。巴利
Ariyasaccānadassanaṃ nāma kumārapañhe vuttatthānaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ abhisamayavasena maggadassanaṃ. Taṃ saṃsāradukkhavītikkamahetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti vuccati.
在这里,“涅槃作证”指的是阿拉汉果,也就是这里所说的“涅槃”。因为阿拉汉果已经脱离了被称为“五趣行”的渴爱,所以也称为“涅槃”。证得这个果,或者省察这个果,就叫做“作证”。至于另一种涅槃,仅仅通过见圣谛就已经完成了作证,所以这里指的不是它。这样,这种涅槃作证,因为是现法乐住等的因,应当知道就是“吉祥”。巴利
Nibbānasacchikiriyā nāma idha arahattaphalaṃ ‘‘nibbāna’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tampi hi pañcagativānanena vānasaññitāya taṇhāya nikkhantattā ‘‘nibbāna’’nti vuccati. Tassa patti vā paccavekkhaṇā vā ‘‘sacchikiriyā’’ti vuccati. Itarassa pana nibbānassa ariyasaccānaṃ dassaneneva sacchikiriyā siddhā, tenetaṃ idha na adhippetaṃ. Evamesā nibbānasacchikiriyā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārādihetuto ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbā.
就这样,在这首偈颂里也宣说了四种吉祥:苦行、梵行、见圣谛、证得涅槃;而它们之所以是吉祥,也在各处分别作了阐明。巴利
Evaṃ imissāpi gāthāya tapo, brahmacariyaṃ, ariyasaccāna dassanaṃ, nibbānasacchikiriyāti cattāri maṅgalāni vuttāni, maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
271 271. 现在解释“被世间法所触时”这一句。这里的“被触的”,意思是被接触、被碰触、所遭遇的。“世间法”就是世间之法,意思是只要世间还在流转,就不会停息的法。“心”就是意、心。“其”指无论是新学比丘、中年比丘还是长老。“不动摇”就是不摇晃、不动荡。“无忧”就是没有忧愁,已经拔除了忧箭。“离尘”就是远离尘垢、摧毁尘垢。“安稳”就是无畏、没有灾患。其余部分和前面所说的一样。以上是词句注释。巴利
271. Idāni phuṭṭhassa lokadhammehīti ettha phuṭṭhassāti phusitassa chupitassa sampattassa. Loke dhammā lokadhammā, yāva lokappavatti, tāva anivattakā dhammāti vuttaṃ hoti. Cittanti mano mānasaṃ. Yassāti navassa vā majjhimassa vā therassa vā. Na kampatīti na calati, na vedhati. Asokanti nissokaṃ abbūḷhasokasallaṃ. Virajanti vigatarajaṃ viddhaṃsitarajaṃ. Khemanti abhayaṃ nirupaddavaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti ayaṃ tāva padavaṇṇanā.
义注应当这样理解:当一个人被世间法触动时,他的心不动摇——当被利得、损失等八种世间法触动、覆盖时,他的心不动摇、不颤动、不震荡;这样的心能带来不被任何事物动摇的出世间状态,因此应当知道这就是“吉祥”。巴利
Atthavaṇṇanā pana evaṃ veditabbā – phuṭṭhassa lokadhammehi yassa cittaṃ na kampati, yassa lābhālābhādīhi aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi phuṭṭhassa ajjhotthaṭassa cittaṃ na kampati, na calati, na vedhati, tassa taṃ cittaṃ kenaci akampanīyalokuttarabhāvāvahanato ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ.
那么,被这些法触动时,谁的心不会动摇呢?只有漏尽的阿罗汉,其他任何人都不行。因为这样说:巴利
Kassa pana etehi phuṭṭhassa cittaṃ na kampati? Arahato khīṇāsavassa, na aññassa kassaci. Vuttañhetaṃ –
就像一块整块的岩石,不会被风吹动;
如是色、味、声、香、触这一切,
可意和不可意的法,都动摇不了那位如如不动的人;
心住立而解脱,并且随观它的坏灭。巴利
‘‘Selo yathā ekagghano, vātena na samīrati; Evaṃ rūpā rasā saddā, gandhā phassā ca kevalā. ‘‘Iṭṭhā dhammā aniṭṭhā ca, na pavedhenti tādino; Ṭhitaṃ cittaṃ vippamuttaṃ, vayañcassānupassatī’’ti. (a. ni. 6.55; mahāva. 244);
“无忧”指的是漏尽者才有的心。因为按照“愁、悲伤、忧苦、内忧、内焦灼、心的热恼”等等(《分别论》237)这种方式所说的那种愁,在漏尽者的心里不存在,所以是“无忧”。有些人说这是涅槃,但那样就和前面“心”这个词接不上了。就像“无忧”一样,“离尘”和“安稳”也指的是漏尽者才有的心。因为那颗心已经远离了贪、嗔、痴的尘垢,所以是“离尘”;因为已经从四种轭缚中得到安稳,所以是“安稳”。因此,以种种方式,在每一次生起的刹那把握这颗心并加以说明。这三种心,因为能带来尚未生起的蕴等出世间的状态,也能带来应受供养等状态,所以应当知道这就是“吉祥”。巴利
Asokaṃ nāma khīṇāsavasseva cittaṃ. Tañhi yo ‘‘soko socanā socitattaṃ antosoko antoparisoko cetaso parinijjhāyitatta’’ntiādinā (vibha. 237) nayena vuccati soko, tassa abhāvato asokaṃ. Keci nibbānaṃ vadanti, taṃ purimapadena nānusandhiyati. Yathā ca asokaṃ, evaṃ virajaṃ khemantipi khīṇāsavasseva cittaṃ. Tañhi rāgadosamoharajānaṃ vigatattā virajaṃ, catūhi ca yogehi khemattā khemaṃ. Yato etaṃ tena tenākārena tamhi tamhi pavattikkhaṇe gahetvā niddiṭṭhavasena tividhampi appavattakkhandhatādilokuttamabhāvāvahanato āhuneyyādibhāvāvahanato ca ‘‘maṅgala’’nti veditabbaṃ.
就这样,在这首偈颂里,讲了四种吉祥:面对八种世间法都不动摇的心、没有忧愁的心、远离尘垢的心、安稳的心;而它们为什么是吉祥,也在各处分别说明了。巴利
Evaṃ imissā gāthāya aṭṭhalokadhammehi akampitacittaṃ, asokacittaṃ, virajacittaṃ, khemacittanti cattāri maṅgalāni vuttāni, maṅgalattañca nesaṃ tattha tattha vibhāvitamevāti.
272 272. 世尊用“不亲近愚者”等十首偈颂讲了三十八种吉祥之后,现在一边赞叹这些他自己所说的吉祥,一边说出了这首结尾偈颂:“成就了这些之后。”巴利
272. Evaṃ bhagavā ‘‘asevanā ca bālāna’’ntiādīhi dasahi gāthāhi aṭṭhatiṃsa maṅgalāni kathetvā idāni etāneva attanā vuttamaṅgalāni thunanto ‘‘etādisāni katvānā’’ti imaṃ avasānagāthamabhāsi.
这段义注的意思是:“像这样等”:这些就是我所说的那一类,比如不亲近愚者等。“做了之后”:就是做完。“katvāna、katvā、karitvā”这几个词在意义上并没有差别。“在一切处都不被战胜”:意思是说,在一切处——也就是在蕴魔、烦恼魔、行作魔、天子魔这四种敌人当中——不被其中任何一个战胜,反而自己战胜了那四种魔。这里应知道,“ma”这个字只是为了连接词句而已。巴利
Tassāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā – etādisānīti etāni īdisāni mayā vuttappakārāni bālānaṃ asevanādīni. Katvānāti katvā. Katvāna katvā karitvāti hi atthato anaññaṃ. Sabbatthamaparājitāti sabbattha khandhakilesābhisaṅkhāradevaputtamārappabhedesu catūsu paccatthikesu ekenapi aparājitā hutvā, sayameva te cattāro māre parājetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Makāro cettha padasandhikaraṇamattoti viññātabbo.
他们无论到哪里都平安前行:做了这样的吉祥之事以后,因为已经不被四种魔战胜,所以无论在此世还是他世,无论在站立还是行走等一切情况下,都平安前行;又因为亲近愚者等行为可能生起的诸漏、损害和热恼都不存在了,所以平安前行。这里说的是:他们不受侵扰、不被逼迫,安稳而无有恐怖地前行。还应知道,这里带鼻音的字是为了让偈颂读起来顺畅才加上去的。巴利
Sabbattha sotthiṃ gacchantīti etādisāni maṅgalāni katvā catūhi mārehi aparājitā hutvā sabbattha idhalokaparalokesu ṭhānacaṅkamanādīsu ca sotthiṃ gacchanti, bālasevanādīhi ye uppajjeyyuṃ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā , tesaṃ abhāvā sotthiṃ gacchanti, anupaddutā anupasaṭṭhā khemino appaṭibhayā gacchantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Anunāsiko cettha gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ vuttoti veditabbo.
世尊用这半偈结束了开示:“那是他们最上的吉祥。”怎么结束的呢?世尊让那位天子这样领会:天子,凡是做这些吉祥之事的人,因为他们在一切处都安稳而行,所以应当受持:不亲近愚者等三十八种,对于这些如此行事的人来说,就是吉祥、最上、最胜、最殊胜的。巴利
Taṃ tesaṃ maṅgalamuttamanti iminā gāthāpādena bhagavā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Kathaṃ? Evaṃ devaputta ye etādisāni karonti, te yasmā sabbattha sotthiṃ gacchanti, tasmā taṃ bālānaṃ asevanādi aṭṭhatiṃsavidhampi tesaṃ etādisakārakānaṃ maṅgalaṃ uttamaṃ seṭṭhaṃ pavaranti gaṇhāhīti.
世尊这样结束开示之后,有十万俱胝的天神证得了阿罗汉果,而证得入流果、一来果、不来果的天神数量多到无法计算。第二天,世尊吩咐阿难尊者说:“阿难,昨夜有一位天神来到我面前,问了关于吉祥的问题。我就为他讲了三十八种吉祥。阿难,你要受持这个吉祥法门,受持之后教给比丘们。”阿难尊者受持之后,就教给了比丘们。这个法门经由师徒代代相传,一直流传到今天。应当知道,这样的梵行就是这样成就、兴旺、广泛传播、为众人所知、普遍流布,乃至被天神和人们善加宣说。巴利
Evañca bhagavatā niṭṭhāpitāya desanāya pariyosāne koṭisatasahassadevatā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiphalappattānaṃ gaṇanā asaṅkhyeyyā ahosi. Atha bhagavā dutiyadivase ānandattheraṃ āmantesi – ‘‘imaṃ, ānanda, rattiṃ aññatarā devatā maṃ upasaṅkamitvā maṅgalapañhaṃ pucchi. Athassāhaṃ aṭṭhatiṃsa maṅgalāni abhāsiṃ, uggaṇha, ānanda, imaṃ maṅgalapariyāyaṃ, uggahetvā bhikkhū vācehī’’ti. Thero uggahetvā bhikkhū vācesi. Tayidaṃ ācariyaparamparābhataṃ yāvajjatanā pavattati, evamidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṃ bāhujaññaṃ puthubhūtaṃ yāva devamanussehi suppakāsitanti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为了对这些吉祥法门达到智慧的贯通与熟练掌握,从开头说起,它们的整体脉络是这样的:这些想要得到今生、来世以及出世间快乐的众生,舍弃了亲近愚人,依靠智者,恭敬值得恭敬的人;因为住在合适的地方,加上过去所修的福德,他们被推动着去行善法,正确地立定自己;他们以多闻、各种技艺和戒律仪法来充实自身,说话符合戒律、善巧得当。只要还没有脱离在家身份,他们就通过奉养父母来偿还旧债,通过照顾妻儿来承担新的责任;因为做事有条不紊,他们在钱财粮食等方面获得丰足。他们用布施把握财富的精华,用法行把握生命的精华;通过照顾亲族来利益自己人,通过没有过失的事业来利益他人;通过远离恶行来避免伤害他人,通过节制饮酒来避免伤害自己;在诸法上不放逸,使善法方面不断增长。由于善法增长,他们舍弃了在家的标志,安住在出家状态中,又以恭敬和谦逊,对佛陀、佛弟子、戒师、轨范师等圆满履行应尽的义务;以知足舍弃对资具的贪求,以知恩安住在善人的境地;以听闻正法舍弃心的消沉,以忍耐克服一切危难,以易于受教使自己有所依怙,以见到沙门而看见修行的实践,以谈论法来消除对应当疑惑之法的疑惑;以根律仪的苦行成就戒清净,以沙门法、梵行成就心清净,进而成就其余四种清净。依照这条道路,他们达到名为见圣谛的知见清净,现证被称为阿拉汉果的涅槃。证得这个之后,他们就像须弥山不被风雨动摇一样,面对八种世间法心不动摇,成为无忧、无染、安稳的人。凡是安稳的人,在一切处都不会被任何一法战胜,在一切处都走向平安。因此世尊说:巴利
Idāni etesveva maṅgalesu ñāṇaparicayapāṭavatthaṃ ayaṃ ādito pabhuti yojanā – evamime idhalokaparalokalokuttarasukhakāmā sattā bālajanasevanaṃ pahāya, paṇḍite nissāya, pūjaneyye pūjentā, patirūpadesavāsena pubbe katapuññatāya ca kusalappavattiyaṃ codiyamānā, attānaṃ sammā paṇidhāya, bāhusaccasippavinayehi alaṅkatattabhāvā, vinayānurūpaṃ subhāsitaṃ bhāsamānā , yāva gihibhāvaṃ na vijahanti, tāva mātāpituupaṭṭhānena porāṇaṃ iṇamūlaṃ visodhayamānā, puttadārasaṅgahena navaṃ iṇamūlaṃ payojayamānā, anākulakammantatāya dhanadhaññādisamiddhiṃ pāpuṇantā, dānena bhogasāraṃ dhammacariyāya jīvitasārañca gahetvā, ñātisaṅgahena sakajanahitaṃ anavajjakammantatāya parajanahitañca karontā, pāpaviratiyā parūpaghātaṃ majjapānasaṃyamena attūpaghātañca vivajjetvā, dhammesu appamādena kusalapakkhaṃ vaḍḍhetvā, vaḍḍhitakusalatāya gihibyañjanaṃ ohāya pabbajitabhāve ṭhitāpi buddhabuddhasāvakupajjhācariyādīsu gāravena nivātena ca vattasampadaṃ ārādhetvā, santuṭṭhiyā paccayagedhaṃ pahāya, kataññutāya sappurisabhūmiyaṃ ṭhatvā, dhammassavanena cittalīnataṃ pahāya, khantiyā sabbaparissaye abhibhavitvā, sovacassatāya sanāthamattānaṃ katvā, samaṇadassanena paṭipattipayogaṃ passantā, dhammasākacchāya kaṅkhāṭṭhāniyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodetvā, indriyasaṃvaratapena sīlavisuddhiṃ samaṇadhammabrahmacariyena cittavisuddhiṃ tato parā ca catasso visuddhiyo sampādentā, imāya paṭipadāya ariyasaccadassanapariyāyaṃ ñāṇadassanavisuddhiṃ patvā arahattaphalasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaronti. Yaṃ sacchikatvā sinerupabbato viya vātavuṭṭhīhi aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi avikampamānacittā asokā virajā khemino honti. Ye ca khemino, te sabbattha ekenāpi aparājitā honti, sabbattha ca sotthiṃ gacchanti. Tenāha bhagavā –
做了这样的事之后,他们在一切地方都不会被战胜;
他们到处都能平安前行,这就是他们最上的吉祥。巴利
‘‘Etādisāni katvāna, sabbatthamaparājitā; Sabbattha sotthiṃ gacchanti, taṃ tesaṃ maṅgalamuttama’’nti.
5. 针毛经的注释巴利
5. Sūcilomasuttavaṇṇanā
“如是我闻”这句,就是《针毛经》。它的起因是什么?通过释义的方式,起因自然就会显现出来。在释义里,“如是我闻”等语句的意思,和前面所说的完全一样。至于“住在伽耶的板石座上——针毛夜叉的住处”这一句,这里的“伽耶”指什么?“板石座”又是什么?世尊为什么住在那个夜叉的住处呢?回答说:“伽耶”既可以指村庄,也可以指渡口,这两种意思在这里都说得通。如果住在伽耶村附近的地方,也可以说“住在伽耶”,而那座板石座就在村子附近不远、靠近入口的地方。如果住在伽耶渡口,也可以说“住在伽耶”,那座板石座就在渡口那里。所谓“板石座”,就是把一块石板铺在四块石头上搭成的石台。依靠这座石台,那里就成了夜叉的住处,就像旷野夜叉的住处一样。另外,世尊那天在黎明时分,从大悲定中出来,用佛眼观察世间,看到针毛和粗毛这两个夜叉都有证得入流果的因缘,于是拿着钵和衣,在天还没亮的时候就来到那个渡口一带——那里聚集了从各方来的人,地面被痰、鼻涕等各种不净之物弄得湿漉漉的。世尊就在针毛夜叉住处的板石座上坐了下来。因此说“有一次,世尊住在伽耶的板石座上——针毛夜叉的住处”。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti sūcilomasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Atthavaṇṇanānayenevassa uppatti āvi bhavissati. Atthavaṇṇanāyañca ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādi vuttatthameva. Gayāyaṃ viharati ṭaṅkitamañce sūcilomassa yakkhassa bhavaneti ettha pana kā gayā, ko ṭaṅkitamañco, kasmā ca bhagavā tassa yakkhassa bhavane viharatīti? Vuccate – gayāti gāmopi titthampi vuccati, tadubhayampi idha vaṭṭati. Gayāgāmassa hi avidūre dese viharantopi ‘‘gayāyaṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati, tassa ca gāmassa samīpe avidūre dvārasantike so ṭaṅkitamañco. Gayātitthe viharantopi ‘‘gayāyaṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati, gayātitthe ca so ṭaṅkitamañco. Ṭaṅkitamañcoti catunnaṃ pāsāṇānaṃ upari vitthataṃ pāsāṇaṃ āropetvā kato pāsāṇamañco . Taṃ nissāya yakkhassa bhavanaṃ āḷavakassa bhavanaṃ viya. Yasmā vā pana bhagavā taṃ divasaṃ paccūsasamaye mahākaruṇāsamāpattito vuṭṭhāya buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento sūcilomassa ca kharalomassa cāti dvinnampi yakkhānaṃ sotāpattiphalūpanissayaṃ addasa, tasmā pattacīvaraṃ ādāya antoaruṇeyeva nānādisāhi sannipatitassa janassa kheḷasiṅghāṇikādinānappakārāsucinissandakilinnabhūmibhāgampi taṃ titthappadesaṃ āgantvā tasmiṃ ṭaṅkitamañce nisīdi sūcilomassa yakkhassa bhavane. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā gayāyaṃ viharati ṭaṅkitamañce sūcilomassa yakkhassa bhavane’’ti.
“那时”,指的是世尊当时正住在那个地方的那段时间。粗毛夜叉和针毛夜叉从离世尊不远的地方经过。这两个夜叉是什么来头,又为什么经过那里呢?是这样说的——他们两人当中,有一个在过去世没有先征得僧团同意,就擅自拿了油涂在自己身上。因为那个业,他在地狱里受了苦,之后转生到伽耶池塘岸边的夜叉道中。又因为那个业的余报,他的四肢和身体长得非常丑陋,皮肤像瓦片一样,摸起来粗糙扎手。据说,他想吓唬人的时候,就把那些像瓦片一样的皮肤掀起来吓人。就因为他皮肤粗糙,所以得到了“粗毛夜叉”这个名字。巴利
Tena kho pana samayenāti yaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā tattha viharati, tena samayena. Kharo ca yakkho sūcilomo ca yakkho bhagavato avidūre atikkamantīti. Ke te yakkhā, kasmā ca atikkamantīti? Vuccate – tesu tāva eko atīte saṅghassa telaṃ anāpucchā gahetvā attano sarīraṃ makkhesi. So tena kammena niraye paccitvā gayāpokkharaṇitīre yakkhayoniyaṃ nibbatto. Tasseva cassa kammassa vipākāvasesena virūpāni aṅgapaccaṅgāni ahesuṃ , iṭṭhakacchadanasadisañca kharasamphassaṃ cammaṃ. So kira yadā paraṃ bhiṃsāpetukāmo hoti, tadā chadaniṭṭhakasadisāni cammakapālāni ukkhipitvā bhiṃsāpeti. Evaṃ so kharasamphassattā kharo yakkhotveva nāmaṃ labhi.
另一位在迦叶世尊时代做居士,每月八天去精舍听法。有一天,在说法通知发布时,他正在僧园门口照料自己的田地,听到通知后心想:“我要是先去洗澡,就会花很长时间。”于是身上脏兮兮地就进了布萨堂,在昂贵的地铺上毫不在意地躺下睡着了。《相应部》诵者认为:“此人实是比丘,并非居士。”他因为这件事和别的业,在地狱里受了苦,之后转生到伽耶池塘岸边的夜叉道中。由于那业的余报,他变得非常丑陋,身上的毛像针一样。他恐吓众生时,就像用针扎一样。正因身毛如针,他才得了“针毛夜叉”这个名字。他们为了觅食,从自己的住处出来,走了一小段路,又沿着原路返回,再朝另一个方向走去,从世尊不远处经过。巴利
Itaro kassapassa bhagavato kāle upāsako hutvā māsassa aṭṭha divase vihāraṃ gantvā dhammaṃ suṇāti. So ekadivasaṃ dhammassavane ghosite saṅghārāmadvāre attano khettaṃ kelāyanto ugghosanaṃ sutvā ‘‘sace nhāyāmi, ciraṃ bhavissatī’’ti kiliṭṭhagattova uposathāgāraṃ pavisitvā mahagghe bhummattharaṇe anādarena nipajjitvā supi. Bhikkhu evāyaṃ, na upāsakoti saṃyuttabhāṇakā. So tena ca aññena kammena ca niraye paccitvā gayāpokkharaṇiyā tīre yakkhayoniyaṃ nibbatto. So tassa kammassa vipākāvasesena duddasiko ahosi, sarīre cassa sūcisadisāni lomāni ahesuṃ. So hi bhiṃsāpetabbake satte sūcīhi vijjhanto viya bhiṃsāpeti. Evaṃ so sūcisadisalomattā sūcilomo yakkhotveva nāmaṃ labhi. Te attano gocaratthāya bhavanato nikkhamitvā muhuttaṃ gantvā gatamaggeneva nivattitvā itaraṃ disābhāgaṃ gacchantā bhagavato avidūre atikkamanti.
那么,粗毛为什么那样说呢?粗毛是看到那副沙门模样才开口的。而针毛一向抱持这样的见解:“会害怕的就不是真沙门,只是因为外表像沙门,才成了假沙门。”所以,他把世尊也当成这一类人,冲口就说:“这不是沙门,这是个假沙门!”说完之后,又想进一步试探,便说:“让我来弄清楚。”说了“那么”之后,接着便是“针毛夜叉……”从这里往下,直到“可是,朋友,那种触感是邪恶的”为止,文义都很浅显。只是在这里要这样衔接理解:“世尊之身”,是指针毛把自己的身体凑近世尊。巴利
Atha kho kharoti kasmā te evamāhaṃsu? Kharo samaṇakappaṃ disvā āha. Sūcilomo pana ‘‘yo bhāyati na so samaṇo, samaṇapaṭirūpakattā pana samaṇako hotī’’ti evaṃladdhiko. Tasmā tādisaṃ bhagavantaṃ maññamāno ‘‘neso samaṇo, samaṇako eso’’ti sahasāva vatvāpi puna vīmaṃsitukāmo āha – ‘‘yāvāhaṃ jānāmī’’ti. ‘‘Atha kho’’ti evaṃ vatvā tato. Sūcilomo yakkhoti ito pabhuti yāva apica kho te samphasso pāpakoti, tāva uttānatthameva kevalañcettha bhagavato kāyanti attano kāyaṃ bhagavato upanāmesīti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo.
见世尊毫不畏惧,就说出“沙门,我来问你……”这番话。这是什么原因呢?因为他心里盘算:“我用这么粗涩的非人接触去碰他,他身为人类竟然不害怕。好吧,我就问他一个属于佛陀境界的问题。他肯定答不上来,到时候我就这样折磨他。”世尊听了之后,便说“不,贤友,我不……”等等。这些内容,都应依照《旷野夜叉经》里所说的方法,从各个方面如实理解。巴利
Tato abhāyantaṃ bhagavantaṃ disvā ‘‘pañhaṃ taṃ samaṇā’’tiādimāha. Kiṃ kāraṇā? So hi cintesi – ‘‘imināpi nāma me evaṃ kharena amanussasamphassena manusso samāno ayaṃ na bhāyati, handāhaṃ etaṃ buddhavisaye pañhaṃ pucchāmi, addhā ayaṃ tattha na sampāyissati, tato naṃ evaṃ viheṭhessāmī’’ti. Bhagavā taṃ sutvā ‘‘na khvāhaṃ taṃ āvuso’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ āḷavakasutte vuttanayeneva sabbākārehi veditabbaṃ.
273 这时,针毛夜叉用偈颂对世尊说:“贪与嗔……”这里,贪和嗔就是前面已经说过的那些。“从何因生?”意思是:以什么为因,以什么为根源?“从何”(kuto)应当理解为:这是把“从”的语尾替代了原来的格尾,而且在复合词里这个词尾没有省略。另一种解释是:“因”(nidānā)就是已生、已起的意思,所以说“从何因生”,就是问:从何而生,从何而起,从何而现。“不乐、乐、毛发竖立,从何而生?”——这里说的“不乐”,就是《分别论》里所分别的那种:“在边远的坐卧处,或者在种种殊胜的善法上,心生不乐、不喜、不悦、厌倦、战栗。”所谓“乐”,就是在五种欲乐对象上生起的乐。所谓“毛发竖立”,是因为能让人毛发竖起来,所以得了“毛发竖立”这个名字,其实就是内心的恐惧。他问的是:这三种法从何而生、从何而起?“从何生起?”就是从何而生起之后。“心”指善心,“寻”就是《蛇经》里说的九种欲寻等等。“像孩童放飞乌鸦一样”——就像村里的孩子们玩耍时,用线绑住乌鸦的脚然后放开、抛出去;同样地,他问:不善寻从何生起之后,把善心放飞出去?巴利
273.Atha kho sūcilomo yakkho bhagavantaṃ gāthāya ajjhabhāsi ‘‘rāgo ca doso cā’’ti. Tattha rāgadosā vuttanayā eva. Kutonidānāti kiṃnidānā kiṃhetukā. Kutoti paccattavacanassa to-ādeso veditabbo, samāse cassa lopābhāvo. Atha vā nidānāti jātā uppannāti attho, tasmā kutonidānā, kutojātā, kutouppannāti vuttaṃ hoti. Aratī ratī lomahaṃso kutojāti yāyaṃ ‘‘pantesu vā senāsanesu aññataraññataresu vā adhikusalesu dhammesu arati aratitā anabhirati anabhiramaṇā ukkaṇṭhitā paritassitā’’ti (vibha. 856) evaṃ vibhattā arati, yā ca pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rati, yo ca lomahaṃsasamuṭṭhāpanato ‘‘lomahaṃso’’tveva saṅkhyaṃ gato cittutrāso. Ime tayo dhammā kutojā kutojātāti pucchati . Kuto samuṭṭhāyāti kuto uppajjitvā. Manoti kusalacittaṃ, vitakkāti uragasutte vuttā nava kāmavitakkādayo. Kumārakā dhaṅkamivossajantīti yathā gāmadārakā kīḷantā kākaṃ suttena pāde bandhitvā ossajanti khipanti, evaṃ kusalamanaṃ akusalavitakkā kuto samuṭṭhāya ossajantīti pucchati.
274 274. 于是世尊为他解答那些问题,说出第二首偈颂:“贪……”其中,“从此”是就自身而说的。因为贪和嗔都以自身为根源。不乐、乐与毛发竖立也是从自身产生的,欲寻等不善寻也是从自身生起之后,把善心抛出去的。因此,为了否定其他如本性等起因,他说:“以此为因,从此而生,从此而起。”这里语句的成立,应当依照前一偈颂所说的方式来理解。巴利
274. Athassa bhagavā te pañhe vissajjento ‘‘rāgo cā’’ti dutiyagāthamabhāsi. Tattha itoti attabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha. Attabhāvanidānā hi rāgadosā. Aratiratilomahaṃsā ca attabhāvato jātā, kāmavitakkādiakusalavitakkā ca attabhāvatoyeva samuṭṭhāya kusalamano ossajanti, tena tadaññaṃ pakatiādikāraṇaṃ paṭikkhipanto āha – ‘‘itonidānā itojā ito samuṭṭhāyā’’ti. Saddasiddhi cettha purimagāthāya vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
275-6 275-6. 这样回答了那些问题之后,现在要证明前面“以此为因”等句中已经说过的含义——“以自身为因,从自身而生,从自身而起”——他说道:“由爱而生,依自身而起。”因为这一切贪等乃至寻,都是由渴爱的爱润而生;生起时,也是在那个作为自身的同义语、即五取蕴差别所成的自身之中生起。因此说:“由爱而生,依自身而起。”现在,他为阐明这个含义而作譬喻:“如孟加拉榕的干枝。”其中,在树干上生出的就是“干枝”,这是气根的别名。说的是什么呢?就像孟加拉榕那些名为“干枝”的气根,在有汁液的爱润时便会生起,生起时也正是在那棵榕树的各个枝杈处分出;同样,这些贪等在有内在渴爱的爱润时便会生起,生起时也正是在那个自身中、在眼等各个不同的门、所缘、依处中产生。因此应当知道:“这些是以自身为因、从自身而生、从自身而起。”巴利
275-6. Evaṃ te pañhe vissajjetvā idāni yvāyaṃ ‘‘itonidānā’’tiādīsu ‘‘attabhāvanidānā attabhāvato jātā attabhāvato samuṭṭhāyā’’ti attho vutto, taṃ sādhento āha – ‘‘snehajā attasambhūtā’’ti. Ete hi sabbepi rāgādayo vitakkapariyosānā taṇhāsnehena jātā, tathā jāyantā ca pañcupādānakkhandhabhede attabhāvapariyāye attani sambhūtā. Tenāha – ‘‘snehajā attasambhūtā’’ti. Idāni tadatthajotikaṃ upamaṃ karoti ‘‘nigrodhasseva khandhajā’’ti. Tattha khandhesu jātā khandhajā, pārohānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā nigrodhassa khandhajā nāma pārohā āporasasinehe sati jāyanti, jāyantā ca tasmiṃyeva nigrodhe tesu tesu sākhappabhedesu sambhavanti, evametepi rāgādayo ajjhattataṇhāsnehe sati jāyanti, jāyantā ca tasmiṃyeva attabhāve tesu tesu cakkhādibhedesu dvārārammaṇavatthūsu sambhavanti. Tasmā veditabbametaṃ ‘‘attabhāvanidānā attabhāvajā attabhāvasamuṭṭhānā ca ete’’ti.
对于剩下的一颂半,下面是总摄一切义理的解释——这些依自身而生的种种烦恼,就这样系著于诸欲之中。贪,是依五种欲功德等而起的;嗔,是依愤恨事等而起的;不乐等,也是依各自不同的类别而起的。所以,这一切烦恼以种种方式变得多种多样,依于对象、门、所缘等,在那些不同的对象欲境中,这样那样地系著、粘著、缠缚而住。像什么呢?就像林中蔓延的蔓藤。正如林中蔓延的蔓藤,在那些树木的枝干、细枝等种种差别处系著、粘著、缠缚而住;同样地,在种种分类的对象欲境中系著的烦恼群,那些了知它从何因生起的人,他们便驱除它——夜叉,你听吧!巴利
Avasesadiyaḍḍhagāthāya pana ayaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikā atthavaṇṇanā – evaṃ attasambhūtā ca ete puthū visattā kāmesu. Rāgopi hi pañcakāmaguṇikādivasena, dosopi āghātavatthādivasena, aratiādayopi tassa tasseva bhedassa vasenāti sabbathā sabbepime kilesā puthū anekappakārā hutvā vatthudvārārammaṇādivasena tesu tesu vatthukāmesu tathā tathā visattā laggā laggitā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitā. Kimiva? Māluvāva vitatā vane, yathā vane vitatā māluvā tesu tesu rukkhassa sākhapasākhādibhedesu visattā hoti laggā laggitā saṃsibbitvā ṭhitā, evaṃ puthuppabhedesu vatthukāmesu visattaṃ kilesagaṇaṃ ye naṃ pajānanti yatonidānaṃ, te naṃ vinodenti suṇohi yakkha.
在这里,“从何因”是依抽象中性词的指示。它要说明什么呢?那些众生对这个烦恼群这样了知:“它从何因生起”,他们了知“它在被渴爱之爱润所润泽的自身中生起”之后,便以见过患等修习智之火,干涸那渴爱之爱润,从而驱除、断除、使之灭尽。“这是我们所说的善说,夜叉,你听闻吧!”如此,在这里,通过了知自身而显示苦的遍知;通过驱除渴爱之爱润、贪等烦恼群而显示集的断除。巴利
Tattha yatonidānanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, tena kiṃ dīpeti? Ye sattā naṃ kilesagaṇaṃ ‘‘yatonidānaṃ uppajjatī’’ti evaṃ jānanti, te naṃ ‘‘taṇhāsnehasnehite attabhāve uppajjatī’’ti ñatvā taṃ taṇhāsnehaṃ ādīnavānupassanādibhāvanāñāṇagginā visosentā vinodenti pajahanti byantīkaronti ca, etaṃ amhākaṃ subhāsitaṃ suṇohi yakkhāti. Evamettha attabhāvajānanena dukkhapariññaṃ taṇhāsneharāgādikilesagaṇavinodanena samudayappahānañca dīpeti.
那些能清除它的人,就能渡过这条难以渡过的暴流——这是他们过去从未渡过的——从而不再有来生。这里显示了修习道与证得灭。因为,那些清除烦恼群的人,必定在修习道。离开了修习道,就不可能清除烦恼。而那些修习道的人,就能渡过这条单靠自然智慧难以渡过的暴流,即欲暴流等四种暴流。因为修习道就是渡过暴流。“过去从未渡过”,意思是说在这么漫长的时间里,连做梦都不曾越过。“为了不再有来生”,就是为了涅槃。就这样,当这两位夜叉同伴听闻这首阐明四圣谛的偈颂时,依照“听闻法而受持,对所受持的法思察其义”等次第,随着善成熟的智慧逐步进展,就在偈颂结束时,两人都安立于入流果,变得清净可爱、金色辉耀、以天饰庄严。巴利
Ye ca naṃ vinodenti, te duttaraṃ oghamimaṃ taranti atiṇṇapubbaṃ apunabbhavāya. Etena maggabhāvanaṃ nirodhasacchikiriyañca dīpeti. Ye hi naṃ kilesagaṇaṃ vinodenti, te avassaṃ maggaṃ bhāventi. Na hi maggabhāvanaṃ vinā kilesavinodanaṃ atthi. Ye ca maggaṃ bhāventi, te duttaraṃ pakatiñāṇena kāmoghādiṃ catubbidhampi oghamimaṃ taranti. Maggabhāvanā hi oghataraṇaṃ. Atiṇṇapubbanti iminā dīghena addhunā supinantenapi avītikkantapubbaṃ. Apunabbhavāyāti nibbānāya. Evamimaṃ catusaccadīpikaṃ gāthaṃ suṇantā ‘‘sutvā dhammaṃ dhārenti, dhatānaṃ dhammānaṃ atthamupaparikkhantī’’tiādikaṃ kathaṃ subhāviniyā paññāya anukkamamānā te dvepi sahāyakā yakkhā gāthāpariyosāneyeva sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu, pāsādikā ca ahesuṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇā dibbālaṅkāravibhūsitāti.
6. 迦毗罗经(法行经)的注释巴利
6. Kapilasutta-(dhammacariyasutta)-vaṇṇanā
法行经指的是《迦毗罗经》。它的起因是什么呢?就像《雪山夜叉经》里讲的那样,在迦叶世尊般涅槃之后,有两位善男子,是兄弟俩,他们出家了,在弟子们跟前受了具足戒。哥哥名叫索达那,弟弟名叫迦毗罗。他们的母亲名叫萨达尼,妹妹名叫塔帕那。她们俩也在比丘尼僧团中出家了。然后,这两兄弟也像《雪山夜叉经》里讲的那样,问:“教法中有几种责任?”听了之后,哥哥说:“我要圆满履行住立的责任。”于是在亲教师和轨范师跟前住了五年,满五年后,听了能证得阿罗汉果的业处,进入森林精勤修行,证得了阿罗汉果。迦毗罗则说:“我还年轻,等年纪大了再圆满履行住立的责任吧。”于是他开始着手典籍的责任,成了三藏法师。他依靠教理知识有了追随的眷属,依靠眷属又得到了利养。巴利
Dhammacariyanti kapilasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Hemavatasutte vuttanayeneva parinibbute kassape bhagavati dve kulaputtā bhātaro nikkhamitvā sāvakānaṃ santike pabbajiṃsu. Jeṭṭho sodhano nāma, kaniṭṭho kapilo nāma. Tesaṃ mātā sādhanī nāma, kaniṭṭhabhaginī tāpanā nāma. Tāpi bhikkhunīsu pabbajiṃsu. Tato te dvepi hemavatasutte vuttanayeneva ‘‘sāsane kati dhurānī’’ti pucchitvā sutvā ca jeṭṭho ‘‘vāsadhuraṃ pūressāmī’’ti pañca vassāni ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ santike vasitvā pañcavasso hutvā yāva arahattaṃ, tāva kammaṭṭhānaṃ sutvā araññaṃ pavisitvā vāyamanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Kapilo ‘‘ahaṃ tāva taruṇo, vuḍḍhakāle vāsadhuraṃ paripūressāmī’’ti ganthadhuraṃ ārabhitvā tepiṭako ahosi. Tassa pariyattiṃ nissāya parivāro, parivāraṃ nissāya lābho ca udapādi.
他因为多闻而骄傲得昏了头,自以为很有智慧,对不知道的事情也装作知道。别人说的本来是允许的,他说成不允许;不允许的,他说成允许;有过失的,他说成没有过失;没有过失的,他说成有过失。那些品行端正的比丘们用“贤友迦比罗,不要这样说”之类的话劝他,他却用“你们知道什么?你们就像空拳头一样”这类话来嘲讽、轻蔑他们,一直这样到处走动。比丘们把这件事告诉了他的哥哥清净长老。长老也走到他面前,对他说:“贤友迦比罗,教法的寿命,就是像你这样的人的正确修行。贤友迦比罗,不要把允许的说成不允许,不要把不允许的说成允许,不要把有过失的说成没有过失,也不要把没有过失的说成有过失。”他仍然不听长老的话。于是清净长老说了两三次之后——巴利
So bāhusaccamadena matto paṇḍitamānī anaññātepi aññātamānī hutvā parehi vuttaṃ kappiyampi akappiyaṃ, akappiyampi kappiyaṃ, sāvajjampi anavajjaṃ, anavajjampi sāvajjanti bhaṇati. So pesalehi bhikkhūhi, ‘‘mā, āvuso kapila, evaṃ avacā’’tiādinā nayena ovadiyamāno ‘‘tumhe kiṃ jānātha rittamuṭṭhisadisā’’tiādīhi vacanehi khuṃsento vambhentoyeva carati. Bhikkhū tassa bhātuno sodhanattherassāpi etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Sopi naṃ upasaṅkamitvā āha – ‘‘āvuso kapila, sāsanassa āyu nāma tumhādisānaṃ sammāpaṭipatti. Mā, āvuso kapila, kappiyampi akappiyaṃ, akappiyampi kappiyaṃ, sāvajjampi anavajjaṃ, anavajjampi sāvajjanti vadehī’’ti. So tassapi vacanaṃ nādiyi. Tato naṃ sodhanatthero dvattikkhattuṃ vatvā –
心怀悲悯的人,会说一次,甚至两次;
在他主人面前,不该再多说什么。巴利
‘‘Ekavācampi dvivācaṃ, bhaṇeyya anukampako; Tatuttariṃ na bhāseyya, dāsovayyassa santike’’ti. (jā. 2.19.34) –
他避开后,说了一句“贤友,你终究会因自己的业行而被人看清”,然后就离开了。从那时起,那些善良的比丘们就都疏远了他。巴利
Parivajjetvā ‘‘tvameva, āvuso, sakena kammena paññāyissasī’’ti pakkāmi. Tato pabhuti naṃ pesalā bhikkhū chaḍḍesuṃ.
他行为不正,又被一群行为不正的人围着一起生活。有一天,他心想“我要举行布萨”,就登上狮子座,拿起彩色的拂尘扇坐下,说了三遍:“贤友们,这里比丘的戒律成立吗?”可是没有一个比丘回答“我戒律成立”。对他们来说,戒律也确实不成立。于是他说:“不管有没有听过戒律,根本就没有律这东西。”说完就从座位上起来了。就这样,他让迦叶世尊的教法衰败、毁灭了。就在那天,须陀那长老般涅槃了。迦比罗这样让教法衰败之后,自己也死了,投生到阿鼻大地狱;他的母亲和妹妹也跟着他持同样的邪见,辱骂、诽谤那些品行端正的比丘,死后也都投生到了地狱。巴利
So durācāro hutvā durācāraparivuto viharanto ekadivasaṃ ‘‘uposathaṃ osāressāmī’’ti sīhāsanaṃ abhiruyha citrabījaniṃ gahetvā nisinno ‘‘vattati, āvuso, ettha bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkho’’ti tikkhattuṃ āha. Atheko bhikkhupi ‘‘mayhaṃ vattatī’’ti na avoca. Na ca tassa tesaṃ vā pātimokkho vattati. Tato so ‘‘pātimokkhe sutepi asutepi vinayo nāma natthī’’ti āsanā vuṭṭhāsi. Evaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanaṃ osakkāpesi vināsesi. Atha sodhanatthero tadaheva parinibbāyi. Sopi kapilo evaṃ taṃ sāsanaṃ osakkāpetvā kālakato avīcimahāniraye nibbatti, sāpissa mātā ca bhaginī ca tasseva diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjitvā pesale bhikkhū akkosamānā paribhāsamānā kālaṃ katvā niraye nibbattiṃsu.
就在那个时候,有五百个男人做了屠杀村庄之类的事,靠偷盗为生,被当地百姓追赶,逃跑时进入一片森林。他们在那里找不到任何可以躲藏的密林或庇护处,看见不远处住在岩石上的一位林野比丘,就上前顶礼,说:“尊者,请做我们的庇护处吧。”长老说:“没有与你们的戒相等的庇护处。你们全都受持五戒吧。”他们答应“善哉”,就受持了五戒。长老又说:“你们是持戒的人了,现在即使在有人毁坏你们自己的生命时,也不可染污内心。”他们答应“善哉”,接受了。然后那些村民赶到,四处搜寻,看见这些盗贼,就把他们全部杀死了。他们死后,投生到欲界天。其中,盗贼首领成了大天子,其余的人就成了他的随从。巴利
Tasmiṃyeva ca kāle pañcasatā purisā gāmaghātādīni katvā corikāya jīvantā janapadamanussehi anubaddhā palāyamānā araññaṃ pavisitvā tattha kiñci gahanaṃ vā paṭisaraṇaṃ vā apassantā avidūre pāsāṇe vasantaṃ aññataraṃ āraññikaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā vanditvā ‘‘amhākaṃ, bhante, paṭisaraṇaṃ hothā’’ti bhaṇiṃsu. Thero ‘‘tumhākaṃ sīlasadisaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ natthi, sabbe pañca sīlāni samādiyathā’’ti āha. Te ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā sīlāni samādiyiṃsu. Thero ‘‘tumhe sīlavanto, idāni attano jīvitaṃ vināsentesupi mā mano padūsayitthā’’ti āha. Te ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchiṃsu. Atha te jānapadā sampattā ito cito ca maggamānā te core disvā sabbeva jīvitā voropesuṃ. Te kālaṃ katvā kāmāvacaradevaloke nibbattiṃsu. Tesu jeṭṭhakacoro jeṭṭhakadevaputto ahosi, itare tasseva parivārā.
他们顺逆轮回,在整整一个无佛的时期里都在天界度过。到了我们世尊住世的时代,他们从天界命终,那位大天子投生到舍卫城城门附近一个叫渔夫村的地方,进入五百渔夫首领之妻的腹中;其余的人则分别进入其他渔夫之妻的腹中。就这样,他们同一天结生,同一天出生。渔夫首领心想:“今天这个村子里还有别的孩子出生吗?”他四处打听,看到那些男婴,心想:“这些孩子将来可以跟我儿子作伴。”于是给所有孩子都送了抚养费。这些孩子一起玩泥巴,渐渐长大成人。其中耶输阇成了他们的头领。巴利
Te anulomapaṭilomaṃ saṃsarantā ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ devaloke khepetvā amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle devalokato cavitvā jeṭṭhakadevaputto sāvatthidvāre kevaṭṭagāmo atthi, tattha pañcasatakulajeṭṭhassa kevaṭṭassa pajāpatiyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ aggahesi, itare avasesakevaṭṭapajāpatīnaṃ. Evaṃ tesaṃ ekadivasaṃyeva paṭisandhiggahaṇañca gabbhavuṭṭhānañca ahosi. Atha kevaṭṭajeṭṭho ‘‘atthi nu kho imasmiṃ gāme aññepi dārakā ajja jātā’’ti vicinanto te dārake disvā ‘‘ime me puttassa sahāyakā bhavissantī’’ti sabbesaṃ posāvanikaṃ adāsi. Te sabbe sahāyakā sahapaṃsuṃ kīḷantā anupubbena vayappattā ahesuṃ. Yasojo tesaṃ aggo ahosi.
迦毗罗那时也因地狱的余报,投生在阿致罗筏底河里,变成一条金色、口臭难闻的鱼。有一天,所有渔夫的孩子都拿着渔网,说“我们去捕鱼”,就去了河边撒网。那条鱼钻进了他们的网里。大家看到后,整个渔村高声大叫大嚷:“我们的孩子第一次捕鱼就捕到了金鱼!孩子们真有福气,现在国王一定会给我们很多财宝!”于是那五百个孩子和同伴们把鱼放上船,抬起船去见国王。国王看到后问:“喂,那是什么?”他们回答:“是一条鱼,大王。”国王看到那条金色的鱼,心想:“世尊一定知道它为什么是这个颜色。”就让人把鱼带上,去了世尊那里。鱼一张开嘴的时候,祇园精舍里弥漫着极其浓烈的臭气。巴利
Kapilopi tadā niraye pakkāvasesena aciravatiyā suvaṇṇavaṇṇo duggandhamukho maccho hutvā nibbatti. Athekadivasaṃ sabbepi kevaṭṭadārakā jālāni gahetvā ‘‘macche bandhissāmā’’ti nadiṃ gantvā jālāni pakkhipiṃsu. Tesaṃ jālaṃ so maccho pāvisi. Taṃ disvā sabbo kevaṭṭagāmo uccāsaddamahāsaddo ahosi – ‘‘amhākaṃ puttā paṭhamaṃ macche bandhantā suvaṇṇamacchaṃ bandhiṃsu, vuḍḍhi nesaṃ dārakānaṃ, idāni ca no rājā pahūtaṃ dhanaṃ dassatī’’ti. Atha te pañcasatāpi dārakasahāyakā macchaṃ nāvāya pakkhipitvā nāvaṃ ukkhipitvā rañño santikaṃ agamaṃsu. Rājā disvā ‘‘kiṃ etaṃ bhaṇe’’ti āha. ‘‘Maccho devā’’ti. Rājā suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ macchaṃ disvā ‘‘bhagavā etassa vaṇṇakāraṇaṃ jānissatī’’ti macchaṃ gāhāpetvā bhagavato santikaṃ agamāsi. Macchassa mukhavivaraṇakāle jetavanaṃ ativiya duggandhaṃ hoti.
国王问世尊:“世尊,为什么这条鱼生来是金色的,为什么它嘴里散发出恶臭?”世尊回答:“大王,在迦叶世尊的教法时期,有一位名叫迦毗罗的比丘,他博学多闻,精通法义。但他对那些不接受他说法的人,就辱骂、讥讽那些比丘,还破坏那位世尊的教法。因为他破坏了那位世尊的教法,以这个业,他投生到了无间大地狱;如今靠着剩余果报,他生成了这条鱼。又因为他长久以来读诵佛语、讲述佛陀的功德,凭着这个果报的力量,他得到了这样的金色身。又因为他曾经辱骂、讥讽比丘们,所以嘴里散发出恶臭。”“大王,我让他开口说话吧?”“好的,世尊。”于是世尊对那条鱼说:“你是迦毗罗吗?”“是的,世尊,我就是迦毗罗。”“你从哪里来?”“从无间大地狱来,世尊。”“索达那去了哪里?”“已经般涅槃了,世尊。”“萨达尼去了哪里?”“投生到了大地狱,世尊。”“塔巴娜去了哪里?”“投生到了大地狱,世尊。”“那你现在要去哪里?”“去大地狱,世尊。”话音刚落,他就被追悔之心彻底压倒,用头撞船而死,随即投生到了大地狱。在场的大众都感到震惊,汗毛直竖。于是世尊便向聚集在那里的在家众和出家众,宣说了与当时情境相应的法,讲出了这部经。巴利
Rājā bhagavantaṃ pucchi – ‘‘kasmā, bhante, maccho suvaṇṇavaṇṇo jāto, kasmā cassa mukhato duggandho vāyatī’’ti? Ayaṃ, mahārāja, kassapassa bhagavato pāvacane kapilo nāma bhikkhu ahosi, bahussuto āgatāgamo. Attano vacanaṃ agaṇhantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ akkosakaparibhāsako. Tassa ca bhagavato sāsanavināsako. Yaṃ so tassa bhagavato sāsanaṃ vināsesi, tena kammena avīcimahāniraye nibbatti, vipākāvasesena ca idāni maccho jāto. Yaṃ dīgharattaṃ buddhavacanaṃ vācesi, buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ kathesi, tassa nissandena īdisaṃ vaṇṇaṃ paṭilabhi. Yaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ akkosakaparibhāsako ahosi, tenassa mukhato duggandho vāyati. ‘‘Ullapāpemi naṃ mahārājā’’ti? ‘‘Āma bhagavā’’ti. Atha bhagavā macchaṃ ālapi – ‘‘tvaṃsi kapilo’’ti? ‘‘Āma bhagavā, ahaṃ kapilo’’ti. ‘‘Kuto āgatosī’’ti? ‘‘Avīcimahānirayato bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Sodhano kuhiṃ gato’’ti? ‘‘Parinibbuto bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Sādhanī kuhiṃ gatā’’ti? ‘‘Mahāniraye nibbattā bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Tāpanā kuhiṃ gatā’’ti? ‘‘Mahāniraye nibbattā bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Idāni tvaṃ kuhiṃ gamissasī’’ti? ‘‘Mahānirayaṃ bhagavā’’ti. Tāvadeva vippaṭisārābhibhūto nāvaṃ sīsena paharitvā kālakato mahāniraye nibbatti. Mahājano saṃviggo ahosi lomahaṭṭhajāto. Atha bhagavā tattha sampattagahaṭṭhapabbajitaparisāya taṅkhaṇānurūpaṃ dhammaṃ desento imaṃ suttamabhāsi.
277-8 在这里,“法行”是指身善行等合乎正法的行为。“梵行”是指道梵行。“这称为最上财”:这两者都是世间与出世间的善行,因为能带来生天与解脱的安乐,所以圣者们称它为“最上财”。所谓“最上财”,就是最殊胜的宝物,自己跟随它、由自己主宰,国王等他人无法占有——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
277-8. Tattha dhammacariyanti kāyasucaritādi dhammacariyaṃ. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Etadāhu vasuttamanti etaṃ ubhayampi lokiyalokuttaraṃ sucaritaṃ saggamokkhasukhasampāpakattā vasuttamanti āhu ariyā. Vasuttamaṃ nāma uttamaratanaṃ, anugāmikaṃ attādhīnaṃ rājādīnaṃ asādhāraṇanti adhippāyo.
说到这里,已经说明了“无论在家还是出家,真正可依靠的只有正确的修行”。现在,为了通过揭示没有修行的出家生活毫无实质,来批评迦毗罗以及类似这样的人,就说了“即使出家了”等这些话。巴利
Ettāvatā ‘‘gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā sammāpaṭipattiyeva paṭisaraṇa’’nti dassetvā idāni paṭipattivirahitāya pabbajjāya asārakattadassanena kapilaṃ aññe ca tathārūpe garahanto ‘‘pabbajitopi ce hotī’’ti evamādimāha.
这里对这段含义的解说如下:如果有人舍弃了在家人的外表特征,仅仅以剃发、穿坏色衣等行为就算出家了,即使他已如前文所说从在家走向无家,若他天性多嘴多舌、说话粗鲁刻薄,因为热衷于种种伤害别人的方式,所以以伤害为乐;又因为无惭无愧,像野兽一样,所以是野兽。这种人的活法极其恶劣、极其低贱。为什么?因为他凭着这种邪行,不断增长自己贪欲等种种尘垢烦恼。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā – yo hi koci gihibyañjanāni apanetvā bhaṇḍukāsāvādigahaṇamattaṃ upasaṅkamanena pabbajitopi cehoti pubbe vuttatthaṃ agārasmā anagāriyaṃ, so ce mukharajātiko hoti pharusavacano, nānappakārāya vihesāya abhiratattā vihesābhirato, hirottappābhāvena magasadisattā mago, jīvitaṃ tassa pāpiyo, tassa evarūpassa jīvitaṃ atipāpaṃ atihīnaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā imāya micchāpaṭipattiyā rāgādimanekappakāraṃ rajaṃ vaḍḍheti attano.
279 他的生命变得更糟,不只是因为这个原因。而且,像这样天生多嘴、喜欢争吵的比丘,被一种愚痴的心理状态所笼罩,这种愚痴让他对善说之法的义理和认识产生混乱。所以,即使有戒行清净的比丘们用这样的话来提醒他:“贤友迦毗罗,别这么说,你也可以从这个角度来理解”,他也还是不明白佛陀所教导的法。即使别人用种种方式为他解说佛陀所教导的法,他也还是不明白。这样一来,他的生命就更加下劣了。巴利
279. Na kevalañca imināva kāraṇenassa jīvitaṃ pāpiyo, apica kho pana ayaṃ evarūpo mukharajātikattā kalahābhirato bhikkhu subhāsitassa atthavijānanasammohanena mohadhammena āvuto, ‘‘mā, āvuso kapila, evaṃ avaca, imināpi pariyāyena taṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti evamādinā nayena pesalehi bhikkhūhi akkhātampi na jānāti dhammaṃ buddhena desitaṃ. Yo dhammo buddhena desito, taṃ nānappakārena attano vuccamānampi na jānāti. Evampissa jīvitaṃ pāpiyo.
280 同样地,这样的人因为喜好恼害他人、以恼害为乐,就用种种方式去恼害那些修行有成、已断尽烦恼的比丘们,比如清净长老等人,对他们说:“你们不懂律,不懂经,也不懂阿毗达摩,不过是些老出家的罢了。”诸如此类。这里的属格表示动作所指向的对象。或者,也可以按照前面所说的方式,理解为省略了“对修行有成者施加恼害”这一表述。这样,属格的用法就完全说得通了。“被无明所引导”:他被无明所引导、驱使、推动,这种无明遮蔽了他看见恼害修行有成者之过患的慧眼。他不知道,以恼害之心对待其他有修行的出家众,在现世就会因内心受扰而染污,未来还会走上通往地狱的道路。巴利
280. Tathā so evarūpo vihesābhiratattā vihesaṃ bhāvitattānaṃ bhāvitatte khīṇāsavabhikkhū sodhanattherapabhutike ‘‘na tumhe vinayaṃ jānātha, na suttaṃ na abhidhammaṃ, vuḍḍhapabbajitā’’tiādinā nayena vihesanto . Upayogappavattiyañhi idaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Atha vā yathāvutteneva nayena ‘‘vihesaṃ bhāvitattānaṃ karonto’’ti pāṭhaseso veditabbo. Evaṃ nippariyāyameva sāmivacanaṃ sijjhati. Avijjāya purakkhatoti bhāvitattavihesane ādīnavadassanapaṭicchādikāya avijjāya purakkhato pesito payojito sesapabbajitānaṃ bhāvitattānaṃ vihesabhāvena pavattaṃ diṭṭheva dhamme cittavibādhanena saṅkilesaṃ, āyatiñca nirayasampāpanena maggaṃ nirayagāminaṃ na jānāti.
281 281. 由于无知,他沿着那条路,堕入了分为四类恶趣的堕落处。在那堕落处中,他从一个母胎到另一个母胎,从一片黑暗到另一片黑暗,在各类众生中,甚至百次、千次地从母胎到母胎。那些连日月光芒都无法照亮的阿修罗界的黑暗之处,他也投生其中。这样的比丘,此世死后前往他世,就会像那条迦毗罗鱼一样,遭受种种痛苦。巴利
281. Ajānanto ca tena maggena catubbidhāpāyabhedaṃ vinipātaṃ samāpanno. Tattha ca vinipāte gabbhā gabbhaṃ tamā tamaṃ ekekanikāye satakkhattuṃ sahassakkhattumpi mātukucchito mātukucchiṃ candimasūriyehipi aviddhaṃsanīyā asurakāyatamā tamañca samāpanno. Sa ve tādisakobhikkhu pecca ito paralokaṃ gantvā ayaṃ kapilamaccho viya nānappakāraṃ dukkhaṃ nigacchati.
282 282. 这是什么原因?就像一座粪坑,装满了多年的粪便,如同厕所里的粪坑,积了多年、无数年的粪便,从入口不断被粪便填满,已经充满。这样的粪坑,就算用数百罐、数千罐水去冲洗,也还是臭气熏天、污秽不堪,极难洗干净。同样地,如果有人长期以来造作染污的业,就像那粪坑被粪便填满一样,这个被恶业填满的人,也是极难洗干净的,他确实带着污垢。即使他长久地承受那污垢所带来的果报,也仍然清净不了。所以,这样的比丘死后必定遭受痛苦,时间长得无法用年数计算。或者,这段和偈颂的关联是这样的:前面说“这样的比丘死后必定遭受痛苦”,对此你们可能会想:“有没有办法让他死后不遭受痛苦呢?”没办法。为什么?因为就像那粪坑……(中略)……他确实是带着污垢的。巴利
282. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Gūthakūpo yathā assa, sampuṇṇo gaṇavassiko,yathā vaccakuṭigūthakūpo gaṇavassiko anekavassiko bahūni vassāni mukhato gūthena pūriyamāno sampuṇṇo assa, so udakakumbhasatehi udakakumbhasahassehi dhoviyamānopi duggandhadubbaṇṇiyānapagamā dubbisodho hoti, evameva yo evarūpo assa dīgharattaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhakammanto gūthakūpo viya gūthena pāpena sampuṇṇattā sampuṇṇo puggalo, so dubbisodho hi sāṅgaṇo, cirakālaṃ tassa aṅgaṇassa vipākaṃ paccanubhontopi na sujjhati. Tasmā vassagaṇanāya aparimāṇampi kālaṃ sa ve tādisako bhikkhu pecca dukkhaṃ nigacchatīti. Atha vā ayaṃ imissā gāthāya sambandho – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sa ve tādisako bhikkhu, pecca dukkhaṃ nigacchatī’’ti, tatra siyā tumhākaṃ ‘‘sakkā panāyaṃ tathā kātuṃ, yathā pecca dukkhaṃ na nigaccheyyā’’ti. Na sakkā. Kasmā? Yasmā gūthakūpo…pe… sāṅgaṇoti.
283-4 比丘们,对于这种你们事先就知道是依着在家的东西,这种你们应当知道是依着五种欲乐的东西,由于它具备邪恶欲望,表现为对虚假功德的希求,所以是恶欲;由于它具备欲寻思等,所以是恶思惟;由于它具备身体上的违犯以及施竹等种种邪恶行为,所以是恶行;由于它行于淫女等邪恶行处,所以是恶行处。你们应当全体和合,把他彻底赶出去。这里“彻底赶出去”的意思是应当远离,不应亲近。但不要以为只是把他赶出去就算了,就可以不管了,还应当像扬掉糠秕一样把他清除,像扔掉污物一样把他丢弃。要把那个像垃圾一样的人,毫不留恋地当作垃圾扔掉;要像对待混在刹帝利等人群中、疮口破裂流脓的旃陀罗那样,抓住他的手或头,把他拽出去。就像具寿大目犍连抓住那个恶法之人的手臂,把他推出门外的门廊,然后关上门闩一样,这就是在示范应当怎样把他清除出去。为什么要这样做呢?因为僧园是为持戒的人建的,不是为破戒的人建的。巴利
283-4. Yato paṭikacceva yaṃ evarūpaṃ jānātha, bhikkhavo gehanissitaṃ, yaṃ evarūpaṃ pañcakāmaguṇanissitaṃ jāneyyātha abhūtaguṇapatthanākārappavattāya pāpikāya icchāya samannāgatattā pāpicchaṃ, kāmavitakkādīhi samannāgatattā pāpasaṅkappaṃ, kāyikavītikkamādinā veḷudānādibhedena ca pāpācārena samannāgatattā pāpācāraṃ, vesiyādipāpagocarato pāpagocaraṃ, sabbe samaggā hutvāna abhinibbajjiyātha naṃ. Tattha abhinibbajjiyāthāti vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha, mā cassa abhinibbajjanamatteneva appossukkataṃ āpajjeyyātha, apica kho pana kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamatha, kasambuṃ apakassatha, taṃ kacavarabhūtaṃ puggalaṃ kacavaramiva anapekkhā niddhamatha, kasaṭabhūtañca naṃ khattiyādīnaṃ majjhe paviṭṭhaṃ pabhinnapaggharitakuṭṭhaṃ caṇḍālaṃ viya apakassatha, hatthe vā sīse vā gahetvā nikkaḍḍhatha. Seyyathāpi āyasmā mahāmoggallāno taṃ puggalaṃ pāpadhammaṃ bāhāya gahetvā bahidvārakoṭṭhakā nikkhāmetvā sūcighaṭikaṃ adāsi, evaṃ apakassathāti dasseti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Saṅghārāmo nāma sīlavantānaṃ kato, na dussīlānaṃ.
285-6 既然这样,就该把那些谷壳扬掉——那些根本不是沙门、却自以为是的沙门。就像谷壳,里面没有米粒,外面却带着糠壳,看上去像稻谷;恶比丘也是这样,内在没有戒等实质,外面靠着袈裟等资具,看上去像比丘。所以称他们为“谷壳”。你们要扬弃这些谷壳,簸掉他们,清除他们——从究竟意义上说,他们根本不是沙门,只是靠外表装扮而自以为沙门。这样驱除之后,要保持恭敬。这里的“应行”就是应去做、应去实行;“恭敬”就是彼此尊重、心存敬意。然后,你们这些清净的人与清净的人共住,因为见解和戒行相同而和合,又因智慧逐步成熟而变得审慎,最终将终结轮回等一切苦。世尊就以阿罗汉果为顶点,结束了这次开示。巴利
285-6. Yato etadeva tato palāpe vāhetha, assamaṇe samaṇamānine, yathā hi palāpā anto taṇḍularahitāpi bahi thusehi vīhī viya dissanti, evaṃ pāpabhikkhū anto sīlādivirahitāpi bahi kāsāvādiparikkhārena bhikkhū viya dissanti. Tasmā ‘‘palāpā’’ti vuccanti. Te palāpe vāhetha, opunātha, vidhamatha paramatthato assamaṇe vesamattena samaṇamānine . Evaṃ niddhamitvāna…pe… patissatā. Tattha kappayavhoti kappetha, karothāti vuttaṃ hoti. Patissatāti aññamaññaṃ sagāravā sappatissā. Tato samaggā nipakā, dukkhassantaṃ karissathāti athevaṃ tumhe suddhā suddhehi saṃvāsaṃ kappentā, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññatāya samaggā, anupubbena paripākagatāya paññāya nipakā, sabbassevimassa vaṭṭadukkhādino dukkhassa antaṃ karissathāti arahattanikūṭeneva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.
开示结束时,那五百位渔夫之子生起了强烈的紧迫感,渴望彻底终结痛苦。他们在世尊面前出家,不久就彻底终结了痛苦,和世尊一样受用不动住等至之法,成为同一受用者。他们与世尊如何同一受用,应当依据《优陀那》中耶输阇经所说的方式来理解。巴利
Desanāpariyosāne te pañcasatā kevaṭṭaputtā saṃvegamāpajjitvā dukkhassantakiriyaṃ patthayamānā bhagavato santike pabbajitvā nacirasseva dukkhassantaṃ katvā bhagavatā saddhiṃ āneñjavihārasamāpattidhammaparibhogena ekaparibhogā ahesuṃ. Sā ca nesaṃ evaṃ bhagavatā saddhiṃ ekaparibhogatā udāne vuttayasojasuttavaseneva veditabbāti.
7. 《婆罗门法经》的注释。巴利
7. Brāhmaṇadhammikasuttavaṇṇanā
如是我闻这句,就是《婆罗门法经》的开头。它的缘起是什么呢?就是这部经在序分里用“那时,众多……”这样的方式所说的那段缘起。其中,“众多”是指很多、不止一个。“憍萨罗人”是指住在憍萨罗国的人。“大富婆罗门”是指出身是婆罗门,又因为极其富有而成为大富豪。据说,凡是把八亿财富存起来固定不动的人,就被称为“大富婆罗门”。这些婆罗门正是这样,所以经里说他们是“大富婆罗门”。“老朽”是指身体已经衰败,因为年迈,四肢与身体各部分已衰败残缺。“长老”是指具足了身体肢体的成长状态,意即经历很长时间。“长途”是指已走过了长远的路,意思是已经经历了前后两三代国王的更替。“达到晚年”是指达到了最后的年岁。此外,“老朽”是指古老的,意即世代流传久远的家族传承。“长老”是指具足戒行等功德的增长。“大富”是指具足广大财富,即拥有大量财产、众多受用。“长途”是指行持在修行路上,即修习婆罗门的梵行等规范而不逾越。“达到晚年”是指连出身的长老状态也达到了最后的年岁。这里应当这样理解其搭配。其余在此处则是显而易见的。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti brāhmaṇadhammikasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Ayameva yāssa nidāne ‘‘atha kho sambahulā’’tiādinā nayena vuttā. Tattha sambahulāti bahū aneke. Kosalakāti kosalaraṭṭhavāsino. Brāhmaṇamahāsālāti jātiyā brāhmaṇā mahāsāratāya mahāsālā. Yesaṃ kira nidahitvā ṭhapitaṃyeva asītikoṭisaṅkhyaṃ dhanamatthi, te ‘‘brāhmaṇamahāsālā’’ti vuccanti. Ime ca tādisā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇamahāsālā’’ti. Jiṇṇāti jajjarībhūtā jarāya khaṇḍiccādibhāvamāpāditā. Vuḍḍhāti aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ vuḍḍhimariyādaṃ pattā. Mahallakāti jātimahallakatāya samannāgatā, cirakālappasutāti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhagatāti addhānaṃ gatā, dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe atītāti adhippāyo. Vayo anuppattāti pacchimavayaṃ sampattā. Apica jiṇṇāti porāṇā, cirakālappavattakulanvayāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuḍḍhāti sīlācārādiguṇavuḍḍhiyuttā. Mahallakāti vibhavamahantatāya samannāgatā mahaddhanā mahābhogā. Addhagatāti maggapaṭipannā brāhmaṇānaṃ vatacariyādimariyādaṃ avītikkamma caramānā. Vayo anuppattāti jātivuḍḍhabhāvampi antimavayaṃ anuppattāti evampettha yojanā veditabbā. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
他们与世尊互相问候,也就是询问“是否安好”等话,彼此都生起了欢喜。他们用这样的话互相问候:“乔达摩尊者是否安好?是否还能维持?是否无病?是否无疾?是否有体力、起身轻快、安住安乐?”这种谈话能让人生起欢喜和喜悦,所以是“值得问候的”;因为词句和意义都很甘美,即使过了很久也能让人记得、持续不断,所以是“值得忆持的”。听的时候让人觉得舒服,所以是“值得问候的”;回忆的时候让人觉得舒服,所以是“值得忆持的”。同样,因为词句清净,所以是“值得问候的”;因为意义清净,所以是“值得忆持的”。就这样,他们以种种方式,把这值得问候、值得忆持的谈话进行完毕、结束、圆满之后,为了询问前来的目的,便坐在一边。巴利
Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodiṃsūti khamanīyādīni pucchantā aññamaññaṃ samappavattamodā ahesuṃ. Yāya ca ‘‘kacci bhoto gotamassa khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, appābādhaṃ, appātaṅkaṃ, balaṃ, lahuṭṭhānaṃ, phāsuvihāro’’tiādikāya kathāya sammodiṃsu, taṃ pītipāmojjasaṅkhātasammodajananato sammodituṃ arahato ca sammodanīyaṃ, atthabyañjanamadhuratāya sucirampi kālaṃ sāretuṃ nirantaraṃ pavattetuṃ arahato saritabbabhāvato ca sāraṇīyaṃ. Suyyamānasukhato ca sammodanīyaṃ, anussariyamānasukhato sāraṇīyaṃ, tathā byañjanaparisuddhatāya sammodanīyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāya sāraṇīyanti evaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ sāraṇīyaṃ vītisāretvā pariyosāpetvā niṭṭhāpetvā yenatthena āgatā, taṃ pucchitukāmā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Taṃ –
不在后面,不在前面,也不在近处或远处;
不在侧面,也不在逆风处,也不在背风处。巴利
‘‘Na pacchato na purato, nāpi āsannadūrato; Na passe nāpi paṭivāte, na cāpi oṇatuṇṇate’’ti. –
以开头的方式,《吉祥经》的注释里已经说过了。巴利
Ādinā nayena maṅgalasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva.
那些大富婆罗门坐在一边后,对世尊这样说道:“这是什么?”也就是“是否可见?”等等。这些内容意思都很明白。不过这里,“婆罗门的婆罗门法”,是抛开说法的时间、地点等条件,单指婆罗门法本身。因此说“婆罗门们啊”——因为你们向我请求,所以你们这些婆罗门:要听,要倾耳,要好好作意,要如理作意。也就是说,以加行清净来听,以意乐清净来好好作意;以不散乱来听,以策励来好好作意。按这种方式,这些词句虽然没有在前面说过,其意趣也应当了知。接着,那些大富婆罗门接受了世尊的这番话,回答世尊说:“是的,尊者!”他们面向世尊之语而听闻。或者说,他们应允了。这就是说:对于“请听,好好作意”所说的意思,他们想要去做,所以应允了。然后,对已经这样应允的他们,世尊这样说:“这是什么?”也就是“过去的仙人们……”等等。巴利
Evaṃ ekamantaṃ nisinnā kho te brāhmaṇamahāsālā bhagavantaṃ etadavocuṃ – ‘‘kiṃ ta’’nti? ‘‘Sandissanti nu kho’’tiādi. Taṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthameva. Kevalañhettha brāhmaṇānaṃ brāhmaṇadhammeti desakālādidhamme chaḍḍetvā yo brāhmaṇadhammo, tasmiṃyeva. Tena hi brāhmaṇāti yasmā maṃ tumhe yācittha, tasmā brāhmaṇā suṇātha, sotaṃ odahatha, sādhukaṃ manasi karotha, yoniso manasi karotha. Tathā payogasuddhiyā suṇātha, āsayasuddhiyā sādhukaṃ manasi karotha. Avikkhepena suṇātha, paggahena sādhukaṃ manasi karothātiādinā nayena etesaṃ padānaṃ pubbe avuttopi adhippāyo veditabbo. Atha bhagavatā vuttaṃ taṃ vacanaṃ sampaṭicchantā ‘‘evaṃ bho’’ti kho te brāhmaṇamahāsālā bhagavato paccassosuṃ, bhagavato vacanaṃ abhimukhā hutvā assosuṃ. Atha vā paṭissuṇiṃsu. ‘‘Suṇātha sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ kattukāmatāya paṭijāniṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha tesaṃ evaṃ paṭissutavataṃ bhagavā etadavoca – ‘‘kiṃ ta’’nti? ‘‘Isayo pubbakā’’tiādi.
287 287. 其中,先就第一首偈颂来说,“saññatattā”是指以戒律的约束来收摄心;“tapassino”是指致力于守护根门的苦行者;“attadatthamacārisu”是指他们修习明咒、禅那、梵住等,成就了自身的利益。其余内容已经很清楚。巴利
287. Tattha paṭhamagāthāya tāva saññatattāti sīlasaṃyamena saṃyatacittā. Tapassinoti indriyasaṃvaratapayuttā. Attadatthamacārisunti mantajjhenabrahmavihārabhāvanādiṃ attano atthaṃ akaṃsu. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
288 288. 在第二偈等部分,简要注释如下:“na pasū brāhmaṇānāsuṃ”的意思是:古时的婆罗门没有牲畜,他们不占有牲畜。“na hiraññaṃ na dhāniyaṃ”的意思是:婆罗门没有黄金,连一粒芥子那么大的黄金都没有;同样,粳米、稻米、大麦、小麦等各类谷物,他们也没有。因为他们已经舍弃了金银,不积蓄储存,只以诵习为财富和粮食,仅仅具备那称为明咒诵习的财富和粮食。而这种慈等梵住,因为最为殊胜,又能跟随到来世,所以称为梵财;他们一直守护这梵财,通过不断修习让它相随。巴利
288. Dutiyagāthādīsupi ayaṃ saṅkhepavaṇṇanā – na pasū brāhmaṇānāsunti porāṇānaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ pasū na āsuṃ, na te pasupariggahamakaṃsu. Na hiraññaṃ na dhāniyanti hiraññañca brāhmaṇānaṃ antamaso jatumāsakopi nāhosi , tathā vīhisāliyavagodhūmādi pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇabhedaṃ dhāniyampi tesaṃ nāhosi. Te hi nikkhittajātarūparajatā asannidhikārakāva hutvā kevalaṃ sajjhāyadhanadhaññā attano mantajjhenasaṅkhāteneva dhanena dhaññena ca samannāgatā ahesuṃ. Yo cāyaṃ mettādivihāro seṭṭhattā anugāmikattā ca brahmanidhīti vuccati, tañca brahmaṃ nidhimapālayuṃ sadā tassa bhāvanānuyogena.
289 289. 这样安住的婆罗门们,为他们所准备的是什么?就是专为这些婆罗门而备的食物——施主们心想“我们要布施给婆罗门”,于是准备好、各自放在自家门口的食物。“saddhāpakataṃ”就是由信心所准备的意思,也就是所说的信施。“esānaṃ”是“esantīti esā”的意思,即“那些寻求者”,也就是正在寻求的人的。“dātabbe”就是应当布施的。“tadamaññisuṃ”就是他们这样认为:那放在门口准备好的食物,即信施,应当布施给这些正在寻求的婆罗门,而不是给其他人。因为那些婆罗门对其他事物没有需求,他们仅仅以衣食满足为限,知足而住——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
289. Evaṃ vihārīnaṃ yaṃ nesaṃ pakataṃ āsi, yaṃ etesaṃ pakataṃ ete brāhmaṇe uddissa kataṃ ahosi. Dvārabhattaṃ upaṭṭhitanti ‘‘brāhmaṇānaṃ dassāmā’’ti sajjetvā tehi tehi dāyakehi attano attano gharadvāre ṭhapitabhattaṃ. Saddhāpakatanti saddhāya pakataṃ, saddhādeyyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Esānanti esantīti esā, tesaṃ esānaṃ, esamānānaṃ pariyesamānānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dātaveti dātabbaṃ. Tadamaññisunti taṃ amaññiṃsu, taṃ dvāre sajjetvā ṭhapitaṃ bhattaṃ saddhādeyyaṃ pariyesamānānaṃ etesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ dātabbaṃ amaññiṃsu dāyakā janā, na tato paraṃ. Anatthikā hi te aññena ahesuṃ, kevalaṃ ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhāti adhippāyo.
290 用各种不同颜色的染料染成的衣服,铺着各种华丽卧具的床榻,以及单层、双层等上等殿堂。住处,就是用这样的资具组成的。那些富庶的地方和王国,有些是单独一个地区构成的地方,有些是整个王国,人们早晚都像礼敬天神一样向婆罗门行礼,念诵:礼敬婆罗门!巴利
290.Nānārattehīti nānāvidharāgarattehi vatthehi vicitrattharaṇatthatehi, sayanehi ekabhūmikadvibhūmikādipāsādavarehi. Āvasathehīti evarūpehi upakaraṇehi. Phītā janapadā raṭṭhā ekekappadesabhūtā janapadā ca keci keci sakalaraṭṭhā ca ‘‘namo brāhmaṇāna’’nti sāyaṃ pātaṃ brāhmaṇe deve viya namassiṃsu.
291 291. 他们这样受到世间敬重,成为不可杀害的婆罗门;不但不可杀害,而且不可征服——因为不能被伤害、不能被压制,所以不可征服。这是什么缘故呢?因为他们受到法的守护,也就是被法所保护。他们确实守护了五种殊胜的戒法,正如“法确实守护行法的人”所说,成为法所守护者,因此不可杀害、不可征服,这就是这段话的意趣。“没有谁阻挡他们”:那些婆罗门在各家门前,无论外门还是内门,因为人们把他们看作可爱可敬的人,他们又具足殊胜的戒德,所以人们像对待父母一样极其信赖他们,因此没有人阻挡他们说“你不许进入这个地方”。巴利
291. Te evaṃ namassiyamānā lokena avajjhā brāhmaṇā āsuṃ, na kevalañca avajjhā, ajeyyā vihiṃsitumpi anabhibhavanīyattā ajeyyā ca ahesuṃ. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Dhammarakkhitā, yasmā dhammena rakkhitā. Te hi pañca varasīladhamme rakkhiṃsu, ‘‘dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’nti (jā. 1.10.102; 1.15.385) dhammarakkhitā hutvā avajjhā ajeyyā ca ahesunti adhippāyo. Na ne koci nivāresīti te brāhmaṇe kulānaṃ dvāresu sabbaso bāhiresu ca abbhantaresu ca sabbadvāresu yasmā tesu piyasammatesu varasīlasamannāgatesu mātāpitūsu viya ativissatthā manussā ahesuṃ, tasmā ‘‘idaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ tayā na pavisitabba’’nti na koci nivāresi.
292 他们这样受法守护,在各家门口行走时没人阻拦,从少年时起就修习童真梵行,一共四十八年。即使是那些婆罗门和旃陀罗也曾这样做,更何况那些像梵天一样的人呢——这里应当这样理解其用意。古代的婆罗门正是这样修习梵行,是为了寻求明与行而修行,而不是先成了非梵行者再去寻求。其中,寻求明是指读诵咒文。这也是有记载的:“他修习童真梵行四十八年,学习咒文。”(增支部5.192)寻求行是指守护戒律。也有读作“vijjācaraṇapariyeṭṭhuṃ”的,意思是為了寻求明与行而修行。巴利
292. Evaṃ dhammarakkhitā kuladvāresu anivāritā carantā aṭṭha ca cattālīsañcāti aṭṭhacattālīsaṃ vassāni kumārabhāvato pabhuti caraṇena komāraṃ brahmacariyaṃ cariṃsu te. Yepi brāhmaṇacaṇḍālā ahesuṃ, ko pana vādo brahmasamādīsūti evamettha adhippāyo veditabbo. Evaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carantā eva hi vijjācaraṇapariyeṭṭhiṃ acaruṃ brāhmaṇā pure, na abrahmacārino hutvā. Tattha vijjāpariyeṭṭhīti mantajjhenaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘so aṭṭhacattālīsa vassāni komāraṃ brahmacariyaṃ carati mante adhīyamāno’’ti (a. ni. 5.192). Caraṇapariyeṭṭhīti sīlarakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Vijjācaraṇapariyeṭṭhu’’ntipi pāṭho, vijjācaraṇaṃ pariyesituṃ acarunti attho.
293 293. 按照前面所说的,修完规定时期的梵行之后,即使随后要安家过在家生活,婆罗门也不会另娶别的种姓——不会娶刹帝利,也不会娶吠舍等其他种姓中的任何一个。这里说的是那些像天神一样尊贵、或者恪守规矩的婆罗门。同样,他们也不会像今天某些人那样,花一百或一千买来妻子,而是如法地求娶妻子。怎么求呢?婆罗门修了四十八年梵行之后,就四处去讨要少女:“我已完成四十八年梵行,如果有到了年龄的女儿,请给我。”于是,谁家有到了年龄的女儿,就把她打扮好,带到门口,向站在门口的婆罗门手上倒水,说:“婆罗门,我把这个女子给你做妻子,用来养育后代。”说完就交给他。巴利
293. Yathāvuttañca kālaṃ brahmacariyaṃ caritvā tato paraṃ gharāvāsaṃ kappentāpi na brāhmaṇā aññamagamuṃ khattiyaṃ vā vessādīsu aññataraṃ vā, ye ahesuṃ devasamā vā mariyādā vāti adhippāyo. Tathā sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vā datvā napi bhariyaṃ kiṇiṃsu te, seyyathāpi etarahi ekacce kiṇanti. Te hi dhammena dāraṃ pariyesanti. Kathaṃ? Aṭṭhacattālīsaṃ vassāni brahmacariyaṃ caritvā brāhmaṇā kaññābhikkhaṃ āhiṇḍanti – ‘‘ahaṃ aṭṭhacattālīsa vassāni ciṇṇabrahmacariyo, yadi vayappattā dārikā atthi, detha me’’ti. Tato yassa vayappattā dārikā hoti, so taṃ alaṅkaritvā nīharitvā dvāre ṭhitasseva brāhmaṇassa hatthe udakaṃ āsiñcanto ‘‘imaṃ te, brāhmaṇa, bhariyaṃ posāvanatthāya dammī’’ti vatvā deti.
那么,为什么他们修了这么久的梵行,却仍然要娶妻,而不是终身做梵行者呢?这是因为邪见。他们有这样一种看法:“不生孩子的人就是在断绝家族血脉,因此会堕入地狱。”据说有四种东西害怕不该害怕的事:蚯蚓、基基鸟、鹬鸟和婆罗门。蚯蚓因为害怕大地毁灭,所以只吃适量的食物,不敢吃太多泥土。基基鸟因为害怕天空塌下来,所以仰躺着护在蛋上面。鹬鸟因为害怕大地震动,所以脚不敢稳稳地踩在地上。婆罗门因为害怕家族血脉断绝,所以娶妻。这里有一首偈颂说:巴利
Kasmā pana te evaṃ ciraṃ brahmacariyaṃ caritvāpi dāraṃ pariyesanti, na yāvajīvaṃ brahmacārino hontīti? Micchādiṭṭhivasena. Tesañhi evaṃdiṭṭhi hoti – ‘‘yo puttaṃ na uppādeti, so kulavaṃsacchedakaro hoti, tato niraye paccatī’’ti. Cattāro kira abhāyitabbaṃ bhāyanti gaṇḍuppādo kikī kuntanī brāhmaṇāti. Gaṇḍuppādā kira mahāpathaviyā khayabhayena mattabhojino honti, na bahuṃ mattikaṃ khādanti. Kikī sakuṇikā ākāsapatanabhayena aṇḍassa upari uttānā seti. Kuntanī sakuṇikā pathavikampanabhayena pādehi bhūmiṃ na suṭṭhu akkamati. Brāhmaṇā kulavaṃsūpacchedabhayena dāraṃ pariyesanti. Āha cettha –
蚯蚓、基基鸟、贡蒂鸟,还有奉行婆罗门法的婆罗门;
这些愚痴的四种人,把没有危险的东西当成危险来害怕。巴利
‘‘Gaṇḍuppādo kikī ceva, kuntī brāhmaṇadhammiko; Ete abhayaṃ bhāyanti, sammūḷhā caturo janā’’ti.
他们即使已经如法求娶了妻子,也只是因为彼此相爱才共同生活、结合在一起;正是因为彼此相爱,怀着对对方的爱意,身心交融、紧密相连、混融一体地共同生活,而不是出于不喜欢,也不是出于压制——这就是这段话要表达的意思。巴利
Evaṃ dhammena dāraṃ pariyesitvāpi ca sampiyeneva saṃvāsaṃ saṅgantvā samarocayuṃ, sampiyeneva aññamaññaṃ pemeneva kāyena ca cittena ca missībhūtā saṅghaṭitā saṃsaṭṭhā hutvā saṃvāsaṃ samarocayuṃ, na appiyena na niggahena cāti vuttaṃ hoti.
294 294. 即使这样以彼此相爱的方式共同生活,也还是有“除了那个时候之外”的例外——也就是除了那个时节:在那个时候,婆罗门女才可被婆罗门亲近。除了那个时候,避开那段时间,丈夫对妻子远离经期,也就是守持经期戒,直到那段时间再次到来之前,一直不接近。“淫欲法”就是指淫欲之事。据说这里是以完成语代替业格。“他们不去”就是根本不去。“婆罗门”指的是那些如同天神、具足轨范的人。巴利
294. Evaṃ sampiyeneva saṃvāsaṃ karontāpi ca aññatra tamhāti, yo so utusamayo, yamhi samaye brāhmaṇī brāhmaṇena upagantabbā, aññatra tamhā samayā ṭhapetvā taṃ samayaṃ ututo virataṃ utuveramaṇiṃ pati bhariyaṃ, yāva puna so samayo āgacchati, tāva aṭṭhatvā antarāyeva. Methunaṃ dhammanti methunāya dhammāya. Sampadānavacanapattiyā kiretaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nāssu gacchantīti neva gacchanti. Brāhmaṇāti ye honti devasamā ca mariyādā cāti adhippāyo.
295 295. 不过,总的来说,他们全都称赞梵行……中略……以及戒、正直、柔和、苦行、和顺、无害、忍耐。其中,梵行指远离淫欲;戒指其余四条学处;正直指为人正直,实质上就是不狡诈、不虚伪;柔和指性情柔软,实质上就是不顽固、不骄慢;苦行指守护诸根;和顺指性情温良、安于善行、待人接物不乖戾;无害指不以手等对众生施加伤害的本性,心怀悲悯;忍耐指能忍受的忍耐。他们称赞这些功德。那些无法完全通过修行令(他人/法)满意的人,也在其中成为看到精华的人,用言语称赞、赞叹。巴利
295. Avisesena pana sabbepi brahmacariyañca…pe… avaṇṇayuṃ. Tattha brahmacariyanti methunavirati. Sīlanti sesāni cattāri sikkhāpadāni. Ajjavanti ujubhāvo, atthato asaṭhatā amāyāvitā ca. Maddavanti mudubhāvo, atthato atthaddhatā anatimānitā ca. Tapoti indriyasaṃvaro. Soraccanti suratabhāvo sukhasīlatā appaṭikūlasamācāratā. Avihiṃsāti pāṇiādīhi avihesikajātikatā sakaruṇabhāvo. Khantīti adhivāsanakkhanti. Iccete guṇe avaṇṇayuṃ. Yepi nāsakkhiṃsu sabbaso paṭipattiyā ārādhetuṃ, tepi tattha sāradassino hutvā vācāya vaṇṇayiṃsu pasaṃsiṃsu.
296 在这样称赞他们的人当中……中略……他没有去接近;在这些婆罗门中,那位最殊胜的梵天,也就是被称为与梵天等同的最上婆罗门,因为具备坚固的精进,所以叫坚固精进者。这里的“vā”是表示强调的词,用它来说明他正是这样的婆罗门。“淫欲法”指行淫。“即使在梦中也未去接近”,意思是即使在梦中也不曾行淫。巴利
296. Evaṃ vaṇṇentānañca yo nesaṃ…pe… nāgamā, yo etesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ paramo brahmā ahosi, brahmasamo nāma uttamo brāhmaṇo ahosi, daḷhena parakkamena samannāgatattā daḷhaparakkamo. Sa vāti vibhāvane vā-saddo, tena so evarūpo brāhmaṇoti tameva vibhāveti. Methunaṃ dhammanti methunasamāpattiṃ. Supinantepi nāgamāti supinepi na agamāsi.
297 297. 此后,他的行持……中略……他们共同赞叹。通过这首偈颂,也就是第九首偈颂,由开头到结尾逐一指出前面已经说过的那些功德,从而显示像天人一样的婆罗门。因为那些生来就有智慧的人,会跟随学习那位如同梵天的婆罗门的行持,也就是出家以及修习禅那;而他们正是通过实际修行来称扬这些梵行等功德。这一切婆罗门,都应当依照《增支部》五集《陶匠经》(A. Ni. 5.192)所说的方法来理解。巴利
297. Tato tassa vattaṃ…pe… avaṇṇayuṃ. Imāya gāthāya navamagāthāya vuttaguṇeyeva ādiantavasena niddisanto devasame brāhmaṇe pakāseti. Te hi viññujātikā paṇḍitā tassa brahmasamassa brāhmaṇassa vattaṃ anusikkhanti pabbajjāya jhānabhāvanāya ca, te ca ime brahmacariyādiguṇe paṭipattiyā eva vaṇṇayantīti. Te sabbepi brāhmaṇā pañcakanipāte doṇasutte (a. ni. 5.192) vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
298 现在,为了说明那些遵守界限的婆罗门,他说了“稻米、卧具”这句话。它的意思是:在他们当中,那些遵守界限的婆罗门,如果想举办祭祀,由于他们远离接受生谷,就依法乞求各种稻米、床椅等卧具、亚麻等衣服,以及牛酥油、芝麻油等酥油。他们依据这样一句话——“圣者们依此而住,这就是对圣者的乞求”——也就是以被称为“依止处”的如法方式乞求之后,凡是有人愿意布施什么,就把那些布施的稻米等物聚集、归拢到一起。也有写成“收集后”的版本,意思是一样的。然后,他们拿着那些东西举行祭祀,进行布施。巴利
298. Idāni mariyāde brāhmaṇe dassento āha – ‘‘taṇḍulaṃ sayana’’nti. Tassattho – tesu ye honti mariyādā, te brāhmaṇā sace yaññaṃ kappetukāmā honti, atha āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā paṭiviratattā nānappakārakaṃ taṇḍulañca, mañcapīṭhādibhedaṃ sayanañca, khomādibhedaṃ vatthañca, gosappitilatelādibhedaṃ sappitelañca yāciya dhammena, ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyāna yācanā’’ti evaṃ vuttena uddissaṭhānasaṅkhātena dhammena yācitvā, atha yo yaṃ icchati dātuṃ, tena taṃ dinnataṇḍulādiṃ samodhānetvā saṃkaḍḍhitvā. ‘‘Samudānetvā’’tipi pāṭho, ekoyevattho. Tato yaññamakappayunti tato gahetvā dānamakaṃsu .
299 299. 当他们这样举行时,在这个被称为布施的祭祀已经准备好的场合,他们没有杀害那些公牛,也没有杀害那些母牛。这里应当知道,是用“母牛”这个词来代表一切众生。为什么他们没有杀害呢?因为他们具备梵行等功德。再者,特别是像母亲一样……他们没有杀害那些牛。其中,“在它们身上出生药草”的意思是:在那些母牛身上,产生针对胆汁等(疾病)的、作为药物的五种牛乳制品。巴利
299. Karontā ca evametasmiṃ upaṭṭhitasmiṃ dānasaṅkhāte yaññasmiṃ nāssu gāvo haniṃsu te, na te gāviyo haniṃsu. Gāvīmukhena cettha sabbapāṇā vuttāti veditabbā. Kiṃkāraṇā na haniṃsūti? Brahmacariyādiguṇayuttattā. Apica visesato yathā mātā…pe… nāssu gāvo haniṃsu te. Tattha yāsu jāyanti osadhāti yāsu pittādīnaṃ bhesajjabhūtā pañca gorasā jāyanti.
300 在“施食者”等说法中应当知道:因为吃了五种牛乳制品的人,饥饿会平息,体力会增长,肤色会变得光洁,身心的快乐会生起,所以它们可以称为施食者、施力者、施色者、施乐者。这里其余的内容,意思都很浅显。巴利
300.Annadātiādīsu yasmā pañca gorase paribhuñjantānaṃ khudā vūpasammati, balaṃ vaḍḍhati, chavivaṇṇo vippasīdati, kāyikamānasikaṃ sukhaṃ uppajjati , tasmā annadā baladā vaṇṇadā sukhadā cetāti veditabbā. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
301 301. 就这样,他们在祭祀中不杀牛,身体受到福德威力的护持,变得娇嫩……人民便安乐地增长。其中,“娇嫩”是指手足等柔软细嫩;“体型高大”是指身量高壮、体态丰满;“有容色”是指具有金色般的肤色和匀称的身形;“有名声”是指拥有利养和眷属的成就。“以自法”是指依自己的行持。“于应为与不应为之事中勤勉”是指:对于应做之事,生起“这应当做”;对于不应做之事,生起“这不应当做”,如此发起勤勉。就这样,那些古代的婆罗门成为这般模样——值得瞻仰、令人信服、是世间最上的应供者,依此而行,只要他们还行于世间,便远离恐惧、灾难与祸害,享有并获得了种种安乐,或者说,安乐地增长,安乐地达至增盛。“这人民”是指众生世间。巴利
301. Evaṃ te yaññesu gāvo ahanantā puññappabhāvānuggahitasarīrā sukhumālā…pe… sukhamedhittha yaṃ pajā. Tattha sukhumālā mudutaluṇahatthapādāditāya, mahākāyā ārohapariṇāhasampattiyā, vaṇṇavanto suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya saṇṭhānayuttatāya ca, yasassino lābhaparivārasampadāya. Sehi dhammehīti sakehi cārittehi. Kiccākiccesu ussukāti kiccesu ‘‘idaṃ kātabbaṃ’’, akiccesu ‘‘idaṃ na kātabba’’nti ussukkamāpannā hutvāti attho. Evaṃ te porāṇā brāhmaṇā evarūpā hutvā dassanīyā pasādanīyā lokassa paramadakkhiṇeyyā imāya paṭipattiyā yāva loke avattiṃsu, tāva vigataītibhayupaddavā hutvā nānappakārakaṃ sukhaṃ edhittha pāpuṇi, sukhaṃ vā edhittha sukhaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ agamāsi. Ayaṃ pajāti sattalokaṃ nidasseti.
302-3 后来,当他们想要破坏、混淆原有的界限时,那些婆罗门生起了颠倒想……按部分计量。这里,“颠倒想”就是颠倒的认知。“从微细中见微细”:与从欲乐中生起的禅定、无色定和涅槃之乐相比,欲乐因为低劣、渺小、少乐的性质而被称为微细,连拿来比较的资格都没有,所以他们看到欲乐是微细的;或者,与出世间乐相比,欲乐是微细的,比起自己证得的世间等至之乐,欲乐更微细、更少、更微不足道——这就是这段话的意思。“国王的”就是国王的。“受用”就是财产。“善种马相应”就是与良马相应的。“善作”就是以木匠、金工善加制造的;“彩绘缝制”就是以狮皮等作为庄严的彩绘缝制品;“住所”就是房屋的基址;“屋舍”就是建于其上的房子;“划分”就是依长宽而划分的;“按部分计量”就是分为庭院、大门、殿堂、楼阁等部分而计量。这话是什么意思呢?那些婆罗门看见从微细中见微细的欲乐、国王的财产、装饰过的妇女,以及上述种类的车乘、住所和屋舍,由于在这些实为苦的事物上生起了“乐”想,所以先前生起的、被称为出离想的颠倒想,就是颠倒的认知。巴利
302-3. Kālaccayena pana sambhinnamariyādabhāvaṃ āpajjitukāmānaṃ tesaṃ āsi vipallāso…pe… bhāgaso mite. Tattha vipallāsoti viparītasaññā. Aṇuto aṇunti lāmakaṭṭhena parittaṭṭhena appassādaṭṭhena aṇubhūtato kāmaguṇato uppannaṃ jhānasāmaññanibbānasukhāni upanidhāya saṅkhyampi anupagamanena aṇuṃ kāmasukhaṃ, lokuttarasukhaṃ vā upanidhāya aṇubhūtato attanā paṭiladdhalokiyasamāpattisukhato aṇuṃ appakatopi appakaṃ kāmasukhaṃ disvāti adhippāyo. Rājino cāti rañño ca. Viyākāranti sampattiṃ. Ājaññasaṃyutteti assājānīyasaṃyutte. Sukateti dārukammalohakammena suniṭṭhite. Cittasibbaneti sīhacammādīhi alaṅkaraṇavasena citrasibbane. Nivesaneti gharavatthūni. Niveseti tattha patiṭṭhāpitagharāni. Vibhatteti āyāmavitthāravasena vibhattāni. Bhāgaso miteti aṅgaṇadvārapāsādakūṭāgārādivasena koṭṭhāsaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā mitāni. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ aṇuto aṇusaññitaṃ kāmasukhañca rañño byākārañca alaṅkatanāriyo ca vuttappakāre rathe ca nivesane nivese ca disvā dukkhesuyeva etesu vatthūsu ‘‘sukha’’nti pavattattā pubbe pavattanekkhammasaññāvipallāsasaṅkhātā viparītasaññā āsi.
304 他们这样生起颠倒想之后,……婆罗门。其中,“被牛群围绕”就是被牛群环绕;“与最上等的女子群体相伴”就是与最优秀的女子群体在一起;“广大”就是宽广;“人间的受用物”就是人们的住所等受用之物。他们生起贪求:“啊!但愿这些成为我们的!”这样增长渴爱,满怀强烈的期盼而思虑。巴利
304. Te evaṃ viparītasaññā hutvā gomaṇḍalaparibyūḷhaṃ…pe… brāhmaṇā. Tattha gomaṇḍalaparibyūḷhanti goyūthehi parikiṇṇaṃ. Nārīvaragaṇāyutanti varanārīgaṇasaṃyuttaṃ. Uḷāranti vipulaṃ . Mānusaṃ bhoganti manussānaṃ nivesanādibhogavatthuṃ. Abhijjhāyiṃsūti ‘‘aho vatidaṃ amhākaṃ assā’’ti taṇhaṃ vaḍḍhetvā abhipatthayamānā jhāyiṃsu.
305 305. 他们这样贪求着,心里想:“这些人沐浴干净、涂香打扮、修剪须发、佩戴珠宝,享受五种感官快乐;而我们虽然同样被他们礼敬,却身体被汗垢弄脏,腋毛和指甲、体毛都长得很长,没有财物,过得极其悲惨。这些人骑象、骑马、坐轿、乘金车等出行,我们却靠双脚走路。这些人住在两层楼等宫殿的高台上,我们却住在树林、树下等地方。这些人铺着羊毛毯等褥垫,睡在殊胜的床座上,我们却铺着草席、兽皮片等,睡在地上。这些人吃各种美味的食物,我们却靠乞讨过活。我们怎样才能变得和他们一样呢?”这样想了之后,他们认定:“必须追求财富,没有财富的人不可能获得这种成就。”于是他们破坏吠陀,毁掉与法相应的古老咒语,编造与非法相应的虚假咒语,一心求财,前去亲近甘蔗王,说了些祝福的话,然后说:“大王,我们婆罗门传承中有世代相传的古老咒句。我们秉承师传,从未对任何人说过。大王值得听闻。”接着称赞马祭等祭祀。称赞之后,又鼓励国王说:“大王,请祭祀吧,您拥有如此丰足的财富和谷物,祭祀的资具一点也不缺。您这样祭祀,七代亲属都将转生天界。”世尊为了显示他们的这些行为,说了:“他们在那里……咒语……你财富众多。”巴利
305. Evaṃ abhijjhāyantā ca ‘‘ete manussā sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmuttamaṇiābharaṇā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi paricārenti, mayaṃ pana evaṃ tehi namassiyamānāpi sedamalakiliṭṭhagattā parūḷhakacchanakhalomā bhogarahitā paramakāruññataṃ pattā viharāma. Ete ca hatthikkhandhaassapiṭṭhisivikāsuvaṇṇarathādīhi vicaranti, mayaṃ pādehi. Ete dvibhūmikādipāsādatalesu vasanti, mayaṃ araññarukkhamūlādīsu. Ete ca gonakādīhi attharaṇehi atthatāsu varaseyyāsu sayanti, mayaṃ taṭṭikācammakhaṇḍādīni attharitvā bhūmiyaṃ. Ete nānārasāni bhojanāni bhuñjanti, mayaṃ uñchācariyāya yāpema. Kathaṃ nu kho mayampi etehi sadisā bhaveyyāmā’’ti cintetvā ‘‘dhanaṃ icchitabbaṃ, na sakkā dhanarahitehi ayaṃ sampatti pāpuṇitu’’nti ca avadhāretvā vede bhinditvā dhammayutte purāṇamante nāsetvā adhammayutte kūṭamante ganthetvā dhanatthikā okkākarājānamupasaṅkamma sotthivacanādīni payuñjitvā ‘‘amhākaṃ, mahārāja, brāhmaṇavaṃse paveṇiyā āgataṃ porāṇamantapadaṃ atthi, taṃ mayaṃ ācariyamuṭṭhitāya na kassaci bhaṇimhā, taṃ mahārājā sotumarahatī’’ti ca vatvā assamedhādiyaññaṃ vaṇṇayiṃsu. Vaṇṇayitvā ca rājānaṃ ussāhentā ‘‘yaja, mahārāja, evaṃ pahūtadhanadhañño tvaṃ, natthi te yaññasambhāravekallaṃ, evañhi te yajato sattakulaparivaṭṭā sagge uppajjissantī’’ti avocuṃ. Tena nesaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ dassento āha bhagavā ‘‘te tattha mante…pe… bahu te dhana’’nti.
这里,“各处”指的是:他们当时贪求受用物的那个地方,说的就是那个相状。因为这是用方位格来表达“相状”的意思。“那时来亲近”就是那时他们前来亲近。“你拥有丰足的财富和谷物”意思是:你来世会成为拥有丰足财富和谷物的人,指的是来世。因为精通语言的人认为,在表达愿望时,即使说的是未来,也喜欢用现在时的说法。“请祭祀”就是请举行祭祀。“财物与财富”:黄金等珍宝本身就是财物,因为它是产生财富的原因;因为是产生成功的原因,所以叫财富。或者,“财物”就是作为财富之因的装饰品等用具,比如在“拥有丰足财物的用具”这类说法中出现;“财富”则是金银等。这是在说什么呢?那些婆罗门编好了咒语,那时前去亲近甘蔗王。怎么样呢?“大王,您有很多财物和财富,请祭祀吧,来世您也会成为拥有丰足财富和谷物的人。”巴利
Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ, yaṃ bhogamabhijjhāyiṃsu, tannimittanti vuttaṃ hoti. Nimittatthe hi etaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Tadupāgamunti tadā upāgamuṃ. Pahūtadhanadhaññosīti pahūtadhanadhañño bhavissasi, abhisamparāyanti adhippāyo. Āsaṃsāyañhi anāgatepi vattamānavacanaṃ icchanti saddakovidā. Yajassūti yajāhi. Vittaṃ dhananti jātarūpādiratanameva vittikāraṇato vittaṃ, samiddhikāraṇato dhananti vuttaṃ. Atha vā vittanti vittikāraṇabhūtameva ābharaṇādi upakaraṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘pahūtavittūpakaraṇo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.331) āgacchati. Dhananti hiraññasuvaṇṇādi. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Te brāhmaṇā mante ganthetvā tadā okkākaṃ upāgamuṃ. Kinti? ‘‘Mahārāja, bahū te vittañca dhanañca, yajassu, āyatimpi pahūtadhanadhañño bhavissasī’’ti.
306 他们这样说明理由、让国王明白之后,那位国王……布施了财富。这里,“让他明白”就是让他知道。“车乘之雄”是说,在众多大车乘的刹帝利中,因为他不可动摇,所以像公牛一样。“马祭”等词中,马在这里被祭祀,所以叫马祭;这是指以两种辅助祭祀来举行、有二十一根祭柱、除了土地和男子之外布施其余一切财富的祭祀。“人祭”是说,人在这里被祭祀;这是指以四种辅助祭祀来举行、连同土地一起布施,像马祭所说的那样布施财富的祭祀。“广掷标尺祭”是说,在这里抛掷标尺;这是指每天抛掷标尺,在标尺落地的地方设立祭坛,用可以搬动的祭柱等,从色罗斯沃蒂河沉没的地方开始逆流而上举行祭祀,这是百祭的名称。“饮力祭”是说,在这里饮力;这是指以一种辅助祭祀、用十七头牲畜来举行,有孟加拉苹果树做的祭柱、有十七种供养物的祭祀。“无闩祭”是说,这里没有门闩;这是指以九种辅助祭祀来举行、连同土地和男子一起布施,像马祭所说的那样布施财富,称为一切祭祀之终极,是马祭的变体。这里其余的意思都很明显。巴利
306. Evaṃ kāraṇaṃ vatvā saññāpentehi tato ca rājā…pe… adā dhanaṃ. Tattha saññattoti ñāpito. Rathesabhoti mahārathesu khattiyesu akampiyaṭṭhena usabhasadiso. ‘‘Assamedha’’ntiādīsu assamettha medhantīti assamedho, dvīhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa ekavīsatiyūpassa ṭhapetvā bhūmiñca purise ca avasesasabbavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Purisamettha medhantīti purisamedho, catūhi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sammamettha pāsantīti sammāpāso, divase divase sammaṃ khipitvā tassa patitokāse vediṃ katvā saṃhārimehi yūpādīhi sarassatinadiyā nimuggokāsato pabhuti paṭilomaṃ gacchantena yajitabbassa satrayāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vājamettha pivantīti vājapeyyo. Ekena pariyaññena sattarasahi pasūhi yajitabbassa beluvayūpassa sattarasakadakkhiṇassa yaññassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Natthi ettha aggaḷāti niraggaḷo, navahi pariyaññehi yajitabbassa saddhiṃ bhūmiyā ca purisehi ca assamedhe vuttavibhavadakkhiṇassa sabbamedhapariyāyanāmassa assamedhavikappassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
307-8 现在要说明前面所说的“他布施了财富给婆罗门们”这句话,就说了“牛与卧具”这两首偈颂。那位国王想:“他们长久以来吃粗劣的食物,身体很疲惫,愿他们能享用五种牛乳制品。”于是把带着公牛的整群牛都布施给了他们。同样又想:“他们长久以来睡在硬地上,穿粗厚的布衣,独自躺卧,徒步行走,住在树下等地方,身体很疲惫,愿他们能在铺着羊毛毯等上等卧具的地方享受快乐。”于是把昂贵的卧具等物布施给了他们。就这样,他还布施了其他各种金银等财富。因此世尊说:“牛与卧具、衣服……他布施了财富给婆罗门们。”巴利
307-8. Idāni yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇānamadā dhana’’nti, taṃ dassento ‘‘gāvo sayanañcā’’ti gāthādvayamāha. So hi rājā ‘‘dīgharattaṃ lūkhāhārena kilantā pañca gorase paribhuñjantū’’ti nesaṃ sapuṅgavāni goyūthāneva adāsi, tathā ‘‘dīgharattaṃ thaṇḍilasāyitāya thūlasāṭakanivāsanena ekaseyyāya pādacārena rukkhamūlādivāsena ca kilantā gonakādiatthatavarasayanādīsu sukhaṃ anubhontū’’ti nesaṃ mahagghāni sayanādīni ca adāsi. Evametaṃ nānappakārakaṃ aññañca hiraññasuvaṇṇādidhanaṃ adāsi. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘gāvo sayanañca vatthañca…pe… brāhmaṇānamadā dhana’’nti.
309-10 那些婆罗门从那位国王那里,在那些祭祀中得到财富以后,长期日复一日地这样寻求食物和衣服,并贪求、积攒各种感官享受的东西。他们被欲望淹没,心里被对味道的渴爱浸透,因为尝到了牛奶等五种牛产品的美味,就想:“牛奶这些牛身上的东西都这么好吃,那这些牛的肉肯定更好吃。”于是,对肉的渴爱就更加强烈了。接着他们想:“如果我们把牛杀了来吃,一定会被指责。不如我们在咒语里编些说法吧。”于是他们又破坏吠陀,编造出相应的咒语。那些婆罗门为了这个目的编造了假咒语之后,又来到甘蔗王那里。他们这样说:“就像水……你会有很多财富。”巴利
309-10. Evaṃ tassa rañño santikā te ca tattha…pe… puna mupāgamuṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Tassa rañño santikā te brāhmaṇā tesu yāgesu dhanaṃ labhitvā dīgharattaṃ divase divase evameva ghāsacchādanaṃ pariyesitvā nānappakārakaṃ vatthukāma sannidhiṃsamarocayuṃ. Tato tesaṃ icchāvatiṇṇānaṃ khīrādipañcagorasassādavasena rasataṇhāya otiṇṇacittānaṃ ‘‘khīrādīnipi tāva gunnaṃ sādūni, addhā imāsaṃ maṃsaṃ sādutaraṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ maṃsaṃ paṭicca bhiyyo taṇhā pavaḍḍhatha. Tato cintesuṃ – ‘‘sace mayaṃ māretvā khādissāma, gārayhā bhavissāma, yaṃnūna mante gantheyyāmā’’ti. Atha punapi vedaṃ bhinditvā tadanurūpe te tattha mante ganthetvā te brāhmaṇā tannimittaṃ kūṭamante ganthetvā okkākarājānaṃ puna upāgamiṃsu. Imamatthaṃ bhāsamānā ‘‘yathā āpo ca…pe… bahu te dhana’’nti.
这段话是什么意思呢?大王,在我们的咒语里,有这样的说法:就像水在洗手等一切事情中都能为众生所用,众生不会因此而有罪过。为什么?因为水本来就是供众生使用的,是为了帮助众生才出现的,这就是它的用意。又像这大地,在行走等一切事情中,被称为钱的金、银等财物,以及大麦、小麦等谷物,在买卖等一切事情中都能发挥作用;同样,牛也是为了在人类的一切事情中发挥作用才出现的。所以,把这些牛杀掉,在各种祭祀中献祭吧!你会得到很多财富,献祭吧!你会得到很多财物。巴利
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Amhākaṃ, mahārāja, mantesu etadāgataṃ yathā āpo hatthadhovanādisabbakiccesu pāṇīnaṃ upayogaṃ gacchati, natthi tesaṃ tatonidānaṃ pāpaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā parikkhāro so hi pāṇinaṃ, upakaraṇatthāya uppannoti adhippāyo. Yathā cāyaṃ mahāpathavī gamanaṭṭhānādisabbakiccesu kahāpaṇasaṅkhātaṃ hiraññaṃ suvaṇṇarajatādibhedaṃ dhanaṃ, yavagodhūmādibhedaṃ dhāniyañca, saṃvohārādisabbakiccesu upayogaṃ gacchati, evaṃ gāvo manussānaṃ sabbakiccesu upayogagamanatthāya uppannā. Tasmā etā hanitvā nānappakārake yāge yajassu bahu te vittaṃ, yajassu bahu te dhananti.
311-12 就这样,和前面所说的一样,那位国王……(中略)……屠杀。而在那之前,他不曾伤害任何众生……(中略)……屠杀。据说那时,婆罗门们把牛群填满祭坑,绑住吉祥公牛,带到国王面前,说道:“大王,请举行牛祭吧!这样,您通往梵天界的道路就会变得清净。”国王在吉时执剑,把公牛连同数十万头牛一并宰杀。婆罗门们在祭坑里切割牛肉来吃,披着黄、白、红三色毯子,进行屠杀。据说从那时起,牛只要看见身披布料的人就会惊恐。因此世尊说:“没有……(中略)……屠杀。”巴利
311-12. Evaṃ purimanayeneva tato ca rājā…pe… aghātayi, yaṃ tato pubbe kañci sattaṃ na pādā…pe… ghātayi. Tadā kira brāhmaṇā yaññāvāṭaṃ gāvīnaṃ pūretvā maṅgalausabhaṃ bandhitvā rañño mūlaṃ netvā ‘‘mahārāja, gomedhayaññaṃ yajassu, evaṃ te brahmalokassa maggo visuddho bhavissatī’’ti āhaṃsu. Rājā katamaṅgalakicco khaggaṃ gahetvā puṅgavena saha anekasatasahassā gāvo māresi. Brāhmaṇā yaññāvāṭe maṃsāni chinditvā khādiṃsu, pītakodātarattakambale ca pārupitvā māresuṃ. Tadupādāya kira gāvo pārute disvā ubbijjanti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘na pādā…pe… ghātayī’’ti.
313 「于是诸天」这句话的意思是:当那位国王开始杀牛的时候,紧接着,四大王天等诸天、在婆罗门中被称作「父亲」的梵天们、帝释天王,以及住在山脚、被称为檀那婆和夜叉的阿修罗与罗刹们,看到那个屠牛者之后,就发出声音说:「非法!非法!」又喊道:「可耻啊,人们!可耻啊,人们!」这样大声叫喊。从大地起,这个声音在一刹那间一直传到了梵天界,整个世界充满了同一种呵责。这是什么原因呢?就是说「刀落在牛身上」这句话,意思是:因为刀落在了牛身上。巴利
313.Tato devāti evaṃ tasmiṃ rājini gāviyo ghātetumāraddhe atha tadanantarameva taṃ goghātakaṃ disvā ete cātumahārājikādayo devā ca, pitaroti brāhmaṇesu laddhavohārā brahmāno ca, sakko devānamindo ca, pabbatapādanivāsino dānavayakkhasaññitā asurarakkhasā ca ‘‘adhammo adhammo’’ti evaṃ vācaṃ nicchārentā ‘‘dhi manussā, dhi manussā’’ti ca vadantā pakkanduṃ. Evaṃ bhūmito pabhuti so saddo muhuttena yāva brahmalokā agamāsi, ekadhikkāraparipuṇṇo loko ahosi. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Yaṃ satthaṃ nipatī gave, yasmā gāvimhi satthaṃ nipatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
314 314. 不只是诸天等人在呼喊,世间还出现了另一种灾祸——据说,从前只有三种病:欲求、饥饿和衰老,也就是种种渴求的贪欲、饥饿以及成熟带来的衰老。但由于开始宰杀牲畜,它们变成了九十八种,也就是说,以眼病等种种分类来看,达到了九十八种。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
314. Na kevalañca devādayo pakkanduṃ, ayamaññopi loke anattho udapādi – ye hi te tayo rogā pure āsuṃ, icchā anasanaṃ jarā, kiñci kiñcideva patthanataṇhā ca khudā ca paripākajarā cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pasūnañca samārambhā, aṭṭhānavutimāgamuṃ, cakkhurogādinā bhedena aṭṭhanavutibhāvaṃ pāpuṇiṃsūti attho.
315 315. 现在,世尊为了谴责那种宰杀牲畜的行为,说道:“这是非法。”这句话的意思是:这种被称为宰杀牲畜的行为,属于身罚等三种惩罚中的一种。因为它背离了法,所以非法就如此出现、发生了。又因为它从那时起一直持续不断,所以称为“古老的”。自从它出现以来,由于不伤害任何众生、连脚等都不去侵害,那些无害的牛就被宰杀了。那些宰杀者、祭祀者、举行祭祀的人,他们的法就毁坏、退失、减损,他们知道。巴利
315. Idāni bhagavā taṃ pasusamārambhaṃ nindanto āha ‘‘eso adhammo’’ti. Tassattho eso pasusamārambhasaṅkhāto kāyadaṇḍādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ daṇḍānaṃ aññataradaṇḍabhūto dhammato apetattā adhammo okkanto ahu, pavatto āsi, so ca kho tato pabhuti pavattattā purāṇo, yassa okkamanato pabhuti kenaci pādādinā ahiṃsanato adūsikāyo gāvo haññanti. Yā ghātentā dhammā dhaṃsanti cavanti parihāyanti yājakā yaññayājino janāti.
316 这样,这“随法”就是指这种低劣的法、卑下的法,也就是所说的非法。或者,因为在这种祭祀中也有少许布施的法,所以就针对那一点说“随法”。所谓“古老的”,是因为它从很久以前就一直存在,所以叫古老。而应当知道,“被智者所呵责”是因为它受到智者们的呵责。又因为它被智者所呵责,所以人们看到这样的祭祀者时,就会呵责他。怎么呵责呢?他们说:“阿浮陀是婆罗门搞出来的,他们宰牛吃牛肉。”诸如此类的话。这就是这里所说的传闻。巴利
316.Evameso aṇudhammoti evaṃ eso lāmakadhammo hīnadhammo, adhammoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā vā ettha dānadhammopi appako atthi , tasmā taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aṇudhammo’’ti. Porāṇoti tāva cirakālato pabhuti pavattattā porāṇo. Viññūhi pana garahitattā viññūgarahitoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca viññugarahito, tasmā yattha edisakaṃ passati, yājakaṃ garahatī jano. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Abbudaṃ brāhmaṇehi uppāditaṃ, gāvo vadhitvā maṃsaṃ khādantī’’ti evamādīni vatvāti ayamettha anussavo.
317 古代的婆罗门法就这样坏灭了。也有写成“颠倒”的版本,意思是颠倒过来、变成了另一种样子。原本和睦相处的首陀罗和吠舍,如今分裂了。刹帝利们也彼此分裂,分成许多派别。妻子轻视丈夫:妻子因为掌管家中事务,又仗着自己的权势,或者依靠儿子的力量等,就变得骄慢,于是轻视、瞧不起丈夫,不再恭敬地侍奉他。巴利
317.Evaṃ dhamme viyāpanneti evaṃ porāṇe brāhmaṇadhamme naṭṭhe. ‘‘Viyāvatte’’tipi pāṭho, viparivattitvā aññathā bhūteti attho. Vibhinnā suddavessikāti pubbe samaggā viharantā suddā ca vessā ca te vibhinnā. Puthū vibhinnā khattiyāti khattiyāpi bahū aññamaññaṃ bhinnā. Patiṃ bhariyāvamaññathāti bhariyā ca gharāvāsatthaṃ issariyabale ṭhapitā puttabalādīhi upetā hutvā patiṃ avamaññatha, paribhavi avamaññi na sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhāsi.
318 318. 就这样,刹帝利与婆罗门等互相分裂……最终都随逐于欲。刹帝利、婆罗门,以及其他吠舍和首陀罗,只要不互相混杂,就因各自守护自己的种姓而被称为种姓所护。但他们全都抛弃了那套出身论,把我是刹帝利、我是婆罗门这些想法通通丢掉,转而随逐于被称为五欲的种种欲乐,深深陷了进去。意思是说,为了欲乐,他们什么不该做的事都干得出来。巴利
318. Evaṃ aññamaññaṃ vibhinnā samānā khattiyā brahmabandhū ca…pe… kāmānaṃ vasamanvagunti. Khattiyā ca brāhmaṇā ca ye caññe vessasuddā yathā saṅkaraṃ nāpajjanti, evaṃ attano attano gottena rakkhitattā gottarakkhitā. Te sabbepi taṃ jātivādaṃ niraṃkatvā, ‘‘ahaṃ khattiyo, ahaṃ brāhmaṇo’’ti etaṃ sabbampi nāsetvā pañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhātānaṃ kāmānaṃ vasaṃ anvaguṃ āsattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, kāmahetu na kiñci akattabbaṃ nākaṃsūti vuttaṃ hoti.
在这里,世尊先用“过去的仙人们”等九首偈颂讲了古代婆罗门的德行;再用“他们当中最上的”这首偈颂说明他们与梵天同等;用“随学他的行为”这首偈颂说明他们与天神同等;用“米、床卧”等四首偈颂说明他们的界限;用“他们产生了颠倒”等十七首偈颂说明界限已被破坏,并说明他们越轨时天神等如何惊呼,然后结束了这次说法。不过,婆罗门旃陀罗在这里并没有被提到。为什么?因为它不是法败坏的原因。因为婆罗门法成就时,与梵天同等、与天神同等、界限,这些才是原因;而法败坏时,界限被破坏才是原因。至于《多纳经》(增支部5.192)里所说的那种婆罗门旃陀罗,也不是婆罗门法败坏的原因。为什么?因为它是在法已经败坏之后才出现的。所以,世尊没有显示它,就结束了说法。不过到了今天,就连那样的婆罗门旃陀罗也很难遇到了。婆罗门的法就这样毁灭了。正因如此,多纳婆罗门才说:“既然如此,乔达摩先生,我们连婆罗门旃陀罗都够不着啊。”这里其余的内容,都按照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Evamettha bhagavā ‘‘isayo pubbakā’’tiādīhi navahi gāthāhi porāṇānaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitvā ‘‘yo nesaṃ paramo’’ti gāthāya brahmasamaṃ, ‘‘tassa vattamanusikkhantā’’ti gāthāya devasamaṃ, ‘‘taṇḍulaṃ sayana’’ntiādikāhi catūhi gāthāhi mariyādaṃ, ‘‘tesaṃ āsi vipallāso’’tiādīhi sattarasahi gāthāhi sambhinnamariyādaṃ, tassa vippaṭipattiyā devādīnaṃ pakkandanādidīpanatthañca dassetvā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Brāhmaṇacaṇḍālo pana idha avuttoyeva. Kasmā? Yasmā vipattiyā akāraṇaṃ. Brāhmaṇadhammasampattiyā hi brahmasamadevasamamariyādā kāraṇaṃ honti, vipattiyā sambhinnamariyādo. Ayaṃ pana doṇasutte (a. ni. 5.192) vuttappakāro brāhmaṇacaṇḍālo brāhmaṇadhammavipattiyāpi akāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Vipanne dhamme uppannattā. Tasmā taṃ adassetvāva desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Etarahi pana sopi brāhmaṇacaṇḍālo dullabho. Evamayaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ dhammo vinaṭṭho. Tenevāha doṇo brāhmaṇo – ‘‘evaṃ sante mayaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇacaṇḍālampi na pūremā’’ti. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
第八 法经(船经)注释巴利
8. Dhammasutta-(nāvāsutta)-vaṇṇanā
319 319. 所谓“Yasmā hi dhammaṃ”云云,就是《法经》,也称为《船经》。它的起因是什么?这部经是针对尊者舍利弗长老而说的。这里只作简要说明,详细因缘则要从两位上首弟子的诞生说起。事情是这样的:据说在佛陀尚未出世时,两位上首弟子用一阿僧祇劫又十万劫圆满波罗蜜,投生到天界。第一位从天界死后,投生在王舍城附近一个叫优波提舍村的婆罗门富村。那里有一位拥有五百六十俱胝财富的村主婆罗门,他的妻子名叫色舍利,这位未来的上首弟子就在她腹中结生。第二位投生在离那里不远的拘律陀村,那也是婆罗门的富村。那里同样有一位拥有如此财富的村主婆罗门,他的妻子名叫目犍连尼,他也在同一天于她腹中结生。就这样,他们在同一天结生,同一天出生。因为一个出生在优波提舍村,就取名优波提舍;一个出生在拘律陀村,就取名拘律陀。巴利
319.Yasmāhi dhammanti dhammasuttaṃ, ‘‘nāvāsutta’’ntipi vuccati. Kā uppatti? Idaṃ suttaṃ āyasmantaṃ sāriputtattheraṃ ārabbha vuttaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana dvinnaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ uppattito pabhuti veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ – anuppanne kira bhagavati dve aggasāvakā ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā devaloke nibbattā. Tesaṃ paṭhamo cavitvā rājagahassa avidūre upatissagāmo nāma brāhmaṇānaṃ bhogagāmo atthi, tattha saṭṭhiadhikapañcakoṭisatadhanavibhavassa gāmasāmino brāhmaṇassa rūpasārī nāma brāhmaṇī, tassā kucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ aggahesi. Dutiyo tassevāvidūre kolitagāmo nāma brāhmaṇānaṃ bhogagāmo atthi. Tattha tathārūpavibhavasseva gāmasāmino brāhmaṇassa moggallānī nāma brāhmaṇī, tassā kucchiyaṃ taṃ divasameva paṭisandhiṃ aggahesi. Evaṃ tesaṃ ekadivasameva paṭisandhiggahaṇañca gabbhavuṭṭhānañca ahosi. Ekadivaseyeva ca nesaṃ ekassa upatissagāme jātattā upatisso, ekassa kolitagāme jātattā kolitoti nāmamakaṃsu.
他们从小一起在泥地里玩耍,长大后也一直是好朋友,各自都有五百名青年随从。他们去园林或河边时,总是带着自己的随从一起去。一个人带着五百顶金轿,另一个人带着五百辆骏马车。那时候,王舍城经常举办一种叫“山头集会”的节庆。傍晚时分,在城中央,整个鸯伽与摩揭陀的居民中有名望的刹帝利青年等人都会聚在一起,坐在摆好的床座等座位上观看节庆的盛况。于是,这两位朋友也带着随从去那里,坐在安排好的座位上。接着,优波提舍观看节庆盛况,看到大众聚集,心想:“这么多人,还不到一百岁就会死去。”死亡仿佛来到并停在他额头上;拘律陀也同样如此。尽管有各种舞者在跳舞,他们连看一眼的兴趣都提不起来,反而生起了强烈的悚惧。巴利
Te sahapaṃsuṃ kīḷantā sahāyakā anupubbena vuḍḍhiṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, ekamekassa ca pañcapañcamāṇavakasatāni parivārā ahesuṃ. Te uyyānaṃ vā nadītitthaṃ vā gacchantā saparivārāyeva gacchanti. Eko pañcahi suvaṇṇasivikāsatehi, dutiyo pañcahi ājaññarathasatehi. Tadā ca rājagahe kālānukālaṃ giraggasamajjo nāma hoti. Sāyanhasamaye nagaravemajjhe yattha sakalaaṅgamagadhavāsino abhiññātā khattiyakumārādayo sannipatitvā supaññattesu mañcapīṭhādīsu nisinnā samajjavibhūtiṃ passanti. Atha te sahāyakā tena parivārena saddhiṃ tattha gantvā paññattāsanesu nisīdiṃsu. Tato upatisso samajjavibhūtiṃ passanto mahājanakāyaṃ sannipatitaṃ disvā ‘‘ettako janakāyo vassasataṃ appatvāva marissatī’’ti cintesi. Tassa maraṇaṃ āgantvā nalāṭante patiṭṭhitaṃ viya ahosi, tathā kolitassa. Tesaṃ anekappakāresu naṭesu naccantesu dassanamattepi cittaṃ na nami, aññadatthu saṃvegoyeva udapādi.
那时,节庆结束、人群散去,朋友们也带着各自的随从离开了。拘律陀问优波提舍:“朋友,你看那些戏剧之类的表演,难道连一点欢喜都没有吗?”优波提舍就把自己的情形告诉了他,又同样反问了他。拘律陀也把自己的情形告诉了他,然后说:“朋友,来吧,我们出家去寻求不死吧。”优波提舍答应道:“好的,朋友。”于是,两人舍弃了那些荣华富贵,又回到了王舍城。当时,王舍城里住着一位名叫散若耶的游方者。他们带着五百名青年,在散若耶门下出家,没过多久就学通了三吠陀以及游方者的一切教义。他们审视这些教义的开头、中间和结尾,却看不到结尾,便问老师:“这些教义的开头和中间还能看到,但结尾却看不到。也就是说,通过这些教义能达成某种结果,但再往上就没有可达成的了。”老师也说:“我也看不到它们的结尾。”他们就说:“那我们就自己去寻找这些教义的结尾吧。”老师说:“你们随意去找吧。”于是,他们得到老师的许可,四处游历,寻求不死,在赡部洲出了名。刹帝利、智者等人被他们提问时,都无法进一步作答。只要一提起“优波提舍、拘律陀”,没有人会说“这些人是谁?我们不知道”。他们就是这样声名远扬。巴利
Atha vuṭṭhite samajje pakkantāya parisāya sakaparivārena pakkantesu tesu sahāyesu kolito upatissaṃ pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ, samma, nāṭakādidassanena tava pamodanamattampi nāhosī’’ti? So tassa taṃ pavattiṃ ārocetvā tampi tatheva paṭipucchi. Sopi tassa attano pavattiṃ ārocetvā ‘‘ehi, samma, pabbajitvā amataṃ gavesāmā’’ti āha. ‘‘Sādhu sammā’’ti upatisso taṃ sampaṭicchi. Tato dvepi janā taṃ sampattiṃ chaḍḍetvā punadeva rājagahamanuppattā. Tena ca samayena rājagahe sañcayo nāma paribbājako paṭivasati. Te tassa santike pañcahi māṇavakasatehi saddhiṃ pabbajitvā katipāheneva tayo vede sabbañca paribbājakasamayaṃ uggahesuṃ. Te tesaṃ satthānaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ upaparikkhantā pariyosānaṃ adisvā ācariyaṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘imesaṃ satthānaṃ ādimajjhaṃ dissati, pariyosānaṃ pana na dissati ‘idaṃ nāma imehi satthehi pāpuṇeyyāti, yato uttari pāpuṇitabbaṃ natthī’’’ti. Sopi āha – ‘‘ahampi tesaṃ tathāvidhaṃ pariyosānaṃ na passāmī’’ti. Te āhaṃsu – ‘‘tena hi mayaṃ imesaṃ pariyosānaṃ gavesāmā’’ti. Te ācariyo ‘‘yathāsukhaṃ gavesathā’’ti āha. Evaṃ te tena anuññātā amataṃ gavesamānā āhiṇḍantā jambudīpe pākaṭā ahesuṃ. Tehi khattiyapaṇḍitādayo pañhaṃ puṭṭhā uttaruttariṃ na sampāyanti. ‘‘Upatisso kolito’’ti vutte pana ‘‘ke ete, na kho mayaṃ jānāmā’’ti bhaṇantā natthi, evaṃ vissutā ahesuṃ.
当他们这样寻找不死的时候,我们的世尊出现在世间,转动了殊胜的法轮,一路游行,渐渐来到王舍城。那些游方者走遍了整个赡部洲,别说证得不死,就连对最终问题的解答也一点都得不到,于是又回到了王舍城。那时,具寿阿说示在上午时分穿好下衣,拿着衣钵……直到他们出家,这整个过程应当依照《大品·出家犍度》中所说的方式详细了知。巴利
Evaṃ tesu amatapariyesanaṃ caramānesu amhākaṃ bhagavā loke uppajjitvā pavattitavaradhammacakko anupubbena rājagahamanuppatto. Te ca paribbājakā sakalajambudīpaṃ caritvā tiṭṭhatu amataṃ, antamaso pariyosānapañhavissajjanamattampi alabhantā punadeva rājagahaṃ agamaṃsu. Atha kho āyasmā assaji pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvāti yāva tesaṃ pabbajjā, tāva sabbaṃ pabbajjākkhandhake (mahāva. 60) āgatanayeneva vitthārato daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这两位朋友出家之后,具寿舍利弗在半个月内就证得了声闻波罗蜜智。当他与阿说示长老同住在一座精舍时,他去礼拜世尊之后,紧接着就去礼拜长老,心里怀着恭敬想:“这位具寿是我从前的老师,我就是依靠他,才了解了世尊的教法。”当他没有和阿说示长老同住在一座精舍时,他就朝着长老所住的方向看去,五体投地地礼拜,合掌致敬。有些比丘看到后,就议论起来:“舍利弗已经是上首弟子了,还朝着方向礼拜,看来他到现在都还没有断除婆罗门的见解。”那时,世尊用天耳界听到了他们的交谈,就坐在铺设好的庄严佛座上,让他们看到自己,然后对比丘们说:“比丘们,你们现在聚在一起谈论什么?”他们把这件事告诉了世尊。于是世尊说:“比丘们,舍利弗不是在朝方向礼拜。他是对那位让他了解教法的老师,在礼拜、恭敬、尊重。比丘们,舍利弗是恭敬老师的人。”说完之后,为了给聚集在那里的人说法,世尊说了这部经。巴利
Evaṃ pabbajitesu tesu dvīsu sahāyakesu āyasmā sāriputto aḍḍhamāsena sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ sacchākāsi. So yadā assajittherena saddhiṃ ekavihāre vasati, tadā bhagavato upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā anantaraṃ therassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati ‘‘pubbācariyo me ayamāyasmā, etamahaṃ nissāya bhagavato sāsanaṃ aññāsi’’nti gāravena. Yadā pana assajittherena saddhiṃ ekavihāre na vasati, tadā yassaṃ disāyaṃ thero vasati, taṃ disaṃ oloketvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā añjaliṃ paggayha namassati. Taṃ disvā keci bhikkhū kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ – ‘‘sāriputto aggasāvako hutvā disaṃ namassati, ajjāpi maññe brāhmaṇadiṭṭhi appahīnā’’ti. Atha bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā taṃ kathāsallāpaṃ sutvā paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinnaṃyeva attānaṃ dassento bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘kāya nuttha, bhikkhave, etarahi kathāya sannisinnā’’ti ? Te taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhiṃsu. Tato bhagavā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, sāriputto disaṃ namassati, yaṃ nissāya sāsanaṃ aññāsi, taṃ attano ācariyaṃ vandati namassati sammāneti, ācariyapūjako, bhikkhave, sāriputto’’ti vatvā tattha sannipatitānaṃ dhammadesanatthaṃ imaṃ suttamabhāsi.
在这里,从哪个人那里“一个人若了知法”这句话的意思是:一个人从哪个人——补特伽罗——了解、知道、通达分为三藏的教理法,或者听闻教理之后应当证得的、分为九种出世间的证悟法。也有“yassa”这个读法,意思一样。“如同诸天敬奉帝释”是说:就像在两个天界里,诸天敬奉帝释天王那样,这个人也会适时起身,为他做脱鞋等一切应尽的义务,去敬奉他、尊重他、礼敬他。这是什么原因呢?那位老师受到这样的敬奉,对那位弟子生起清净欢喜之心,凭借教理与证悟而成为多闻者,仅通过说法开显教理法,以及听法之后依教奉行而应当证得的证悟法;或者通过说法开显教理法,通过譬喻开显自己已经证得的证悟法。巴利
Tattha yasmā hi dhammaṃ puriso vijaññāti yato puggalā piṭakattayappabhedaṃ pariyattidhammaṃ vā, pariyattiṃ sutvā adhigantabbaṃ navalokuttarappabhedaṃ paṭivedhadhammaṃ vā puriso vijaññā jāneyya vedeyya. ‘‘Yassā’’tipi pāṭho, so evattho. Indaṃva naṃ devatā pūjayeyyāti yathā sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ dvīsu devalokesu devatā pūjenti, evaṃ so puggalo taṃ puggalaṃ kālasseva vuṭṭhāya upāhanaomuñcanādiṃ sabbaṃ vattapaṭivattaṃ karonto pūjeyya sakkareyya garukareyya. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? So pūjito…pe… pātukaroti dhammaṃ, so ācariyo evaṃ pūjito tasmiṃ antevāsimhi pasannacitto pariyattipaṭivedhavasena bahussuto desanāvaseneva pariyattidhammañca, desanaṃ sutvā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattiyā adhigantabbaṃ paṭivedhadhammañca pātukaroti deseti, desanāya vā pariyattidhammaṃ, upamāvasena attanā adhigatapaṭivedhadhammaṃ pātukaroti.
320 智者听闻并牢记之后,成为有智慧的人:对于怀有清净信心的老师所开示的法,因为具备听闻之后能够忆持思惟的能力,所以成为智者。随法修行法:指修习随顺出世间法的观,因为它是出世间法的随顺分。成为有智、明了、敏锐的人:由于证得了称为“有智”的智慧,所以是有智者;由于能够明了之后也让别人清楚知道,所以是明了者;由于能通达最微妙的究竟义,所以是敏锐者。若有人不放逸地亲近这样的人:若有人以不放逸、恭敬的态度,去亲近前面所说的那种多闻者。巴利
320.Tadaṭṭhikatvāna nisamma dhīroti evaṃ pasannena ācariyena pātukataṃ dhammaṃ aṭṭhikatvāna suṇitvā upadhāraṇasamatthatāya dhīro puriso. Dhammānudhammaṃ paṭipajjamānoti lokuttaradhammassa anulomattā anudhammabhūtaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno. Viññū vibhāvī nipuṇo ca hotīti viññutāsaṅkhātāya paññāya adhigamena viññū, vibhāvetvā paresampi pākaṭaṃ katvā ñāpanasamatthatāya vibhāvī, paramasukhumatthapaṭivedhatāya nipuṇo ca hoti. Yo tādisaṃ bhajati appamattoti yo tādisaṃ pubbe vuttappakāraṃ bahussutaṃ appamatto tappasādanaparo hutvā bhajati.
321 321. 这样赞叹亲近智者师之后,现在为了呵责亲近愚者师,说出“khuddañca bālaṃ”这首偈颂。其中,“khudda”(微小)指具备微小的身业等,“bāla”(愚痴)是因为没有智慧的缘故。“anāgatattha”(未达义利)指尚未证得教理与证悟之利益的人。“usūyaka”(嫉妒)指心怀嫉妒,不能忍受弟子的成长。其余的文辞在这里从字面上就能明白。不过从意旨来说:如果有一位老师获得很多衣服等利养,却不能把衣服等物给予弟子,在法施方面甚至连“无常、苦、无我”这样的话也说不出来——由于他具足这些微小等性质,亲近这样一位微小、愚痴、未达义利、心怀嫉妒的老师,就会像“用草尖挑腐鱼”所说的那样,自己也会变成愚痴的人。因此,在这里的教法中,对于教理法和证悟法,哪怕一丁点都没有阐明、没有了解,对法还有疑惑,没有超越疑惑就死去——应当这样理解这里的含义。巴利
321. Evaṃ paṇḍitācariyasevanaṃ pasaṃsitvā idāni bālācariyasevanaṃ nindanto ‘‘khuddañca bāla’’nti imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha khuddanti khuddena kāyakammādinā samannāgataṃ, paññābhāvato bālaṃ. Anāgatatthanti anadhigatapariyattipaṭivedhatthaṃ. Usūyakanti issāmanakatāya antevāsikassa vuḍḍhiṃ asahamānaṃ. Sesamettha pākaṭameva padato. Adhippāyato pana yo bahucīvarādilābhī ācariyo antevāsikānaṃ cīvarādīni na sakkoti dātuṃ, dhammadāne pana aniccadukkhānattavacanamattampi na sakkoti. Etehi khuddatādidhammehi samannāgatattā taṃ khuddaṃ bālaṃ anāgatatthaṃ usūyakaṃ ācariyaṃ upasevamāno ‘‘pūtimacchaṃ kusaggenā’’ti (itivu. 76; jā. 1.15.183) vuttanayena sayampi bālo hoti. Tasmā idha sāsane kiñci appamattakampi pariyattidhammaṃ paṭivedhadhammaṃ vā avibhāvayitvā ca avijānitvā ca yassa dhammesu kaṅkhā, taṃ ataritvā maraṇaṃ upetīti evamassa attho veditabbo.
322-3 现在,为了把同一个意思讲清楚,说了“yathā naro”(譬如有人)这两首偈颂。其中,“āpaga”就是河流。“mahodaka”就是水很多。“salila”就是从这边那边流过来的水,意思是遍布展开。也有写成“sarita”的读法,意思一样。“sīghasota”就是带着漂流物急速奔流,意思是水流迅猛。“Kiṃ so”在这里,因为前面用“so vuyhamāno”(他被冲走)已经指明了那个人,所以“so”只是个语气词。说的是:“他怎么能呢?”也就是:“我将不复存在,我将彻底毁灭。”“dhamma”就是前面说过的两种法。“anisāmayattha”就是没有审察意义。其余部分从字面上看就很清楚。巴利
322-3. Idāni tassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘yathā naro’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha āpaganti nadiṃ. Mahodakanti bahuudakaṃ. Salilanti ito cito ca gataṃ, vitthiṇṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sarita’’ntipi pāṭho, so evattho. Sīghasotanti hārahārikaṃ, vegavatinti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ soti ettha ‘‘so vuyhamāno’’ti iminā ca sokārena tassa narassa niddiṭṭhattā nipātamatto sokāro. Kiṃ sūti vuttaṃ hoti yathā ‘‘na bhavissāmi nāma so, vinassissāmi nāma so’’ti. Dhammanti pubbe vuttaṃ duvidhameva. Anisāmayatthanti anisāmetvā atthaṃ. Sesamettha pākaṭameva padato.
从意旨上说,就好比有一个人,走进前面说的那种河流,被河水冲走,只能顺着水流漂,他自己都只能跟着水走,又怎么能把其他想渡河的人带到对岸呢?也有写成“sakkati”的版本。同样,对这两种法,他既没有用自己的智慧去辨明,也没有到多闻的人跟前去请教其中的含义——因为自己没有辨明,所以不懂;因为没有请教,所以疑惑没有消除——这样的人,怎么能让别人信解、让别人明白呢?这里的意思应当这样理解。另外,这里还应当忆念《中部》里的经文:“准陀啊,自己陷在泥沼里的人……”等等。巴利
Adhippāyato pana yathā yo kocideva naro vuttappakāraṃ nadiṃ otaritvā tāya nadiyā vuyhamāno anusotagāmī sotameva anugacchanto pare pāratthike kiṃ sakkhati pāraṃ netuṃ. ‘‘Sakkatī’’tipi pāṭho. Tatheva duvidhampi dhammaṃ attano paññāya avibhāvayitvā bahussutānañca santike atthaṃ anisāmetvā sayaṃ avibhāvitattā ajānanto anisāmitattā ca avitiṇṇakaṅkho pare kiṃ sakkhati nijjhāpetuṃ pekkhāpetunti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘So vata, cunda, attanā palipapalipanno’’tiādikañcettha (ma. ni. 1.87) suttapadaṃ anussaritabbaṃ.
324-5 像这样,先用譬喻说明:亲近愚者的人没有能力让别人明白;接着,为了说明“若有人不放逸地亲近这样的人”所说的智者有能力让别人明白,就说了“犹如船”这两首偈颂。其中,“phiyena”是桨叶;“rittena”是竹竿;“tattha”是在那艘船上;“tatrūpayaññū”是因为懂得那艘船装卸等方法、能引导航路,所以是懂得方法的人;因为所学已经掌握、技艺纯熟,所以是“kusalo”(善巧);因为有能力处理已经发生的灾患,所以是“mutīmā”(有慧);“vedagū”是指以四种道智而到达的人;“bhāvitatta”是指通过那样的修道而修好了心的人;“bahussuta”如前所说;“avedhadhamma”是指其本性不会被八种世间法动摇;“sotāvadhānūpanisūpapanna”是指具备倾听和作为道果近缘的条件。其余部分词义浅显。意旨的贯通也可以按前面的方式理解,所以不再展开。巴利
324-5. Evaṃ bālasevanāya bālassa paraṃ nijjhāpetuṃ asamatthatāya pākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ upamaṃ vatvā idāni ‘‘yo tādisaṃ bhajati appamatto’’ti ettha vuttassa paṇḍitassa pare nijjhāpetuṃ samatthatāya pākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘yathāpi nāva’’nti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha phiyenāti dabbipadarena. Rittenāti veḷudaṇḍena. Tatthāti tassaṃ nāvāyaṃ. Tatrūpayaññūti tassā nāvāya āharaṇapaṭiharaṇādiupāyajānanena maggapaṭipādanena upāyaññū. Sikkhitasikkhatāya sukusalahatthatāya ca kusalo. Uppannupaddavapaṭikārasamatthatāya mutīmā. Vedagūti vedasaṅkhātehi catūhi maggañāṇehi gato. Bhāvitattoti tāyeva maggabhāvanāya bhāvitacitto. Bahussutoti pubbe vuttanayeneva. Avedhadhammoti aṭṭhahi lokadhammehi akampaniyasabhāvo. Sotāvadhānūpanisūpapanneti sotaodahanena ca maggaphalānaṃ upanissayena ca upapanne. Sesaṃ uttānapadatthameva. Adhippāyayojanāpi sakkā purimanayeneva jānitunti na vitthāritā.
326 世尊先用譬喻说明智者有能力让别人信服,接着为了劝人亲近这样的智者,说出这首结尾偈颂:“tasmā have”(因此确实)。这里的意思简单说是:因为根基成熟的人通过亲近智者能得到殊胜的进步,所以确实应当亲近善士。应当亲近什么样的善士呢?既有智慧又多闻的人。因为智慧成就,所以是有智慧的人;因为前面说的那两种经典,所以是多闻的人。亲近这样的人,了解他所说的法义,了解之后按照教导去实践,通过这样的修行而通达法、证悟法,他就能获得、证得、达到道、果、涅槃这些出世间之乐。世尊以阿罗汉果为顶点,结束了这次说法。巴利
326. Evaṃ paṇḍitassa pare nijjhāpetuṃ samatthabhāvapākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ upamaṃ vatvā tassā paṇḍitasevanāya niyojento ‘‘tasmā have’’ti imaṃ avasānagāthamāha. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yasmā upanissayasampannā paṇḍitasevanena visesaṃ pāpuṇanti, tasmā have sappurisaṃ bhajetha. Kīdisaṃ sappurisaṃ bhajetha? Medhāvinañceva bahussutañca, paññāsampattiyā ca medhāvinaṃ vuttappakārasutadvayena ca bahussutaṃ. Tādisañhi bhajamāno tena bhāsitassa dhammassa aññāya atthaṃ evaṃ ñatvā ca yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāno tāya paṭipattiyā paṭivedhavasena viññātadhammo so maggaphalanibbānappabhedaṃ lokuttarasukhaṃ labhetha adhigaccheyya pāpuṇeyyāti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ samāpesīti.
第九 何戒经解说巴利
9. Kiṃsīlasuttavaṇṇanā
327 327.《何戒经》即《何戒经》。它的缘起是什么?尊者舍利弗有一位在家时的朋友,是长老父亲梵伽那婆罗门那位朋友的婆罗门之子。他舍弃了五百六十俱胝的财富,在尊者舍利弗长老面前出家,学完了全部佛语。长老多次教导他,给了他修行的法门,他却没能因此获得殊胜的证悟。于是长老知道“此人是应由佛陀调教的”,便带他前往世尊那里,针对那位比丘,不指定具体人地问道:“具何戒?”于是世尊接着为他说了以下内容。其中,“具何戒”是指具足怎样的禁戒?或者具有怎样的本性?“具何行”是指具备怎样的行为举止?“增长哪些业”是指增长哪些身业等等?“人正确地安立”是指乐于教法的人,应当正确地安立于教法中。“还证得最上义”是说还应当证得一切之中最上的阿罗汉果——这就是所说的意思。巴利
327.Kiṃsīloti kiṃsīlasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Āyasmato sāriputtassa gihisahāyako eko therasseva pituno vaṅgantabrāhmaṇassa sahāyassa brāhmaṇassa putto saṭṭhikoṭiadhikaṃ pañcasatakoṭidhanaṃ pariccajitvā āyasmato sāriputtattherassa santike pabbajitvā sabbaṃ buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇi. Tassa thero bahuso ovaditvā kammaṭṭhānamadāsi, so tena visesaṃ nādhigacchati. Tato thero ‘‘buddhaveneyyo eso’’ti ñatvā taṃ ādāya bhagavato santikaṃ gantvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ ārabbha puggalaṃ aniyametvā ‘‘kiṃsīlo’’ti pucchi. Athassa bhagavā tato paraṃ abhāsi. Tattha kiṃsīloti kīdisena vārittasīlena samannāgato, kīdisapakatiko vā. Kiṃsamācāroti kīdisena cārittena yutto. Kāni kammānibrūhayanti kāni kāyakammādīni vaḍḍhento. Naro sammā niviṭṭhassāti abhirato naro sāsane sammā patiṭṭhito bhaveyya. Uttamatthañca pāpuṇeti sabbatthānaṃ uttamaṃ arahattañca pāpuṇeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
328 于是世尊这样作意观察:“舍利弗受具足戒才半个月,就已经达到了声闻的究竟,为什么还问一个像初学者、凡夫才会问的问题呢?”他了解到这是为了那位同住比丘而问的,就不把提问所涉及的行持戒分开来解释,而是针对那位比丘的根性来说法,于是说出了“尊敬长者”等偈颂。巴利
328. Tato bhagavā ‘‘sāriputto aḍḍhamāsūpasampanno sāvakapāramippatto, kasmā ādikammikaputhujjanapañhaṃ pucchatī’’ti āvajjento ‘‘saddhivihārikaṃ ārabbhā’’ti ñatvā pucchāya vuttaṃ cārittasīlaṃ avibhajitvāva tassa sappāyavasena dhammaṃ desento ‘‘vuḍḍhāpacāyī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,有四种“长老”:智慧长老、功德长老、出身长老、年龄长老。即使年纪还轻,只要博学多闻,在那些少闻的年长比丘中间,因为广博的智慧和学识而被称为智慧长老。因为年长的比丘们也会到他跟前学习佛语,并期待他给予教诫、裁决和答疑。同样,一个年轻比丘如果已经证得殊胜成就,就叫做功德长老。因为年长的比丘们依靠他的教导,也能把握内观的精髓,证得阿拉汉果。同样,即使年纪轻,只要是已灌顶的刹帝利王或婆罗门,因为值得其余人礼敬,就叫做出身长老。而一切最先出生的,就叫做年龄长老。在这其中,除了世尊之外,没有人在智慧上比得上舍利弗尊者;在功德上也是如此,因为他仅用半个月就通达了一切声闻波罗蜜智;在出身上,他又出生在大婆罗门家族。所以,那位比丘虽然和他年龄相同,但凭这三种原因,他仍然是长老。在这里,世尊正是着眼于智慧和功德上的超胜,才说了“尊敬长老”。因此,对这样的长老致以恭敬,就是尊敬长老;对这样的长老在利养等方面不起嫉妒,就是无嫉妒。这就是第一句的含义。巴利
Tattha paññāvuḍḍho, guṇavuḍḍho, jātivuḍḍho, vayovuḍḍhoti cattāro vuḍḍhā. Jātiyā hi daharopi bahussuto bhikkhu appassutamahallakabhikkhūnamantare bāhusaccapaññāya vuḍḍhattā paññāvuḍḍho. Tassa hi santike mahallakabhikkhūpi buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, ovādavinicchayapañhavissajjanāni ca paccāsīsanti. Tathā daharopi bhikkhu adhigamasampanno guṇavuḍḍho nāma. Tassa hi ovāde patiṭṭhāya mahallakāpi vipassanāgabbhaṃ gahetvā arahattaphalaṃ pāpuṇanti. Tathā daharopi rājā khattiyo muddhāvasitto brāhmaṇo vā sesajanassa vandanārahato jātivuḍḍho nāma. Sabbo pana paṭhamajāto vayovuḍḍho nāma. Tattha yasmā paññāya sāriputtattherassa sadiso natthi ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ, tathā guṇenapi aḍḍhamāsena sabbasāvakapāramīñāṇassa paṭividdhattā. Jātiyāpi so brāhmaṇamahāsālakule uppanno, tasmā tassa bhikkhuno vayena samānopi so imehi tīhi kāraṇehi vuḍḍho. Imasmiṃ panatthe paññāguṇehi eva vuḍḍhabhāvaṃ sandhāya bhagavā āha – ‘‘vuḍḍhāpacāyī’’ti. Tasmā tādisānaṃ vuḍḍhānaṃ apacitikaraṇena vuḍḍhāpacāyī, tesameva vuḍḍhānaṃ lābhādīsu usūyavigamena anusūyako ca siyāti ayamādipādassa attho.
“知时者”在这里是指:当贪欲生起时,为了去除它而去拜见师长,这就是知时者;当嗔恨……愚痴……懈怠生起时,为了去除它们而去拜见师长,这也是知时者。正是因为他这样知道适当的时机,才会去拜见师长。“法谈”是指与止观相应的谈论。“宣说”就是把它讲出来。“知机会者”是指能察觉听闻这种法谈的时机,或者知道听闻这种法谈的机会极为难得。“应当恭敬地听”是指应当恭恭敬敬地听这种法谈。而且不只是这一种法谈,其他与佛功德等相关的一切善说,也都应当恭敬地听。这就是这里的意思。巴利
Kālaññū cassāti ettha pana rāge uppanne tassa vinodanatthāya garūnaṃ dassanaṃ gacchantopi kālaññū, dose… mohe… kosajje uppanne tassa vinodanatthāya garūnaṃ dassanaṃ gacchantopi kālaññū, yato evaṃ kālaññū ca assa garūnaṃ dassanāya. Dhammiṃ kathanti samathavipassanāyuttaṃ. Erayitanti vuttaṃ. Khaṇaññūti tassā kathāya khaṇavedī, dullabho vā ayaṃ īdisāya kathāya savanakkhaṇoti jānanto. Suṇeyya sakkaccāti taṃ kathaṃ sakkaccaṃ suṇeyya. Na kevalañca tameva, aññānipi buddhaguṇādipaṭisaṃyuttāni subhāsitāni sakkaccameva suṇeyyāti attho.
329 对于“他应是知时者,为了见师长”这句话,这里说的方法是:先知道自己内心生起了贪等烦恼、应当何时去消除它们,然后再去师长跟前,也就是在适当的时候前往师长那里。不能因为想着“我是修业处的人、是持头陀支的人”,就在礼佛塔时、在菩提树园里、在乞食的路上、在上午或正午等时候,只要看见师长站在哪里,就为了提问而凑上去。应该等师长在自己的住处、坐在自己的座位上、疲劳已经平息之后,观察清楚了,再为了请问业处等方法而前去亲近,这就是这句话的意思。即使这样前去亲近时,也要放下傲慢,保持谦和,摧毁那种让心刚硬的慢心,以谦卑的姿态前去,像擦脚布、像被锯掉角的牛、像被拔掉毒牙的蛇一样。然后,对那位师长所说的义、法……乃至都应遵行。义,指所说的含义;法,指巴利经典;律仪,指戒;梵行,指其余全部教法中的梵行。忆念并遵行:在讲到义的地方就忆念义,在讲到法、律仪、梵行的地方就忆念法、律仪、梵行;而且不只是忆念就够了,还要把那一切都完全遵行、受持实践。意思是说,应当努力把那些教导落实到自己身上。能这样做的人,就是尽到了自己的本分。巴利
329. ‘‘Kālaññū cassa garūnaṃ dassanāyā’’ti ettha vuttanayañca attano uppannarāgādivinodanakālaṃ ñatvāpi garūnaṃ santikaṃ gacchanto kālena gacche garūnaṃsakāsaṃ, ‘‘ahaṃ kammaṭṭhāniko dhutaṅgadharo cā’’ti katvā na cetiyavandanabodhiyaṅgaṇabhikkhācāramaggaatimajjhanhikavelādīsu yattha katthaci ṭhitamācariyaṃ disvā paripucchanatthāya upasaṅkameyya, sakasenāsane pana attano āsane nisinnaṃ vūpasantadarathaṃ sallakkhetvā kammaṭṭhānādividhipucchanatthaṃ upasaṅkameyyāti attho. Evaṃ upasaṅkamantopi ca thambhaṃ niraṃkatvā nivātavutti thaddhabhāvakaraṃ mānaṃ vināsetvā nīcavutti pādapuñchanacoḷakachinnavisāṇusabhauddhatadāṭhasappasadiso hutvā upasaṅkameyya. Atha tena garunā vuttaṃ atthaṃ dhammaṃ…pe… samācare ca. Atthanti bhāsitatthaṃ. Dhammanti pāḷidhammaṃ. Saṃyamanti sīlaṃ. Brahmacariyanti avasesasāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Anussare ceva samācare cāti atthaṃ kathitokāse anussareyya, dhammaṃ saṃyamaṃ brahmacariyaṃ kathitokāse anussareyya, anussaraṇamatteneva ca atussanto taṃ sabbampi samācare samācareyya samādāya vatteyya. Tāsaṃ kathānaṃ attani pavattane ussukkaṃ kareyyāti attho. Evaṃ karonto hi kiccakaro hoti.
330 此后,他还应当成为以法为乐的人、欢喜法的人、安住于法的人、通达法之抉择的人。在这里,所有语句中的“法”都指止与观。“乐”和“喜”是同一个意思。以法为乐处,所以叫“以法为乐的人”。欢喜法,不贪求别的,所以叫“欢喜法的人”。随法而行,所以叫“安住于法的人”。他了知法的抉择,知道“这是生智,这是灭智”,所以叫“通达法之抉择的人”。他应当成为这样的人。至于像谈论国王之类毫无意义的畜生论,会让初修观的人对外在的色等生起欢喜,从而染污他的止观之法,所以被称为“毁法之论”。他不应从事这种毁法之论,而应当受用住处、行境等适宜的条件,以真实、善说的话语来度过时光。在这里,与止观相应的话语才是“真实”。以这样的善说度过时光,也就是以此消磨时间,这就是这里的意思。巴利
330. Tato parañca dhammārāmo dhammarato dhamme ṭhito dhammavinicchayaññū bhaveyya. Sabbapadesu cettha dhammoti samathavipassanā, ārāmo ratīti ekova attho, dhamme ārāmo assāti dhammārāmo. Dhamme rato, na aññaṃ pihetīti dhammarato. Dhamme ṭhito dhammaṃ vattanato. Dhammavinicchayaṃ jānāti ‘‘idaṃ udayañāṇaṃ idaṃ vayañāṇa’’nti dhammavinicchayaññū, evarūpo assa. Atha yāyaṃ rājakathāditiracchānakathā taruṇavipassakassa bahiddhārūpādīsu abhinandanuppādanena taṃ samathavipassanādhammaṃ sandūseti, tasmā ‘‘dhammasandosavādo’’ti vuccati, taṃ nevācare dhammasandosavādaṃ, aññadatthu āvāsagocarādisappāyāni sevanto tacchehi nīyetha subhāsitehi. Samathavipassanāpaṭisaṃyuttānevettha tacchāni, tathārūpehi subhāsitehi nīyetha nīyeyya, kālaṃ khepeyyāti attho.
331 331. 现在,为了把“毁法之论”这里极度简略说到的、与止观相应的比丘的随烦恼讲清楚,连同其他随烦恼一起,世尊说了“笑、闲谈……”这偈。也有的版本写作“笑者”。因为修观的比丘,遇到可笑的事只应微微一笑,不该说无意义的闲谈,不该在亲属遭难等时候悲泣,不该对树桩、荆棘等心生恼怒。所谓谄曲、三种诡诈、对资具的贪求、由种姓等生起的慢、以乐于违逆对抗为名的忿激、以粗恶语为特征的粗犷、贪等垢秽、以极强渴爱为特征的昏迷——这些过失,求快乐的人应当像避开炭坑一样,求清净的人应当像避开粪坑一样,想活命的人应当像避开毒蛇等一样,把它们断除。断除之后,由于无病慢等已经消失、以无骄慢而心无散乱,就安住而行。这样修行的人,以令一切随烦恼清净的修习,不久就证得阿罗汉果。因此世尊说:“笑、闲谈……心安定。”巴利
331. Idāni ‘‘dhammasandosavāda’’nti ettha atisaṅkhepena vuttaṃ samathavipassanāyuttassa bhikkhuno upakkilesaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto tadaññenapi upakkilesena saddhiṃ ‘‘hassaṃ jappa’’nti imaṃ gāthamāha. Hāsantipi pāṭho. Vipassakena hi bhikkhunā hasanīyasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ sitamattameva kātabbaṃ, niratthakakathājappo na bhāsitabbo, ñātibyasanādīsu paridevo na kātabbo, khāṇukaṇṭakādimhi manopadoso na uppādetabbo. Māyākatanti vuttā māyā, tividhaṃ kuhanaṃ, paccayesu giddhi, jātiādīhi māno, paccanīkasātatāsaṅkhāto sārambho, pharusavacanalakkhaṇaṃ kakkasaṃ, rāgādayo kasāvā, adhimattataṇhālakkhaṇā mucchāti ime ca dosā sukhakāmena aṅgārakāsu viya, sucikāmena gūthaṭhānaṃ viya, jīvitukāmena āsivisādayo viya ca pahātabbā. Hitvā ca ārogyamadādivigamā vītamadena cittavikkhepābhāvā ṭhitattena caritabbaṃ. Evaṃ paṭipanno hi sabbupakkilesaparisuddhāya bhāvanāya na cirasseva arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘hassaṃ jappaṃ…pe… ṭhitatto’’ti.
332 现在,对于刚才以“笑、闲谈”等方式所说的随烦恼,具足它的比丘因为鲁莽、不加审察,被贪染污就随贪而行,被嗔染污就随嗔而行,又因放逸而对善法的修习不持续用功;对这样的人,以“应当恭敬地听闻善说”等方式所说的教诫就没有意义。因此,为了说明这种杂染在依人而说的教法中,是闻等增长的对立面,而说了“知精华者”这一偈。巴利
332. Idāni yvāyaṃ ‘‘hassaṃ jappa’’ntiādinā nayena upakkileso vutto, tena samannāgato bhikkhu yasmā sāhaso hoti avīmaṃsakārī, ratto rāgavasena duṭṭho dosavasena gacchati, pamatto ca hoti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya asātaccakārī, tathārūpassa ca ‘‘suṇeyya sakkacca subhāsitānī’’tiādinā nayena vutto ovādo niratthako, tasmā imassa saṃkilesassa puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya sutādivuddhipaṭipakkhabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘viññātasārānī’’ti imaṃ gāthamāha.
这段话的意思是:那些和止观相应的善说,真正要把握的精华在于了知它们。如果已经了知,那当然很好;但如果只是把声音抓取下来,那就什么也没做成。借着闻所成智来了知这些善说,这才叫“闻”;而这种闻所成智的精华,就在于了知之后与定相应。对于这些已经了知的法,能让心不散乱的那种定,也就是为了证得如实状态而实修,这才是它的精华。因为光靠了知,是成不了任何事的。可是,一个人如果因为贪等烦恼而行事鲁莽,又在修习善法时不持续精进、放逸懈怠,那他就只是抓取声音而已。由于他不了知其中的义理,那种了知善说的智慧就不会增长;由于他不为了证得如实状态而实修,他的闻也不会增长。巴利
Tassattho – yāni hetāni samathavipassanāpaṭisaṃyuttāni subhāsitāni, tesaṃ vijānanaṃ sāro. Yadi viññātāni sādhu, atha saddamattameva gahitaṃ, na kiñci kataṃ hoti, yena etāni sutamayena ñāṇena viññāyanti, taṃ sutaṃ, etañca sutamayañāṇaṃ viññātasamādhisāraṃ, tesu viññātesu dhammesu yo samādhi cittassāvikkhepo tathattāya paṭipatti, ayamassa sāro. Na hi vijānanamatteneva koci attho sijjhati. Yo panāyaṃ naro rāgādivasena vattanato sāhaso, kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya asātaccakāritāya pamatto, so saddamattaggāhīyeva hoti. Tena tassa atthavijānanābhāvato sā subhāsitavijānanapaññā ca, tathattāya paṭipattiyā abhāvato sutañca na vaḍḍhatīti.
333 333. 这样显示了放逸众生在智慧上的退失和在听闻上的退失之后,现在要显示不放逸者获得这两者的精华,所以说道:“于法……得精华”。其中,由圣者所宣说的法,就是止观之法。因为确实没有哪一位佛陀不教导止观之法就般涅槃。因此,在这由圣者所宣说的法中,那些欢喜、乐于投入、不放逸、持续精进的人,他们在言语、心意和行为上都是无上的。由于他们具备四种语善行、三种意善行和三种身善行,所以在言语、心意和行为上都是无上的,与其他众生不同,是最上、最殊胜的。到这里,连同前行部分的戒一起,显示了与圣道相应的戒。这些戒清净的人,安住在寂静柔和与定之中,获得了听闻和智慧的精华。应当知道,那些对圣者所宣说的法欢喜的人,不仅仅在言语等方面是无上的,而且他们安住在寂静柔和与定之中,获得了听闻和智慧的精华。这是对有所期望者的真实之语。其中,“寂静”就是涅槃;“柔和”是因为乐于善法而能如实通达的智慧;寂静与柔和合在一起就是“寂静柔和”,这是以涅槃为所缘的道慧的别名。“定”就是与道相应的定。“安住”就是在两者中稳固地建立。听闻与智慧的精华,就是阿拉汉果的解脱。因为这种梵行以解脱为精华。巴利
333. Evaṃ pamattānaṃ sattānaṃ paññāparihāniṃ sutaparihāniñca dassetvā idāni appamattānaṃ tadubhayasārādhigamaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘dhamme ca ye…pe… sāramajjhagū’’ti. Tattha ariyappavedito dhammo nāma samathavipassanādhammo. Ekopi hi buddho samathavipassanādhammaṃ adesetvā parinibbuto nāma natthi. Tasmā etasmiṃ dhamme ca ye ariyappavediteratā niratā appamattā sātaccānuyogino, anuttarā te vacasā manasā kammunā ca, te catubbidhena vacīsucaritena tividhena manosucaritena tividhena kāyasucaritena ca samannāgatattā vacasā manasā kammunā ca anuttarā, avasesasattehi asamā aggāvisiṭṭhā. Ettāvatā saddhiṃ pubbabhāgasīlena ariyamaggasampayuttaṃ sīlaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ parisuddhasīlā te santisoraccasamādhisaṇṭhitā, sutassa paññāya ca sāramajjhagū, ye ariyappavedite dhamme ratā, te na kevalaṃ vācādīhi anuttarā honti, apica kho pana santisoracce samādhimhi ca saṇṭhitā hutvā sutassa paññāya ca sāramajjhagū adhigatā icceva veditabbā. Āsaṃsāyaṃ bhūtavacanaṃ. Tattha santīti nibbānaṃ, soraccanti sundare ratabhāvena yathābhūtapaṭivedhikā paññā, santiyā soraccanti santisoraccaṃ, nibbānārammaṇāya maggapaññāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samādhīti taṃsampayuttova maggasamādhi. Saṇṭhitāti tadubhaye patiṭṭhitā. Sutapaññānaṃ sāraṃ nāma arahattaphalavimutti. Vimuttisārañhi idaṃ brahmacariyaṃ.
世尊在这里依法先开示了前行阶段的修行,接着用“语无上”等语句开示了戒蕴,又用寂静、柔和与定开示了慧蕴和定蕴——通过这三蕴,显示了后行阶段的修行。然后,他以闻慧的精华揭示不动摇的解脱,并以阿罗汉果的顶点结束了这次说法。说法结束时,那位比丘证得入流果,不久之后便立足于最高的果位——阿罗汉果。巴利
Evamettha bhagavā dhammena pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ, ‘‘anuttarā vacasā’’tiādīhi sīlakkhandhaṃ, santisoraccasamādhīhi paññākkhandhasamādhikkhandheti tīhipi imehi khandhehi aparabhāgapaṭipadañca dassetvā sutapaññāsārena akuppavimuttiṃ dassento arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ samāpesi. Desanāpariyosāne ca so bhikkhu sotāpattiphalaṃ patvā puna na cirasseva aggaphale arahatte patiṭṭhāsīti.
10. 《精勤经》的注释巴利
10. Uṭṭhānasuttavaṇṇanā
334 “奋起吧”这一偈颂出自《奋起经》。它的缘起是什么呢?有一次,世尊住在舍卫城,夜里在祇园精舍过夜,上午由比丘僧团围绕,进入舍卫城乞食,然后从东门出城,前往鹿子母讲堂,准备在那里午休。世尊有个习惯:夜里在祇园精舍过夜,白天就去鹿子母讲堂午休;夜里在鹿子母讲堂过夜,白天就去祇园精舍午休。为什么呢?一是为了护念两方施主之家,二是为了彰显大布施的功德。鹿子母讲堂下面有五百间尖顶房,其中住着五百位比丘。当世尊住在楼下时,比丘们因为敬畏世尊,不敢上楼。但那天,世尊进入了楼上的尖顶房,于是楼下五百间房就住进了五百位比丘。他们都是新学比丘,刚进入这个法和律,心浮气躁,高傲自负,不守护根门。他们进去后,午休时躺下睡觉,傍晚起来,聚在大厅里,高声喧哗,谈论种种关于饮食的话题:“今天在斋堂,你吃到了什么?你去了哪里?朋友,我去了憍萨罗王的王宫,我去了给孤独长者的家,那里的供食方式是这般这般……”巴利
334.Uṭṭhahathāti uṭṭhānasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharanto rattiṃ jetavanavihāre vasitvā pubbaṇhasamayaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto sāvatthiyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā pācīnadvārena nagarā nikkhamitvā migāramātupāsādaṃ agamāsi divāvihāratthāya. Āciṇṇaṃ kiretaṃ bhagavato rattiṃ jetavanavihāre vasitvā migāramātupāsāde divāvihārūpagamanaṃ, rattiñca migāramātupāsāde vasitvā jetavane divāvihārūpagamanaṃ. Kasmā? Dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ anuggahatthāya mahāpariccāgaguṇaparidīpanatthāya ca. Migāramātupāsādassa ca heṭṭhā pañca kūṭāgāragabbhasatāni honti, yesu pañcasatā bhikkhū vasanti. Tattha yadā bhagavā heṭṭhāpāsāde vasati, tadā bhikkhū bhagavato gāravena uparipāsādaṃ nāruhanti. Taṃ divasaṃ pana bhagavā uparipāsāde kūṭāgāragabbhaṃ pāvisi, tena heṭṭhāpāsāde pañcapi gabbhasatāni pañcasatā bhikkhū pavisiṃsu. Te ca sabbeva navā honti adhunāgatā imaṃ dhammavinayaṃ uddhatā unnaḷā pākatindriyā. Te pavisitvā divāseyyaṃ supitvā sāyaṃ uṭṭhāya mahātale sannipatitvā ‘‘ajja bhattagge tuyhaṃ kiṃ ahosi, tvaṃ kattha agamāsi, ahaṃ āvuso kosalarañño gharaṃ, ahaṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa, tattha evarūpo ca evarūpo ca bhojanavidhi ahosī’’ti nānappakāraṃ āmisakathaṃ kathentā uccāsaddamahāsaddā ahesuṃ.
世尊听到那声音,心想:“这些和我住在一起的人竟然这么放逸,唉,真是做了不该做的事。”于是便想到大目犍连尊者要来。就在那时,具寿大目犍连知道了世尊的心意,以神通力来到,正顶礼在世尊脚下。世尊便对他说:“目犍连,你这些同梵行者太放逸了,你去让他们生起警醒吧。”“好的,尊者。”具寿大目犍连答应世尊后,立刻进入水遍处定,用大脚趾震动那座建在粪地上的大讲堂,连同它所在的地基,就像大风吹动小船一样。于是那些比丘惊恐地叫喊起来,丢下各自的衣袍,从四个门跑了出去。世尊为了让他们看见自己,就像从另一扇门走进香室一样出现了。那些比丘见到世尊,顶礼后站在一旁。世尊问:“比丘们,你们为什么害怕?”他们回答:“尊者,鹿子母讲堂震动了。”世尊又问:“比丘们,你们知道是谁做的吗?”他们说:“我们不知道,尊者。”世尊便说:“比丘们,正是为了让你们这些失念、不正知、常行放逸的人心生警醒,目犍连才震动了讲堂。”随后,世尊为那些比丘说法,宣说了这部经。巴利
Bhagavā taṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘ime mayā saddhiṃ vasantāpi evaṃ pamattā, aho ayuttakārino’’ti mahāmoggallānattherassa āgamanaṃ cintesi. Tāvadeva āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavato cittaṃ ñatvā iddhiyā āgamma pādamūle vandamānoyeva ahosi. Tato naṃ bhagavā āmantesi – ‘‘ete te, moggallāna, sabrahmacārino pamattā, sādhu ne saṃvejehī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ bhante’’ti kho so āyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavato paṭissuṇitvā tāvadeva āpokasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā karīsabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitaṃ mahāpāsādaṃ nāvaṃ viya mahāvāto pādaṅguṭṭhakena kampesi saddhiṃ patiṭṭhitapathavippadesena. Atha te bhikkhū bhītā vissaraṃ karontā sakasakacīvarāni chaḍḍetvā catūhi dvārehi nikkhamiṃsu. Bhagavā tesaṃ attānaṃ dassento aññena dvārena gandhakuṭiṃ pavisanto viya ahosi, te bhagavantaṃ disvā vanditvā aṭṭhaṃsu . Bhagavā ‘‘kiṃ, bhikkhave, bhītatthā’’ti pucchi, te ‘‘ayaṃ, bhante, migāramātupāsādo kampito’’ti āhaṃsu . ‘‘Jānātha, bhikkhave, kenā’’ti? ‘‘Na jānāma, bhante’’ti. Atha bhagavā ‘‘tumhādisānaṃ, bhikkhave, muṭṭhassatīnaṃ asampajānānaṃ pamādavihārīnaṃ saṃvegajananatthaṃ moggallānena kampito’’ti vatvā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhammadesanatthaṃ imaṃ suttamabhāsi.
在这里,“奋起吧”的意思是从座位上站起来,要精勤努力,不要懈怠。“坐好”的意思是盘腿坐下,为了专心投入修行而安坐。“睡眠对你们有什么用”:你们是为了无取般涅槃而出家的人,睡眠对你们有什么用呢?因为睡着的人不可能达成任何利益。患病的人怎么会有睡意呢?被箭射中、遭受痛苦的人怎么会有睡意呢?比如一个人身体哪怕只有一小处地方被眼病等疾病侵袭,或者被铁箭、骨箭、牙箭、角箭、木箭等任何一种箭射入,哪怕只刺入一两指节那么深,他正遭受箭伤之苦,就不会有睡意。那么,你们整个身心相续都被种种生起的烦恼病所击碎、备受煎熬,怎么还会有睡意呢?你们内心被贪欲等五支箭深深刺入、穿透,正遭受箭伤之苦,怎么还会有睡意呢?巴利
Tattha uṭṭhahathāti āsanā uṭṭhahatha ghaṭatha vāyamatha, mā kusītā hotha. Nisīdathāti pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā kammaṭṭhānānuyogatthāya nisīdatha. Ko attho supitena voti ko tumhākaṃ anupādāparinibbānatthāya pabbajitānaṃ supitena attho. Na hi sakkā supantena koci attho pāpuṇituṃ. Āturānañhi kā niddā, sallaviddhāna ruppatanti yatra ca nāma appakepi sarīrappadese uṭṭhitena cakkhurogādinā rogena āturānaṃ ekadvaṅgulamattampi paviṭṭhena ayasallaaṭṭhisalladantasallavisāṇasallakaṭṭhasallānaṃ aññatarena sallena ruppamānānaṃ manussānaṃ niddā natthi, tattha tumhākaṃ sakalacittasarīrasantānaṃ bhañjitvā uppannehi nānappakārakilesarogehi āturānañhi kā niddā rāgasallādīhi ca pañcahi sallehi antohadayaṃ pavisiya viddhattā sallaviddhānaṃ ruppataṃ.
335 335. 世尊这样说完之后,为了进一步激励和警策那些比丘,又说道:“奋起吧……不要做欲望的奴隶。”这里按照意图所作的义解与词义解释如下:比丘们,你们被烦恼之箭射穿了,现在正是觉醒的时候。什么原因呢?比丘们,这种梵行就像可以畅饮的甘露,导师就站在你们面前。可是在此之前,你们长久以来一直在沉睡——在山里沉睡,在河边沉睡,在平地上沉睡,在崎岖处沉睡,甚至在树梢上沉睡,因为你们没有见到圣谛。所以,为了终结那沉睡,为了寂止,你们应当奋起,坐好,坚定地修学。巴利
335. Evaṃ vatvā puna bhagavā bhiyyosomattāya te bhikkhū ussāhento saṃvejento ca āha – ‘‘uṭṭhahatha…pe… vasānuge’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ sādhippāyayojanā atthavaṇṇanā – evaṃ kilesasallaviddhānañhi vo, bhikkhave, kālo pabujjhituṃ. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Maṇḍapeyyamidaṃ, bhikkhave, brahmacariyaṃ, satthā sammukhībhūto, ito pubbe pana vo dīgharattaṃ suttaṃ, girīsu suttaṃ, nadīsu suttaṃ, samesu suttaṃ, visamesu suttaṃ, rukkhaggesupi suttaṃ adassanā ariyasaccānaṃ, tasmā tassā niddāya antakiriyatthaṃ uṭṭhahatha nisīdatha daḷhaṃ sikkhatha santiyā.
其中,前半偈的意思和前面所说的一样。至于后半偈中说的“寂静”,有三种寂静:究竟寂静、彼分寂静和世俗寂静,这是对涅槃、观和见等境界的异名。但这里指的是究竟寂静,也就是涅槃。因此这句话是说:你们应当为了涅槃而坚定地修学,以不懈怠的精进努力来修学。为什么要这样说呢?是为了不让死王魔罗把你们看作放逸的人而迷惑你们,使你们落入他的掌控。意思是:不要让那位名叫死王的魔罗,把你们认作“这些人是放逸者”而迷惑你们,使你们随他摆布,千万不要让他这样主宰你们。巴利
Tattha purimapādassattho vuttanayo eva. Dutiyapāde pana santīti tisso santiyo – accantasanti, tadaṅgasanti, sammutisantīti, nibbānavipassanādiṭṭhigatānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idha pana accantasanti nibbānamadhippetaṃ, tasmā nibbānatthaṃ daḷhaṃ sikkhatha, asithilaparakkamā hutvā sikkhathāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Mā vo pamatte viññāya, maccurājā amohayittha vasānuge, mā tumhe ‘‘pamattā ete’’ti evaṃ ñatvā maccurājapariyāyanāmo māro vasānuge amohayittha, yathā tassa vasaṃ gacchatha, evaṃ vasānuge karonto mā amohayitthāti vuttaṃ hoti.
336 你们不要随顺它的摆布。天界和人间的众生,都被它牢牢套住;天界和人间那些贪求色、声、香、味、触的人,都依赖色等对象,执著它们,紧贴它们,安住其中。你们要超越它,要跨过它——那在各种境界中四处蔓延、广泛流布的贪爱,也就是对存在和享乐的渴爱。不要让时机从你们身边溜走,不要错过你们修习沙门法的时机。因为,凡是错过这种时机的人,凡是被时机抛在后面的人,他们就是错过了时机,会忧愁苦恼,沉沦在地狱里。他们因为毫无滋味可尝,而落在被称为地狱的四种恶趣之中,忧愁哀叹:“我们确实没有修善啊!”巴利
336. Yato tassa vasaṃ anupagacchantā yāya devā manussā ca…pe… samappitā, yāya devā ca manussā ca atthikā rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbatthikā, taṃ rūpādiṃ sitā nissitā allīnā hutvā tiṭṭhanti, taratha samatikkamatha etaṃ nānappakāresu visayesu visaṭavitthiṇṇavisālattā visattikaṃ bhavabhogataṇhaṃ. Khaṇo vo mā upaccagā, ayaṃ tumhākaṃ samaṇadhammakaraṇakkhaṇo mā atikkami. Yesañhi ayamevarūpo khaṇo atikkamati, ye ca imaṃ khaṇaṃ atikkamanti, te khaṇātītā hi socanti nirayamhi samappitā, nirassādaṭṭhena nirayasaññite catubbidhepi apāye patiṭṭhitā ‘‘akataṃ vata no kalyāṇa’’ntiādinā nayena socanti.
337 337. 世尊这样激励、警策了那些比丘之后,现在又责备他们那种放逸的生活方式,并劝导他们所有人都要安住于不放逸,于是说出“放逸是尘垢”这个偈颂。其中,“放逸”简单说就是失去正念,它因为会让心变得污浊,所以是尘垢。随逐放逸,就是跟着放逸走;因为跟着放逸走,所以一次又一次生起的还是放逸本身,那也是尘垢。因为放逸任何时候都不可能是没有尘垢的。这说明了什么呢?是说:你们不要以为“我们还年轻,以后自然会明白”,就这样心安理得地放逸。因为年轻时的放逸就是尘垢,到了中年、老年,由于一直跟着放逸走,就会变成极大的尘垢,像一堆垃圾。就像家里一两天积的灰尘,虽然也是灰尘,但不断堆积,积上几年,就成了一堆垃圾。话虽如此,如果有人在年轻时学习佛陀的教法,在之后的人生阶段修习沙门法;或者年轻时学习佛陀的教法,中年时听闻,老年时修习沙门法,这样的比丘就不是过放逸生活的人,因为他已经走上了随顺不放逸的道路。可是,如果有人像你们这样,在人生的每个阶段都过着放逸的生活,白天沉溺于午睡,热衷于谈论吃喝,那么对他来说,年轻时的放逸就是尘垢,而在其他人生阶段,由于跟着放逸走,就成了大放逸和大尘垢。巴利
337. Evaṃ bhagavā te bhikkhū ussāhetvā saṃvejetvā ca idāni tesaṃ taṃ pamādavihāraṃ vigarahitvā sabbeva te appamāde niyojento ‘‘pamādo rajo’’ti imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha pamādoti saṅkhepato sativippavāso, so cittamalinaṭṭhena rajo. Taṃ pamādamanupatito pamādānupatito, pamādānupatitattā aparāparuppanno pamādo eva, sopi rajo. Na hi kadāci pamādo nāma arajo atthi. Tena kiṃ dīpeti? Mā tumhe ‘‘daharā tāva mayaṃ pacchā jānissāmā’’ti vissāsamāpajjittha. Daharakālepi hi pamādo rajo, majjhimakālepi therakālepi pamādānupatitattā mahārajo saṅkārakūṭo eva hoti, yathā ghare ekadvedivasiko rajo rajo eva, vaḍḍhamāno pana gaṇavassiko saṅkārakūṭo eva hoti. Evaṃ santepi pana paṭhamavaye buddhavacanaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā itaravayesu samaṇadhammaṃ karonto, paṭhamavaye vā pariyāpuṇitvā majjhimavaye suṇitvā pacchimavaye samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi bhikkhu pamādavihārī na hoti appamādānulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannattā. Yo pana sabbavayesu pamādavihārī divāseyyaṃ āmisakathañca anuyutto, seyyathāpi tumhe, tasseva so paṭhamavaye pamādo rajo, itaravayesu pamādānupatito mahāpamādo ca mahārajo evāti.
世尊这样责备他们放逸而住,又劝导他们安住于不放逸之后,说道:“以不放逸与明,拔除自己的箭。”这句话的意思是:因为放逸在任何时候都是尘垢,所以有智慧的良家子应当以不放逸——也就是不失正念——以及以明——也就是诸漏灭尽的智慧——拔除那依附在自己心中的贪等五种箭。世尊以阿罗汉果为顶点结束了这次说法。说法结束时,那五百位比丘生起警策之心,专心忆念并反复观察这次说法,开始修观,最终都证得了阿罗汉果。巴利
Evaṃ tesaṃ pamādavihāraṃ vigarahitvā appamāde niyojento āha – ‘‘appamādena vijjāya, abbahe sallamattano’’ti, tassattho – yasmā evameso sabbadāpi pamādo rajo, tasmā satiavippavāsasaṅkhātena appamādena āsavānaṃ khayañāṇasaṅkhātāya ca vijjāya paṇḍito kulaputto uddhare attano hadayanissitaṃ rāgādipañcavidhaṃ sallanti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ samāpesi. Desanāpariyosāne saṃvegamāpajjitvā tameva dhammadesanaṃ manasi karitvā paccavekkhamānā vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā pañcasatāpi te bhikkhū arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsūti.
11. 《罗睺罗经》的注释巴利
11. Rāhulasuttavaṇṇanā
338 338. “是否因常共住”这一段,出自《罗睺罗经》。它的缘起是怎样的呢?世尊成就正等正觉之后,从菩提道场出发,一路渐次来到迦毗罗卫城。在那里,罗睺罗王子向世尊乞求遗产,说:“沙门,请把遗产给我。”于是世尊吩咐舍利弗尊者:“让罗睺罗王子出家吧。”这些内容,都应当依照《大品注》中所说的来理解。罗睺罗王子就这样出家了。等他长大后,是舍利弗尊者为他授具足戒,大目犍连尊者担任他羯磨的教授师。世尊心想:“这位王子具足种姓等种种优越条件,不要让他依仗种姓、家族、容貌端正等而生起慢心或骄逸。”为了教导他,从他还年幼时起,直到他证得圣位为止,世尊常常为他宣说这部经。因此,在这部经的末尾也说:“据说,世尊确实常常用这些偈颂教导罗睺罗尊者。”其中,第一首偈的简要含义是:世尊针对舍利弗尊者说:“罗睺罗,你是否因为常共住,就拿种姓等某种理由去轻慢智者?对于那位像持灯者一样、为人们带来智慧之灯和说法之灯的人,你是否恭敬他、是否常常尊敬他?”巴利
338.Kacciabhiṇhasaṃvāsāti rāhulasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Bhagavā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhitvā bodhimaṇḍato anupubbena kapilavatthuṃ gantvā tattha rāhulakumārena ‘‘dāyajjaṃ me samaṇa dehī’’ti dāyajjaṃ yācito sāriputtattheraṃ āṇāpesi – ‘‘rāhulakumāraṃ pabbājehī’’ti. Taṃ sabbaṃ khandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 105) vuttanayeneva gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ pabbajitaṃ pana rāhulakumāraṃ vuḍḍhippattaṃ sāriputtattherova upasampādesi, mahāmoggallānatthero assa kammavācācariyo ahosi. Taṃ bhagavā ‘‘ayaṃ kumāro jātiādisampanno, so jātigottakulavaṇṇapokkharatādīni nissāya mānaṃ vā madaṃ vā mā akāsī’’ti daharakālato pabhuti yāva na ariyabhūmiṃ pāpuṇi, tāva ovadanto abhiṇhaṃ imaṃ suttamabhāsi. Tasmā cetaṃ suttapariyosānepi vuttaṃ ‘‘itthaṃ sudaṃ bhagavā āyasmantaṃ rāhulaṃ imāhi gāthāhi abhiṇhaṃ ovadatī’’ti. Tattha paṭhamagāthāyaṃ ayaṃ saṅkhepattho ‘‘kacci tvaṃ, rāhula, abhiṇhaṃ saṃvāsahetu jātiādīnaṃ aññatarena vatthunā na paribhavasi paṇḍitaṃ, ñāṇapadīpassa dhammadesanāpadīpassa ca dhāraṇato ukkādhāro manussānaṃkacci apacito tayā, kacci niccaṃ pūjito tayā’’ti āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ sandhāya bhaṇati.
339 世尊这样说后,具寿罗睺罗为了表明“世尊,我不会像下劣之人那样,因为常与世尊共住就生起慢心或骄逸”,便说了这首答偈:“我并非因为常共住……”这首偈的意思本身就很明白。巴利
339. Evaṃ vutte āyasmā rāhulo ‘‘nāhaṃ bhagavā nīcapuriso viya saṃvāsahetu mānaṃ vā madaṃ vā karomī’’ti dīpento imaṃ paṭigāthamāha ‘‘nāhaṃ abhiṇhasaṃvāsā’’ti. Sā uttānatthā eva.
340 于是,世尊为了进一步教导他,说了以“五欲”等开头的其余偈颂。其中,因为五欲对众生来说是可爱、令人欢喜的,被众生极度渴求、盼望,能让他们的心感到愉悦;而这位罗睺罗尊者并不是被国王逼迫、被盗贼逼迫、因欠债所迫、因恐惧所迫、也不是为了活命才出家,他是凭着信心,舍弃了这些五欲,从家中出离。因此,世尊鼓励他说:“你舍弃了这些可爱、令人愉悦的五欲,凭着信心从家中出离。”为了让他实践与这出离相称的修行,又说道:“你应当成为终结苦的人。”巴利
340. Tato naṃ bhagavā uttariṃ ovadanto pañca kāmaguṇetiādikā avasesagāthāyo āha. Tattha yasmā pañca kāmaguṇā sattānaṃ piyarūpā piyajātikā ativiya sattehi icchitā patthitā , mano ca nesaṃ ramayanti, te cāyasmā rāhulo hitvā saddhāya gharā nikkhanto, na rājābhinīto, na corābhinīto, na iṇaṭṭo, na bhayaṭṭo, na jīvikāpakato, tasmā naṃ bhagavā ‘‘pañca kāmaguṇe hitvā, piyarūpe manorame, saddhāya gharā nikkhammā’’ti samuttejetvā imassa nekkhammassa patirūpāya paṭipattiyā niyojento āha – ‘‘dukkhassantakaro bhavā’’ti.
这里可能会有人提出疑问:“这位尊者不是被人强行逼着出家的吗?他本来还盼着继承家产呢,那世尊为什么说‘是凭着信心才离开家出家的’呢?”答案是:因为他一心倾向于出离。这位尊者其实很久以来就一直心向出离。过去他曾是名叫“螺”的龙王,见到莲华上正自觉者的儿子优波离婆多沙弥之后,连续七天大行布施,并发愿将来也能成就那样的境界。从那时起,他就具足了愿求,具足了志向,在十万劫中圆满种种波罗蜜,最终投生到这最后一生。世尊完全知道他有这样深厚的出离倾向,这种了知属于如来十力中的一种智慧。所以世尊才说“是凭着信心才离开家出家的”。另一种理解是:你很久以来就是凭着信心离开家出家的,如今应当成为终结苦的人——这就是这段话的用意。巴利
Tattha siyā ‘‘nanu cāyasmā dāyajjaṃ patthento balakkārena pabbājito, atha kasmā bhagavā āha – ‘saddhāya gharā nikkhammā’’’ti vuccate – nekkhammādhimuttattā. Ayañhi āyasmā dīgharattaṃ nekkhammādhimutto padumuttarasammāsambuddhassa puttaṃ uparevataṃ nāma sāmaṇeraṃ disvā saṅkho nāma nāgarājā hutvā satta divase dānaṃ datvā tathābhāvaṃ patthetvā tato pabhuti patthanāsampanno abhinīhārasampanno satasahassakappe pāramiyo pūretvā antimabhavaṃ upapanno. Evaṃ nekkhammādhimuttatañcassa bhagavā jānāti. Tathāgatabalaññatarañhi etaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tasmā āha – ‘‘saddhāya gharā nikkhammā’’ti. Atha vā dīgharattaṃ saddhāyeva gharā nikkhamma idāni dukkhassantakaro bhavāti ayamettha adhippāyo.
341 341. 现在,为了从一开始就为他指出灭尽轮回之苦的修行方法,世尊说了“应亲近善知识”等话。其中,在戒等功德上更为超胜的人,就叫作善知识。亲近他们时,就像依靠雪山的大娑罗树凭借树根等而生长一样,自己的戒等功德也会增长。因此说“应亲近善知识”。还有“僻静的坐卧处,远离、无喧闹”:凡是坐卧处偏僻、遥远、远离人群、没有喧闹,在那里听到鹿、野猪等声音就能生起山林想,这样的坐卧处也应当去亲近。“于食知量”:应当知道分量,意思是应当知道接受的分量和受用的分量。其中,了知接受分量的人,如果所施之物少,施主也只想少给,就只应接受少量;如果所施之物少,但施主想多给,也只应接受少量;如果所施之物很多,但施主只想少给,也只应接受少量;如果所施之物很多,施主也想多给,就应知道自己的能力而接受。再者,世尊赞叹适量,所以了知受用分量的人,应当如理作意,像吃亲子之肉、像给车轴涂油那样来受用食物。巴利
341. Idānissa ādito pabhuti vaṭṭadukkhassa antakiriyāya paṭipattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mitte bhajassu kalyāṇe’’tiādimāha. Tattha sīlādīhi adhikā kalyāṇamittā nāma, te bhajanto himavantaṃ nissāya mahāsālā mūlādīhi viya sīlādīhi vaḍḍhati. Tenāha – ‘‘mitte bhajassu kalyāṇe’’ti. Pantañca sayanāsanaṃ, vivittaṃ appanigghosanti yañca sayanāsanaṃ pantaṃ dūraṃ vivittaṃ appākiṇṇaṃ appanigghosaṃ, yattha migasūkarādisaddena araññasaññā uppajjati, tathārūpaṃ sayanāsanañca bhajassu. Mattaññū hohi bhojaneti pamāṇaññū hohi, paṭiggahaṇamattaṃ paribhogamattañca jānāhīti attho. Tattha paṭiggahaṇamattaññunā deyyadhammepi appe dāyakepi appaṃ dātukāme appameva gahetabbaṃ, deyyadhamme appe dāyake pana bahuṃ dātukāmepi appameva gahetabbaṃ, deyyadhamme pana bahutare dāyakepi appaṃ dātukāme appameva gahetabbaṃ, deyyadhammepi bahutare dāyakepi bahuṃ dātukāme attano balaṃ jānitvā gahetabbaṃ. Apica mattāyeva vaṇṇitā bhagavatāti paribhogamattaññunā puttamaṃsaṃ viya akkhabbhañjanamiva ca yoniso manasi karitvā bhojanaṃ paribhuñjitabbanti.
342 342. 这样,通过这首偈颂劝导他亲近作为梵行助缘的善知识,又借由坐卧处和食物,策励他安立于资具受用清净戒。接下来,因为在衣等资具上由于渴爱会成为邪命,所以为了遮止它、策励他安立于活命清净戒,说了这首偈颂:“于衣、于团食。”其中,“资具”指病缘资具。“于这些”指在衣等四种比丘容易生起渴爱的对象上。“莫作渴爱”意思是:应当观察过患——“这四种资具,只是为了遮蔽羞处等目的,对常病之人如同药物,对如同破旧房屋一般极其虚弱的这个身体如同支撑”——以这样的方式看待,不要令渴爱生起;也就是说,应当安住于不让渴爱生起、不使它产生的状态。为什么呢?“莫再回此世间。”因为若对这些资具生起渴爱,就会被渴爱牵引,再次回到这个世间。你如果对这些资具不生渴爱,这样就不会再来这个世间了。巴利
342. Evamimāya gāthāya brahmacariyassa upakārabhūtāya kalyāṇamittasevanāya niyojetvā senāsanabhojanamukhena ca paccayaparibhogapārisuddhisīle samādapetvā idāni yasmā cīvarādīsu taṇhāya micchāājīvo hoti, tasmā taṃ paṭisedhetvā ājīvapārisuddhisīle samādapento ‘‘cīvare piṇḍapāte cā’’ti imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha paccayeti gilānappaccaye. Etesūti etesu catūsu cīvarādīsu bhikkhūnaṃ taṇhuppādavatthūsu. Taṇhaṃ mākāsīti ‘‘hirikopīnapaṭicchādanādiatthameva te cattāro paccayā niccāturānaṃ purisānaṃ paṭikārabhūtā jajjaragharassevimassa atidubbalassa kāyassa upatthambhabhūtā’’tiādinā nayena ādīnavaṃ passanto taṇhaṃ mā janesi, ajanento anuppādento viharāhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Mālokaṃ punarāgami. Etesu hi taṇhaṃ karonto taṇhāya ākaḍḍhiyamāno punapi imaṃ lokaṃ āgacchati. So tvaṃ etesu taṇhaṃ mākāsi, evaṃ sante na puna imaṃ lokaṃ āgamissasīti.
世尊这样说时,具寿罗睺罗受持了与衣有关的两种头陀支:粪扫衣支和三衣支。他又受持了与团食有关的五种头陀支:常乞食支、次第乞食支、一座食支、一钵食支、过午不食支。他又受持了与坐卧具有关的六种头陀支:阿兰若住支、露地住支、树下住支、随处住支、冢间住支、常坐不卧支。他又以“随所得、随能力、随适合”这三种知足,在一切资具中知足而住。他就像一位容易受教的良家子,善于领受教导。巴利
Evaṃ vutte āyasmā rāhulo ‘‘cīvare taṇhaṃ mākāsīti maṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti cīvarapaṭisaṃyuttāni dve dhutaṅgāni samādiyi paṃsukūlikaṅgañca, tecīvarikaṅgañca. ‘‘Piṇḍapāte taṇhaṃ mākāsīti maṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti piṇḍapātapaṭisaṃyuttāni pañca dhutaṅgāni samādiyi – piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ, sapadānacārikaṅgaṃ, ekāsanikaṅgaṃ, pattapiṇḍikaṅgaṃ, khalupacchābhattikaṅganti. ‘‘Senāsane taṇhaṃ mākāsīti maṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti senāsanapaṭisaṃyuttāni cha dhutaṅgāni samādiyi – āraññikaṅgaṃ, abbhokāsikaṅgaṃ, rukkhamūlikaṅgaṃ, yathāsanthatikaṅgaṃ, sosānikaṅgaṃ, nesajjikaṅganti. ‘‘Gilānappaccaye taṇhaṃ mākāsīti maṃ bhagavā āhā’’ti sabbappaccayesu yathālābhaṃ yathābalaṃ yathāsāruppanti tīhi santosehi santuṭṭho ahosi, yathā taṃ subbaco kulaputto padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaninti.
343 343. 世尊这样劝导尊者罗睺罗在活命遍净戒上安住之后,现在为了劝导他在其余诸戒以及止与观上安住,便说了“在巴帝摩卡上守护”等话。其中,“在巴帝摩卡上守护”这里,省略了“你应当”。应当理解为“应当”与最后一句相连,第二句也是这样。如此,世尊用这两句话劝导了他在巴帝摩卡防护戒和根律仪戒上安住。在这里,虽然从明显的方式说了五根,但从特征上来说,应当知道第六根也已经包含在内了。“身至念应当存在”——对于这样安立在四种遍净戒上的你,应当让身至念存在、生起,也就是修习四界差别、四种正知、入出息念、食厌逆想等种种身至念——意思是:你应当修习它。“厌离充盛”——意思是:你应当对轮回流转深生厌离,对一切世间具有不喜乐想。巴利
343. Evaṃ bhagavā āyasmantaṃ rāhulaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīle samādapetvā idāni avasesasīle samathavipassanāsu ca samādapetuṃ ‘‘saṃvuto pātimokkhasmi’’ntiādimāha. Tattha saṃvuto pātimokkhasminti ettha bhavassūti pāṭhaseso. Bhavāti antimapadena vā sambandho veditabbo, tathā dutiyapade. Evametehi dvīhi vacanehi pātimokkhasaṃvarasīle, indriyasaṃvarasīle ca samādapesi. Pākaṭavasena cettha pañcindriyāni vuttāni. Lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhampi vuttaṃyeva hotīti veditabbaṃ. Sati kāyagatā tyatthūti evaṃ catupārisuddhisīle patiṭṭhitassa tuyhaṃ catudhātuvavatthānacatubbidhasampajaññānāpānassatiāhārepaṭikūlasaññābhāvanādibhedā kāyagatā sati atthu bhavatu, bhāvehi nanti attho. Nibbidābahulo bhavāti saṃsāravaṭṭe ukkaṇṭhanabahulo sabbaloke anabhiratasaññī hohīti attho.
344 344. 到这里,已经开示了属于决择分的近行地;现在为了显示安止地,接着说了“应避开相”等话。其中,“相”是指能引生贪染的净相。正因如此,他随后进一步区分它,说道:“净相,与贪染相应。”“应避开”是指以不作意而舍弃它。“应修不净心”是指:就像在有知觉或无知觉的身体上修成不净修习那样,你应当如此修心。“一境、善安止”是指:以近行定而心一境,以安止定而善安止。意思是,你的心应当成为这样,你应当如此修习它。巴利
344. Ettāvatā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ upacārabhūmiṃ dassetvā idāni appanābhūmiṃ dassento ‘‘nimittaṃ parivajjehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha nimittanti rāgaṭṭhāniyaṃ subhanimittaṃ. Teneva naṃ parato visesento āha – ‘‘subhaṃ rāgūpasañhita’’nti. Parivajjehīti amanasikārena pariccajāhi. Asubhāya cittaṃ bhāvehīti yathā saviññāṇake aviññāṇake vā kāye asubhabhāvanā sampajjati, evaṃ cittaṃ bhāvehi. Ekaggaṃ susamāhitanti upacārasamādhinā ekaggaṃ, appanāsamādhinā susamāhitaṃ. Yathā te īdisaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tathā naṃ bhāvehīti attho.
345 345. 这样为他显示了安止的境地之后,为了显示观,说了“无相”等话。其中,“应修无相”的意思是:如此,以能导向抉择的定所等持的心修习观。因为观依“无常随观智从常相解脱,所以是无相解脱”等方式,或者因不执取贪相等,而得到“无相”这个名称。正如经中所说:巴利
345. Evamassa appanābhūmiṃ dassetvā vipassanaṃ dassento ‘‘animitta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha animittañca bhāvehīti evaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyena samādhinā samāhitacitto vipassanaṃ bhāvehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Vipassanā hi ‘‘aniccānupassanāñāṇaṃ niccanimittato vimuccatīti animitto vimokkho’’tiādinā nayena rāganimittādīnaṃ vā aggahaṇena animittavohāraṃ labhati. Yathāha –
贤友,我不作意一切相,成就无相心定而安住。贤友,当我这样安住时,随相的识就生起了。巴利
‘‘So khvāhaṃ, āvuso, sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikārā animittaṃ cetosamādhiṃ upasampajja viharāmi. Tassa mayhaṃ, āvuso, iminā vihārena viharato nimittānusāri viññāṇaṃ hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.340).
通过这个无相修习,证得无常想之后,就能逐渐断除、舍弃、抛弃慢随眠。就像经文里说的:“弥醯,对于有无常想的人,无我想就能建立起来;有无我想的人,就能彻底根除我慢。”(《增支部》9.3;《优陀那》31)等等。这就是这段话的意思。
由于对慢的现观,你将寂静地生活。也就是说,通过圣道对慢的现观,经由灭尽、衰灭、舍断、弃舍,你成为寂静的、已熄灭的、清凉的、没有一切热恼的,直到无余涅槃界般涅槃为止。在这期间,你将依空、无相、无愿三种果等至中的任何一种而生活、安住。世尊以阿拉汉果为顶点,结束了这番教导。巴利
Mānānusayamujjahāti imāya animittabhāvanāya aniccasaññaṃ paṭilabhitvā ‘‘aniccasaññino, meghiya, anattasaññā saṇṭhāti, anattasaññī asmimānasamugghātaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti evamādinā (a. ni. 9.3; udā. 31) anukkamena mānānusayaṃ ujjaha pajaha pariccajāhīti attho. Tato mānābhisamayā, upasanto carissasīti athevaṃ ariyamaggena mānassa abhisamayā khayā vayā pahānā paṭinissaggā upasanto nibbuto sītibhūto sabbadarathapariḷāhavirahito yāva anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāsi, tāva suññatānimittāppaṇihitānaṃ aññataraññatarena phalasamāpattivihārena carissasi viharissasīti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
从此之后,“当时,世尊……”等语,是结集者的话。其中,“当时确实”就是“当时确实如此”,意思是“正是这样”。这里其余的部分意思都很清楚。尊者罗睺罗这样受到教诫时,在那些已趋于成熟、能令解脱成熟的法中,于《小罗睺罗教诫经》结束时,与数千天众一同证得阿拉汉果。巴利
Tato paraṃ ‘‘itthaṃ sudaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi saṅgītikārakānaṃ vacanaṃ. Tattha itthaṃ sudanti itthaṃ su idaṃ, evamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva. Evaṃ ovadiyamāno cāyasmā rāhulo paripākagatesu vimuttiparipācaniyesu dhammesu cūḷarāhulovādasuttapariyosāne anekehi devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ arahatte patiṭṭhāsīti.
第12章 《尼拘律劫波经》(又称《鹏耆舍经》)的注释巴利
12. Nigrodhakappasutta-(vaṅgīsasutta)-vaṇṇanā
这部以“如是我闻”开头的经,名叫《尼拘律树经》,也叫《鹏耆舍经》。它的缘起是什么?就是在这部经的序分里已经说过的那个缘起。其中“如是我闻”等部分,意思已经讲过,所以这里不再重复;我们把那些以及同类的已说内容放下,只解释还没讲到的部分。“在阿伽罗婆塔庙”是指在阿罗毗的阿伽塔庙。为什么叫这个名字呢?因为佛陀还没出世的时候,阿伽罗婆、乔达摩等许多塔庙就已经存在了,那些是夜叉、龙等非人的住处。佛陀出世以后,人们毁掉那些塔庙,改建成了精舍,但名字还是沿用旧的。所以说“住在名叫阿伽罗婆塔庙的精舍里”,就是这个意思。“尊者鹏耆舍”这里,“尊者”是亲切的称呼,“鹏耆舍”是那位长老的名字。他的来历,要从他出生说起:据说他是一个游方者的儿子,母亲也是游方女。他懂得一种明咒,靠这种明咒的力量,敲一敲死人的头骨,就能知道那个众生投生到了哪里。人们也常常把去世亲属的头骨从坟场带回来,问他那些人投生到了哪里。他就说“投生到某个地狱了”“投生到人间某处了”。大家对此很惊奇,就送给他很多财物。就这样,他在整个赡部洲出了名。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti nigrodhakappasuttaṃ, ‘‘vaṅgīsasutta’’ntipi vuccati. Kā uppatti? Ayameva yāssa nidāne vuttā. Tattha evaṃ metiādīni vuttatthāneva, yato tāni aññāni ca tathāvidhāni chaḍḍetvā avuttanayameva vaṇṇayissāma. Aggāḷave cetiyeti āḷaviyaṃ aggacetiye. Anuppanne hi bhagavati aggāḷavagotamakādīni anekāni cetiyāni ahesuṃ yakkhanāgādīnaṃ bhavanāni. Tāni uppanne bhagavati manussā vināsetvā vihāre akaṃsu, teneva ca nāmena vohariṃsu. Tato aggāḷavacetiyasaṅkhāte vihāre viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Āyasmato vaṅgīsassāti ettha āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ, vaṅgīsoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. So jātito pabhuti evaṃ veditabbo – so kira paribbājakassa putto paribbājikāya kucchimhi jāto aññataraṃ vijjaṃ jānāti, yassānubhāvena chavasīsaṃ ākoṭetvā sattānaṃ gatiṃ jānāti. Manussāpi sudaṃ attano ñātīnaṃ kālakatānaṃ susānato sīsāni ānetvā taṃ tesaṃ gatiṃ pucchanti. So ‘‘asukaniraye nibbatto, asukamanussaloke’’ti vadati. Te tena vimhitā tassa bahuṃ dhanaṃ denti. Evaṃ so sakalajambudīpe pākaṭo ahosi.
他在十万劫中圆满了波罗蜜,具足大愿,被五千人众围绕,游走于各村镇、城邦和王都之间,最后到了舍卫城。那时,世尊正住在舍卫城。舍卫城的居民午前供完饮食,午后便穿戴整齐、衣着端庄,拿着花、香等物,前往祇园听法。他看见这些人,就问:“这一大群人是要去哪里?”那些人告诉他:“佛陀出现在世间了,他为利益广大众生而说法,我们就是去那里。”他也带着自己的眷属,和他们一同前去,与世尊互相问候之后,坐在一边。于是世尊对他说:“鹏耆舍,听说你懂得一种明,能敲击死人的头骨,说出他们投生到哪里,是吗?”他回答:“是的,乔达摩先生,我知道。”世尊让人取来一个投生地狱者的头骨给他看,他用指甲敲了敲,说:“乔达摩先生,这是投生地狱者的头骨。”就这样,世尊把投生各趣处的头骨一一拿给他看,他也都一一辨认出来并如实报告。接着,世尊又拿一个漏尽者的头骨给他看,他反复敲击,却认不出来。于是世尊对他说:“鹏耆舍,这不是你的境界,这是我的境界,这是漏尽者的头骨。”说完,便诵出这首偈颂——巴利
So satasahassakappaṃ pūritapāramī abhinīhārasampanno pañcahi purisasahassehi parivuto gāmanigamajanapadarājadhānīsu vicaranto sāvatthiṃ anuppatto. Tena ca samayena bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, sāvatthivāsino purebhattaṃ dānaṃ datvā pacchābhattaṃ sunivatthā supārutā pupphagandhādīni gahetvā dhammassavanatthāya jetavanaṃ gacchanti. So te disvā ‘‘mahājanakāyo kuhiṃ gacchatī’’ti pucchi. Athassa te ācikkhiṃsu – ‘‘buddho loke uppanno, so bahujanahitāya dhammaṃ deseti, tattha gacchāmā’’ti. Sopi tehi saddhiṃ saparivāro gantvā bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammoditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Atha naṃ bhagavā āmantesi – ‘‘kiṃ, vaṅgīsa, jānāsi kira tādisaṃ vijjaṃ, yāya sattānaṃ chavasīsāni ākoṭetvā gatiṃ pavedesī’’ti? ‘‘Evaṃ, bho gotama, jānāmī’’ti. Bhagavā niraye nibbattassa sīsaṃ āharāpetvā dassesi, so nakhena ākoṭetvā ‘‘niraye nibbattassa sīsaṃ bho gotamā’’ti āha. Evaṃ sabbagatinibbattānaṃ sīsāni dassesi, sopi tatheva ñatvā ārocesi. Athassa bhagavā khīṇāsavasīsaṃ dassesi, so punappunaṃ ākoṭetvā na aññāsi. Tato bhagavā ‘‘avisayo te ettha vaṅgīsa, mameveso visayo, khīṇāsavasīsa’’nti vatvā imaṃ gāthamabhāsi –
野兽的去处是森林,飞鸟的去处是天空;
诸法的趣向是坏灭,涅槃是阿罗汉的趣向。巴利
‘‘Gatī migānaṃ pavanaṃ, ākāso pakkhinaṃ gati; Vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ, nibbānaṃ arahato gatī’’ti. (pari. 339);
婆耆舍听完这首偈颂后,说道:“乔达摩贤者,请把这种明传给我。”世尊说:“这种明,没出家的人修不成。”他又说:“乔达摩贤者,那就请您先让我出家,或者按您的意思安排之后,再把这种明传给我。”当时尼哥罗达咖巴长老正好在世尊身边,世尊就吩咐他:“那这样,尼哥罗达咖巴,你给他剃度出家。”尼哥罗达咖巴给他剃度后,教了他“皮五种”业处。婆耆舍依次修行,证得无碍解,成了阿罗汉。后来世尊在《增支部》(A. I. 212)中把他列为最上首:“比丘们,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,辩才第一的,就是这位婆耆舍。”巴利
Vaṅgīso gāthaṃ sutvā ‘‘imaṃ me, bho gotama, vijjaṃ dehī’’ti āha. Bhagavā ‘‘nāyaṃ vijjā apabbajitānaṃ sampajjatī’’ti āha. So ‘‘pabbājetvā vā maṃ, bho gotama, yaṃ vā icchasi, taṃ katvā imaṃ vijjaṃ dehī’’ti āha. Tadā ca bhagavato nigrodhakappatthero samīpe hoti, taṃ bhagavā āṇāpesi – ‘‘tena hi, nigrodhakappa, imaṃ pabbājehī’’ti. So taṃ pabbājetvā tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhi. Vaṅgīso anupubbena paṭisambhidāppatto arahā ahosi. Etadagge ca bhagavatā niddiṭṭho ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭibhānavantānaṃ yadidaṃ vaṅgīso’’ti (a. ni. 1.212).
这位具寿鹏耆舍就是这样出家的。他的亲教师因为惯于以“应作、不应作”等方式加以省察,所以得到了“尼哥罗达咖巴”这个称呼。这位长老名叫“咖巴”;又因为他在榕树下证得阿罗汉果,世尊便称他为“尼哥罗达咖巴”。从此以后,比丘们也都这样称呼他。“长老”是指他在教法中达到了坚固。他在阿伽罗婆塔庙,不久之后就在那座塔庙中般涅槃了。“独处宴坐”:因为远离了众人,所以是身体独处;因为心从种种外境退回、收摄安住,“遍寻”:依此方式生起寻思。何以生起?因为不在跟前以及曾见其习性。因为在他般涅槃时他不在跟前,且他曾见过他弄手等旧习,而这种习性由于过去的习惯,非漏尽者有,漏尽者亦有。巴利
Evaṃ samudāgatassa āyasmato vaṅgīsassa upajjhāyo vajjāvajjādiupanijjhāyanena evaṃ laddhavohāro nigrodhakappo nāma thero. Kappoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ, nigrodhamūle pana arahattaṃ adhigatattā ‘‘nigrodhakappo’’ti bhagavatā vutto. Tato naṃ bhikkhūpi evaṃ voharanti. Sāsane thirabhāvaṃ pattoti thero. Aggāḷave cetiye aciraparinibbuto hotīti tasmiṃ cetiye aciraparinibbuto hoti. Rahogatassa paṭisallīnassāti gaṇamhā vūpakaṭṭhattā rahogatassa kāyena, paṭisallīnassa cittena tehi tehi visayehi paṭinivattitvā sallīnassa. Evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādīti iminā ākārena vitakko uppajji. Kasmā pana udapādīti. Asammukhattā diṭṭhāsevanattā ca. Ayañhi tassa parinibbānakāle na sammukhā ahosi, diṭṭhapubbañcānena assa hatthakukkuccādipubbāsevanaṃ, tādisañca akhīṇāsavānampi hoti khīṇāsavānampi pubbaparicayena.
正因为这样,宾头卢·婆罗堕阇在吃完饭后,为了白天安住,就径直去优填王的园林。这是因为他过去曾在那里做国王,在那里享受游乐,由于这种宿世的习惯。牛主长老前往三十三天界中一座空的天宫,这是因为他过去曾在那里做天子,在那里享受游乐,由于这种宿世的习惯。毕陵伽婆蹉用“贱种”这样的话来称呼比丘们,这是因为他连续五百世生为婆罗门,一直那样说话,由于这种宿世的习惯。因此,因为他的亲教师不在场,他也没有亲自侍奉亲教师,他心里就生起了这样的念头:“我的亲教师是已经般涅槃了,还是还没有般涅槃?”这之后的意思就很明白了。“偏袒一肩,把衣整理好”:这里说的“偏袒一肩”,是指把衣重新整理好之后站着。“一肩”这个词,是指披覆左肩站着的人。也就是说,应当这样理解其含义:像披覆左肩站着那样把衣整理好。其余部分意思都很明白。巴利
Tathā hi piṇḍolabhāradvājo pacchābhattaṃ divāvihāratthāya udenassa uyyānameva gacchati pubbe rājā hutvā tattha paricāresīti iminā pubbaparicayena, gavampatitthero tāvatiṃsabhavane suññaṃ devavimānaṃ gacchati devaputto hutvā tattha paricāresīti iminā pubbaparicayena. Pilindavaccho bhikkhū vasalavādena samudācarati abbokiṇṇāni pañca jātisatāni brāhmaṇo hutvā tathā abhāsīti iminā pubbaparicayena. Tasmā asammukhattā diṭṭhāsevanattā cassa evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi ‘‘parinibbuto nu kho me upajjhāyo, udāhu no parinibbuto’’ti. Tato paraṃ uttānatthameva. Ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvāti ettha pana puna saṇṭhāpanena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekaṃsanti ca vāmaṃsaṃ pārupitvā ṭhitassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yato yathā vāmaṃsaṃ pārupitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, tathā cīvaraṃ katvāti evamassattho veditabbo. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
346 “无劣慧”:“劣”是指微小、低劣,不是“劣慧”,而是“无劣慧”,意思就是大慧。“于现法”:就是现前可见的,或者说是就在这个生命体当中。“关于疑”:是关于这类思虑。“已知”:就是清楚明白。“有名声”:就是具足利养和眷属。“已寂灭者”:就是守护自心,或者说心不被烧灼。巴利
346.Anomapaññanti omaṃ vuccati parittaṃ lāmakaṃ, na omapaññaṃ, anomapaññaṃ, mahāpaññanti attho. Diṭṭheva dhammeti paccakkhameva, imasmiṃyeva attabhāveti vā attho. Vicikicchānanti evarūpānaṃ parivitakkānaṃ. Ñātoti pākaṭo. Yasassīti lābhaparivārasampanno abhinibbutattoti guttacitto apariḍayhamānacitto vā.
347 “这是你做的”:因为坐在尼拘律树下,所以被称为“尼拘律咖波”;说“这是你做的”,是世尊按照他自己所观察到的那样来说。不过,世尊并不是因为他坐在那里才那样称呼他,而是因为他在那里证得了阿拉汉果。“婆罗门”:这是就种姓而说的。据说他确实是从婆罗门大富豪家族出家的。“行礼敬”:即行着礼而住。“希求解脱”:即希求名为涅槃的解脱,意思是希求涅槃。“坚固法见者”:这是在称呼世尊。因为涅槃以不可破坏之义称为“坚固法”,而世尊显示此法,所以称他为“坚固法见者”。巴利
347.Tayā katanti nigrodhamūle nisinnattā ‘‘nigrodhakappo’’ti vadatā tayā katanti yathā attanā upalakkheti, tathā bhaṇati. Bhagavā pana na nisinnattā eva taṃ tathā ālapi, apica kho tattha arahattaṃ pattattā. Brāhmaṇassāti jātiṃ sandhāya bhaṇati. So kira brāhmaṇamahāsālakulā pabbajito. Namassaṃ acarīti namassamāno vihāsi. Mutyapekkhoti nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ vimuttiṃ apekkhamāno, nibbānaṃ patthentoti vuttaṃ hoti. Daḷhadhammadassīti bhagavantaṃ ālapati. Daḷhadhammo hi nibbānaṃ abhijjanaṭṭhena, tañca bhagavā dasseti. Tasmā taṃ ‘‘daḷhadhammadassī’’ti āha.
348 “释迦”也是用姓氏来称呼世尊。“我们一切”是把全体大众毫无遗漏地包含进来,显示自己也包括在内而说的。“普眼”也是用一切知智来称呼世尊。“善安住”就是正确地安住,作意之后而安住。“我等”就是我们的。“为听闻”就是为了听闻这个问题的解答。“诸耳”就是耳根。“你是我们的导师,你是无上者”这只是赞叹的话而已。巴利
348.Sakyātipi bhagavantameva kulanāmena ālapati. Mayampi sabbeti niravasesaparisaṃ saṅgaṇhitvā attānaṃ dassento bhaṇati. Samantacakkhūtipi bhagavantameva sabbaññutaññāṇena ālapati. Samavaṭṭhitāti sammā avaṭṭhitā ābhogaṃ katvā ṭhitā. Noti amhākaṃ. Savanāyāti imassa pañhassa veyyākaraṇassavanatthāya. Sotāti sotindriyāni. Tuvaṃ no satthā tvamanuttarosīti thutivacanamattamevetaṃ.
349 他确实断除了疑,也就是断除了不善的疑;不过,这句话是针对那种类似疑的思虑而说的。“请告诉我”:意思是请告诉我那件事——你已经被我这样请求过:“那位释迦族的声闻,我们所有人也都想了知。”在你宣说的时候,请了知那位已经般涅槃的婆罗门,具广大智慧者,就在我们中间说吧;已经了知那位般涅槃的大智慧世尊,请您在我们所有人中间宣说,让我们都能了知。“如同诸天中的千眼帝释天”这一句,只是赞叹的话。此外,他还有这样的意思:就像千眼帝释天在诸天中间,说出那些被他们恭敬领受的话一样,同样地,也请您在我们中间,说出那些被我们恭敬领受的话。巴利
349.Chindevano vicikicchanti akusalavicikicchāya nibbicikiccho so, vicikicchāpatirūpakaṃ pana taṃ parivitakkaṃ sandhāyevamāha. Brūhi metanti brūhi me etaṃ, yaṃ mayā yācitosi ‘‘taṃ sāvakaṃ sakya, mayampi sabbe aññātumicchāmā’’ti, brūvanto ca taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ parinibbutaṃ vedaya bhūripañña majjheva no bhāsa, parinibbutaṃ ñatvā mahāpaññaṃ bhagavā majjheva amhākaṃ sabbesaṃ bhāsa, yathā sabbeva mayaṃ jāneyyāma. Sakkova devāna sahassanettoti idaṃ pana thutivacanameva. Apicassa ayaṃ adhippāyo – yathā sakko sahassanetto devānaṃ majjhe tehi sakkaccaṃ sampaṭicchitavacano bhāsati, evaṃ amhākaṃ majjhe amhehi sampaṭicchitavacano bhāsāti.
350 “凡任何”这句,是为了让世尊生起想要说法的意愿,而一边赞叹世尊一边说出这个偈颂。它的意思是:凡是贪欲等结缚,由于没有断除它们,也就没有断除愚痴和疑惑,所以被称为“愚痴之路”“无明的部分”“疑惑的立足处”。这一切在遇到如来之后,凭借如来说法的力量被彻底摧毁,不再存在。为什么呢?因为这是众人至高无上的眼。由于如来能生起摧毁一切结缚的智慧眼,所以说这是众人至高无上的眼。巴利
350.Ye kecīti imampi gāthaṃ bhagavantaṃ thunantoyeva vattukāmataṃ janetuṃ bhaṇati. Tassattho ye keci abhijjhādayo ganthā tesaṃ appahāne mohavicikicchānaṃ pahānābhāvato ‘‘mohamaggā’’ti ca ‘‘aññāṇapakkhā’’ti ca ‘‘vicikicchaṭṭhānā’’ti ca vuccanti. Sabbe te tathāgataṃ patvā tathāgatassa desanābalena viddhaṃsitā na bhavanti nassanti. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Cakkhuñhi etaṃ paramaṃ narānaṃ, yasmā tathāgato sabbaganthavidhamanapaññācakkhujananato narānaṃ paramaṃ cakkhunti vuttaṃ hoti.
351 “若确实不曾”:他同样是为了引发想赞颂的心情,才诵出这首偈颂。其中,“确实”是表示确定的词。“男子”是指世尊而说的。“具光耀者”是指具足智慧之光的舍利弗等人。这里要表达的意思是:如果世尊不能像东风等风驱散浓云那样,以说法的威力驱散烦恼;那么,正如被浓云遮蔽的世界只有黑暗、一片漆黑,被无明遮蔽的人也只会是黑暗。而如今这些看起来具足光耀的舍利弗等人,他们这些人也不会照耀。巴利
351.No ce hi jātūti imampi gāthaṃ thunantoyeva vattukāmataṃ janentova bhaṇati. Tattha jātūti ekaṃsavacanaṃ. Purisoti bhagavantaṃ sandhāyāha. Jotimantoti paññājotisamannāgatā sāriputtādayo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yadi bhagavā yathā puratthimādibhedo vāto abbhaghanaṃ vihanati, evaṃ desanāvegena kilese na vihaneyya . Tathā yathā abbhaghanena nivuto loko tamova hoti ekandhakāro, evaṃ aññāṇanivutopi tamovassa. Yepi ime dāni jotimanto khāyanti sāriputtādayo, tepi narā na tapeyyunti.
352 “智者”这句,他也是按照前面同样的方式来说的。它的意思是:智者和贤明的人会成为带来光明的人,他们生起智慧之光。所以,我认为那位具足勇猛精进的世尊正是“勇者”,也正认为他是“智者”,也正认为他是“带来光明的人”。因为我们正是因为知道世尊是具观智者、如实照见一切法,才前来亲近他。所以,请在众人中为我们开示劫波,宣说、阐明尼拘律咖波。巴利
352.Dhīrā cāti imampi gāthaṃ purimanayeneva bhaṇati. Tassattho dhīrā ca paṇḍitā purisā pajjotakarā bhavanti, paññāpajjotaṃ uppādenti. Tasmā ahaṃ taṃ vīra padhānavīriyasamannāgato bhagavā tatheva maññe dhīroti ca pajjotakarotveva ca maññāmi. Mayañhi vipassinaṃ sabbadhamme yathābhūtaṃ passantaṃ bhagavantaṃ jānantā eva upāgamumhā, tasmā parisāsu no āvikarohi kappaṃ, nigrodhakappaṃ ācikkha pakāsehīti.
353 世尊啊,请赶快说出话来,迅速讲出话语,讲出悦耳动听、令人欢喜的语言。就像一只金天鹅觅食归来,看见自己出生的湖泊和林丛,便伸长脖子,用红色的喙缓缓游动,发出悦耳的声音,轻轻鸣叫;同样地,您也缓缓地发出妙音,以大人相之一的清净梵音,善巧分别、善加修饰、圆满成就的音声。我们大家都端正站立,心不散乱,聆听您的妙音。巴利
353.Khippanti imampi gāthaṃ purimanayeneva bhaṇati. Tassattho khippaṃ giraṃ eraya lahuṃ acirāyamāno vacanaṃ bhāsa, vagguṃ manoramaṃ bhagavā. Yathā suvaṇṇahaṃso gocarapaṭikkanto jātassaravanasaṇḍaṃ disvā gīvaṃ paggayha uccāretvā rattatuṇḍena saṇikaṃ ataramāno vagguṃ giraṃ nikūjati nicchāreti, evameva tvampi saṇikaṃ nikūja, iminā mahāpurisalakkhaṇaññatarena bindussarena suvikappitena suṭṭhuvikappitena abhisaṅkhatena. Ete mayaṃ sabbeva ujugatā avikkhittamānasā hutvā tava nikūjitaṃ suṇomāti.
354 “已断生死”这句偈,也是按照前面同样的方式来说的。其中,“毫无残留”就是无残留,那无残留。就像入流者等人那样,没有留下任何残余而断除了生死,这里说的就是这个意思。“恳请”是指好好地请求、固定下来。“洗净”是指洗净一切罪恶的人。“我将宣说”是指我将讲说此法。“凡夫没有意愿”是说凡夫确实没有意愿,他们想了解或想说,都无法做到。“如来则有审智之行”是说如来以智慧为先导,进行审察之行。他们想了解或想说的,都能做到——这是这段话的意旨。巴利
354.Pahīnajātimaraṇanti imampi gāthaṃ purimanayeneva bhaṇati. Tattha na sesetīti aseso, taṃ asesaṃ. Sotāpannādayo viya kiñci asesetvā pahīnajātimaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Niggayhāti suṭṭhu yācitvā nibandhitvā. Dhonanti dhutasabbapāpaṃ. Vadessāmīti kathāpessāmi dhammaṃ. Na kāmakāro hi puthujjanānanti puthujjanānameva hi kāmakāro natthi, yaṃ patthenti ñātuṃ vā vattuṃ vā, taṃ na sakkonti. Saṅkheyyakāro ca tathāgatānanti tathāgatānaṃ pana vīmaṃsakāro paññāpubbaṅgamā kiriyā. Te yaṃ patthenti ñātuṃ vā vattuṃ vā, taṃ sakkontīti adhippāyo.
355 现在,为了说明这种可计量的行持,说了“sampannaveyyākaraṇaṃ”这个偈颂。它的意思是:世尊啊,确实,您那在种种场合被完全掌握、被宣说、被开示的、对于具有正直智慧者的圆满记说——比如“珊陀提大臣将升到七棵多罗树那么高而般涅槃”“善觉释迦将在第七天陷入大地”等等——都是如实所见、毫无颠倒的。然后,他更加深深地合掌,说道:这是最后的合掌,至诚敬礼;这又是一次合掌,更加深深地敬礼。请不要因为不说而让我们迷惑,您是明知劫波去向的人。无等智慧者啊——这是对世尊的称呼。巴利
355. Idāni taṃ saṅkheyyakāraṃ pakāsento ‘‘sampannaveyyākaraṇa’’nti gāthamāha. Tassattho – tathā hi tava bhagavā idaṃ samujjupaññassa tattha tattha samuggahītaṃ vuttaṃ pavattitaṃ sampannaveyyākaraṇaṃ, ‘‘santatimahāmatto sattatālamattaṃ abbhuggantvā parinibbāyissati, suppabuddho sakko sattame divase pathaviṃ pavisissatī’’ti evamādīsu aviparītaṃ diṭṭhaṃ. Tato pana suṭṭhutaraṃ añjaliṃ paṇāmetvā āha – ayamañjalī pacchimo suppaṇāmito, ayamaparopi añjalī suṭṭhutaraṃ paṇāmito. Mā mohayīti mā no akathanena mohayi jānaṃ jānanto kappassa gatiṃ. Anomapaññāti bhagavantaṃ ālapati.
356 接着,为了请求不迷惑,他又以另一种方式说了这首偈。其中,“胜劣”是指依世间与出世间而说的美好与不美好,或者远与近。“圣法”是指四谛之法。“知已”是指已经通达之后。“知”是指了知一切应当被了知的事物。“我渴望言语”:就像在暑热中被热所逼、疲惫口渴的人渴望水一样,我这样渴望您的话语。“请降下所闻”:请降下、流出、释放、展现那被称为“所闻”的声处。也有读作“sutassa vassā”的,意思是降下如前所说的声处之雨。巴利
356.Parovaranti imaṃ pana gāthaṃ aparenapi pariyāyena amohanameva yācanto āha. Tattha parovaranti lokiyalokuttaravasena sundarāsundaraṃ dūresantikaṃ vā. Ariyadhammanti catusaccadhammaṃ. Viditvāti paṭivijjhitvā. Jānanti sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ jānanto. Vācābhikaṅkhāmīti yathā ghammani ghammatatto puriso kilanto tasito vāriṃ, evaṃ te vācaṃ abhikaṅkhāmi. Sutaṃ pavassāti sutasaṅkhātaṃ saddāyatanaṃ pavassa pagghara muñca pavattehi. ‘‘Sutassa vassā’’tipi pāṭho, vuttappakārassa saddāyatanassa vuṭṭhiṃ vassāti attho.
357 现在他宣说他所渴望的是什么样的言语,就开示说:巴利
357. Idāni yādisaṃ vācaṃ abhikaṅkhati, taṃ pakāsento –
为了什么目的而修梵行,
迦旃延啊,你那个见解不会落空吧?
他是否已经般涅槃,还是还留有残余的执取?
我们想听他是怎么解脱的。巴利
‘‘Yadatthikaṃ brahmacariyaṃ acarī, Kappāyano kaccissa taṃ amoghaṃ; Nibbāyi so ādu saupādiseso, Yathā vimutto ahu taṃ suṇomā’’ti. –
他说出了这首偈颂。其中,“kappāyana”是以恭敬的方式在说“劫”。问“如何解脱”,是在问:“是以无余涅槃界像无学圣者那样[解脱],还是以有余涅槃界像有学圣者那样[解脱]?”这里剩下的部分很明白。巴利
Gāthamāha . Tattha kappāyanoti kappameva pūjāvasena bhaṇati. Yathā vimuttoti ‘‘kiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā yathā asekkhā, udāhu upādisesāya yathā sekkhā’’ti pucchati. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
358 世尊被这十二首偈颂这样恳请后,就为他解说,说出这样的话:巴利
358. Evaṃ dvādasahi gāthāhi yācito bhagavā taṃ viyākaronto –
他在这里已经断除了对名色的渴爱,世尊这样说。
黑魔之流长久以来一直潜伏着;
我已彻底超越了生与死,
世尊——五者中的最胜者——这样说道。巴利
‘‘Acchecchi taṇhaṃ idha nāmarūpe, (iti bhagavā) Kaṇhassa sotaṃ dīgharattānusayitaṃ; Atāri jātiṃ maraṇaṃ asesaṃ, Iccabravī bhagavā pañcaseṭṭho’’ti. –
他说了这首偈颂。其中,前半句的意思是:凡是在这个名色当中,以欲爱等种种形态存在的渴爱,因为长久以来未曾断除而潜藏为随眠,它也被称为黑魔的“流”。这个属于黑魔的流、长久潜藏在名色中的渴爱,劫者已经把它斩断了。这里“世尊这样说”,是结集者的话。“他完全超越了生与死”,说明他斩断那渴爱之后,完全超越了生与死,以无余涅槃界而般涅槃。“世尊,五者中最胜者,如此说”:被鹏耆舍请问后,世尊这样说了;他是五位最初的弟子——五群比丘中最胜的,或者因为信等五根,或者因为戒等法蕴和极其殊胜的眼而成为最胜者。这也是结集者的话。巴利
Gāthamāha. Tattha purimapadassa tāva attho – yāpi imasmiṃ nāmarūpe kāmataṇhādibhedā taṇhādīgharattaṃ appahīnaṭṭhena anusayitā kaṇhanāmakassa mārassa ‘‘sota’’ntipi vuccati, taṃ kaṇhassa sotabhūtaṃ dīgharattānusayitaṃ idha nāmarūpe taṇhaṃ kappāyano chindīti. Iti bhagavāti idaṃ panettha saṅgītikārānaṃ vacanaṃ. Atāri jātiṃ maraṇaṃ asesanti so taṃ taṇhaṃ chetvā asesaṃ jātimaraṇaṃ atāri, anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyīti dasseti. Iccabravī bhagavā pañcaseṭṭhoti vaṅgīsena puṭṭho bhagavā etadavoca pañcannaṃ paṭhamasissānaṃ pañcavaggiyānaṃ seṭṭho, pañcahi vā saddhādīhi indriyehi, sīlādīhi vā dhammakkhandhehi ativisiṭṭhehi cakkhūhi ca seṭṭhoti saṅgītikārānamevidaṃ vacanaṃ.
359 世尊这样说时,婆耆舍对世尊的教导心生欢喜,便说出“他听闻此”等偈颂。其中,第一首偈颂里的“仙人之第七”:世尊既是仙人,也是第七位;因为从最胜的意义上说,他把毗婆尸、尸弃、毗舍婆、拘留孙、拘那含、迦叶这六位仙人,连同自己合为七位而出现于世,所以称为仙人之第七,这是以呼唤的口吻而说。“他不欺诳我”:因为他已般涅槃,所以对于期望他般涅槃的我,他没有欺诳、没有违背。这里其余的文句已经很清楚。巴利
359. Evaṃ vutte bhagavato bhāsitamabhinandamānaso vaṅgīso ‘‘esa sutvā’’tiādigāthāyo āha. Tattha paṭhamagāthāya isisattamāti bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena vipassīsikhīvessabhūkakusandhakoṇāgamanakassapanāmake cha isayo attanā saha satta karonto pātubhūtotipi isisattamo, taṃ ālapanto āha. Na maṃ vañcesīti yasmā parinibbuto, tasmā tassa parinibbutabhāvaṃ icchantaṃ maṃ na vañcesi, na visaṃvādesīti attho. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
360 在第二首偈颂中,因为他住于对解脱的期待,所以就这一点说“如说而行,他是佛陀的弟子”。“死魔之网”:指遍布于三界轮回中的魔罗的渴爱之网。“具幻术者”:指具有众多幻术的人。也有人读作“tathā māyāvino”,他们的意思是:那个以种种幻术多次来到世尊面前的人,正是这样一位具幻术者。巴利
360. Dutiyagāthāya yasmā mutyapekkho vihāsi, tasmā taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yathāvādī tathākārī, ahu buddhassa sāvako’’ti. Maccuno jālaṃ tatanti tebhūmakavaṭṭe vitthataṃ mārassa taṇhājālaṃ. Māyāvinoti bahumāyassa. ‘‘Tathā māyāvino’’tipi keci paṭhanti, tesaṃ yo anekāhi māyāhi anekakkhattumpi bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkami, tassa tathā māyāvinoti adhippāyo.
361 第三首偈颂里的“始”,指的是原因。“取”指的是轮回。因为轮回从“应当被执取”这个意义上,在这里被称为“取”;而那位名叫咖巴的人,已经看见了这“取”的起始——也就是分为无明、渴爱等种类的原因。应当这样解说,这是按照世尊的意趣而说的。“已越过啊”:就是已经超越。“死域”:死魔在这里安住,所以叫死域,这是三界轮回的别名。那极难渡过的死域,他已经越过了啊——他生起这样的智慧而说出赞叹。这里其余的内容都很明显。巴利
361. Tatiyagāthāya ādīti kāraṇaṃ. Upādānassāti vaṭṭassa. Vaṭṭañhi upādātabbaṭṭhena idha ‘‘upādāna’’nti vuttaṃ, tasseva upādānassa ādiṃ avijjātaṇhādibhedaṃ kāraṇaṃ addasa kappoti evaṃ vattuṃ vaṭṭati bhagavāti adhippāyena vadati. Accagā vatāti atikkanto vata. Maccudheyyanti maccu ettha dhiyatīti maccudheyyaṃ, tebhūmakavaṭṭassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ suduttaraṃ maccudheyyaṃ accagā vatāti vedajāto bhaṇati. Sesamettha pākaṭamevāti.
13. 《正游行经》(即《大集会经》)的注释巴利
13. Sammāparibbājanīyasutta-(mahāsamayasutta)-vaṇṇanā
362 “我问广慧的牟尼”这一段,是《正游行经》,因为是在大集会那天说的,所以也叫《大集会经》。它的缘起是什么?是以提问为缘的缘起。化现的佛陀问过之后,世尊才说了这部经,连同那个提问一起,就称为《正游行经》。这里只是简略说说。至于详细展开,古师们是从释迦族和拘利族的起源开始讲的。巴利
362.Pucchāmimuniṃ pahūtapaññanti sammāparibbājanīyasuttaṃ, ‘‘mahāsamayasutta’’ntipi vuccati mahāsamayadivase kathitattā. Kā uppatti? Pucchāvasikā uppatti. Nimmitabuddhena hi puṭṭho bhagavā imaṃ suttamabhāsi, taṃ saddhiṃ pucchāya ‘‘sammāparibbājanīyasutta’’nti vuccati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana sākiyakoliyānaṃ uppattito pabhuti porāṇehi vaṇṇīyati.
这里先讲一下传承的次第:据说,劫初之王大选王有一个儿子叫罗阇。罗阇的儿子是婆罗罗阇,婆罗罗阇的儿子是迦利耶纳,迦利耶纳的儿子是婆罗迦利耶纳,婆罗迦利耶纳的儿子是曼陀多,曼陀多的儿子是婆罗曼陀多,婆罗曼陀多的儿子是布萨,布萨的儿子是婆罗,婆罗的儿子是伍巴婆罗,伍巴婆罗的儿子是摩伽提婆。摩伽提婆一脉相承下来,共有八万四千位刹帝利。在他们之后,甘蔗王族出了三代。其中第三代甘蔗王有五位王后:哈塔、基达、姜图、迦利尼和毗舍佉。每位王后各有五百名侍女随侍。最年长的那位王后生了四个儿子——奥迦穆卡、卡拉干度、哈提尼卡、西尼普罗;还有五个女儿——毕雅、苏毕雅、阿难达、毗吉达、毗吉达西那。她就这样生了九个孩子之后去世了。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ uddesamaggavaṇṇanā – paṭhamakappikānaṃ kira rañño mahāsammatassa rojo nāma putto ahosi. Rojassa vararojo, vararojassa kalyāṇo, kalyāṇassa varakalyāṇo, varakalyāṇassa mandhātā, mandhātussa varamandhātā, varamandhātussa uposatho, uposathassa varo, varassa upavaro, upavarassa maghadevo, maghadevassa paramparā caturāsīti khattiyasahassāni ahesuṃ. Tesaṃ parato tayo okkākavaṃsā ahesuṃ. Tesu tatiyaokkākassa pañca mahesiyo ahesuṃ – hatthā, cittā, jantu, jālinī, visākhāti. Ekekissā pañca pañca itthisatāni parivārā. Sabbajeṭṭhāya cattāro puttā – okkāmukho, karakaṇḍu, hatthiniko, sinipuroti; pañca dhītaro – piyā, suppiyā, ānandā, vijitā, vijitasenāti. Evaṃ sā nava putte labhitvā kālamakāsi.
这时,国王又娶来一位年轻貌美的王族少女,立她为正宫王后。她也生了一个儿子,取名姜图。王子出生第五天,她给王子打扮好,带去见国王。国王很高兴,就答应给王后一个恩惠。她和亲族商量后,替儿子请求继承王位。国王说:“你这下贱女人,是想害我的儿子们吗?”没有答应。她一次又一次私下讨国王欢心,还说“大王,说假话是不应该的”这一类话,再三请求。于是国王把儿子们叫来,对他们说:“孩子们,我看见你们的小弟姜图王子,一时冲动就答应了他母亲一个恩惠。她想把王位转到她儿子手里。你们等我死后,再回来治理国家吧。”说完,就让他们带着八位大臣离开。王子们带着姐妹,率领四支军队出了城。许多人心想:“王子们等父王去世后会回来治国,我们跟去侍奉他们吧。”于是纷纷跟随。第一天,队伍绵延约一由旬;第二天约两由旬;第三天约三由旬。王子们心想:“这支队伍太庞大了。如果我们去攻打某个邻国、占领它的国土,那里也容不下我们。何必靠压迫别人来得到王位呢?赡部洲很大,我们不如在森林里建一座城。”于是他们朝雪山方向走去。巴利
Atha rājā aññaṃ daharaṃ abhirūpaṃ rājadhītaraṃ ānetvā aggamahesiṭṭhāne ṭhapesi. Sāpi jantuṃ nāma ekaṃ puttaṃ vijāyi. Taṃ jantukumāraṃ pañcamadivase alaṅkaritvā rañño dassesi. Rājā tuṭṭho mahesiyā varaṃ adāsi. Sā ñātakehi saddhiṃ mantetvā puttassa rajjaṃ yāci. Rājā ‘‘nassa vasali, mama puttānaṃ antarāyamicchasī’’ti nādāsi. Sā punappunaṃ raho rājānaṃ paritosetvā ‘‘na, mahārāja, musāvādo vaṭṭatī’’tiādīni vatvā yācati eva. Atha rājā putte āmantesi – ‘‘ahaṃ, tātā, tumhākaṃ kaniṭṭhaṃ jantukumāraṃ disvā tassa mātuyā sahasā varaṃ adāsiṃ. Sā puttassa rajjaṃ pariṇāmetuṃ icchati. Tumhe mamaccayena āgantvā rajjaṃ kāreyyāthā’’ti aṭṭhahi amaccehi saddhiṃ uyyojesi. Te bhaginiyo ādāya caturaṅginiyā senāya nagarā nikkhamiṃsu. ‘‘Kumārā pituaccayena āgantvā rajjaṃ kāressanti, gacchāma ne upaṭṭhahāmā’’ti cintetvā bahū manussā anubandhiṃsu. Paṭhamadivase yojanamattā senā ahosi, dutiyadivase dviyojanamattā, tatiyadivase tiyojanamattā. Kumārā cintesuṃ – ‘‘mahā ayaṃ balakāyo, sace mayaṃ kañci sāmantarājānaṃ akkamitvā janapadaṃ gaṇhissāma, sopi no na pahossati, kiṃ paresaṃ pīḷaṃ katvā laddharajjena, mahā jambudīpo, araññe nagaraṃ māpessāmā’’ti himavantābhimukhā agamiṃsu.
在那里寻找适合建城的地方时,雪山中有一位名叫迦毗罗的大苦行仙人,住在池塘岸边的大沙迦树林里。他们来到这位仙人居住的地方。仙人看见他们,问明来意,听完整个经过后,对他们生起了怜悯。据说他懂得一种叫“地网”的明咒,凭这个能看见上方八十肘高的空中和下方地里的好坏之处。那时,在某个地方,野猪之类的野兽把狮子、老虎等吓得逃跑,青蛙、老鼠把蛇吓得害怕。他看到这些,认定“这块地方是大地之巅”,就在那里建了庵舍。然后他对王子们说:“如果你们用我的名字来建城,我就把这块地方给你们。”王子们答应了。仙人说:“站在这块地方上,就算是旃陀罗的儿子,也能凭力量胜过转轮王。”又说:“在我的庵舍处建起国王的宫宅,然后建城吧。”他把那块地方给了他们,自己在不远处的山脚下另建庵舍住下。于是王子们在那里建了城,因为建在迦毗罗住过的地方,就取名为“迦毗罗卫”,并在那里定居下来。巴利
Tattha nagaramāpanokāsaṃ pariyesamānā himavati kapilo nāma ghoratapo tāpaso paṭivasati pokkharaṇitīre mahāsākasaṇḍe, tassa vasanokāsaṃ gatā. So te disvā pucchitvā sabbaṃ pavattiṃ sutvā tesu anukampaṃ akāsi. So kira bhummajālaṃ nāma vijjaṃ jānāti, yāya uddhaṃ asītihatthe ākāse ca heṭṭhā bhūmiyañca guṇadose passati. Athekasmiṃ padese sūkaramigā sīhabyagghādayo tāsetvā paripātenti, maṇḍūkamūsikā sappe bhiṃsāpenti. So te disvā ‘‘ayaṃ bhūmippadeso pathavīagga’’nti tasmiṃ padese assamaṃ māpesi. Tato so rājakumāre āha – ‘‘sace mama nāmena nagaraṃ karotha, demi vo imaṃ okāsa’’nti. Te tathā paṭijāniṃsu. Tāpaso ‘‘imasmiṃ okāse ṭhatvā caṇḍālaputtopi cakkavattiṃ balena atisetī’’ti vatvā ‘‘assame rañño gharaṃ māpetvā nagaraṃ māpethā’’ti taṃ okāsaṃ datvā sayaṃ avidūre pabbatapāde assamaṃ katvā vasi. Tato kumārā tattha nagaraṃ māpetvā kapilassa vutthokāse katattā ‘‘kapilavatthū’’ti nāmaṃ āropetvā tattha nivāsaṃ kappesuṃ.
这时,大臣们心想:“这些王子已经长大成人了,如果他们的父亲还在身边,一定会为他们操办婚嫁。现在这个担子就落在我们身上了。”于是他们跟王子们商量。王子们说:“我们找不到跟我们身份相当的刹帝利女子,也找不到能跟我们的姐妹相配的刹帝利青年。我们不能让血统混杂。”因为害怕血统混杂,他们就把大姐放在母亲的位置上,然后跟其余的姐妹一起生活。他们的父亲听说了这件事,发出这样的感叹:“这些王子真是释迦啊!这些王子真是最上的释迦啊!”以上就是释迦族的由来。世尊也这样说过——巴利
Atha amaccā ‘‘ime kumārā vayappattā, yadi nesaṃ pitā santike bhaveyya, so āvāhavivāhaṃ kāreyya. Idāni pana amhākaṃ bhāro’’ti cintetvā kumārehi saddhiṃ mantesuṃ. Kumārā ‘‘amhākaṃ sadisā khattiyadhītaro na passāma, tāsampi bhaginīnaṃ sadise khattiyakumāre, jātisambhedañca na karomā’’ti. Te jātisambhedabhayena jeṭṭhabhaginiṃ mātuṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā avasesāhi saṃvāsaṃ kappesuṃ. Tesaṃ pitā taṃ pavattiṃ sutvā ‘‘sakyā vata, bho kumārā, paramasakyā vata, bho kumārā’’ti udānaṃ udānesi. Ayaṃ tāva sakyānaṃ uppatti. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
阿摩昼,那时,甘蔗王把大臣和廷臣们叫来,问:“贤者们,现在王子们住在哪里?” “大王,在雪山山坡的一个池塘边,有一大片柚木树林,王子们现在正住在那里。他们因为害怕血统混杂,就和自己的姐妹同居婚配。” 阿摩昼,于是甘蔗王发出感叹:“这些王子真能干啊,真是最能干的王子啊!” 阿摩昼,从那时起就有了“释迦族”这个名称,而甘蔗王就是释迦族的始祖。巴利
‘‘Atha kho, ambaṭṭha, rājā okkāko amacce pārisajje āmantesi – ‘kahaṃ nu kho, bho, etarahi kumārā sammantī’ti. Atthi, deva, himavantapasse pokkharaṇiyā tīre mahāsākasaṇḍo, tatthetarahi kumārā sammanti. Te jātisambhedabhayā sakāhi bhaginīhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappentīti. Atha kho, ambaṭṭha, rājā okkāko udānaṃ udānesi – ‘sakyā vata, bho kumārā, paramasakyā vata, bho kumārā’ti, tadagge kho pana , ambaṭṭha, sakyā paññāyanti, so ca sakyānaṃ pubbapuriso’’ti (dī. ni. 1.267).
从那以后,他们的大姐得了麻风病,身上长出了像紫矿花一样的斑块。王子们心想:“跟她坐在一起、一起吃饭等等,这病也会传染到我们身上。”于是他们假装去园林游玩,把她抬上车,进入森林,叫人挖了一个池塘,连吃的喝的一起把她丢进去,上面盖上木板,再铺上泥土,然后就走了。那时候,还有一个叫罗摩的国王,也得了麻风病,被后宫和舞女们嫌弃。他因此心生厌离,把王位交给长子,自己进入森林,在那里吃树叶、根茎和果实。没过多久,他的病就好了,身体变成金色。他四处游走时,看见一棵巨大的空心树,就把树心清理出十六肘大的空间,开了门窗,绑上梯子,住在里面。他烧起炭火,夜里躺着,听着各种悦耳和不悦耳的声音。他仔细分辨:“那个地方是狮子在叫,那个地方是老虎在叫。”天一亮,他就去那里,取回吃剩的肉,煮了来吃。巴利
Tato nesaṃ jeṭṭhabhaginiyā kuṭṭharogo udapādi, koviḷārapupphasadisāni gattāni ahesuṃ. Rājakumārā ‘‘imāya saddhiṃ ekato nisajjaṭṭhānabhojanādīni karontānampi upari esa rogo saṅkamatī’’ti cintetvā uyyānakīḷaṃ gacchantā viya taṃ yāne āropetvā araññaṃ pavisitvā pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇāpetvā taṃ tattha khādanīyabhojanīyehi saddhiṃ pakkhipitvā upari padaraṃ paṭicchādāpetvā paṃsuṃ datvā pakkamiṃsu. Tena ca samayena rāmo nāma rājā kuṭṭharogī orodhehi ca nāṭakehi ca jigucchiyamāno tena saṃvegena jeṭṭhaputtassa rajjaṃ datvā araññaṃ pavisitvā tattha paṇṇamūlaphalāni paribhuñjanto nacirasseva arogo suvaṇṇavaṇṇo hutvā, ito cito ca vicaranto mahantaṃ susirarukkhaṃ disvā tassabbhantare soḷasahatthappamāṇaṃ taṃ kolāpaṃ sodhetvā, dvārañca vātapānañca katvā nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā tattha vāsaṃ kappesi. So aṅgārakaṭāhe aggiṃ katvā rattiṃ vissarañca sussarañca suṇanto sayati. So ‘‘asukasmiṃ padese sīho saddamakāsi, asukasmiṃ byaggho’’ti sallakkhetvā pabhāte tattha gantvā vighāsamaṃsaṃ ādāya pacitvā khādati.
有一天,他在破晓时分生起火,坐在那里。就在那时,一只老虎闻到那位公主的气味,把她所在的地方刨开,在铺着木板的地方挖出一个洞。公主从那个洞里看见老虎,吓得尖叫起来。他听到那个声音,辨认出“这是女人的声音”,天亮后就到那里去,问道:“这里是谁?”她回答:“是个女人,主人。”“出来吧。”“我不出来。”“为什么?”“我是刹帝利家的女儿。”即使被这样埋在坑里,她仍然端着架子。他问清了全部经过,就说:“我也是刹帝利。”并说明了自己的出身,然后说:“现在来吧,你就像倒进牛奶里的酥油一样,已经融合了。”她说:“主人,我得了麻风病,出不来。”他说:“我现在已经有经验了,能治好你。”于是放下梯子,把她拉上来,带回自己住的地方,把自己用过的药给她用,不久就把她治好了,让她变得肤色如金。他和她一起生活。她第一次同房就怀了孕,生下两个儿子;又生两个,这样一共生了十六次。于是他们成了三十二个兄弟。他们渐渐长大,父亲就教他们学会了各种技艺。巴利
Athekadivasaṃ so paccūsasamaye aggiṃ jāletvā nisīdi. Tena ca samayena tassā rājadhītāya gandhaṃ ghāyitvā byaggho taṃ padesaṃ khaṇitvā padaratthare vivaramakāsi. Tena vivarena sā byagghaṃ disvā bhītā vissaramakāsi. So taṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘itthisaddo eso’’ti ca sallakkhetvā pātova tattha gantvā ‘‘ko etthā’’ti āha. ‘‘Mātugāmo sāmī’’ti. ‘‘Nikkhamā’’ti. ‘‘Na nikkhamāmī’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ kāraṇā’’ti? ‘‘Khattiyakaññā aha’’nti. Evaṃ sobbhe nikhātāpi mānameva karoti. So sabbaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘ahampi khattiyo’’ti jātiṃ ācikkhitvā ‘‘ehi dāni khīre pakkhittasappi viya jāta’’nti āha. Sā ‘‘kuṭṭharoginīmhi sāmi, na sakkā nikkhamitu’’nti āha. So ‘‘katakammo dāni ahaṃ sakkā tikicchitu’’nti nisseṇiṃ datvā taṃ uddharitvā attano vasanokāsaṃ netvā sayaṃ paribhuttabhesajjāni eva datvā nacirasseva arogaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇamakāsi. So tāya saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappesi. Sā paṭhamasaṃvāseneva gabbhaṃ gaṇhitvā dve putte vijāyi, punapi dveti evaṃ soḷasakkhattuṃ vijāyi. Evaṃ te dvattiṃsa bhātaro ahesuṃ. Te anupubbena vuḍḍhippatte pitā sabbasippāni sikkhāpesi.
有一天,一位住在罗摩王城的居民到山里寻找宝石,来到了那个地方。他一看见国王,就认出了他,说道:“大王,我认得您。”国王问他:“你从哪里来?”他回答:“从王城来,大王。”于是国王向他询问了城中的种种情况。他们正这样交谈时,那些孩子走了过来。那人看见他们后问道:“大王,这些是谁?”国王说:“朋友,是我的儿子。”那人便说:“大王,如今有三十二位王子围绕着您,您为什么还住在林中呢?请回去治理国家吧!”国王说:“朋友,不用了,我在这里很快乐。”那人心想“这下有了回去禀报的话头”,便回到城里,把情况告诉了国王的儿子。王子心想“我要把父王接回来”,于是率领四支军队来到那里,用种种方式恳请父王。父王仍然说:“够了,孩子,我在这里很快乐。”始终不肯回去。于是王子心想:“既然父王不愿回来,那我就在这里为他建一座城吧。”他便把那棵空心树挖掉,在原地建造房屋,规划并营建了一座城市。因为这座城是在拔除空心树的地方建成的,所以叫“空心树城”;又因为建在老虎往来的路上,所以又叫“虎道”。赋予这两个名称之后,王子便离开了。巴利
Athekadivasaṃ eko rāmarañño nagaravāsī pabbate ratanāni gavesanto taṃ padesaṃ āgato rājānaṃ disvā aññāsi. ‘‘Jānāmahaṃ, deva, tumhe’’ti āha. ‘‘Kuto tvaṃ āgatosī’’ti ca tena puṭṭho ‘‘nagarato devā’’ti āha. Tato naṃ rājā sabbaṃ pavattiṃ pucchi. Evaṃ tesu samullapamānesu te dārakā āgamiṃsu. So te disvā ‘‘ime ke devā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Puttā me bhaṇe’’ti. ‘‘Imehi dāni, deva, dvattiṃsakumārehi parivuto vane kiṃ karissasi, ehi rajjamanusāsā’’ti? ‘‘Alaṃ, bhaṇe, idheva sukha’’nti. So ‘‘laddhaṃ dāni me kathāpābhata’’nti nagaraṃ gantvā rañño puttassārocesi. Rañño putto ‘‘pitaraṃ ānessāmī’’ti caturaṅginiyā senāya tattha gantvā nānappakārehi pitaraṃ yāci. Sopi ‘‘alaṃ, tāta kumāra, idheva sukha’’nti neva icchi. Tato rājaputto ‘‘na dāni rājā āgantuṃ icchati, handassa idheva nagaraṃ māpemī’’ti cintetvā taṃ kolarukkhaṃ uddharitvā gharaṃ katvā nagaraṃ māpetvā kolarukkhaṃ apanetvā katattā ‘‘kolanagara’’nti ca byagghapathe katattā ‘‘byagghapajja’’nti cāti dve nāmāni āropetvā agamāsi.
后来,王子们到了成年的年纪,母亲便吩咐他们说:孩子们,住在迦毗罗卫的释迦族人是你们的舅舅,你们去娶他们的女儿吧。于是,每当刹帝利少女们去河里嬉戏的那天,他们就赶去守住渡口,报上自己的名字,各自把看中的公主带走。释迦族的国王们听说后,说:算了,他们本来就是我们的亲戚。便不再作声。这就是拘利族的由来。巴利
Tato vayappatte kumāre mātā āṇāpesi – ‘‘tātā, tumhākaṃ kapilavatthuvāsino sakyā mātulā honti, dhītaro nesaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti. Te yaṃ divasaṃ khattiyakaññāyo nadīkīḷanaṃ gacchanti, taṃ divasaṃ gantvā nadītitthaṃ uparundhitvā nāmāni sāvetvā patthitā patthitā rājadhītaro gahetvā agamaṃsu. Sakyarājāno sutvā ‘‘hotu bhaṇe, amhākaṃ ñātakā evā’’ti tuṇhī ahesuṃ. Ayaṃ koliyānaṃ uppatti.
释迦族和拘利族就这样互相通婚,传承下来的族谱一直延续到狮子颊王,这应当详细地了解——据说狮子颊王有五个儿子:净饭、阿蜜多丹那、头楼丹那、释拘丹那、须拘丹那。其中,净饭王治理国政时,他的王后是阿拏罗王的女儿摩耶天后。那时,圆满具足波罗蜜的大士,按照《本生因缘》中所说的方式,从兜率天离开后,入摩耶天后的母胎结生,逐渐完成了大出家,证得正自觉,转动殊胜的法轮。之后,他逐渐来到迦毗罗卫,使净饭大王等人安立于圣果,然后出发到各地游化;又在另一个时候返回,与一千五百位比丘一起,住在迦毗罗卫的尼拘律园中。巴利
Evaṃ tesaṃ sākiyakoliyānaṃ aññamaññaṃ āvāhavivāhaṃ karontānaṃ āgato vaṃso yāva sīhahanurājā, tāva vitthārato veditabbo – sīhahanurañño kira pañca puttā ahesuṃ – suddhodano, amitodano, dhotodano, sakkodano, sukkodanoti. Tesu suddhodane rajjaṃ kārayamāne tassa pajāpatiyā añjanarañño dhītāya mahāmāyādeviyā kucchimhi pūritapāramī mahāpuriso jātakanidāne vuttanayena tusitapurā cavitvā paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā anupubbena katamahābhinikkhamano sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhitvā pavattitavaradhammacakko anukkamena kapilavatthuṃ gantvā suddhodanamahārājādayo ariyaphale patiṭṭhāpetvā janapadacārikaṃ pakkamitvā punapi aparena samayena paccāgantvā pannarasahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ kapilavatthusmiṃ viharati nigrodhārāme.
当时,世尊正住在那里,释迦族和拘利族因为用水的事起了争执。事情是怎样的呢?据说,在他们两族的迦毗罗城和拘利城之间,有一条叫罗希尼的河。这条河有时水少,有时水大。水少的时候,释迦族人和拘利族人各自筑起堤坝,把水引到自己田里灌溉。有一天,他们的人正在筑坝,互相争吵起来,用出身互相辱骂:“你们王族跟自家姐妹同住,像鸡、狗、豺狼之类的畜生一样;你们王族住在空心树里,像鬼怪、蜥蜴一样。”就这样用出身辱骂之后,各自禀报了自己的国王。国王们听了大怒,整军备战,来到罗希尼河边。就这样,像大海一样的大军摆开了阵势。巴利
Tattha viharante ca bhagavati sākiyakoliyānaṃ udakaṃ paṭicca kalaho ahosi. Kathaṃ? Nesaṃ kira ubhinnampi kapilapurakoliyapurānaṃ antare rohiṇī nāma nadī pavattati. Sā kadāci appodakā hoti, kadāci mahodakā. Appodakakāle setuṃ katvā sākiyāpi koliyāpi attano attano sassapāyanatthaṃ udakaṃ ānenti. Tesaṃ manussā ekadivasaṃ setuṃ karontā aññamaññaṃ bhaṇḍantā ‘‘are tumhākaṃ rājakulaṃ bhaginīhi saddhiṃ saṃvāsaṃ kappesi kukkuṭasoṇasiṅgālāditiracchānā viya, tumhākaṃ rājakulaṃ susirarukkhe vāsaṃ kappesi pisācillikā viyā’’ti evaṃ jātivādena khuṃsetvā attano attano rājūnaṃ ārocesuṃ. Te kuddhā yuddhasajjā hutvā rohiṇīnadītīraṃ sampattā. Evaṃ sāgarasadisaṃ balaṃ aṭṭhāsi.
这时,世尊心想:“亲族们正在争斗,来吧,我要去阻止他们。”于是从空中飞来,站在两支军队中间。也有人认为,世尊是忆念到这件事后,从舍卫城来的。这样站定之后,世尊宣说了《执杖经》。众人听了之后,全都生起警醒,丢下武器,向世尊顶礼而立,并敷设了贵重的座位。世尊从空中降下,坐在敷设好的座位上,讲了以“手持斧头的人”开头的《幡动本生》,又讲了以“我礼敬你,大象”开头的《鹌鹑本生》。巴利
Atha bhagavā ‘‘ñātakā kalahaṃ karonti, handa, ne vāressāmī’’ti ākāsenāgantvā dvinnaṃ senānaṃ majjhe aṭṭhāsi. Tampi āvajjetvā sāvatthito āgatoti eke. Evaṃ ṭhatvā ca pana attadaṇḍasuttaṃ (su. ni. 941 ādayo) abhāsi. Taṃ sutvā sabbe saṃvegappattā āvudhāni chaḍḍetvā bhagavantaṃ namassamānā aṭṭhaṃsu, mahagghañca āsanaṃ paññāpesuṃ. Bhagavā oruyha paññattāsane nisīditvā ‘‘kuṭhārīhattho puriso’’tiādikaṃ phandanajātakaṃ (jā. 1.13.14), ‘‘vandāmi taṃ kuñjarā’’tiādikaṃ laṭukikajātakaṃ (jā. 1.5.39).
鸟儿们和合欢喜地飞去,衔着网。
等他们吵起来的时候,他们就会落到我的手里。巴利
‘‘Sammodamānā gacchanti, jālamādāya pakkhino; Yadā te vivadissanti, tadā ehinti me vasa’’nti. (jā. 1.1.33) –
世尊讲完这部《鹌鹑本生经》后,为了说明他们长久以来一直是亲戚关系,又讲了这部《大族系经》。他们听了以后想:“原来我们在过去生中一直都是亲戚啊!”于是生起了极大的信心。接着,释迦族拿出两百五十位王子,拘利族也拿出两百五十位王子,一共五百位王子,交给世尊做随从。世尊看到他们过去的因缘,就说:“来吧,比丘们。”他们全都凭神通变化出具备八种资具的出家相,腾空而起,来到世尊面前,礼敬之后站在一旁。世尊带着他们去了大林。他们的妻子们派了使者来,她们用种种方式引诱他们,他们心里就生起了厌离。世尊知道他们心生厌离后,为了消除他们的不乐,便为他们示现雪山,在那里用《拘那罗本生经》的故事问道:“比丘们,你们以前见过雪山吗?”他们说:“没有,世尊。”世尊说:“来吧,比丘们,看看吧。”世尊用自己的神通力带着他们在空中飞行,指示种种山说:“这是金山,这是银山,这是宝珠山。”然后降落在拘那罗湖的雌黄石上。接着世尊决意:“愿雪山中所有四足、多足等各类畜生道的众生都前来,并且所有众生后面都跟着拘那罗鸟。”那些众生前来时,世尊按它们的种类、名字、叫声一一描述给他们看:“比丘们,这些是天鹅,这些是鹤,这些是鸳鸯,这些是杜鹃,这些是象鼻鸟,这些是莲花鸟。”巴利
Imaṃ vaṭṭakajātakañca kathetvā puna tesaṃ cirakālappavattaṃ ñātibhāvaṃ dassento imaṃ mahāvaṃsaṃ kathesi. Te ‘‘pubbe kira mayaṃ ñātakā evā’’ti ativiya pasīdiṃsu. Tato sakyā aḍḍhateyyakumārasate, koliyā aḍḍhateyyakumārasateti pañca kumārasate bhagavato parivāratthāya adaṃsu. Bhagavā tesaṃ pubbahetuṃ disvā ‘‘etha bhikkhavo’’ti āha. Te sabbe iddhiyā nibbattaaṭṭhaparikkhārayuttā ākāse abbhuggantvā āgamma bhagavantaṃ vanditvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Bhagavā te ādāya mahāvanaṃ agamāsi. Tesaṃ pajāpatiyo dūte pāhesuṃ, te tāhi nānappakārehi palobhiyamānā ukkaṇṭhiṃsu. Bhagavā tesaṃ ukkaṇṭhitabhāvaṃ ñatvā himavantaṃ dassetvā tattha kuṇālajātakakathāya (jā. 2.21.289 kuṇālajātakaṃ) tesaṃ anabhiratiṃ vinodetukāmo āha – ‘‘diṭṭhapubbo vo, bhikkhave, himavā’’ti? ‘‘Na bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Etha, bhikkhave, pekkhathā’’ti attano iddhiyā te ākāsena nento ‘‘ayaṃ suvaṇṇapabbato, ayaṃ rajatapabbato, ayaṃ maṇipabbato’’ti nānappakāre pabbate dassetvā kuṇāladahe manosilātale paccuṭṭhāsi. Tato ‘‘himavante sabbe catuppadabahuppadādibhedā tiracchānagatā pāṇā āgacchantu, sabbesañca pacchato kuṇālasakuṇo’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Āgacchante ca te jātināmaniruttivasena vaṇṇento ‘‘ete, bhikkhave, haṃsā, ete koñcā , ete cakkavākā, karavīkā, hatthisoṇḍakā, pokkharasātakā’’ti tesaṃ dassesi.
他们看得心里惊奇,只见在一切众生中最后走来的,是一只拘那罗鸟。两只雌鸟用喙叼住一根棍子,它自己坐在棍子正中间,身边有上千只雌鸟围绕。他们看到这一幕,生起稀有难得之心,便对世尊说:尊者,难道世尊您过去也曾是这里的拘那罗王吗?世尊说:是的,比丘们,正是我成就了这拘那罗族的传承。因为在过去,我们四个人曾住在这里:那罗陀提婆罗是仙人,阿难是秃鹫王,满面是弗沙杜鹃,而我是拘那罗鸟。于是世尊完整地讲述了《大拘那罗本生经》。听完之后,那些比丘因为忆念前妻而生起的厌离不乐便止息了。接着,世尊又为他们讲说四圣谛。说法结束时,他们中证果最浅的成为入流者,证果最高的成为不还者,没有一个还是凡夫或阿拉汉。之后,世尊带着他们,再次降落到大林。而这次回来时,那些比丘都是凭自己的神通回来的。巴利
Te vimhitahadayā passantā sabbapacchato āgacchantaṃ dvīhi dijakaññāhi mukhatuṇḍakena ḍaṃsitvā gahitakaṭṭhavemajjhe nisinnaṃ sahassadijakaññāparivāraṃ kuṇālasakuṇaṃ disvā acchariyabbhutacittajātā bhagavantaṃ āhaṃsu – ‘‘kacci, bhante, bhagavāpi idha kuṇālarājā bhūtapubbo’’ti? ‘‘Āma, bhikkhave, mayāvesa kuṇālavaṃso kato. Atīte hi mayaṃ cattāro janā idha vasimhā – nārado devilo isi, ānando gijjharājā, puṇṇamukho phussakokilo, ahaṃ kuṇālo sakuṇo’’ti sabbaṃ mahākuṇālajātakaṃ kathesi. Taṃ sutvā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ purāṇadutiyikāyo ārabbha uppannā anabhirati vūpasantā. Tato tesaṃ bhagavā saccakathaṃ kathesi, kathāpariyosāne sabbapacchimako sotāpanno, sabbauparimo anāgāmī ahosi, ekopi puthujjano vā arahā vā natthi. Tato bhagavā te ādāya punadeva mahāvane oruhi. Āgacchamānā ca te bhikkhū attanova iddhiyā āgacchiṃsu.
这时,世尊为了让他们证得更高的道果,又为他们说法。那五百人全都开始修观,并证得了阿罗汉果。最先证果的那位最先回去,心想:“我要向世尊禀报。”他回来后说:“世尊,我住于安乐之中,没有厌倦。”他礼敬世尊后,坐在一边。就这样,他们所有人也依次回来,围绕世尊坐下。那天正是仲夏月布萨日的傍晚。于是,除了无想有情和无色界梵天之外,整个一万个轮围世界中的其余天神等,都按照《吉祥经》注释里所说的方法,化作微细之身,围绕坐在胜妙佛座上、被五百位漏尽者围绕的世尊,心想:“我们要听那善巧无碍的说法。”其中有四位漏尽梵天从定中出来后,看不见梵天众,便作意:“他们去哪儿了?”知道原因后,他们最后才来,找不到位置,就站在轮围山顶上,各自说了偈颂。正如所说的——巴利
Atha nesaṃ bhagavā uparimaggatthāya puna dhammaṃ desesi. Te pañcasatāpi vipassanaṃ ārabhitvā arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Paṭhamaṃ patto paṭhamameva agamāsi ‘‘bhagavato ārocessāmī’’ti. Āgantvā ca ‘‘abhiramāmahaṃ bhagavā, na ukkaṇṭhāmī’’ti vatvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. Evaṃ te sabbepi anukkamena āgantvā bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā nisīdiṃsu jeṭṭhamāsauposathadivase sāyanhasamaye. Tato pañcasatakhīṇāsavaparivutaṃ varabuddhāsane nisinnaṃ bhagavantaṃ ṭhapetvā asaññasatte ca arūpabrahmāno ca sakaladasasahassacakkavāḷe avasesadevatādayo maṅgalasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena sukhumattabhāve nimminitvā samparivāresuṃ ‘‘vicitrapaṭibhānaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sossāmā’’ti. Tattha cattāro khīṇāsavabrahmāno samāpattito vuṭṭhāya brahmagaṇaṃ apassantā ‘‘kuhiṃ gatā’’ti āvajjetvā tamatthaṃ ñatvā pacchā āgantvā okāsaṃ alabhamānā cakkavāḷamuddhani ṭhatvā paccekagāthāyo abhāsiṃsu. Yathāha –
这时,四位住在净居天的天神这样想:这位世尊如今住在释迦国的迦毗罗卫城大林里,和大约五百位比丘组成的大僧团在一起,那些比丘全都是阿拉汉。来自十个世界界域的天神,大多数已经聚集起来,想见世尊和比丘僧团。我们不如也去世尊那里,到了之后,在世尊面前各自说一首偈颂。巴利
‘‘Atha kho catunnaṃ suddhāvāsakāyikānaṃ devatānaṃ etadahosi – ‘ayaṃ, kho, bhagavā sakkesu viharati kapilavatthusmiṃ mahāvane mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeheva arahantehi. Dasahi ca lokadhātūhi devatā yebhuyyena sannipatitā honti bhagavantaṃ dassanāya bhikkhusaṅghañca . Yaṃnūna mayampi yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkameyyāma, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavato santike paccekaṃ gāthaṃ bhāseyyāmā’’’ti (dī. ni. 2.331; saṃ. ni. 1.37).
这一切都应该按照《有偈品》里讲过的方法来理解。这样去了之后,那里有一位梵天在东方轮围山的顶上找到了一个位置,站在那里说出这首偈颂:巴利
Sabbaṃ sagāthāvagge vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ gantvā ca tattha eko brahmā puratthimacakkavāḷamuddhani okāsaṃ labhitvā tattha ṭhito imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –
大集会在林中……
为了亲眼见到那不可战胜的僧团。巴利
‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmiṃ…pe… Dakkhitāye aparājitasaṅgha’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37);
当他正在说这首偈颂的时候,站在西方轮围山上的那位听到了声音。巴利
Imañcassa gāthaṃ bhāsamānassa pacchimacakkavāḷapabbate ṭhito saddaṃ assosi.
第二位梵天在西方轮围山顶找到一处地方,站在那里听到那首偈颂后,说出了这首偈颂:巴利
Dutiyo pacchimacakkavāḷamuddhani okāsaṃ labhitvā tattha ṭhito taṃ gāthaṃ sutvā imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –
在那里,比丘们把心安住下来……(中略)
智者守护诸根。巴利
‘‘Tatra bhikkhavo samādahaṃsu…pe… Indriyāni rakkhanti paṇḍitā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37);
第三位在南方轮围山顶找到一处地方,站在那里,听完那首偈颂后,说出这首偈:巴利
Tatiyo dakkhiṇacakkavāḷamuddhani okāsaṃ labhitvā tattha ṭhito taṃ gāthaṃ sutvā imaṃ gāthaṃ abhāsi –
斩断了桩,斩断了门闩……(中略)……善调伏的龙象。巴利
‘‘Chetvā khīlaṃ chetvā palighaṃ…pe… susunāgā’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37);
第四位在北方轮围山顶得到一处立足之地,站在那里,听完那首偈颂后,说出这首偈:巴利
Catuttho uttaracakkavāḷamuddhani okāsaṃ labhitvā tattha ṭhito taṃ gāthaṃ sutvā imaṃ gāthamabhāsi –
‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse…pe… Devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37);
站在南方轮围山顶的那位也听到了那个声音。就这样,当时这四位梵天称扬了大众之后,就站在那里;而大梵天们则铺满整个轮围世界,安住下来。巴利
Tassapi taṃ saddaṃ dakkhiṇacakkavāḷamuddhani ṭhito assosi. Evaṃ tadā ime cattāro brahmāno parisaṃ thometvā ṭhitā ahesuṃ, mahābrahmāno ekacakkavāḷaṃ chādetvā aṭṭhaṃsu.
这时,世尊观察了天众之后,对比丘们说:“比丘们,过去世那些阿罗汉、正自觉者的世尊们,他们的天众集会最多也只是这样聚集,就像我现在一样。比丘们,未来世那些阿罗汉、正自觉者的世尊们,他们的天众集会最多也将这样聚集,就像我现在一样。”
然后,世尊把那些天众按有能力觉悟和没有能力觉悟分成两类:“这么多是有能力的,这么多是没有能力的。”他知道:“没有能力的那些天众,即使一百位佛陀为他们说法,也不会觉悟;有能力的那些天众,则可以被引导觉悟。”接着,他又按根性倾向把有能力的个人分成六种:“这么多是贪行者,这么多是嗔行者、痴行者、寻行者、信行者、慧行者。”
这样按根性倾向分类把握之后,他思量:“对这个集会来说,什么样的说法方式才合适?”他又在心里审视那个集会:“是依自己的意趣就能知道,还是依他人的意趣、依因缘发生、依提问才能知道?”然后他知道“应当依提问才能知道”,于是又审视整个集会:“有没有能提问的人?”看清“没有任何人能提问”之后,他想:“如果我自己提问又自己回答,对这个集会来说并不合适。不如我化现一尊化佛吧。”于是,世尊进入基础禅那,出定后,以心意所成的神通造作出一尊化佛。他决意让这尊化佛具足一切肢体,具足相好,手持钵与袈裟,具足前瞻后顾等威仪,随着决意心一同出现。
那尊化佛从东方世界过来,在世尊正对面同样高的座位上坐下,来了之后,就针对世尊在这次集会中按根性倾向所说的六部经——也就是《之前崩坏经》《诤论经》《小积聚经》《大积聚经》《图瓦塔卡经》,以及这部《正游行经》——其中,为了以适合贪行者天神的方式宣说这部经,他提问而说出这首偈颂:“我问那位大智慧的牟尼。”巴利
Atha bhagavā devaparisaṃ oloketvā bhikkhūnaṃ ārocesi – ‘‘yepi te, bhikkhave, ahesuṃ atītamaddhānaṃ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, tesampi bhagavantānaṃ etapparamāyeva devatā sannipatitā ahesuṃ. Seyyathāpi mayhaṃ etarahi, yepi te, bhikkhave, bhavissanti anāgatamaddhānaṃ arahanto sammāsambuddhā, tesampi bhagavantānaṃ etapparamāyeva devatā sannipatitā bhavissanti seyyathāpi mayhaṃ etarahī’’ti. Tato taṃ devaparisaṃ bhabbābhabbavasena dvidhā vibhaji ‘‘ettakā bhabbā, ettakā abhabbā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘abhabbaparisā buddhasatepi dhammaṃ desente na bujjhati, bhabbaparisā sakkā bodhetu’’nti ñatvā puna bhabbapuggale cariyavasena chadhā vibhaji ‘‘ettakā rāgacaritā, ettakā dosa-moha-vitakka-saddhā-buddhicaritā’’ti. Evaṃ cariyavasena pariggahetvā ‘‘assā parisāya kīdisā dhammadesanā sappāyā’’ti dhammakathaṃ vicinitvā puna taṃ parisaṃ manasākāsi – ‘‘attajjhāsayena nu kho jāneyya, parajjhāsayena, aṭṭhuppattivasena, pucchāvasenā’’ti. Tato ‘‘pucchāvasena jāneyyā’’ti ñatvā ‘‘pañhaṃ pucchituṃ samattho atthi, natthī’’ti puna sakalaparisaṃ āvajjetvā ‘‘natthi kocī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘sace ahameva pucchitvā ahameva vissajjeyyaṃ, evamassā parisāya sappāyaṃ na hoti. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ nimmitabuddhaṃ māpeyyanti pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya manomayiddhiyā abhisaṅkharitvā nimmitabuddhaṃ māpesi. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgī lakkhaṇasampanno pattacīvaradharo ālokitavilokitādisampanno hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhānacittena saha pāturahosi. So pācīnalokadhātuto āgantvā bhagavato samasame āsane nisinno evaṃ āgantvā yāni bhagavatā imamhi samāgame cariyavasena cha suttāni (su. ni. 854 ādayo, 868 ādayo, 884 ādayo, 901 ādayo, 921 ādayo) kathitāni. Seyyathidaṃ – purābhedasuttaṃ kalahavivādasuttaṃ cūḷabyūhaṃ mahābyūhaṃ tuvaṭakaṃ idameva sammāparibbājanīyanti. Tesu rāgacaritadevatānaṃ sappāyavasena kathetabbassa imassa suttassa pavattanatthaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanto ‘‘pucchāmi muniṃ pahūtapañña’’nti imaṃ gāthamāha.
其中,“大智慧”指广大的智慧。“已渡越”指渡过了四种瀑流。“已到彼岸”指到达涅槃。“般涅槃”指以有余涅槃而般涅槃。“心不动摇”指心不被世间法所动摇。“从家出离,舍断诸欲”指舍断事欲之后,从居家生活中出离。“比丘如何于世间正确游行?”意思是:那位比丘应当如何在世间正确游行、安住,不被世间染着,超越世间。这里其余的内容,都按照已经说过的方式来理解。巴利
Tattha pahūtapaññanti mahāpaññaṃ. Tiṇṇanti caturoghatiṇṇaṃ. Pāraṅgatanti nibbānappattaṃ. Parinibbutanti saupādisesanibbānavasena parinibbutaṃ. Ṭhitattanti lokadhammehi akampanīyacittaṃ. Nikkhamma gharā panujja kāmeti vatthukāme panuditvā gharāvāsā nikkhamma. Kathaṃ bhikkhu sammā so loke paribbajeyyāti so bhikkhu kathaṃ loke sammā paribbajeyya vihareyya anupalitto lokena hutvā, lokaṃ atikkameyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
363 这时,世尊:因为未达漏尽而在世间正确出家游行的人是不存在的,所以,在由贪行等性格所归类的一切众生群体中,为了断除那些有着同样过失的各类天众团体惯常的过失,便从“凡他的吉祥……”开始说起,以阿罗汉道为顶点,开示漏尽者的修行之道,说了十五首偈颂。巴利
363. Atha bhagavā yasmā āsavakkhayaṃ appatvā loke sammā paribbajanto nāma natthi, tasmā tasmiṃ rāgacaritādivasena pariggahite sabbapuggalasamūhe taṃ taṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ samānadosānaṃ devatāgaṇānaṃ āciṇṇadosappahānatthaṃ ‘‘yassa maṅgalā’’ti ārabhitvā arahattanikūṭeneva khīṇāsavapaṭipadaṃ pakāsento pannarasa gāthāyo abhāsi.
在这其中,先说第一首偈颂里的“吉祥”:这是对《吉祥经》中所说的“见吉祥”等说法的代称。“善断”:就是彻底拔除,用智慧之刀完全斩断。“异兆”:就是认为“流星坠落、方位起火等等会有这样的果报”而生的执著。“梦”:就是认为“清晨做梦见到什么就会发生某事,中午等时候做梦会怎样,朝左侧卧睡时梦到什么就会发生某事,朝右侧卧等梦到什么会怎样,梦快结束时见到月亮就会发生某事,见到太阳等就会发生某事”而生的执著。“相”:就是读了棍相、布相之类的文句后,认为“凭这个就会发生某事”而生的执著。这些全都应当按《梵网经》里所说的方式来理解。“他舍弃了吉祥与过失”:除了三十八种大吉祥之外,其余的就叫吉祥与过失。谁把这些吉祥之类彻底断除了,谁就是舍弃了吉祥与过失的人。或者说,因为吉祥以及异兆等过失都已断除,所以他就是舍弃了吉祥与过失的人;他不再依靠吉祥之类来求得清净,因为他已经证得了圣道。因此,他正确地游行于世间;他是漏已尽的人,正确地游行于世间,不被世间所染著。巴利
Tattha paṭhamagāthāya tāva maṅgalāti maṅgalasutte vuttānaṃ diṭṭhamaṅgalādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samūhatāti suṭṭhu ūhatā paññāsatthena samucchinnā. Uppātāti ‘‘ukkāpātadisāḍāhādayo evaṃ vipākā hontī’’ti evaṃ pavattā uppātābhinivesā. Supināti ‘‘pubbaṇhasamaye supinaṃ disvā idaṃ nāma hoti, majjhanhikādīsu idaṃ, vāmapassena sayatā diṭṭhe idaṃ nāma hoti, dakkhiṇapassādīhi idaṃ, supinante candaṃ disvā idaṃ nāma hoti, sūriyādayo disvā ida’’nti evaṃ pavattā supinābhinivesā. Lakkhaṇāti daṇḍalakkhaṇavatthalakkhaṇādipāṭhaṃ paṭhitvā ‘‘iminā idaṃ nāma hotī’’ti evaṃ pavattā lakkhaṇābhinivesā. Te sabbepi brahmajāle vuttanayeneva veditabbā. So maṅgaladosavippahīnoti aṭṭhatiṃsa mahāmaṅgalāni ṭhapetvā avasesā maṅgaladosā nāma. Yassa panete maṅgalādayo samūhatā, so maṅgaladosavippahīno hoti. Atha vā maṅgalānañca uppātādidosānañca pahīnattā maṅgaladosavippahīno hoti, na maṅgalādīhi suddhiṃ pacceti ariyamaggassa adhigatattā. Tasmā sammā so loke paribbajeyya, so khīṇāsavo sammā loke paribbajeyya anupalitto lokenāti.
364 在第二首偈颂中,“比丘应调伏人间与天上的贪欲”:对于人间和天上的诸欲,以不来道令贪欲不再生起,从而调伏贪欲。“超越有而通达法”:这样调伏贪欲之后,再以阿拉汉道,从一切方面成就遍知现观等,通达四谛法的差别,通过这条行道超越三种有。那位比丘也正确地游行于世间。巴利
364. Dutiyagāthāya rāgaṃ vinayetha mānusesu, dibbesu kāmesu cāpi bhikkhūti mānusesu ca dibbesu ca kāmaguṇesu anāgāmimaggena anuppattidhammataṃ nento rāgaṃ vinayetha. Atikkamma bhavaṃ samecca dhammanti evaṃ rāgaṃ vinetvā tato paraṃ arahattamaggena sabbappakārato pariññābhisamayādayo sādhento catusaccabhedampi samecca dhammaṃ imāya paṭipadāya tividhampi atikkamma bhavaṃ. Sammā soti sopi bhikkhu sammā loke paribbajeyya.
365 在第三首偈颂中,“已舍弃随顺与违逆”是指对一切对象都已断除贪与嗔。其余内容跟前文所说的一样。而且在所有偈颂里,都要接上“那位比丘也正确地游行于世间”来理解。从这里往后,不再说明怎么接,只解释还没讲到的内容。巴利
365. Tatiyagāthāya ‘‘anurodhavirodhavippahīno’’ti sabbavatthūsu pahīnarāgadoso. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva sabbagāthāsu ca ‘‘sopi bhikkhu sammā loke paribbajeyyā’’ti yojetabbaṃ. Ito parañhi yojanampi avatvā avuttanayameva vaṇṇayissāma.
366 在第四首偈颂中,应当依有情与行法来了知可爱与不可爱这两类,在这里,通过断除欲贪与嗔恚而将它们舍弃。不执取,是指不以四种取执取任何法。不依止于任何事物,是指不依止于分为一百零八种的贪爱所依和分为六十二种的邪见所依,不依止于任何色等法或任何生存界。从可结缚法中解脱:一切三界诸法都是十种结缚的所缘,所以是可结缚法;由于通过修习圣道已经完全了知它们的一切行相,所以说为解脱。在这里,第一句说的是断除贪与嗔,第二句说的是没有执取和依止,第三句说的是从其余不善及不善基础上解脱。或者,第一句是断除贪嗔,第二句是断除它们的方法,第三句是因为它们已被断除而从可结缚法中解脱,应当这样理解。巴利
366. Catutthagāthāya sattasaṅkhāravasena duvidhaṃ piyañca appiyañca veditabbaṃ, tattha chandarāgapaṭighappahānena hitvā. Anupādāyāti catūhi upādānehi kañci dhammaṃ aggahetvā. Anissitokuhiñcīti aṭṭhasatabhedena taṇhānissayena dvāsaṭṭhibhedena diṭṭhinissayena ca kuhiñci rūpādidhamme bhave vā anissito. Saṃyojaniyehi vippamuttoti sabbepi tebhūmakadhammā dasavidhasaṃyojanassa visayattā saṃyojaniyā, tehi sabbappakārato maggabhāvanāya pariññātattā ca vippamuttoti attho. Paṭhamapādena cettha rāgadosappahānaṃ vuttaṃ, dutiyena upādānanissayābhāvo, tatiyena sesākusalehi akusalavatthūhi ca vippamokkho. Paṭhamena vā rāgadosappahānaṃ, dutiyena tadupāyo, tatiyena tesaṃ pahīnattā saṃyojaniyehi vippamokkhoti veditabbo.
367 在第五首偈颂中,“诸所依”指的是诸蕴所依。“执取”则因为具有可被执取的意义,也正是指那些蕴本身。“不可被引而随”是指:由于已善见无常等相,不会因任何人而生起“这个更好”的念头。其余部分字面意思很直白。这里说的是:对于诸执取,以第四道彻底断除欲贪之后,他已调伏欲贪,不再认为那些蕴所依中有任何坚实,而是照见一切蕴所依都是无坚实的。因此,他对那两种依止都不依止,也不会被任何人引着认为“这个更好”,这位漏已尽的比丘正确地游行于世间。巴利
367. Pañcamagāthāya upadhīsūti khandhupadhīsu. Ādānanti ādātabbaṭṭhena teyeva vuccanti. Anaññaneyyoti aniccādīnaṃ sudiṭṭhattā ‘‘idaṃ seyyo’’ti kenaci anetabbo. Sesaṃ uttānapadatthameva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ādānesu catutthamaggena sabbaso chandarāgaṃ vinetvā so vinītachandarāgo, tesu upadhīsu na sārameti, sabbe upadhī asārakatteneva passati. Tato tesu duvidhenapi nissayena anissito aññena vā kenaci ‘‘idaṃ seyyo’’ti anetabbo khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sammā so loke paribbajeyya.
368 第六偈中,“不相违逆”是指:因为已经断除了这三种恶行,所以与诸善行不相违逆。“了知法”是指:通过圣道了知四谛之法。“希求涅槃之境”是指:希求无余蕴般涅槃的境界。其余内容意思浅显易懂。巴利
368. Chaṭṭhagāthāya aviruddhoti etesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ duccaritānaṃ pahīnattā sucaritehi saddhiṃ aviruddho. Viditvā dhammanti maggena catusaccadhammaṃ ñatvā. Nibbānapadābhipatthayānoti anupādisesaṃ khandhaparinibbānapadaṃ patthayamāno. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
369 第七偈中,“被辱骂”是指遭到十种辱骂方式的攻击。“不应怀恨”是指不应怨恨,不应发怒。“得到他人饮食不应骄慢”是指得到别人出于信仰布施的食物后,不应骄慢地想:“我是有名声的、有声望的、是得利养的人。”其余内容意思浅显易懂。巴利
369. Sattamagāthāya akkuṭṭhoti dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto. Na sandhiyethāti na upanayhetha na kuppeyya. Laddhā parabhojanaṃna majjeti parehi dinnaṃ saddhādeyyaṃ labhitvā ‘‘ahaṃ ñāto yasassī lābhī’’ti na majjeyya. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
370 第八偈中,“贪”指不正当的贪。“有”指欲有等各类存在。这样,这两句就说明了对于存在与享乐的渴爱。或者,前一句说明一切渴爱,后一句说明业有。“远离切割与束缚”:由于这类业与烦恼已被断除,所以也远离了切割、束缚其他众生。其余内容按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
370. Aṭṭhamagāthāya lobhanti visamalobhaṃ. Bhavanti kāmabhavādibhavaṃ. Evaṃ dvīhi padehi bhavabhogataṇhā vuttā. Purimena vā sabbāpi taṇhā, pacchimena kammabhavo. Virato chedanabandhanā cāti evametesaṃ kammakilesānaṃ pahīnattā parasattachedanabandhanā ca viratoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
371 第九偈中,“了知与自身相应的”——是指舍弃与比丘身份不相称的邪命等,安住在正命等清净活命以及其他正行道中,以此而了知。因为仅仅知道是不够的。“如实”——就是如真实、如实际。“法”——是指以如实智了知的蕴、处、界等分类之法,或者以道了知的四谛之法。其余内容意思清楚。巴利
371. Navamagāthāya sāruppaṃ attano viditvāti attano bhikkhubhāvassa patirūpaṃ anesanādiṃ pahāya sammāesanādiājīvasuddhiṃ aññañca sammāpaṭipattiṃ tattha patiṭṭhahanena viditvā. Na hi ñātamatteneva kiñci hoti. Yathātathiyanti yathātathaṃ yathābhūtaṃ. Dhammanti khandhāyatanādibhedaṃ yathābhūtañāṇena, catusaccadhammaṃ vā maggena viditvā. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
372 第372段,这是第十首偈颂。“无欲、无所希求者”:因为他的随眠已由圣道摧毁而不存在,不善根也被彻底拔除了,因此他无欲、无渴爱。由于没有欲求,他对任何色等法都不再希求。所以经文说“无欲、无所希求者”。其余内容按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
372. Dasamagāthāya so nirāso anāsisānoti yassa ariyamaggena vināsitattā anusayā ca na santi, akusalamūlā ca samūhatā, so nirāso nittaṇho hoti. Tato āsāya abhāvena kañci rūpādidhammaṃ nāsīsati. Tenāha ‘‘nirāso anāsisāno’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
373 第十一偈中,“漏尽者”指四种漏都已断尽的人。“已断慢”指九种慢都已断除。“贪径”指成为贪的对象、属于三地的一切法。“超越”指通过遍知和断除而超越。“已调伏”指舍弃了对一切根门的贪著,依靠圣者的调伏之力,达到了调伏的境界。“般涅槃”指因为烦恼之火已经熄灭,所以变得清凉。其余部分和前面说的一样。巴利
373. Ekādasamagāthāya āsavakhīṇoti khīṇacaturāsavo. Pahīnamānoti pahīnanavavidhamāno. Rāgapathanti rāgavisayabhūtaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ. Upātivattoti pariññāpahānehi atikkanto. Dantoti sabbadvāravisevanaṃ hitvā ariyena damathena dantabhūmiṃ patto. Parinibbutoti kilesaggivūpasamena sītibhūto. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
374 第十二偈中,“有信”是指:对佛陀等功德,因为不依赖他人为缘,所以具足圆满无缺、不动摇的净信,而不是因为相信别人的修行方式就跟着走。正如经中所说:“尊者,在这件事上,我不是因为相信世尊才去的。”(《增支部》5.34)“多闻”是指:已经完成多闻的职责,具备胜义层面的多闻。“见决定”是指:在迷失于轮回旷野的世间中,能看见那条通向不死之城、成为正性决定之道,也就是说已经见道。“于行异见者中不随异见行”:所谓“行异见者”,是指落入六十二种邪见的人,他们彼此相违,所以叫异见者。在这些被异见牵引的众生当中,不跟着异见走——不会依照“这将会断灭,这将一如既往地存在”这类见解而转。“嗔”是指打击、恼害心的东西,是嗔的一种说法。“调伏”就是已经调伏。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
374. Dvādasamagāthāya saddhoti buddhādiguṇesu parappaccayavirahitattā sabbākārasampannena aveccappasādena samannāgato, na parassa saddhāya paṭipattiyaṃ gamanabhāvena. Yathāha – ‘‘na khvāhaṃ ettha bhante bhagavato saddhāya gacchāmī’’ti (a. ni. 5.34). Sutavāti vositasutakiccattā paramatthikasutasamannāgato. Niyāmadassīti saṃsārakantāramūḷhe loke amatapuragāmino sammattaniyāmabhūtassa maggassa dassāvī, diṭṭhamaggoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vaggagatesu na vaggasārīti vaggagatā nāma dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatikā aññamaññaṃ paṭilomattā, evaṃ vaggāhi diṭṭhīhi gatesu sattesu na vaggasārī – ‘‘idaṃ ucchijjissati, idaṃ tatheva bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhivasena agamanato. Paṭighanti paṭighātakaṃ, cittavighātakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dosavisesanamevetaṃ. Vineyyāti vinetvā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
375 第十三偈中,“清净胜者”:以清净的阿罗汉道战胜了烦恼。“揭开遮蔽”:已经揭开贪、嗔、痴的遮蔽。“于诸法得自在”:在四谛法上达到了自在。因为没有人能把他所证知的这些法以任何方式改变,所以漏尽者被称为“于诸法得自在者”。“到彼岸”:彼岸就是涅槃,他已经到达,也就是说以有余依的方式证得了涅槃。“不动”:已经远离了渴爱的动摇。“善于行灭智”:行灭就是涅槃,关于它的智是圣道慧;对此善巧,因为经过四次修习而成为熟练者。巴利
375. Terasamagāthāya saṃsuddhajinoti saṃsuddhena arahattamaggena vijitakileso. Vivaṭṭacchadoti vivaṭarāgadosamohachadano. Dhammesu vasīti catusaccadhammesu vasippatto. Na hissa sakkā te dhammā yathā ñātā kenaci aññathā kātuṃ, tena khīṇāsavo ‘‘dhammesu vasī’’ti vuccati. Pāragūti pāraṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ, taṃ gato, saupādisesavasena adhigatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Anejoti apagatataṇhācalano. Saṅkhāranirodhañāṇakusaloti saṅkhāranirodho vuccati nibbānaṃ, tamhi ñāṇaṃ ariyamaggapaññā, tattha kusalo, catukkhattuṃ bhāvitattā chekoti vuttaṃ hoti.
376 在第十四偈中,“于过去”:指已经流变、已经过去的五蕴。“于未来”:指尚未流变的五蕴。“超越计度”:已经超越“我”和“我的”这种计执,或者超越一切渴爱与邪见的计度。“极清净慧”:智慧极其清净,或者超越三时之后而具有清净慧。超越什么?超越三时。阿拉汉已经超越了由无明和行所构成的过去时,由生、老、死所构成的未来时,以及以识等为边际、包含有支的现在时——他超越这一切,克服疑惑,成为达到最极清净慧的人而安住。因此说“极清净慧”。“于一切处”:即于十二处。阿拉汉正是这样超越计度。由于超越计度,并且是极清净慧,所以未来不再趣向任何处。因此说:“于一切处得解脱。”巴利
376. Cuddasamagāthāya atītesūti pavattiṃ patvā atikkantesu pañcakkhandhesu. Anāgatesūti pavattiṃ appattesu pañcakkhandhesu eva. Kappātītoti ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti kappanaṃ sabbampi vā taṇhādiṭṭhikappaṃ atīto. Aticca suddhipaññoti atīva suddhipañño, atikkamitvā vā suddhipañño. Kiṃ atikkamitvā? Addhattayaṃ. Arahā hi yvāyaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārasaṅkhāto atīto addhā, jātijarāmaraṇasaṅkhāto anāgato addhā, viññāṇādibhavapariyanto paccuppanno ca addhā, taṃ sabbampi atikkamma kaṅkhaṃ vitaritvā paramasuddhippattapañño hutvā ṭhito. Tena vuccati ‘‘aticca suddhipañño’’ti. Sabbāyatanehīti dvādasahāyatanehi. Arahā hi evaṃ kappātīto. Kappātītattā aticca suddhipaññattā ca āyatiṃ na kiñci āyatanaṃ upeti. Tenāha – ‘‘sabbāyatanehi vippamutto’’ti.
377 377. 在第十五偈中,“了知句”指的是那些被称为“四谛之句”的句子,对其中每一句,都以前行阶段的谛决断慧一一了知。“证知法”是指此后通过四圣道证知四谛之法。“见显露后,断尽诸漏”是指那时以省察智亲见被称为漏尽的涅槃——它已显露、明显、无遮蔽——从而断尽诸漏。“尽一切依”是指由于一切依——即蕴、欲乐、烦恼、行等种种分别——都已灭尽,所以比丘在任何地方都不执著,正确地游行于世间、安住于世间,不黏着地行走于世间——以此结束了开示。巴利
377. Pannarasamagāthāya aññāya padanti ye te ‘‘saccānaṃ caturo padā’’ti vuttā, tesu ekekapadaṃ pubbabhāgasaccavavatthāpanapaññāya ñatvā. Samecca dhammanti tato paraṃ catūhi ariyamaggehi catusaccadhammaṃ samecca. Vivaṭaṃ disvāna pahānamāsavānanti atha paccavekkhaṇañāṇena āsavakkhayasaññitaṃ nibbānaṃ vivaṭaṃ pākaṭamanāvaṭaṃ disvā. Sabbupadhīnaṃ parikkhayāti sabbesaṃ khandhakāmaguṇakilesābhisaṅkhārabhedānaṃ upadhīnaṃ parikkhīṇattā katthaci asajjamāno bhikkhu sammā so loke paribbajeyya vihareyya, anallīyanto lokaṃ gaccheyyāti desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
378 那位化现者为了赞叹这次说法,说出这首偈颂:“世尊确实……”在这里,“那位如此安住的人”,指的是已经铲除吉祥等一切观念、安住在断除一切吉祥与过失中的人;也是指已经调伏了对天界与人间诸欲的贪染、超越了一切存在、安住在法现观中的人。他这样一一指出各首偈颂中所说的比丘。其余部分意思都很明白。这里的脉络是这样:世尊确实如此,正如您说了“凡已铲除吉祥……”等等,并且在每首偈颂的末尾都说“他应当正确地游行于世间”。这是什么原因呢?因为那位如此安住的比丘,已经被最上的调伏所调伏,并且超越了全部十结和四轭。所以他确实应当正确地游行于世间,我对此毫无疑惑。就这样,他连这首赞叹说法的偈颂也说了出来,最终以阿罗汉果为顶点结束了这次开示。经讲完时,有一万亿天神证得最高果位;而证得入流果、一来果、不来果的人,则多到无法计算。巴利
378. Tato so nimmito dhammadesanaṃ thomento ‘‘addhā hi bhagavā’’ti imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha yo so evaṃ vihārīti yo so maṅgalādīni samūhanitvā sabbamaṅgaladosappahānavihārī, yopi so dibbamānusakesu kāmesu rāgaṃ vineyya bhavātikkamma dhammābhisamayavihārīti evaṃ tāya tāya gāthāya niddiṭṭhabhikkhuṃ dassento āha. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Ayaṃ pana yojanā – addhā hi bhagavā tatheva etaṃ yaṃ tvaṃ ‘‘yassa maṅgalā samūhatā’’tiādīni vatvā tassā tassā gāthāya pariyosāne ‘‘sammā so loke paribbajeyyā’’ti avaca. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Yo so evaṃvihārī bhikkhu, so uttamena damathena danto, sabbāni ca dasapi saṃyojanāni caturo ca yoge vītivatto hoti. Tasmā sammā so loke paribbajeyya, natthi me ettha vicikicchāti iti desanāthomanagāthampi vatvā arahattanikūṭeneva desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Suttapariyosāne koṭisatasahassadevatānaṃ aggaphalappatti ahosi, sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiphalappattā pana gaṇanato asaṅkhyeyyāti.
第14章 法行经的注释巴利
14. Dhammikasuttavaṇṇanā
“如是我闻”这句,就是《法行经》。它的起因是什么呢?据说,在世尊——世间导师——还住世的时候,有一位名叫“法行”的近事男,无论名字还是修行都名副其实。他具足皈依,戒行圆满,广学多闻,能持诵三藏,证得不来果,获得神通,能在空中飞行。他有五百位近事男作为眷属,这些人也和他一样。有一天,他在布萨日独自静坐禅修,到了中夜将尽的时候,心里生起这样的念头:“我何不去向世尊请教在家和出家的修行之道呢?”于是,他在五百位近事男的围绕下,前往世尊那里,请教这件事,世尊便为他解答。其中与前面已说过的内容相同,应按照前面的方式理解;这里只解释前面没有说过的部分。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti dhammikasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Tiṭṭhamāne kira bhagavati lokanāthe dhammiko nāma upāsako ahosi nāmena ca paṭipattiyā ca. So kira saraṇasampanno sīlasampanno bahussuto piṭakattayadharo anāgāmī abhiññālābhī ākāsacārī ahosi. Tassa parivārā pañcasatā upāsakā, tepi tādisā eva ahesuṃ. Tassekadivasaṃ uposathikassa rahogatassa paṭisallīnassa majjhimayāmāvasānasamaye evaṃ parivitakko udapādi – ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ agāriyaanagāriyānaṃ paṭipadaṃ puccheyya’’nti. So pañcahi upāsakasatehi parivuto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā tamatthaṃ pucchi, bhagavā cassa byākāsi. Tattha pubbe vaṇṇitasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ, apubbaṃ vaṇṇayissāma.
379 379. 其中,先就第一首偈颂来说:“如何行持”——就是怎样做、怎样修行、怎样实践。“成为善好”——就是成为美好、没有过失、能达成利益的人。“近事男众等”——说的就是近事男们。其余内容从意义上来说很清楚。这里的关联是:无论是从在家走向出家修行的人,还是在家的近事男,在这两类弟子当中,怎样的弟子、如何行持的弟子,才是善好的。巴利
379. Tattha paṭhamagāthāya tāva kathaṃkaroti kathaṃ karonto kathaṃ paṭipajjanto. Sādhu hotīti sundaro anavajjo atthasādhano hoti. Upāsakāseti upāsakāicceva vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamatthato pākaṭameva. Ayaṃ pana yojanā – yo vā agārā anagārameti pabbajati, ye vā agārino upāsakā, etesu duvidhesu sāvakesu kathaṃkaro sāvako sādhu hotīti.
380-1 现在,为了说明世尊有能力回答这样的提问,诵出“你确知”这两首偈颂。其中,“趣”指内心的倾向。“归趣”指最终的成就。或者,“趣”指地狱等五种趣向。“归趣”指超越诸趣的去处,即从诸趣中解脱的般涅槃。“无与相等者”:没有人能和你相比。你以一切智彻底了知一切法之后,出于对众生的悲悯而开示,意思是:世尊,凡是所应了知的法,你都已毫无剩余地证知,然后悲悯众生,开示了一切智与一切法。凡是对谁有利益的,你就为谁阐明、演说,这就是说,你绝没有师长藏私保留的吝啬。“无垢者,你照耀”:就像远离云雾尘埃的月亮,因为远离了贪等烦恼的垢染,所以清净无垢地照耀。这里剩下的文义都浅显易懂。巴利
380-1. Idāni evaṃ puṭṭhassa bhagavato byākaraṇasamatthataṃ dīpento ‘‘tuvañhī’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha gatinti ajjhāsayagatiṃ. Parāyaṇanti nipphattiṃ. Atha vā gatinti nirayādipañcappabhedaṃ. Parāyaṇanti gatito paraṃ ayanaṃ gativippamokkhaṃ parinibbānaṃ, na catthi tulyoti tayā sadiso natthi. Sabbaṃ tuvaṃ ñāṇamavecca dhammaṃ, pakāsesi satte anukampamānoti tvaṃ bhagavā yadatthi ñeyyaṃ nāma, taṃ anavasesaṃ avecca paṭivijjhitvā satte anukampamāno sabbaṃ ñāṇañca dhammañca pakāsesi. Yaṃ yaṃ yassa hitaṃ hoti, taṃ taṃ tassa āvikāsiyeva desesiyeva, na te atthi ācariyamuṭṭhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Virocasi vimaloti dhūmarajādivirahito viya cando, rāgādimalābhāvena vimalo virocasi. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
382 现在,为了赞叹那些当时听世尊说法的天子们,并称扬世尊,说了两首偈颂:“来到你面前。”其中,“名叫伊罗婆那的龙王”:据说这位名叫伊罗婆那的天子,能随意变化身形,住在天界的宫殿里。当帝释天要去园林游玩时,他就化出一百五十由旬长的身体,变出三十三个头瘤,成为名叫伊罗婆那的象。他的每一个头瘤上有两颗象牙,每一颗象牙上有七座池塘,每一座池塘里有七丛莲花,每一丛莲花上有七朵花,每一朵花上有七片花瓣,每一片花瓣上有七位天女在跳舞,她们被称为莲花天女,是帝释天的舞女,也就是《天宫事》中“受过训练的少女们在莲花间游舞”所说的那些。然而,在这三十三个头瘤中间,有一个名叫善见的头瘤,有三十由旬大,在那里,一个由旬大的宝座铺展在三由旬高的花亭中。在那里,帝释天与天女众围绕,享受天界的福报。当帝释天从园林游玩回来时,又收摄那个形相,仍然只是天子。针对这一点,说:“名叫伊罗婆那的龙王来到你面前。”“闻胜者”:听闻“这位世尊已战胜诸恶法”。“他也与你商议后”:与你一起商议后,意思是问问题。“到达了”:到达了,即说已去。“善哉”:听闻后欢喜的样子,即听了那个问题后,欢喜地说“善哉,尊者”,以欢喜的样子去了,这是意思。巴利
382. Idāni yesaṃ tadā bhagavā dhammaṃ desesi, te devaputte kittetvā bhagavantaṃ pasaṃsanto ‘‘āgañchī te santike’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha nāgarājā erāvaṇo nāmāti ayaṃ kira erāvaṇo nāma devaputto kāmarūpī dibbe vimāne vasati. So yadā sakko uyyānakīḷaṃ gacchati, tadā diyaḍḍhasatayojanaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimminitvā tettiṃsa kumbhe māpetvā erāvaṇo nāma hatthī hoti. Tassa ekekasmiṃ kumbhe dve dve dantā honti, ekekasmiṃ dante satta satta pokkharaṇiyo, ekekissā pokkharaṇiyā satta satta paduminiyo, ekekissā paduminiyā satta satta pupphāni, ekekasmiṃ pupphe satta satta pattāni, ekekasmiṃ patte satta satta accharāyo naccanti padumaccharāyotveva vissutā sakkassa nāṭakitthiyo, yā ca vimānavatthusmimpi ‘‘bhamanti kaññā padumesu sikkhitā’’ti (vi. va. 1034) āgatā. Tesaṃ pana tettisaṃkumbhānaṃ majjhe sudassanakumbho nāma tiṃsayojanamatto hoti, tattha yojanappamāṇo maṇipallaṅko tiyojanubbedhe pupphamaṇḍape attharīyati. Tattha sakko devānamindo accharāsaṅghaparivuto dibbasampattiṃ paccanubhoti. Sakke pana devānaminde uyyānakīḷāto paṭinivatte puna taṃ rūpaṃ saṃharitvāna devaputtova hoti. Taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘āgañchi te santike nāgarājā erāvaṇo nāmā’’ti. Jinoti sutvāti ‘‘vijitapāpadhammo esa bhagavā’’ti evaṃ sutvā. Sopi tayā mantayitvāti tayā saddhiṃ mantayitvā, pañhaṃ pucchitvāti adhippāyo. Ajjhagamāti adhiagamā, gatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Sādhūti sutvāna patītarūpoti taṃ pañhaṃ sutvā ‘‘sādhu bhante’’ti abhinanditvā tuṭṭharūpo gatoti attho.
383 383. 大王毗沙门也被称为俱毗罗。这里,那个夜叉因为能让人欢喜,所以是“王”;因为在毗舍那王都治理国政,所以是毗沙门;依他先前的名字,则应当知道是俱毗罗。据说,他前世是一位名叫俱毗罗的婆罗门大富长者,做了布施等福德善业之后,转生为毗舍那王都之主。因此被称为“俱毗罗毗沙门”。这在《阿吒囊吒经》中也这样说:巴利
383.Rājāpi taṃ vessavaṇo kuveroti ettha so yakkho rañjanaṭṭhena rājā, visāṇāya rājadhāniyā rajjaṃ kāretīti vessavaṇo, purimanāmena kuveroti veditabbo. So kira kuvero nāma brāhmaṇamahāsālo hutvā dānādīni puññāni katvā visāṇāya rājadhāniyā adhipati hutvā nibbatto. Tasmā ‘‘kuvero vessavaṇo’’ti vuccati. Vuttañcetaṃ āṭānāṭiyasutte –
朋友,那位鸠毗罗大王有一座王都名叫毗舍那,所以鸠毗罗大王被称为“毗沙门”。巴利
‘‘Kuverassa kho pana, mārisa, mahārājassa visāṇā nāma rājadhānī, tasmā kuvero mahārājā ‘vessavaṇo’ti pavuccatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.291) –
这里剩下的内容本身就已经很清楚了。巴利
Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
这里可能会有人问:为什么住在更远的三十三天界的伊罗婆那先到,多闻天王后到,而这位住在同一座城的男居士却最后才到?他又怎么知道他们来了,才说出那番话呢?回答说:据说,当时多闻天王乘坐一辆由无数千颗珊瑚装饰、宽十二由旬、以女眷为乘的车,举起珊瑚矛,被一万亿夜叉围绕,心想“我要去问世尊问题”,便把空中宫殿停在一边,沿着道路一路前行,到了韦卢康达卡城,来到难陀母亲这位女居士住所的上方。这位女居士有这样的功德:戒行清净,长期远离非时食,能持诵三藏,已安住于不来果。那时她打开狮子窗,为了纳凉而站在香风吹拂的地方,用圆润的字句、悦耳的声音诵出《八章·彼岸道品》。多闻天王就在那里停下车乘,一直听到女居士说出结语“世尊住在摩揭陀国,在石支塔庙,为十六位婆罗门侍从说法”,整段听完后,在那品结束时,伸出像大金鼓一样的脖子,赞叹说:“善哉,善哉,姊妹!”她问:“这里是谁?”他说:“姊妹,我是多闻天王。”据说,这位女居士先证得入流果,多闻天王后来才证得。他因为和她在法上是同修兄妹,所以用“姊妹”来称呼她。女居士对他说:“兄长,时候不对了,贤友,你觉得什么时候合适就走吧。”他说:“姊妹,我对你很有信心,我要表达我的敬意。”她说:“那么,贤友,我田里出产的稻谷,工人们运不进来,请你命令你的随从去搬吧。”他说:“好的,姊妹。”便命令夜叉们去搬。他们装满了十三又半座粮仓。从那时起,粮仓再也没有缺过,世间便有了“像难陀母亲的粮仓一样”的说法。多闻天王装满粮仓后,就去见世尊。世尊说:“你是在非时来的。”于是他把一切都禀告了世尊。由于这个原因,即使多闻天王住在更近的四天王天界,也来得更晚。而伊罗婆那没有任何耽搁的事,所以他来得最早。巴利
Tattha siyā – kasmā pana dūratare tāvatiṃsabhavane vasanto erāvaṇo paṭhamaṃ āgato, vessavaṇo pacchā, ekanagareva vasanto ayaṃ upāsako sabbapacchā, kathañca so tesaṃ āgamanaṃ aññāsi, yena evamāhāti? Vuccate – vessavaṇo kira tadā anekasahassapavāḷapallaṅkaṃ dvādasayojanaṃ nārivāhanaṃ abhiruyha pavāḷakuntaṃ uccāretvā dasasahassakoṭiyakkhehi parivuto ‘‘bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti ākāsaṭṭhakavimānāni pariharitvā maggena maggaṃ āgacchanto veḷukaṇḍakanagare nandamātāya upāsikāya nivesanassa uparibhāgaṃ sampatto. Upāsikāya ayamānubhāvo – parisuddhasīlā hoti, niccaṃ vikālabhojanā paṭiviratā, piṭakattayadhārinī, anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhitā. Sā tamhi samaye sīhapañjaraṃ ugghāṭetvā utuggahaṇatthāya māluteritokāse ṭhatvā aṭṭhakapārāyanavagge parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehi madhurena sarena bhāsati. Vessavaṇo tattheva yānāni ṭhapetvā yāva upāsikā ‘‘idamavoca bhagavā magadhesu viharanto pāsāṇake cetiye paricārakasoḷasannaṃ brāhmaṇāna’’nti nigamanaṃ abhāsi, tāva sabbaṃ sutvā vaggapariyosāne suvaṇṇamurajasadisaṃ mahantaṃ gīvaṃ paggahetvā ‘‘sādhu sādhu bhaginī’’ti sādhukāramadāsi. Sā ‘‘ko etthā’’ti āha. ‘‘Ahaṃ bhagini vessavaṇo’’ti. Upāsikā kira paṭhamaṃ sotāpannā ahosi, pacchā vessavaṇo. Taṃ so dhammato sahodarabhāvaṃ sandhāya upāsikaṃ bhaginivādena samudācarati. Upāsikāya ca ‘‘vikālo, bhātika bhadramukha, yassa dāni kālaṃ maññasī’’ti vutto ‘‘ahaṃ bhagini tayi pasanno pasannākāraṃ karomī’’ti āha. Tena hi bhadramukha, mama khette nipphannaṃ sāliṃ kammakarā āharituṃ na sakkonti, taṃ tava parisāya āṇāpehīti. So ‘‘sādhu bhaginī’’ti yakkhe āṇāpesi. Te aḍḍhaterasa koṭṭhāgārasatāni pūresuṃ. Tato pabhuti koṭṭhāgāraṃ ūnaṃ nāma nāhosi, ‘‘nandamātu koṭṭhāgāraṃ viyā’’ti loke nidassanaṃ ahosi. Vessavaṇo koṭṭhāgārāni pūretvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkami. Bhagavā ‘‘vikāle āgatosī’’ti āha. Atha bhagavato sabbaṃ ārocesi. Iminā kāraṇena āsannatarepi cātumahārājikabhavane vasanto vessavaṇo pacchā āgato. Erāvaṇassa pana na kiñci antarā karaṇīyaṃ ahosi, tena so paṭhamataraṃ āgato.
这位居士虽然已经证得不来果,本来也就只吃一顿饭,但那天因为是布萨日,他还是决意受持布萨戒条。傍晚时分,他穿好衣服、整整齐齐,由五百位在家居士围绕,前往祇园精舍听闻佛法开示。听完后回到自己家中,为那些在家居士讲说皈依、戒律、布萨功德等种种在家修行法要,然后让他们各自回去。他家中各处小房间里,分别铺好了五百张脚高只有一拳、合乎规矩的床座。众人各自进入自己的小房间,开始入定而坐,这位居士也一样。当时舍卫城中有五十七万户人家,按人口算有一亿八千万人。初夜时分,象声、马声、人声、鼓声等响成一片,整个舍卫城像大海一样喧腾。到了中夜刚过,这些声音才渐渐平息。就在那时,居士从定中出来,回顾自己的功德,心想:“我能安住在道乐和果乐之中,这份快乐是依靠谁得到的呢?”他想:“是依靠世尊得到的。”于是对世尊生起净信,又观察:“世尊现在以何种住处而住呢?”他以天眼看见伊罗婆那和多闻天王,以天耳听到佛法开示,以他心智知道他们心中充满净信,便想:“我何不也去问世尊那条对自他双方都有利益的修行之道呢?”因此,他虽然住在同一座城里,却是最后才到的;他也确实知道他们到来的情形。所以经文说:“龙王来到你面前……他听了之后也满心欢喜。”巴利
Ayaṃ pana upāsako kiñcāpi anāgāmī pakatiyāva ekabhattiko, tathāpi tadā uposathadivasoti katvā uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya sāyanhasamayaṃ sunivattho supāruto pañcasataupāsakaparivuto jetavanaṃ gantvā dhammadesanaṃ sutvā attano gharaṃ āgamma tesaṃ upāsakānaṃ saraṇasīlauposathānisaṃsādibhedaṃ upāsakadhammaṃ kathetvā te upāsake uyyojesi. Tesañca tasseva ghare muṭṭhihatthappamāṇapādakāni pañca kappiyamañcasatāni pāṭekkovarakesu paññattāni honti. Te attano attano ovarakaṃ pavisitvā samāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdiṃsu, upāsakopi tathevākāsi. Tena ca samayena sāvatthinagare sattapaññāsa kulasatasahassāni vasanti, manussagaṇanāya aṭṭhārasakoṭimanussā. Tena paṭhamayāme hatthiassamanussabherisaddādīhi sāvatthinagaraṃ mahāsamuddo viya ekasaddaṃ hoti. Majjhimayāmasamanantare so saddo paṭippassambhati . Tamhi kāle upāsako samāpattito vuṭṭhāya attano guṇe āvajjetvā ‘‘yenāhaṃ maggasukhena phalasukhena sukhito viharāmi, idaṃ sukhaṃ kaṃ nissāya laddha’’nti cintetvā ‘‘bhagavantaṃ nissāyā’’ti bhagavati cittaṃ pasādetvā ‘‘bhagavā etarahi katamena vihārena viharatī’’ti āvajjento dibbena cakkhunā erāvaṇavessavaṇe disvā dibbāya sotadhātuyā dhammadesanaṃ sutvā cetopariyañāṇena tesaṃ pasannacittataṃ ñatvā ‘‘yaṃnūnāhampi bhagavantaṃ ubhayahitaṃ paṭipadaṃ puccheyya’’nti cintesi. Tasmā so ekanagare vasantopi sabbapacchā āgato, evañca nesaṃ āgamanaṃ aññāsi. Tenāha – ‘‘āgañchi te santike nāgarājā…pe… so cāpi sutvāna patītarūpo’’ti.
384 现在,为了把世尊和世间公认的那些沙门、婆罗门相比,显出世尊最为殊胜,而说了“凡有这些”这两首偈颂。这里,“外道”是指在难陀、婆蹉、散阇耶等最初的外道师所创立的三种邪见基础上产生的外道见解,以及在这些教法中出家的人,比如富兰那迦叶等六位导师。其中,尼乾陀·若提子算一类,其余的是邪命外道。为了把他们都显示出来,所以说“凡有这些好为论说的外道”,意思是他们惯于这样说:“我们是正行者,别人是邪行者”,以口舌之箭刺伤世间,到处游行。“或邪命外道”则是把前面合在一起说的再分开来显示。“不能超越”就是无法越过。“一切”这个词,也是为了把其余的外道弟子等人全都包括进去而说的。“犹如站立之人不能超越行走之人”:就像有个站立不动、无法行走的人,不能超过一个快速行走的人;同样,他们因为没有智慧的行进,无法了知种种义理的差别,所以就像站立不动的人,不能超越智慧极为迅捷的世尊。这就是偈颂的意思。巴利
384. Idāni ito bahiddhā lokasammatehi samaṇabrāhmaṇehi ukkaṭṭhabhāvena bhagavantaṃ pasaṃsanto ‘‘ye kecime’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha titthiyāti nandavacchasaṃkiccehi ādipuggalehi tīhi titthakarehi kate diṭṭhititthe jātā, tesaṃ sāsane pabbajitā pūraṇādayo cha satthāro. Tattha nāṭaputto nigaṇṭho, avasesā ājīvakāti te sabbe dassento āha ‘‘ye kecime titthiyā vādasīlā’’ti, ‘‘mayaṃ sammā paṭipannā, aññe micchā paṭipannā’’ti evaṃ vādakaraṇasīlā lokaṃ mukhasattīhi vitudantā vicaranti. Ājīvakā vāti te ekajjhamuddiṭṭhe bhinditvā dasseti. Nātitarantīti nātikkamanti. Sabbeti aññepi ye keci titthiyasāvakādayo, tepi pariggaṇhanto āha. ‘‘Ṭhito vajantaṃ viyā’’ti yathā koci ṭhito gativikalo sīghagāminaṃ purisaṃ gacchantaṃ nātitareyya, evaṃ te paññāgatiyā abhāvena te te atthappabhede bujjhituṃ asakkontā ṭhitā, atijavanapaññaṃ bhagavantaṃ nātitarantīti attho.
385 婆罗门喜好辩论、年长,用这句话就显示出商吉、陀若树、沸伽罗娑罗、生闻等人。“有些婆罗门存在”这一句,则显示出阿摄惒、婆悉咤、阿摩昼、北方的学童等人——那些中等的、年轻的,只要是婆罗门,有、可以找到的。“为义所系缚”是指,像“他是否能解答这个问题?他是否能断除这个疑惑?”这样,被义所系缚。“以及还有其他者”是指还有其他无数的人,怀着“我们是论者”的想法到处游走,比如刹帝利贤者、婆罗门、梵天、天神、夜叉等。这是在显示,他们所有这些人都被义所系缚于你。巴利
385.Brāhmaṇā vādasīlā vuddhā cāti ettāvatā caṅkītārukkhapokkharasātijāṇussoṇiādayo dasseti, api brāhmaṇā santi kecīti iminā majjhimāpi daharāpi kevalaṃ brāhmaṇā santi atthi upalabbhanti kecīti evaṃ assalāyanavāseṭṭhaambaṭṭhauttaramāṇavakādayo dasseti. Atthabaddhāti ‘‘api nu kho imaṃ pañhaṃ byākareyya, imaṃ kaṅkhaṃ chindeyyā’’ti evaṃ atthabaddhā bhavanti. Ye cāpi aññeti aññepi ye ‘‘mayaṃ vādino’’ti evaṃ maññamānā vicaranti khattiyapaṇḍitabrāhmaṇabrahmadevayakkhādayo aparimāṇā. Tepi sabbe tayi atthabaddhā bhavantīti dasseti.
386-7 世尊就这样以种种方式被赞叹之后,现在为了单以法本身赞叹他,并请求他说法,而说了“这确实是法”等两首偈颂。其中,“这确实是法”是就三十七菩提分法而说的。“微细”是指细密、难以通达。“乐”是指一旦通达了它,就能带来出世间之乐,所以因为它能带来安乐,就称为“乐”。“善说”是指被善巧地宣说。“我们这些想听的人”意思是“我们想要听闻”。“请为我们说那个”就是请为我们宣说那个法。“你为我们”也是一种读法,意思是你为我们说。“所有这些比丘”是显示当时据说有五百位比丘坐在那里,他为了指出他们而请求说法。“以及近事男”则显示出自己周围的其他人。这里其余的意思显而易见。巴利
386-7. Evaṃ nānappakārehi bhagavantaṃ pasaṃsitvā idāni dhammeneva taṃ pasaṃsitvā dhammakathaṃ yācanto ‘‘ayañhi dhammo’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha ayañhi dhammoti sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhamme sandhāyāha. Nipuṇoti saṇho duppaṭivijjho. Sukhoti paṭividdho samāno lokuttarasukhamāvahati, tasmā sukhāvahattā ‘‘sukho’’ti vuccati. Suppavuttoti sudesito. Sussūsamānāti sotukāmamhāti attho. Taṃ no vadāti taṃ dhammaṃ amhākaṃ vada. ‘‘Tvaṃ no’’tipi pāṭho, tvaṃ amhākaṃ vadāti attho. Sabbepime bhikkhavoti taṅkhaṇaṃ nisinnāni kira pañca bhikkhusatāni honti, tāni dassento yācati. Upāsakā cāpīti attano parivāre aññe ca dasseti. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
388 388. 那时,世尊为了先说明出家修行的道路,就叫比丘们过来,说:“比丘们,听我说……”等等。其中,“法被抖落,你们所有人都应行持”这句:因为能抖落烦恼,所以叫“抖落”;我要为你们宣说这样能抖落烦恼的修行之法;凡是我所宣说的,你们所有人都应当行持、实践,不要放逸。这就是这段话的意思。“威仪”指行、住、坐、卧四种姿态。“随顺出家的”指适合沙门的、与正念正知相应的。另一些注释者说:“这是指在森林中致力修行业处而转起的。”“应当亲近”指应当亲近那种威仪。“见义者”指随观利益者。“具慧者”指有智慧者。这里其余的在偈颂中已明显。巴利
388. Atha bhagavā anagāriyapaṭipadaṃ tāva dassetuṃ bhikkhū āmantetvā ‘‘suṇātha me bhikkhavo’’tiādimāha. Tattha dhammaṃ dhutaṃ tañca carātha sabbeti kilese dhunātīti dhuto, evarūpaṃ kilesadhunanakaṃ paṭipadādhammaṃ sāvayāmi vo, tañca mayā sāvitaṃ sabbe caratha paṭipajjatha, mā pamāditthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iriyāpathanti gamanādicatubbidhaṃ. Pabbajitānulomikanti samaṇasāruppaṃ satisampajaññayuttaṃ. Araññe kammaṭṭhānānuyogavasena pavattamevāti apare. Sevetha nanti taṃ iriyāpathaṃ bhajeyya . Atthadasoti hitānupassī. Mutīmāti buddhimā. Sesamettha gāthāya pākaṭameva.
389 比丘不应该在非时游行——也就是说,一个这样随顺出家威仪而行的比丘,考虑到越过日间正午的过失,不应在非时出行,而只应在适当的时间入村乞食。这是什么原因呢?因为种种结缚会缠住非时出行的人——贪结等许多结缚会缠附、拥抱、覆藏、黏着非时出行的人。所以诸佛不在非时出行,因此那些了悟四谛的诸佛与圣者们,也不在非时乞食。据说,当时还没有制定非时食的学处,所以这里只是以说法的方式,为凡夫显示其过患而说了这首偈颂。而圣者们自从证得道果的那一刻起,就已经自然远离了非时食,这是法的本性。巴利
389.No ve vikāleti evaṃ pabbajitānulomikaṃ iriyāpathaṃ sevamāno ca divāmajjhanhikavītikkamaṃ upādāya vikāle na careyya bhikkhu, yuttakāle eva pana gāmaṃ piṇḍāya careyya. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Akālacāriñhi sajanti saṅgā, akālacāriṃ puggalaṃ rāgasaṅgādayo aneke saṅgā sajanti parissajanti upaguhanti allīyanti. Tasmā vikāle nacaranti buddhā, tasmā ye catusaccabuddhā ariyapuggalā, na te vikāle piṇḍāya carantīti. Tena kira samayena vikālabhojanasikkhāpadaṃ appaññattaṃ hoti, tasmā dhammadesanāvasenevettha puthujjanānaṃ ādīnavaṃ dassento imaṃ gāthamāha. Ariyā pana saha maggapaṭilābhā eva tato paṭiviratā honti, esā dhammatā.
390 390. 这样遮止了非时游行之后,为了开示“即使在适当的时间游行,也应当这样行”,而说了“色与声等”。它的意思是:对于那些色等种种能让人迷醉、使众生陶醉的对象,应当依照《团食清净经》等(中部第3册第438经等)所说的方法去除欲求,只在适当的时间才去用早餐。这里,“早上应当吃的东西”就叫早餐,这是团食的名称。而在哪里能得到,那个地方也因为这种关联而在这里被称为“早餐”。应当前往能得到团食的那个地方——这里的意义应当这样理解。巴利
390. Evaṃ vikālacariyaṃ paṭisedhetvā ‘‘kāle carantenapi evaṃ caritabba’’nti dassento āha ‘‘rūpā ca saddā cā’’ti. Tassattho – ye te rūpādayo nānappakārakaṃ madaṃ janentā satte sammadayanti, tesu piṇḍapātapārisuddhisuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.438 ādayo) vuttanayena chandaṃ vinodetvā yuttakāleneva pātarāsaṃ paviseyyāti. Ettha ca pāto asitabboti pātarāso, piṇḍapātassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Yo yattha labbhati, so padesopi taṃ yogena ‘‘pātarāso’’ti idha vutto. Yato piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, taṃ okāsaṃ gaccheyyāti evamettha attho veditabbo.
391 他这样进入之后:巴利
391. Evaṃ paviṭṭho –
比丘在适当的时候得到食物后,
独自退到隐蔽处坐下。
内心思惟者,意不向外。
内心收摄得很好。巴利
‘‘Piṇḍañca bhikkhu samayena laddhā, Eko paṭikkamma raho nisīde; Ajjhattacintī na mano bahiddhā, Nicchāraye saṅgahitattabhāvo’’.
在这里,“团食”是指混合来的乞食,因为它是从各处汇集、捏合到一起的,所以称为“团食”。“于时”是指在正午之前的那段时间。“独自返回”是指为了成就身远离,没有同伴,独自退回到一处。“内思惟”是指把三相加到上面,思惟五蕴的相续。“不让意向外流散”是指不因为对外在的色等对象生起贪染而把心向外拉出去。“善持之身”是指心已被很好地收摄、把握。巴利
Tattha piṇḍanti missakabhikkhaṃ, sā hi tato tato samodhānetvā sampiṇḍitaṭṭhena ‘‘piṇḍo’’ti vuccati. Samayenāti antomajjhanhikakāle. Eko paṭikkammāti kāyavivekaṃ sampādento adutiyo nivattitvā. Ajjhattacintīti tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā khandhasantānaṃ cintento. Na mano bahiddhānicchārayeti bahiddhā rūpādīsu rāgavasena cittaṃ na nīhare. Saṅgahitattabhāvoti suṭṭhu gahitacitto.
392 这样安住时——巴利
392. Evaṃ viharanto ca –
即使他和弟子交谈,
或者跟其他任何一位比丘。
他应当宣说那殊胜的法。
他不说挑拨离间的话,也不诽谤别人。巴利
‘‘Sacepi so sallape sāvakena, Aññena vā kenaci bhikkhunā vā; Dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ tamudāhareyya, Na pesuṇaṃ nopi parūpavādaṃ’’.
这段话要说明的是什么?如果那位修瑜伽的行者,跟前来想听法的人——不管是弟子,还是别的外道、在家人等,或者就在此处出家的比丘——即使交谈时,他应当讲说的,是与道果等相关、包含十种论题、因为无过失而称为殊胜的法。他应当宣说这种殊胜的法;至于其他的话,比如挑拨离间的话或诽谤他人的话,哪怕只是一点点,也绝不应该说。巴利
Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? So yogāvacaro kiñcideva sotukāmatāya upagatena sāvakena vā kenaci aññatitthiyagahaṭṭhādinā vā idheva pabbajitena bhikkhunā vā saddhiṃ sacepi sallape, atha yvāyaṃ maggaphalādipaṭisaṃyutto dasakathāvatthubhedo vā atappakaṭṭhena paṇīto dhammo. Taṃ dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ udāhareyya, aññaṃ pana pisuṇavacanaṃ vā parūpavādaṃ vā appamattakampi na udāhareyyāti.
393 现在,为了指出诽谤他人的过患,他说:“确实,有些人是诤论的。”这句话的意思是:在这里,某些愚人对抗、反对与诽谤他人相关的种种诤论分别,即诤论;他们渴望争斗,就像冲向敌军阵前一样。对于这些智慧低劣的人,我们不赞叹。为什么呢?因为诤论会从各个方面缠住他们;那些从言语之途生起的诤论,会黏着、依附在这样的人身上。为什么会黏着呢?因为他们的心被带到了那边远处。正是由于他们对抗,心就被投向了那里;而心所到之处,就远离了止与观。巴利
393. Idāni tasmiṃ parūpavāde dosaṃ dassento āha ‘‘vādañhi eke’’ti. Tassattho – idhekacce moghapurisā parūpavādasañhitaṃ nānappakāraṃ viggāhikakathābhedaṃ vādaṃ paṭiseniyanti virujjhanti, yujjhitukāmā hutvā senāya paṭimukhaṃ gacchantā viya honti, te mayaṃ lāmakapaññe na pasaṃsāma. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Tato tato ne pasajanti saṅgā, yasmā te tādisake puggale tato tato vacanapathato samuṭṭhāya vivādasaṅgā sajanti allīyanti. Kiṃ kāraṇā sajantīti? Cittañhi te tattha gamenti dūre, yasmā te paṭiseniyantā cittaṃ tattha gamenti, yattha gataṃ samathavipassanānaṃ dūre hotīti.
394-5 像这样显示了智慧狭小者的行持之后,现在为了显示智慧广大者的行持,说道:“团食、精舍……弟子。”其中,精舍是依止处,坐卧具是床和椅子,这三句说的都是住处。“水”就是饮用水。“清洗僧伽梨上的尘垢”,是指洗掉僧伽梨上的尘土等污垢。“听受了善逝所说的法”,是指听受了世尊以“如理省察而受用袈裟,为了抵御寒冷……”等的方式所教导的法。“省察而受用的殊胜智弟子”:这里说的“团食”就是团食,由精舍等说的就是坐卧具,通过“水”这个字显示的是病缘药,僧伽梨就是袈裟。对这四种资具,按照“只是为了维持这个身体……”等的方式省察之后而受用的殊胜智弟子,能够这样受用的,可以是具有殊胜智慧的如来的弟子——不论是有学还是凡夫;从究竟意义上说,则是阿拉汉。因为阿拉汉被说为具有四种依止:“某物,他省察而受用;某物,他省察而忍受;某物,他省察而避开;某物,他省察而遣除。”而这位省察而受用的殊胜智弟子,对于团食等,应当了知就像莲叶上的水珠一样。巴利
394-5. Evaṃ parittapaññānaṃ pavattiṃ dassetvā idāni mahāpaññānaṃ pavattiṃ dassento āha ‘‘piṇḍaṃ vihāraṃ…pe… sāvako’’ti. Tattha vihārena patissayo, sayanāsanena mañcapīṭhanti tīhipi padehi senāsanameva vuttaṃ. Āpanti udakaṃ. Saṅghāṭirajūpavāhananti paṃsumalādino saṅghāṭirajassa dhovanaṃ. Sutvāna dhammaṃ sugatena desitanti sabbāsavasaṃvarādīsu ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paṭisevati sītassa paṭighātāyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58) nayena bhagavatā desitaṃ dhammaṃ sutvā. Saṅkhāya sevevarapaññasāvakoti etaṃ idha piṇḍanti vuttaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ, vihārādīhi vuttaṃ senāsanaṃ, āpamukhena dassitaṃ gilānapaccayaṃ, saṅghāṭiyā cīvaranti catubbidhampi paccayaṃ saṅkhāya ‘‘yāvadeva imassa kāyassa ṭhitiyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58) nayena paccavekkhitvā seve varapaññasāvako, sevituṃ sakkuṇeyya varapaññassa tathāgatassa sāvako sekkho vā puthujjano vā, nippariyāyena ca arahā. So hi caturāpasseno ‘‘saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṃ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṃ vinodetī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.308; ma. ni. 2.168; a. ni. 10.20) vutto. Yassā ca saṅkhāya seve varapaññasāvako, tasmā hi piṇḍe…pe… yathā pokkhare vāribindu, tathā hotīti veditabbo.
396 396. 像这样开示了漏尽者的行道,以阿罗汉果为顶点,结束了无家者的修行之后,现在为了开示在家者的修行,说“然而,在家者的义务……”等。其中,第一首偈颂里的“弟子”指在家弟子。其余部分文义浅显易懂。不过,这里的关联是这样的:我先前所开示的,是纯粹、不混杂、完整圆满的比丘法。这个法,被那些拥有田地、宅地等执取物的有执取者无法触及、不能证得。巴利
396. Evaṃ khīṇāsavapaṭipattiṃ dassento arahattanikūṭena anagāriyapaṭipadaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā idāni agāriyapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘gahaṭṭhavattaṃ pana vo’’tiādimāha. Tattha paṭhamagāthāya tāva sāvakoti agāriyasāvako. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Ayaṃ pana yojanā – yo mayā ito pubbe kevalo abyāmisso sakalo paripuṇṇo bhikkhudhammo kathito. Esa khettavatthuādipariggahehi sapariggahena na labbhā phassetuṃ na sakkā adhigantunti.
397 世尊这样遮止了比丘的法之后,只开示在家人的法,说道:“不应杀生。”其中,前半句说的是从三个方面都清净的离杀生,后半句说的是对众生的利益行持。这里第三句在《犀牛角经》(经集35等)中,第四句的“战栗者”和“不动者”的差别在《慈经注》(经集143等)中,已经从一切方面说明了。其余部分意思很明白。不过应该按倒装的顺序来理解:对一切众生——无论是战栗的还是不动的——都放下杖,自己不杀,不教别人杀,也不赞同杀。“放下杖”之后,还要补上“应行持”这个省略的谓语。否则前后文就衔接不上了。巴利
397. Evaṃ tassa bhikkhudhammaṃ paṭisedhetvā gahaṭṭhadhammameva dassento āha ‘‘pāṇaṃ na hane’’ti. Tattha purimaḍḍhena tikoṭiparisuddhā pāṇātipātāveramaṇi vuttā, pacchimaḍḍhena sattesu hitapaṭipatti. Tatiyapādo cettha khaggavisāṇasutte (su. ni. 35 ādayo) catutthapāde thāvaratasabhedo mettasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (su. ni. 143 ādayo) sabbappakārato vaṇṇito. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Uppaṭipāṭiyā pana yojanā kātabbā – tasathāvaresu sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ na hane na ghātayeyya nānujaññāti. ‘‘Nidhāya daṇḍa’’nti ito vā paraṃ ‘‘vatteyyā’’ti pāṭhaseso āharitabbo. Itarathā hi na pubbenāparaṃ sandhiyati.
398 398. 这样显示了第一学处之后,现在要显示第二学处,所以说“此后,不与”。其中,“任何”是指不论少或多。“何处”是指在村落或林野中。“声闻”是指在家的声闻弟子。“了知”是指知道“这是他人的财物”。应当避开一切不与之物:因为这样修行的人就能避开一切不与之物,而不是别的做法——这就表明了其中的含义。这里其余的内容,按照已说的方式以及显而易见的方式理解即可。巴利
398. Evaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpadaṃ dassetvā idāni dutiyasikkhāpadaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tato adinna’’nti. Tattha kiñcīti appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā. Kvacīti gāme vā araññe vā. Sāvakoti agāriyasāvako. Bujjhamānoti ‘‘parasantakamida’’nti jānamāno. Sabbaṃ adinnaṃ parivajjayeyyāti evañhi paṭipajjamāno sabbaṃ adinnaṃ parivajjeyya, no aññathāti dīpeti. Sesamettha vuttanayañca pākaṭañcāti.
399 399. 像这样显示了第二学处也是三门清净之后,从最高限度开始,为了显示第三学处,而说“非梵行”。其中,“不能胜任”就是没有能力。巴利
399. Evaṃ dutiyasikkhāpadampi tikoṭiparisuddhaṃ dassetvā ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato pabhuti tatiyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘abrahmacariya’’nti. Tattha asambhuṇantoti asakkonto.
400 现在为了说明第四学处,说道“或在会堂中”等。这里,“在会堂中”指在集会堂等场所。“在众人中”指身处大众中间。这里其余的内容,按照已说的方法和显而易见的意思来理解。巴利
400. Idāni catutthasikkhāpadaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sabhaggato vā’’ti. Tattha sabhaggatoti santhāgārādigato. Parisaggatoti pūgamajjagato. Sesamettha vuttanayañca pākaṭañcāti.
401 401. 这样显示了第四学处也是三门清净之后,为了显示第五学处,而说“以及酒类饮料”。其中,“以及酒类饮料”只是为了偈颂读起来顺口才这样说的。它的实际意思是“不应饮酒”。这里的“此法”就是指这个远离饮酒的法。“以疯狂为终”指最终会导致疯狂。因为饮酒哪怕最轻微的果报,对人来说也会导致发疯。“如是了知它后”,就是如此了知这饮酒之后。这里其余的内容,按前面所说的方式理解,而且意思也很明显。巴利
401. Evaṃ catutthasikkhāpadampi tikoṭiparisuddhaṃ dassetvā pañcamaṃ dassento āha ‘‘majjañca pāna’’nti. Tattha majjañca pānanti gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panattho ‘‘majjapānañca na samācareyyā’’ti. Dhammaṃ imanti imaṃ majjapānaveramaṇīdhammaṃ. Ummādanantanti ummādanapariyosānaṃ. Yo hi sabbalahuko majjapānassa vipāko, so manussabhūtassa ummattakasaṃvattaniko hoti. Iti naṃ viditvāti iti naṃ majjapānaṃ ñatvā. Sesamettha vuttanayañca pākaṭañcāti.
402 402. 这样显示了第五学处也是从三个方面都清净之后,现在又显示前面几个学处也是以饮酒本身为造成杂染和破坏的,从而更坚定地劝导远离它,所以说“因为迷醉而行恶”。其中,“迷醉”指以迷醉为原因。“hi”这个字只是用来补足音节的虚词。“行恶”指造作杀生等一切不善的行为。“令人疯狂”指在来世令人疯狂,“令人愚痴”指在此世令人愚痴。其余内容意思都很清楚。巴利
402. Evaṃ pañcamasikkhāpadampi tikoṭiparisuddhaṃ dassetvā idāni purimasikkhāpadānampi majjapānameva saṃkilesakarañca bhedakarañca dassetvā daḷhataraṃ tato veramaṇiyaṃ niyojento āha ‘‘madā hi pāpāni karontī’’ti. Tattha madāti madahetu. Hikāro padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Pāpāni karontīti pāṇātipātādīni sabbākusalāni karonti. Ummādanaṃ mohananti paraloke ummādanaṃ ihaloke mohanaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
403-4 到这里,已经说明了在家弟子的常戒。现在为了说明布萨的支分,而说了“不应杀生”这两首偈颂。其中,“非梵行”是指不殊胜的行为。“淫欲”是指行淫欲之事。“夜间不应食非时食”是指夜间不应进食,白天也不应吃过时之食。“以及香等”这里,用“香”这个词,也包含了涂香、粉末等,应当知道。“床”是指允许使用的床。“铺设”是指用草席等允许使用的铺具铺好。不过在地上,即使铺毛毯等也可以。“八支”就像五支乐器一样,不是脱离支分的。以“苦的终结之德”是指已到达轮回之苦的终结。其余在此处则是显而易见的。据说后半部分也是结集者所说的。巴利
403-4. Ettāvatā agāriyasāvakassa niccasīlaṃ dassetvā idāni uposathaṅgāni dassento ‘‘pāṇaṃ na hane’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha abrahmacariyāti aseṭṭhacariyabhūtā. Methunāti methunadhammasamāpattito. Rattiṃ na bhuñjeyya vikālabhojananti rattimpi na bhuñjeyya, divāpi kālātikkantabhojanaṃ na bhuñjeyya. Na ca gandhanti ettha gandhaggahaṇena vilepanacuṇṇādīnipi gahitānevāti veditabbāni. Mañceti kappiyamañce. Santhateti taṭṭikādīhi kappiyattharaṇehi atthate. Chamāyaṃ pana gonakādisanthatāyapi vaṭṭati. Aṭṭhaṅgikanti pañcaṅgikaṃ viya tūriyaṃ, na aṅgavinimuttaṃ. Dukkhantagunāti vaṭṭadukkhassa antagatena. Sesamettha pākaṭameva. Pacchimaḍḍhuṃ pana saṅgītikārakehi vuttantipi āhu.
405 已经说明了布萨的支分,现在要说明布萨的时间,所以说“于是,在半月”。其中“于是”只是用来补足音节的虚词。应当和后面的词连起来理解:“在半月的十四日、十五日、初八日这三天,受持布萨,也就是受持这八支布萨而安住。”关于“神变半月”,在入雨安居之前是 Āsāḷha 月,雨安居期间是三个月,再加上 Kattika 月,这五个月叫作“神变半月”。另一些人说,只有 Āsāḷha、Kattika、Phagguṇa 这三个月。还有些人说,按半月布萨日的前后日来算,每个半月有十三日、初二日、七日、九日这四天。随各人自己喜欢,取哪一种都可以。或者,对想要功德的人,也可以全都宣说。应当这样连接理解:如此,在这神变半月中,他内心清净虔诚,具足圆满,一天也不放弃,受持这具备八支的布萨。巴利
405. Evaṃ uposathaṅgāni dassetvā idāni uposathakālaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tato ca pakkhassā’’ti. Tattha tatoti padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Pakkhassupavassuposathanti evaṃ parapadena yojetabbaṃ ‘‘pakkhassa cātuddasiṃ pañcadasiṃ aṭṭhaminti ete tayo divase upavassa uposathaṃ, etaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikauposathaṃ upagamma vasitvā’’ti. Pāṭihāriyapakkhañcāti ettha pana vassūpanāyikāya purimabhāge āsāḷhamāso, antovassaṃ tayo māsā, kattikamāsoti ime pañca māsā ‘‘pāṭihāriyapakkho’’ti vuccanti. Āsāḷhakattikaphagguṇamāsā tayo evāti apare. Pakkhuposathadivasānaṃ purimapacchimadivasavasena pakkhe pakkhe terasīpāṭipadasattamīnavamīsaṅkhātā cattāro cattāro divasāti apare. Yaṃ ruccati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ. Sabbaṃ vā pana puññakāmīnaṃ bhāsitabbaṃ. Evametaṃ pāṭihāriyapakkhañca pasannamānaso susamattarūpaṃ suparipuṇṇarūpaṃ ekampi divasaṃ apariccajanto aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ uposathaṃ upavassāti sambandhitabbaṃ.
406 406. 这样显示了布萨的时间之后,现在为了说明在这些日子里受持布萨后应当做什么,而说“然后到了清晨”。这里“然后”只是起填充音节作用的虚词,或者表示紧接着的意思,也就是说“随后”。“清晨”指第二天天亮之前。“已受持布萨”指已经受持了布萨。“以食物”指以粥、饭等。“以饮料”指以八种饮料。“随喜”指持续不断地欢喜,意思是持续不断地欢喜。“如应”指恰好适合自己,也就是随自己的能力、随自己的力气。“应分享”指应当分配、应当招待。其余内容很清楚。巴利
406. Evaṃ uposathakālaṃ dassetvā idāni tesu kālesu etaṃ uposathaṃ upavassa yaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ dassento āha ‘‘tato ca pāto’’ti. Etthāpi tatoti padapūraṇamatte nipāto, anantaratthe vā, athāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pātoti aparajjudivasapubbabhāge. Upavutthuposathoti upavasitauposatho. Annenāti yāgubhattādinā. Pānenāti aṭṭhavidhapānena. Anumodamānoti anupamodamāno, nirantaraṃ modamānoti attho. Yathārahanti attano anurūpena, yathāsatti yathābalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṃvibhajethāti bhājeyya patimāneyya. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
407 407. 这样说了受持布萨者应做的事之后,现在要讲尽形寿的重法以及活命的清净,然后开示通过这条修行道路应当证得的境地,所以说“以如法的方式对待父母”等。其中,“以如法的方式”是指用如法得来的财物。“应当奉养”是指应当养育。如法的经商,是指避开五种不如法的买卖——武器买卖、人口买卖、肉类买卖、酒类买卖、毒药买卖——之后,其余的都是如法的经商。这里通过“经商”这个词,也把耕种、牧牛等其他如法的谋生方式包含在内了。其余内容意思已经很清楚。应当这样理解整句的意思:那位具足恒常戒、布萨戒、布施和法的圣弟子,应当从事如法的经商,并且用由此如法得来的、没有偏离正法的财物来奉养父母。然后,这位在家人这样不放逸地从一开始就按照上面所说的方式行持,身体坏灭之后,就会投生到那些以自身的光明驱散黑暗、因为能作光明而被称为“自然光”的六欲天之中,也就是投生到名为“自然光”的天界里。巴利
407. Evaṃ upavutthuposathassa kiccaṃ vatvā idāni yāvajīvikaṃ garuvattaṃ ājīvapārisuddhiñca kathetvā tāya paṭipadāya adhigantabbaṭṭhānaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dhammena mātāpitaro’’ti. Tattha dhammenāti dhammaladdhena bhogena . Bhareyyāti poseyya. Dhammikaṃ so vaṇijjanti sattavaṇijjā, satthavaṇijjā, visavaṇijjā, maṃsavaṇijjā, surāvaṇijjāti imā pañca adhammavaṇijjā vajjetvā avasesā dhammikavaṇijjā. Vaṇijjāmukhena cettha kasigorakkhādi aparopi dhammiko vohāro saṅgahito. Sesamuttānatthameva. Ayaṃ pana yojanā – so niccasīlauposathasīladānadhammasamannāgato ariyasāvako payojaye dhammikaṃ vaṇijjaṃ, tato laddhena ca dhammato anapetattā dhammena bhogena mātāpitaro bhareyya. Atha so gihī evaṃ appamatto ādito pabhuti vuttaṃ imaṃ vattaṃ vattayanto kāyassa bhedā ye te attano ābhāya andhakāraṃ vidhametvā ālokakaraṇena sayampabhāti laddhanāmā cha kāmāvacaradevā, te sayampabhe nāma deve upeti bhajati allīyati, tesaṃ nibbattaṭṭhāne nibbattatīti.